Home

GeoMoS Help 5

1. The Properties dialog is displayed Select on the Settings tab the ASCII Setup button Troubleshooting Communication Properties HR Connect To Settings The ASCII Setup dialog is displayed Activate the check box Send line ends with line feeds and Echo typed characters locally Press OK to confirm the ASCII Setup and Properties dialog 577 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ASCII Setup ASCII Sending Send line ends with line feeds Echo typed characters locally Line delay 0 milliseconds Character delay 0 milliseconds ASCII Receiving C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width Type in the command ATZ and press ENTER The MC45 responds with OK ATZ gt Set all current parameters to user defined profile ATZ 0K Type in the command AT CMEE 1 and press ENTER The MC45 responds with OK This command enables beside the responses OK and ERROR extended error commands Type in the command AT CMGF 1 and press ENTER The MC45 responds with OK AT CMGF gt Select SMS message format Send the command AT CMGS 49123456789 use an international mobile phone number and press ENTER The character gt appears 578 Troubleshooting Type in the text of a SMS for example This is my first SMS and press together the keys Ctrl and Z The SMS will be send to the mobile phone number above gt Thi
2. The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Reference Point Coordinates tab 409 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en This column displays a icon symbol for the type of edited point and the unique point ID Original point value Edited point value The date and time the reference point was measured PointID o O The reference point name Northing The used northing value e E EN To calculate the selected coordinate following these steps wpe ooo z re Pest processing daoa oaee 5 Fea etme Pon Cortes wb Select a reference point 7 Type in the updated coordinates for the reference point and enter the time The time defines the period from when the coordinate is valid Any measurements before this time will not be affected in relation to the reference point calculations or press the Calculate Selected Coord button The Calculate Selected Coordinate Calculation dialog is displayed Select the Stand point 10 Enter the Displacement of the point previously 410 GeoMoS Analyzer selected reference point relative to the current coordinate value Press the Calculate button to compute the displacement The displacement is calculated in the direction from the reference target point to the standpoint and the reference coordinates are corrected respectively for the displacement in Easting and Northing Press Apply to confirm the displacement computation and the new reference point coordinates will
3. 270 GeoMoS Monitor The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Message Configurator dialog box Lee Active Acknowledge Message Selected Check this box to activate the actions which are linked to the message If the checkbox is disabled not checked GeoMoS Monitor will not run the actions if the message is generated from the system Messages can be selected to be acknowledged or not The Acknowledge column can be set to Yes or No by double clicking in the table on the cell Acknowledgeable Messages The user must manually or automatically acknowledge acknowledgeable messages when the column Acknowledge is set to Yes and the symbol x appears Not acknowledgeable Messages The column Acknowledge is set to No and the symbol A appears All available system messages are listed in the column The messages can be selected to be acknowledged or not Acknowledgeable messages are displayed with a different icon to normal messages With this checkbox you can activate one ore more actions to a selected message Select in the left hand list a message e g power failure and in the column Selected you check all actions you will activate for the message e g power failure For define new actions in the right hand list on this dialog you can use the functions Add Action 271 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Condition List the configured condition Condition You can set conditions fo
4. 7295770 0 1 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 6752241 1279 1684 2158 1036 1677 0728 0235 0305 1010 1004 Coordinate System Manager 701 ISO 9001 1S0 14001 Total Quality Management our commitment to total customer satisfaction Ask your local Leica Geosystems dealer for more information about our TQM program The Campbell Datalogger depicted in this brochure is a product of Campbell Scientific Ltd Leica Geosystems AG Heerbrugg Switzerland www leica geosystems com Active Customer Care Whether you monitor the movement of a volcanic slope the structure of a long bridge or track the settlement of a dam whether you measure analyse and manage the structures of natural or man made objects the monitoring systems by Leica Geosystems provide you with the right solution for every application Our solutions provide reliable precise data acquisition advanced process ing sophisticated analysis and secure data transmission Using standard interfaces open architectures and scalable platforms the solutions are customizable to meet individual requirements for permanent and temporary installations for single sites and monitoring networks When it has to be right Illustrations descriptions and technical data are not binding All rights reserved Copyright Leica Geosystems AG Heerbrugg Switzerland 2010
5. These observation types can be defined in the Define Observation Types dialog and used throughout the system 210 GeoMoS Monitor Available Functions Build in Constants The following table gives an overview of the constants supported by the default implementation 3 14159 Mathematical constant 26535 2 71828 Mathematical constant 18284 e g Current time stamp as 39458 36736 Julian Date Build in Functions The following table gives an overview of the functions supported by the default implementation It lists the function names the number of arguments and a brief description em CS pe CN eee ee a ee pee 211 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en asinh 1 hyperbolic arcus sine function then else if sinx gt 0 1 1 eee Build in Binary Operators The following table lists the default binary operators supported by the parser 212 GeoMoS Monitor GeoMoS Defined Functions The following table gives an overview of the GeoMoS defined functions supported by the default implementation rnd 5 0 5 0 results in a random number between 5 0 and 5 0 e g 4 79 fractional frac value frac 3 14159 part results in 0 14159 modulo mod value quotient mod 17 4 results in 1 213 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Point Editor Point Editor Overview Background information Points can be created or edited in the system by various methods including Inse
6. Inverse Accu Abbreviation OOOOO8eBweooOoO Velocity Longitudi Velocity Transver Velocity Height Di Velocity Easting Yelocity Northing Velocity Height Velocity Slope Dist Velocity Correcte Velocity Correcte Velocity 2D Yector Velocity 3D Vector Standard Velocity LongDisp V TransDisp HeightDisp Y Easting Northing Height SlopeDist SlopeDistAtme SlopeDistRefC v 2DVector Y 3DVector Reset All r Computation Time interval to compute the Instantaneous and Inverse Inst Speed 24 0 h Default Instantaneous Velocity Right mouse click to display the Instantaneous Velocity Yes or not No of the selected series 446 GeoMoS Analyzer Accumulated Velocity Right mouse click to display the Accumulated Velocity Yes or not No of the selected series Inverse Instantaneous Right mouse click to display the Inverse Instantaneous Velocity Velocity Yes or not No of the selected series Inverse Accumulated Right mouse click to display the Inverse Accumulated Velocity Velocity Yes or not No of the selected series Abbreviation The point legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph In addition to the point name the abbreviation of the series name is displayed Computation In this field you can modify the time interval to compute the Instantaneous and Inverse Instantaneous Velocity The valid range is fro
7. Point GP52_TCPIP 1Hz w Coordinates z Time range B Minutes v I Shifting Overview LastActions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status Done User Level Administrator 20 59 06 4 The table below describes the fields in the Chart tab a See Coordinates The calculated coordinate difference of the point Note Coordinate difference Current coordinate Null coordinate Displacements The calculated displacements difference of the point Hz Face l The measured horizontal angle only in Face V Face I The measured vertical angle only in Face I Hz V Face 1 The measured horizontal and vertical angle combined e emer SS me arrear GeoMoS Monitor Sensor Status Background information The Sensor Status tab gives an overview of the measurement and connection status of sensors connected to GeoMoS GeoMoS Monitor Active Project GeoMoS Database BAE File View Configuration Measurement Tools Help amp 4 Ba e Ww By a S a 2 Point Group Free Station Sensor Status Sensor Typi Status Next Event Last Message Rhenusai 2_GEOMOS CLIENT2 GNSS Spider PP Products 2 008 1 GNSS coordinates not conve MONR_OST6_PP_23_GEOMOS CLIENT2 GNSS Spider PP Products 07 GNSS coordinates not conve Rhenusana_OST6_RT_32_GEOMOS CLIENT2 GNSS Spider RT Products 23 07 2008 12 21 GNSS coordinates not conve MONR_OST6_RT_33_GEOMOS CLIENT2 GNSS Spider RT Products 23 07 2008 12 20 00 GNSS coordinates not conv
8. Create a new DynDNS account Pressing the button Sing in you find following link Create a new account a Type in following information Define a Username this name is needed for the DynDNS settings in the ComBox Manager Define a Password this password is needed for the DynDNS settings in the ComBox Manager Confirm the Password Define an E mail address Confirm the E mail address 593 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en At the end you have to enter a security number from an image and agree with the acceptable use policy b If all information is inserted you can press the button Create Account C You will get an e mail to your e mail account to verfiy your DynDNS account Create a new host name for your ComBox a If you are not already logged into your account then press the button Sign in and enter your Username Password Press the link Add Host Services to add a new hostname Define a host name for your ComBox Select a suffix in the list box for your domain name Press the link Your current location s IP address is 4 to insert a first IP address Press the button Add To Cart Press the button Next Press the button Activate Services i Log out Now your host name is activated and ready to be used for your ComBox configuration 594 System Requirements System Requirements The following system requirements are necessary to run GeoMoS Monitor Min Hardware 512 MB RAM 1 GB or
9. E Select the FNC key EE The FNC Function panel appears Select the 7 Increment amp Offset menu 5 The FNC Increment amp Offset panel appears Ez Set the Offs Cross Offset Length and Offset Elev to 0 000m Confirm the setting with CONT F1 Nivel210 and Nivel220 Each Nivel200 sensor must be configured individually Connect each Nivel200 sensor separate to the NivelTool because the software does not support multiple Nivel200 sensor communication NivelTool is the office software including a series of functionality to support working with the Nivel200 sensor Follow these steps to configure a Nivel210 and Nivel220 While starting up NivelTool automatically searches for any connected Nivel200 sensor on all available COM ports with all baud rates The following Nivel200 sensor settings can be read and write Specific Nivel200 sensor name Nivel200 sensor address Nivel200 sensor port read only Nivel200 baud rate Internal average number Set a unique Nivel200 sensor address and required baud rate The Nivel200 sensor address is Nx Valid addresses range 0 to 9 and A to Z 29 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 4 Store the settings with the Write button GPS1200 30 NMEA Out 1 communication settings Follow these steps to configure the NMEA Out 1 communication settings Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The GPS1200 Configuration panel appears Select the 4 Interfaces menu The CONFI
10. Point Groups with Type PPM 322 GeoMoS Monitor This point group contains the points that are measured for the Reference Distances and can be set to measure at a regular interval By comparing the measured distances with the calculated reference distances the PPM scale factor can be calculated which can be used to correct the subsequent measurements The reference distance is calculated between the control point and the target points contained in the PPM group The PPM point group has the highest priority and will interrupt any overlapping point group in the measurement cycle Point Groups with Type Orientation Only This point group contains the points that are measured for the Orientation of the Total Station and can be set to measure at a regular interval The orientation calculation uses the coordinates of the Total Station control point and the measured reference points in the Orientation Only point group to determine the orientation of the instrument using a robust least squares solution The Orientation Only point group has the highest priority and will interrupt any overlapping point group with a lower priority in the measurement cycle Point Groups with Type Vz Correction This point group contains the points that are measured for the Vz Correction of the vertical angle and can be set to measure at a regular interval The Vz Correction calculation uses the coordinates of the Total Station control point and the measured reference p
11. SMS Settings Select the SMS Settings either Leica GFU or ASPSMS com 279 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 280 A Important Leica GeoMoS can not guarantee that a SMS will be received because this function is affected by the operational availability of the mobile network provider Leica GFU SMS Settings Com Port Settings Port COMI bai Cancel Baudrate 115200 Parity None Databits ja Stop Bits fi M RTS Test GSM Modem Settings Send Pin Code Com Port Settings Port The serial port that the GMS phone is j connected to RTS Request to Send Important For Leica GFU mobile phones activate the RTS setting GeoMoS Monitor GSM Modem Settings Send PIN Code Set this option to send a PIN to the phone PIN Code The PIN Personal Identification Number used to enable access to the phone Use this button to test the communication between GeoMoS and the GSM phone ASPSMS com With ASPSMS it is possible to send SMS over Internet For more details see ASPSMS com Important It is possible to use ASPSMS within a firewall The port on the client side GeoMoS PC sends the SMS over Internet through port 5061 SMS Settings ASPSMS com Provider Settings User Key Cancel Password Seo ee OOOO O O 281 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Provider Settings User Key The registered user key for the ASPSMS account How to check the User Key 1 Login to www asp
12. When to use Use the Distance Intersection coordinate calculation to determine the initial total station control point with minimum two known points in a coordinate system after moving the total station control point to re compute the total station coordinates before starting the measurements Procedure Follow these steps to configure the coordinate calculation Distance Intersection Select the Setup button in the Sensor Location dialog for a TPS sensor Select the Distance Intersection tab page Select a point from the list that will be measured for the Distance Intersection Aim the total station telescope to the selected point and press the Measure button The measurement will be executed on the total station and the point will be listed in the Measured Points list Notes The selected measurement mode Point Editor for this point will be used For example measurement mode ATR The horizontal angle vertical angle and distance will be measured However the horizontal and vertical angle will be considered with a very low weight Measurement mode Distance IR The distance will be measured and used for the distance section computation 176 GeoMoS Monitor Note for TM30 TS30 only The Measure button uses the EDM Standard mode The used ATR mode depends on the Windows Registry By default the software attempts measurements in both modes normal ATR and low visibility ATR For example when
13. 1 Select from the menu Configuration Options The Options dialog will be displayed Open with the Properties button the Coordinate System Manager Continue to Step 2 Add a new Transformation Step 2 Add a new Transformation Follow these steps to create a new Transformation Right click on Transformations in the Tree View and select New The New Transformation dialog appears can also be determined using the Leica LGO Datum Map tool Enter the necessary parameters of the selected Transformation type 3 Enter the Name of the Transformation Select the Type of the Transformation Note Only the types Classical 2D and Classical 3D may be added manually Other Transformation types can only be added determined using the Leica LGO Datum Map tool Select the Height Mode of the Transformation Choose between Ellipsoidal or Orthometric Note The Height Mode may only be selected for Classical 3D Transformations It Note The fields Ellip A and Ellip B are for information purpose only 63 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en New Transformation General Name Example_Transformation Ellip amp None Type Classical3D Ellip B None Height Mode Elipsoidal Last Modified Modet Bursa wot x dx 518193 m K dy 43 581 m 3 17756 x dz 466 142 m 031104 5 aai ppm 0 31552 Te Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Continue to Step 3 Add a new Ellipsoid Ste
14. 298 25722210088 627 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Hough 1956 6378270 000 297 00000000000 x Int Hayford 6378388 000 297 00000000000 x Krassowski 6378245 000 298 30000000000 x South American 1969 6378160 000 298 25000000000 x WGS72 6378135 000 298 26000000000 x WGS84 6378137 000 298 25722356300 x Xi an 80 6378140 000 298 25700000000 x Note e The Ellipsoids indicated by amp are hardwired and can neither be deleted nor edited e User defined Ellipsoids which are currently being used in a Coordinate System are indicated by A and may not be deleted or renamed but the parameters may be edited Select from the index below to learn how to manage the Ellipsoids Add a New Ellipsoid Delete an Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Properties 628 Coordinate System Manager Add a New Ellipsoid Follow these steps to add a new Ellipsoid Right click on Ellipsoids in the Tree View and select New Enter the Name of the Ellipsoid 3 Enter the Semi major axis a of the Ellipsoid a Enter the Reciprocal flattening 1 f of the Ellipsoid EA Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 629 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Delete an Ellipsoid Important Information e The Ellipsoids indicated by amp are hardwired and cannot be deleted e User defined Ellipsoids which are currently being used in a Coordinate System are indicated by and may not be deleted Delete an Ellipsoid Follow these steps to delete
15. 612 Coordinate System Manager 2 Average constant between the two height points 3 Plane through the three height points more than 3 Average plane The Advantages e The advantages of this method are that transformation parameters may be computed using very little information No knowledge is needed of the local ellipsoid and map projection and parameters may be computed with the minimum of points Care should be taken however when computing parameters using just one or two local points as the parameters calculated will only be valid in the vicinity of the points used for the transformation The Disadvantage e Disadvantages of this approach are the same as for the Interpolation approach in that the area of the transformation is restricted to about 10km square Using 4 common points Other transformation approaches Classical 3D Classical 2D Two Step Interpolation Stepwise Which approach to use 613 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Two Step Background Information This transformation approach works by treating the height and position transformation separately For the position transformation the WGS 84 coordinates are first transformed using a Classical 3D pre transformation to obtain preliminary local cartesian coordinates These are projected onto a preliminary grid using the specified ellipsoid and map projection Then the 2 shifts the rotation and the scale factor of a Classical 2D transformation are calculated
16. 6378137 000 0 003352810665 763092 409 245766 864 763092 411 245766 855 763092 413 245766 857 644 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 Output usr 08 t1 07 05 05 08 08 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 862 854 850 845 856 858 857 Coordinate System Manager This is the file into which the result of the Projection conversion i e the converted coordinates has to be written All lines Each line contains e incase of grid coordinates output easting and northing for one point e incase of geodetic coordinates output latitude and longitude in radians for one point Example of OUTPUT USR file for grid coordinates 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 763092 4 09 1L 13 08 tI 07 05 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 5766 864 855 857 862 854 850 845 645 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 763092 405 245766 856 763092 408 245766 858 763092 408 245766 857 Example of OUTPUT USR file for geodetic coordinates 0 826317296864 0 167522411279 0 826317295443 0 167522411684 0 826317295748 0 167522412158 0 826317296554 0 167522411036 0 826317295286 0 167522411677 0 826317294676 0 167522410728 0 826317293899 0 16752241023
17. Click the Insert button to create a new measurement row Select in the column TPS Sensor your previously configured total station Select in the column Point Group your previously defined point group from the list EJ Enter the Start time 00 00 00 Set Continuous to No ee a Select Face for Telescope position Click the OK button to exit this dialog Step 15 Start the measurements Follow these steps to start the measurements Select from the menu Measurement Start automatic or click the toolbar button Start to start the measurement cycle The instrument should start to measure Select from the menu Measurement Pause automatic or click the toolbar button Pause II to pause the measurement cycle Select from the menu Measurement Stop automatic or click the toolbar button 43 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Stop Bio stop the measurement cycle Remarks The measurements and calculations use the current computer time Do not change the system time of your computer due to summer winter time It can effect the computations and the storage of the data in the database If the computer time has to be changed for any reason GeoMoS should be stopped and the application Monitor restarted Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only For more detailed information please refer to the related sections in the online help 44 Introduction to GeoM
18. Control may be in a different area to the monitoring points correction not representative May not always be able to observe reference points to to rain snow dust obstructions etc 507 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Background information The PPM is used to account for scale errors in the measured slope distances The scale errors are caused by changes in the atmosphere temperature pressure and humidity The following table shows for different distances 50m 100m and 1000m the effects in the measured slope distance in case the PPM is not applied Temperature Reference distance in standard atmosphere 12C 50 0000 100 0000 1000 0000 1013mBar m m m 40 C 49 9969 99 9938 999 9381 m m m 30 C 49 9976 99 9952 999 9523 m m 20 C 49 9983 99 9965 999 9653 m m m 10 C 49 9989 99 9977 999 9774 m m 0 C 49 9994 99 9987 999 9885 m m 10 C 49 9999 99 9999 999 9989 m m 20 C 50 0004 100 0009 1000 0086 m m m 30 C 50 0009 100 0017 1000 0176 m m m 40 C 50 0013 100 0026 1000 0260 m m m 50 C 50 0017 100 0034 1000 0339 a a ae 60 C 50 0021 100 0041 1000 0414 a a ae Important For long slope distances it is important to account for scale PPM errors because the scale error is much bigger than the EDM precision 508 Troubleshooting Signal Scan Measurement Mode When to use Use the measurement mode Signal Scan to measure the 3D coordinates of a pr
19. Coordinate Calculation Free Station Distance Intersection Station Point TPS Sensor Date Time TSi TS1 24 06 2005 04 10 33 Easting Northing Height Instrument height 11467 149 5259 543 10 344 Reference points measured for Station calculation Results Measured points Average Eror Combined Temp ESTREF1 _Fosiion Scale Eese From the Points list select the point to which you want to measure the direction and distance The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Coordinate Calculation dialog box rex wre eerie Tv esa oe To Sion coisa Northing The northing of the Total Station control point Height The height of the Total Station control point Instrument height The height of the sensor above the survey mark Reference points measured for Station calculation Points The list of available points in the system Measured points Contains a list of all points that have been measured GeoMoS Monitor Position Positions the total station to the selected point This button is only active after two points have been measured Measures with the total station the selected point Lists the average error in the computation Scale o Lists that scale factor from the computation Note The Average Error and Scale indicate the initial precision for the total station control point 179 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate Calculation GNSS F
20. GeoMoS version Login Password 550 Troubleshooting geomos2 geomos_2006 2 1 eee er are ee ee ee az Ka Change the default database to your project database GeoMoS Database Click Next Click Next and then Finish without changing any of the further options Import data example with MS Excel Follow these steps to Import data Open a new worksheet Select the menu Data Import External Data New Database Query source GeoMoS Database and press OK Enter the login and password Press OK Select what records you wish to import from each of the tables Press Next The Choose Data Source window opens Go to the Database tab select the data EF Optional Select options to filter the data Press Next Optional Select the sorting order Press Next Choose Return data to Excel to finish The selected external data will be displayed in a selected MS Excel worksheet Choose View data or edit data in Microsoft Query to run a query on the data e g to get data only from a certain time period The Microsoft Query dialog will be 551 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en displayed Refer to the corresponding topic of the Microsoft Query Help for additional information 552 Troubleshooting Switchbox Background information The Switchbox is an essential tool for permanent monitoring It supports a cold boot for the total station Topic contents Use the Switchbox with a total station Use t
21. If the option Do not update height is active the current measured GNSS height is not used to update the height and therefore not written to the GeoMoS Coordinates table in the database Update Reference Whenever a GNSS result is calculated the reference coordinate for Coordinate the point will be updated This is important if another sensor is measuring to the same point to calculate its own position If this option is unchecked whenever a GNSS result is calculated the current coordinate for the point will be updated Blunder Blunder Tolerance This value defines the maximum deviation from the expected position that will be expected If the resulting coordinate is further from the last position than this amount 3D then it will be regarded as a blunder and will not be stored in this database If a blunder check occurs a Point blunder check failed message will be generated Sensor name The name of the sensor 199 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Virtual Sensor Virtual Sensor Background information The virtual sensor computation functionality is license protected This functionality can be purchased with GeoMoS Monitor Option 1 article number 774 135 Please contact your Leica representative Definition The table below gives a definition of a sensor and a virtual sensor Naming beaa O O d Sensor A sensor is a physical sensor that is transmitting data Virtual A so called virtual sensor uses the output of one
22. Reference site must be different Select the Site File Product the RINEX file product that is activated for the rover site The length of the file product for the rover site must be equal to the length of the reference file product Select the name of the reference site Select a Reference File Product the RINEX file product that is activated for the reference site The length of the file product for the rover site must be equal to the length of the reference file product Select the Logging tab New PP Positioning Product ACTIVE General Logging Processing genc amp 8 Message type NMEA GGA Y Product length 1d zd Archive type None sa Clean up files Never o Cancel Choose a path to log the files if desired Select the Processing tab 487 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en New PP Positioning Product ACTIVE General Logging Processing Cut off Angle p1 deg Ephemeris Automati o Solution Type Automate o Satellite system GPS onp o a Frequency i2 o S Tropospheric Model JAutomatic lonospheric Model Automatic titi lonospheric Activity Automatic Cancel Select the satellite system This parameter defines whether GPS only data or combined GPS GLONASS data is to be used for processing The default setting Automatic will automatically use the data available for reference and rover Select the Frequency Default setting is Automatic When chosen th
23. The NMEA GGA format is a standard format for transmitting coordinates derived from GPS receivers and is supported by most GPS receivers The NMEA GNS format is a standard format for transmitting coordinates derived from combined satellite navigation systems GPS GLONASS possible future satellite systems and combining these a GPGGA GPGNS Header incl Talker ID message sent from the Receiver hhmmss ss hhmmss ss UTC time of Position Latitude Hemisphere N S yyyyy yy yyyyy yy Longitude GGA Quality Indicator 0 fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 not used 4 Realtime position ambiguities fixed GNS Mode N No fix Satellite system not used in position fix of fix not valid A Autonomous Satellite system used in non differential mode in position fix D Differential Satellite system used in differential mode in position fix P Precise Satellite system used in precision mode Precision mode is defined as no deliberate degradation such as Selective Availability and higher resolution code 545 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en P code is used to compute position fix R Real Time Kinematic Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers F Float RTK Satellite system used in real time kinematic mode with floating integers Number of satellites in use 00 12 X X X X Antenna a
24. coordinates is also saved in the database 183 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Orientation Background Information The total station must be oriented before starting the measurements When to use Use the Orientation wizard to orientate the total station instrument with two known points in a coordinate system refer to Method A after replacing the total station instrument to re orientate the total station refer to Method A after moving the total station instrument control point to re orientate the total station refer to Method A after using the total station instrument for manual surveying to re orientate the total station refer to Method A to set manually the orientation for a local coordinate system refer to Method B to enter the instrument height for a total station refer to set instrument height only before starting the measurements Procedure In addition to the Free Station and Distance Intersection setup procedure two additional manual methods for orientation of the total station are available Orientation Method A Known points Determine the orientation with two known points here instrument control point and target point Orientation Method B Set manually Set manually the orientation for a local coordinate system Important After accidentally changing the orientation of the onboard Az value the total station must be re orientated with Method A or B before starting the measure
25. methods of CSCS Models are supported Conversion Methods e Grid conversion method When selecting a CSCS Model of method Grid then when converting from WGS84 to Local Grid first the transformation map projection and ellipsoid specified will be applied to get preliminary grid coordinates As an extra step a shift in Easting and Northing will be interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS Model resulting in the final local Easting and Northing e Cartesian conversion method When selecting a CSCS Model of method Cartesian then when converting from WGS84 to Local Grid after the specified transformation a 3D shift will be interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS Model resulting in Local Cartesian coordinates upon which the specified local ellipsoid and map projection will be applied to get final local Easting and Northing e Geodetic conversion methods are also possible When selecting a CSCS Model of method Geodetic then when converting from WGS84 to Local Grid a shift in geodetic latitude and longitude will be interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS Model resulting in final local geodetic coordinates to which the map projection is applied CSCS Models may also be used on the receiver in the field To do so you have to Create a CSCS Model field file and then upload the file using the Data Exchange Manager Certain CSCS Models are pre defined and hardwired in LGO They are already connected to the corresponding grid file These CSC
26. via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the webcam must be between 192 168 1 30 and 192 168 1 32 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the webcam over mobile Internet Configure a Webcam Follow these steps to configure a Webcam EF Select the menu Services Webcams The Webcams dialog will be displayed When opening this dialog for the first time all fields will be empty EE Press Insert The Webcam Insert Camera dialog box will open 303 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 4 Enter the webcam settings Enter the webcam name Enter the address of the webcam Che ck Store pictures in Database to push webcam images to Leica GeoMosS Web Stand point Select the sensor location Enter a comment or a possible description about the webcam Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog The webcams settings will be visible Each row shows one configured webcam Press Close to save the settings and close the dialog The Store pictures in Database checkbox determines what can be done with the webcam image s If you left the box un checked the webcam image will only be visible in the Overview tab once measuring is activated The check box Display image from webcam if available must be checked in the menu Customize When checked you are able to push the webcam images to Leica GeoMoS Web Please read the topic Data Push to GeoMoS Web for further information 7 Sele
27. CSCS Model Properties Background Information This page enables you to display edit the CSCS Model Properties e CSCS Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by amp and cannot be renamed but only modified Edit a CSCS Model Follow these steps to edit a CSCS Model Right click on a CSCS Model in the Report View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes in the page General Note Only the fields with white background may be edited 3 View the extents and spacing of the model in the Extents page 4 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 673 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en CSCS Model Properties General Background Information This page enables you to display edit the CSCS Model Properties e CSCS Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by and cannot be renamed but only modified General Settings Name of the CSCS Model The Name can only be changed if the CSCS Model is not used in any Coordinate System definition Path of Grid Path and file name including the extension csc To select from the browser tile dick M Displays the Conversion method of the CSCS Model The Conversion method can be either Grid shifts Geodetic shifts or Cartesian shifts It is pre defined by the CSCS Model Grid file Interpolation Displays the Interpolation method used to interpolate a correction value in Method the grid file The Interpola
28. Manual Coordinates Pointo Additive Constant m Reflector Height m _ TP54_1001 ref 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1008 ref 0 000 0 000 6307 16 2 TP54_1013 ref 0 000 0 000 E07 16 2 TP54_1001 0 000 0 000 TP54_1003 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1006 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1007 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1008 0 000 0 000 u TPS4_1009 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1013 0 000 0 000 TP54_1014 0 000 0 000 gt TP54_1016 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1001 ref 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1008 ref 0 000 0 000 TP54_1013 ref 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1001 0 000 0 000 TP54_1003 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1006 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1007 0 000 0 000 u TPS4_1008 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1009 0 000 0 000 n TPS4_1013 0 000 0 000 TP54_1014 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1016 0 000 0 000 TP54_1001 ref 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1008 ref 0 000 0 000 TPS4_1013 ref 0 000 0 000 The table below describes the fields in the Additive Constant Reflector Height tab ee een ee This column displays an icon symbol for the type of edited point Original point value Edited point value The date and time the point was measured PointID The Point ID defined in the Point Editor dialog Additive The used additive constant Const Reflector The used reflector height Height 403 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en OK The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will be stored in the database ee The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will not be stored in the database Fu
29. Note Not till all appropriate settings are set in the wizard you can start the transfer Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog Note The made changes in the wizard will be lost and the settings will be not transferred to the ComBox 126 GeoMoS Monitor Advanced p Setup ComBox Insert ComBox PR General Mobile Provider DynDns Advanced Port COM1 Baud rate COM1 9600 Pot COM2 50002 Baud rate COM2 9600 Port COM3 ET Baud rate COM3 Pot COM4 5000 Baud rate COM4 Port meteo sensor Port LAN Port webcam 5013 i Port LAN2 Port 120 card Port VNC to MonBox Port wireless router Port ComServer Default Pressing the button Apply starts the transfer of all settings to the ComBox Ports COM1 to Set the appropriate COM port numbers of the COM4 ComBox Per default Port COM1 50001 Port COM2 50002 Port COM3 50003 ComBox20 only Port COM4 50004 ComBox20 only Baud rates Select in the list box the baud rates for each COM1 to COM4 COM port Following baud rates are available 4800 9600 1920 1152 Note To select the baud rates a LAN 127 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 128 Port meteo sensor Port webcam Port LAN1 Port LAN2 connection to the ComBox is required If the ComBox is connected via Internet then the list boxes with the baud rates are hidden Make sure that your chosen baud
30. S907 16 2008 10 00 37 TPS54_Station 546626 588 250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 10 01 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 10 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 3388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 10 31 49 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 11 00 38 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250762 910 472 855 0 000 amp 307 16 2008 11 01 51 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 S907 16 2008 11 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250762 910 472 854 0 000 07 16 2008 11 31 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 854 0 000 07 16 2008 12 00 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 Sy07 16 2008 12 01 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 12 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2006 12 31 51 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 13 00 38 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250762 910 472 855 0 000 907 16 2008 13 01 50 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 907 16 2008 13 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 S907 16 2008 13 31 50 TPS4_Station 546626 338 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 907 16 2008 14 00 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250762 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 14 01 51 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 907 16 2008 14 30 38 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250762 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 14 31 50 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 15 00 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5
31. Server Replies 10 z 10 D POP3 Options Local Domains Sever idertiliers Server identifier 1 Way to automatically discover yow host name would lke to automaticaly discover every tine start this User interface Recommended O l don t want to automatically discover my hostname wall do t manualy Helo String used for greetings wih othe SMTP servers Try to tind out my fully qualified doman name 591 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 4 Send a test e mail Follow these steps to send a test e mail from GeoMoS 2S Absolute limit check Failed IE Peter Muster lt qeomos spider gmail com gt EQ absolute limit check level 1 exceed Condition x Absolute limit check level 2 exceed x Absolute limit check level 3 exceed E Access to Webcam failed Insert 3t Burglary Edit 3 Communication lost f a S Communication problem Remove a Compensator out of range B Computation not supported with tF Test o Configuration data push to GeoMo 8 Configuration data successfully pu k 3 Connection to GeoMoS Web server __MailSettings _ Connection to GeoMoS Web server SMS Settings I Coordinate calculation failed current position of GNSS differs gr Digital 10 Data push login failed Data push reset because of GeoMc 8 Data push to GeoMoS Web Failed Displacement computation out of r x Division by zero while evaluating t o Error in formula Reset x Existing fields of table have been c
32. The profile that the point belongs to PomntiD The name of the point being measured Point Group The name of the point group being measured Station update GNSS target For additional sensor see Point Editor Types Normal special or PPM point group Free station or distance intersection point group Orientation only point group Vz correction point group Hz Angle The measured horizontal angle dec V Angle dec The measured vertical angle Slope The measured slope distance Distance m 3D Vector m The total displacement from the null measurement Longitudinal The displacement from the null measurement in the longitudinal Displacement direction m Transverse The displacement from the null measurement in the transverse Displacement direction m Height The displacement from the null measurement in the height Displacement direction m Easting m The calculated easting of the point 340 GeoMoS Monitor Northing m The calculated northing of the point Height m The calculated height of the point Automatically If selected the view will be automatically scrolled to show the display the most recent message last actions 341 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Messages Background information The status and error messages are displayed with date and time The duration that status messages are displayed in the table can be defined in days in the Customize dialog under
33. Upon opening GeoMoS Monitor tabs at the bottom of the view allow you to quickly switch from one view to another Tabs Overview Last Actions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status Select from the menu Configuration Customize to change the settings 337 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Overview Background information The most important system information about the Monitoring System is displayed on the first tab view called Overview A summary of the status of the Monitoring System is displayed The information will be updated after every measurement Information on individual sensors is shown in the Sensor Status Measurement Process Status The Status of the measurement process is displayed The following conditions are possible Active The Total Station image turns points and measures to the prism with a red line Stopped The Total Station image is not moving and a stop sign is displayed between the Total Station and the prism Paused The Total Station image is not moving and a flashing stop sign is displayed along a line between the Total Station and the prism Last Message Displays the most recent message that were generated by the system In addition the message must be selected to be acknowledged in the Message Configurator dialog A special symbol is displayed for every message limit exceeded power failure burglary the time and status message text The symbol will be changed when the m
34. V Slope Distance Easting Northing Height 2D Vector 3D Vector Longitudinal D Transverse Dis Height Displac Torsion Temperature Pressure mBar Custom Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Angle rad Angle rad Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Distance m Custom Tem Press Hum Slop Slop Horiz Verti Slop ii The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Observation Types dialog box 206 This column displays a symbol for the observation type The origin of the observation type can be distinguished Standard system observation type dh User defined observation type The name is used to identify the observation types throughout the system For example in Limit Checks and Campbell Datalogger Parameters Standard system observation types can be either a one to one transmission of a measured value e g Hz Inclination X Pressure or a combination of data and formulas that are basically included in the system for total stations The system unit is the physical quantity of the observation type e g distance temperature System units are available and can be configured within the Customize dialog and marked with an asterisk The observation types are stored with their default internal system unit to the GeoMoS Monitor d
35. and State Plane Zones e A Projection is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation e The Projections indicated by amp are hardwired and can neither be deleted nor edited e The Projections which are currently being used in a Coordinate System are indicated by amp and cannot be deleted or renamed but the parameters may be edited Select from the index below to learn how to manage the Projections Add a New Projection Delete a Projection Projection Properties 634 Coordinate System Manager Add a New Projection Follow these steps to add a new Projection Right click on Projections in the Tree View and select New Enter Name of Projection It is often useful to give any Projection set a meaningful name that identifies the area in which the Projection is applicable For example UTM Zone 5 hemisphere north UTM 5 North Select Type of Projection Mercator Transverse Mercator TM Oblique Mercator Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Cassini Soldner Lambert one Standard Parallel Lambert two Standard Parallels Polar Stereographic Double Stereographic Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic or User defined Enter the necessary parameters of the selected Projection Choose OK to accept entered values or Cancel to abort the function 635 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Delete a Projection Important Information e The Projections indicated by amp are hardwire
36. value gives stronger colors This adjustment is directly connected to the same adjustment in the context menu of the Geo Referencing dialog Site Map Context Menu A right mouse click in the Site Map will display the following menu on the screen Reset All Points to Null Coordinate Graphical Settings v Show Point Labels v Show Background Map Show All Points Save as The table below describes each menu option Reset All Points to Null The positions of all points will be reset to the current Coordinate Null Coordinate Graphical Settings Displays the Graphical Setting dialog Show Point Labels Shows the point labels Show Background Map Activates and deactivates showing the background map in the Site Map tab This check is linked automatically to the Graphical Setting dialog A background map image has to be loaded and geo referenced before it can be shown in the map view Show All Points To display all points in the Site Map tab All hidden points will be shown again Saveas o To save the site map in jpg or bmp format 427 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Point Context Menu A right mouse click on a Point will display the following menu on the screen Move Reset to Null Coordinate Hide Point The table below describes each menu option The position of the selected point can be customized with the Move option Reset to Null The position of the selected point will be reset to the current Co
37. 1 the cone is tangent to the sphere ellipsoid if itis lt 1 it is secant Secant means the cone intersects the sphere along two parallel lines In this case the scale is true along these two parallel lines Lambert two Standard Parallels Conformal Projection on to a cone with its axis coinciding with the z axis of the ellipsoid The cone is secant to the sphere The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e First Standard Parallel e Second Standard Parallel Polar Stereographic Conformal azimuthal Projection on to a plane The point of Projection is on the surface of the sphere ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin centre of the Projection The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Scale Factor at Origin If the Scale Factor at Origin 1 the plane is tangent to the sphere ellipsoid if it is lt 1 itis secant Secant means the plane intersects the sphere along a circle In this case the scale is true along this circle 640 Coordinate System Manager Double Stereographic Conformal azimuthal Projection on to a plane The point of Projection is on the surface of the sphere diametrically opposite of the origin centre of the Projection The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Scale Factor at Origin If the Sc
38. 354 GeoMoS Analyzer DXF Vector Export Background information The displacement vector will be exported as vectors to a file in DXF format microstation The system exports the point identifier the X Y coordinates of the points and the length of the displacement vector as the Z coordinate Open the DXF Vector Export dialog Follow these steps to open the DXF Vector Export dialog Select menu File Export DXF Vector or press the Export DXF Vector button The Export DXF Vectors dialog appears Select a folder where the system should store the file and type in a file name without extension The extension dxf will be added Press the Save button to store the file The system closes the Export DXF Vector dialog computes the displacement vector and creates an export file based on the selected points and the selected graphic options and stores it with the defined name in the defined folder Remark Comments will not be exported 355 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en DXF Contours Export Background information The displacement vectors will be exported as contours into a file in DXF format microstation The system exports the contour lines the calculated points of the contour interpolation and the labels Open the DXF Contours Export dialog Follow these steps to open the DXF Contours Export dialog Select the points for export in the point view tree Select menu File Export DXF Contour or press the Export D
39. Asend an email to a specified email address send an SMS to a specified telephone number switch ON OFF a relay on a digital input output card g run a database query and save the result to a file To send email you need to have access to an Internet or dial up connection and in addition a properly configured email account is required To open the Message Configurator Follow these steps to open the Message Configurator Select the menu Configuration Message Configurator or click on the toolbar Messages button The Message Configurator dialog will be shown In the list on the left hand side of 269 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en the dialog all Messages are listed which the GeoMoS Monitor can generate On the right hand side you see all Actions Use the Add Action button to configure an action You will be required to enter specific information for the action based on its type Application E Mail SMS Digital Out Database Query If you wish a condition may be set for the selected Action using the Condition Select the messages that you wish to trigger the action in the Message window on the left and activate the check box for the action in the Action window You can link multiple Actions to one Message messages 7 Change the settings as required Click the Close button The Message Configurator dialog will be closed and the E Use the Overview button to get a summary of which actions are assigned to
40. Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established 3 If the connection establishment was successfully the Test Link Progress dialog will be shown This dialog will show the test status of all modules which are included in a ComBox You find more details about this test under following link ComBox Test Link 4 After the test you can close the dialog Use the Test Digital Out button to display and change the state Ten De Oe of the Digital I O outputs of the selected ComBox 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to ComBox Manager Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where ComBox Manager is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established If the connection establishment was successfully the ComBox Test Digital Out dialog will be shown This dialog will show the state of the Digital I O outputs and gives the opportunity to recycle the power of the 109 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en appropriate ports You find more details about this test under following link ComBox Test Digital
41. Follow these steps to connect or disconnect a site 476 Open a server Switch with the Tabbed View to the Site tab SiteMap Site Sensor Raw Data Status File Products RT Products AT Positioning PP Positioning Right click on the particular item in the Property view on the right hand side Select Connect or Disconnect in the Context menu to establish communication GNSS Spider will indicate the successful connection or termination with a progress bar and a watch view message GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products Background information Positions are the most important output of a monitoring system In the GNSS Spider site server it is possible to compute and distribute real time position data streams for attached sites One such data stream is called a RT Positioning Product The positions are calculated as base lines using one site as a reference and another site as the rover The output can be in NUEA GGQ format intended to be used by other software applications or directly to the Leica GeoMoS monitoring software Topic contents Preparations Create and Edit RT Positioning Products Activate and Inactivate RT Positioning Products Use Spider RT Positioning Products in the GeoMoS Related topics Ambiguity Resolution Techniques Preparations Make sure that you have already configured two sensors The Site tab should now look similar to this Site Properties 3 MONR Sensor comm 1 b gt MOVI Senso
42. Tabbed View Status Bar Menu Bar The Menu Bar is a special Toolbar at the top of the screen that contains the menus File Edit View Configuration Tools and Help The Menu Bar lists the available commands If a command is not applicable it is grayed out and not accessible Configuration Toolbars allow you to organize the commands you use most often the way Toolbar you want to so you can find and use them quickly The configuration toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the important menu items used to aid the analysis of the data 10 Introduction to GeoMoS Tree View The tree view contains a list of all point groups and all profiles configured in the system Under each point group profile are listed all of the points contained in that point group profile By activating and deactivating points it is possible to control which points are shown in the graphs in the main window The main window shows the graph or report as indicated by the tab view Graphics The graphics toolbar may be used to control the display and formatting of Toolbar the graphs Context With a right click on the Main Window a Context Menu is available A Menu Context Menu lists all useful commands at a particular instant for a particular item on the screen Tabbed View Upon opening GeoMoS tabs at the bottom of the view allow you to quickly switch from one view to another Click on each tab to learn more Site Map Longitudinal Disp
43. distance will be measured and the coordinate of the point calculated The Measure button can be pressed again to repeat the measurement as often as required Note for TM30 TS30 only The Learn button uses the EDM Standard mode The used ATR mode depends on the Windows Registry By default the software attempts measurements in both modes normal ATR and low visibility ATR For example when the normal ATR mode succeeds the measurement is calculated directly If due to weather conditions the normal ATR mode fails then the low visibility ATR attempts a second measurement When existing points are learnt again the dialog displays the Difference from the last measured coordinate The dialog can be closed with the Cancel button and the existing data will not be changed GeoMoS Monitor Point succussfully remeasured Hz dec 278 5736 dec 91 2360 Slope Distance m 3 047 Easting m 496 826 Northing m 1000 345 Height m 0 066 dE m 0 000 dN m 0 000 dH m 0 000 Would you like to update the existing point canes Click the OK button to accept the measured coordinates and the coordinates will be updated in the table The Point Learn dialog will be closed and the new values will be displayed in the table The time and date column will be updated to the current time The Profile column will initially show No Profile and the Limit Class column will initially show the Standard Limit Class that was defined during the installati
44. entered in a separate dialog Point The point displacement can be defined relative to the 1st measurement in Displacement time period or Absolute with respect to the Null measurement The null measurement is the first defined measurement The relative option shows the graph beginning on the 0 value of the Y axis The displacements will be calculated relative to the first measurement of the selected time range The absolute option shows the first point of the line with the absolute displacement value compared to the null measurements e g 0 320 meters Absolute The defined limit classes can be selected to be viewed in the longitudinal Limit Levels transverse and height displacements tabs Note The option to view limit levels is only available if the point displacement is set to Absolute 380 GeoMoS Analyzer Velocity Follow these steps to open and configure the Velocity dialog Select menu Configuration Options or press the button Options The Graphic Options dialog appears The dialog shows option pages for the available graphics Activate the page Velocity Define the required options a Press the OK button E Press refresh to show the Velocity graphic with the new options The dialog will be closed and the new options will be stored The velocity page is defined by four main groups Graph Labels Comments and Velocity Options Displacement Velocity Vector Height Transverse Displac
45. from the right mouse menu The Print dialog appears Change the print settings as required ze Press the OK button The dialog will be closed and the printing will be started Comments in the Graphic The comments can be displayed in the displacement and velocity graphics Follow these steps to configure comments in the graphics Select the menu Configuration Options The Options dialog appears 3 Select the type of comments to display in the graphics 376 GeoMoS Analyzer 4 Press the OK button The dialog will be closed and the settings will be stored Select the menu View Refresh to show the redraw the graphics with the new options you selected Z The comments can be shown or hidden in the graph Press the Tools button and select Values legend It is possible to display up to 10 comments If points with a profile have been selected the comments of the profile will also be displayed The comment indexes will be displayed in a separate legend The start and end time of a comment will be shown by 2 different symbols in the graphic If the start and or end date is not in the visible area of the graphic the comments will not be displayed Note Comments are not displayed in the vector graph and will also not be exported in the DXN export 377 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Graphic Options Displacements Longitudinal Transverse and Height Follow these steps to open and configure the D
46. gt x Overview 1 Mail successfully sent to Peter Muster lt qeomos spider gmail com gt Check your e mail account to ensure that the test mail arrived The e mail may be in the spam folder Select the e mail and set to not spam GeoMoS is now configured to send e mail to an address that requires authentication 592 Troubleshooting How to configure a DynDNS account for ComBoxes Background information To use ComBoxes we recommend to utilise domain name services DNS A domain name service provider is Dynamic Network Services Inc Among other things they offer you superior domain name services DynDNS Each ComBox needs a unique host name domain name which can be created within a DynDNS account This host name points to your dynamic IP address of your ComBox s SIM card Such an account must be organised locally prior to installation of a ComBox Procedure to activate Follow these steps to configure a DynDNS account Ez Open with a web browser following web page www dyndns com Select the tab Services amp Prices to get an overview about the offered services DynDNS Free This account is for free and the most popular it allows to create five hostnames DynDNS Pro This account with low costs allows to create up to 25 hostnames Also you have more robust service features and support DynDNS Custom This account with costs is an all in one managed DNS hosting solution for top level domains
47. information Not supported information Not supported information This message is given when the defined Action Export Service to GeoMoS Adjustment was successful This message is given when the Service is not started or the software license does not support Troubleshooting Adjustment the option GeoMoS Monitor Option 3 failed To check the service please go to Start Settings Control panel Administrative Tools Services GeoMoS Adjustment Export Service Sensor not E3warning 1 Occurs if the sensor e g Leica DNA or Leica leveled Sprinter is not leveled up with the electronic bubble Export Service information 3 If the customer wants to use the Export Service to GeoMoS to GeoMoS Adjustment he needs to purchase Adjustment is Monitor Option 3 not supported by the current software license or attached dongle Failed to send Md Warning 1 Occurs if SMS via ComBox 503 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate Types GeoMoS uses several different coordinates types as listed in the table below Each point has types 1 through 4 and instrument points have type 5 Coordinate Type Null Only manually using the Reference for calculating displacement Point Editor Reference Manually or when To calculate PPM VzCorrections corrections importing points target coordinates 3 Current Manually or by To calculate displacement limit checks measuring any point blunder checks group Scan Man
48. reference coordinates are identical The scan coordinate is the target coordinate used when positioning the telescope and search for the target The current coordinate is the calculated position 3b Ga 7 Longitudinal displacement The 4 longitudinal displacement vector is based on the profile direction The longitudinal displacement vector is not the 5 true displacement vector between the original prism position null coordinate and the real prism position scan coordinate 3b s Ga 4 Longitudinal displ True displ 524 Troubleshooting 8 Control survey The difference between the calculated and measured displacements will increase with time the accuracy of the calculation will reduce with time It is necessary to periodically conduct a control survey to update the reference coordinates For example the prisms can be measured with GNSS Update point coordinates Import the new point coordinates into the Point Editor with a GSI or Koo file For each point the coordinate types reference current scan will be updated and are identical The null coordinate is not updated Check with Tools Point Viewer Profile direction The profile for each point is defined with the reference coordinate and the profile direction The direction of the profile is identical The position of the profile 6 is shifted parallel to the original position of the profile
49. sneng gt The Connect To dialog is displayed Select the COM port and press OK Icon 571 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Connect To B Troubleshooting Communication Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code Phone number Connect using MI Cx The COM Properties dialog is displayed Select the correct Baud rate Bits per second Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None and press OK COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second 9600 Data bits g Parity N one Stop bits 1 Flow contol Ea v Select from the menu File Properties Re The Properties dialog is displayed Select on the Settings tab the ASCII Setup 572 Troubleshooting button Troubleshooting Communication Properties HR Connect To Settings The ASCII Setup dialog is displayed Activate the check box Send line ends with line feeds and Echo typed characters locally Press OK to confirm the ASCII Setup and Properties dialog ASCII Setup ASCII Sending Send line ends with line feeds Echo typed characters locally Line delay 0 milliseconds Character delay D milliseconds ASCII Receiving C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width Send any key via HyperTerminal for example a The
50. systems It is the user s responsibility to either write or obtain a program that will serve as the Geoid Model Certain guidelines must be followed they are somewhat similar in nature to those that apply for User defined Projections Requirements for the user defined Geoid Model e t must be an executable program e Nointeraction is allowed e Input for the user program has to be organised according to the specified file format given below e Input output and external data files have to be accessed from the current directory Input into the Geoid Model When a user written geoidal model is called by LGO LGO will automatically prepare a file called INPUT USR This file contains all the points for which the executable program has to interpolate the geoidal undulation values The format of such a file is shown below 661 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en For Geodetic coordinates Latitude Longitude in radians 0 826317296827 0 167522411309 0 826317295438 0 167522411668 etc For Grid coordinates Easting Northing in meters 763092 4093 245766 8641 763092 4112 245766 8552 etc The Geoid Model must read in the coordinate file and then perform its interpolation and preparation of the Geoid Separation values for each point contained in the INPUT USR file Note In this case the order Easting Northing will not be affected by switching the coordinate order under Tools Options This has to be taken into ac
51. the Panes options The columns can be sorted by time so new messages are displayed at the top or bottom of the table When the system generates messages for limit checks or other system conditions they will be displayed in the table The time of occurrence for all messages is held fixed Messages that are related to point observations will also display the information about the Point ID and Profile in the relevant columns When a protocol printer is connected it can be activated or deactivated in the Customize dialog When the protocol printer is active all messages will be also be printed A signal tone can also be activated to sound for the messages GeoMoS Monitor Professional Version 1 6 Active Project Project1 File View Configuration Measurement Tools Help Eogha ie Syg amp 2 Monitoring System Prois v Point Group inside Contre Y Messages State Time Sensor Profile Point 10 _ Text A Message 04 08 2005 20 31 54 GRX123 GPS data received but bad quality Message 04 08 2005 20 31 55 GRX123 GPS data received but bad quality A Message 04 08 2005 20 31 56 GRX123 GPS data received but bad quality f Ackno 04 08 2005 20 40 01 Nivel20 livel20 sol exc f vel_Y Movement 0 6 e 0 5 mm m Y Ackno 0 105 20 40 30 livel20 livel20 Absolute limit 5 Ackno 04 1 00 vel20 vel20 e limit Ackno 04 0 41 30 livel20 vel20 A vel_ Limit 1 Ackno 04 2 00 vel20 nit Limit 1 5 f Ackno 04 vel20 A
52. 4 06 1 500 570 400 00 4 713 8808770 N 00934 8361070 E 4 06 1 500 570 403 GPRGA 154491 AA 47132 RRAR 7 N AAQIA RAATASR F A AA 1 KAA S7A AAA Test Siemens MC45 MC75 mobile phone Follow these steps to test Siemens MC45 MC75 mobile phone Step 1 Connect the MC45 mobile phone Configure the data output of the MC45 mobile phone to a port The on off switch at the program cable GEV171 cable must be set to off 575 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Step 2 Check the AT Commands Follow these steps to check the AT commands Select from Windows the menu Programs Accessories Communications HyperTerminal The Connection Description dialog is displayed Enter a name and press OK Connection Description sl New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name Troubleshooting Communicatior Icon The Connect To dialog is displayed Select the COM port and press OK Connect To x Troubleshooting Communication Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code Phone number Connect using malty m Cx 576 Troubleshooting The COM Properties dialog is displayed Select the correct Baud rate Bits per second Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None and press OK COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control
53. 59 Delete Bregenz _GMX90 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 GMX902 GG_He 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 Rebstein_GMX9 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 Point Groups Rhenusana_GM 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 Rhenusana_GM 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 Ruthi_GMx902 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 GMX_Ruthi NMEA 00 00 00 No 00 10 00 23 59 59 TPSL TPS1_SignalScan 00 15 00 No 02 00 00 23 59 59 4 mi v gt The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Measurement Cycle Editor dialog box TPS Sensor A Total Station can be selected from the choice list The list displays the Total Station currently connected in the Sensor Manager If no Total Station is shown in the list the Total Station connection must first be defined in the Sensor Manager dialog and then the Sensor must be assigned to a set up point in the Sensor Location Editor Any non TPS sensor such as a GNSS Nivel20 200 Combined Temperature Pressure sensor etc can be selected from the list The list displays the non TPS Sensors currently connected in the Sensor Manager If no Generic Sensor is shown in the list the Generic Sensor connection must first be defined in the Sensor Manager dialog and then the Sensor must be assigned to a set up point in the Sensor Location Editor Note It is not possible to combine a Total Station and a Generic sensor in the same entry in the Measurement Cycle Editor Point Group For Total Station a point group must be se
54. A Onde hacer SMe trees elses a tenet Mol eS E Nas tages tanec 303 Data Push to GEOMOS Web 2 000 oe ccecececeecee cece ee eececeaecaeceeeeeeesecscaeeeeeeeeesecsiaeeaeeeeeess 308 Export Service to GeoMoS AdjUsStMent 0 cc ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeees 311 Automatic Measurement ccccceccceecceeceeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeeeeseceucaeeeeeeeeeeeeas 318 Manual Measurement cccccceceeeeeceecceceeeeeseceaaaeaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeesesecsucnaaeeeeeess 320 Measurement Prony serrurerie le ati ie atea A RT A 321 Point VIEWER cnda neki dete eee ae hae ee 325 Shrink Database saa eee eee ee a 326 TES Read Oubhccaciacieancceainanniieech asi eee iat eee 328 Help Topics i meae eei aar lee eel ea aeaa ae ea 330 View Licenses nisni hei a ee dee aoe 331 About GeoMoS Monitor ccccccecceceeceecececeeececcncaeeeeeeeeeesecaaaeceeeeeeesecsaaeeeeeeeeetennaees 336 TADS iiie Saeki as dev ee a vada ade a Lae ee ea 337 OVGrVIOWs teenie Si eee ane ee ee ee ee 338 LASUACIONS sect litt sepscctentd a a iagutcl cats lacks a a a a a aaa aa a e a bd sae 339 MESSAGES l arna aE E E EE A O E 342 Observation Si onean a ea a e eae aa a a aieea aeniea 345 Ghart irama ee a aa a a a ai 347 SONSOMSLAUUS ninaa a iaaa Jacke A aa coat raa E A Eaa aa naiai 349 GEOMOS AMAZON enaa E EE E cucced edie cube bbhaceastiia s 351 PYOJOCUS vtec cehiecttccteececeobicten E hs ene ohh bebe ds cect bipetelen A 351 GRADING sted tacs
55. Acknowledge Only C Automatically Acknowledge After Sound tone for Messages Print Messages To 293 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Options dialog box Coordinate The coordinate system is applied to System GNSS data and Total Station measurements excluding the distance reduction The distances reduction is applied with the separate setting Distance Reduction A coordinate system provides the information necessary to convert coordinates to different representations Cartesian Geodetic Grid and to transform coordinates between the WGS1984 and the local system A coordinate system consists of five elements Tran sformation Proje ction Ellipsoid Geoid Model Country Specific Coordinate System CSCS Model The selected coordinate system Properties Opens the Coordinate System Manager to define a new coordinate system for further use in a project Transformations ellipsoids projections geoid models and CSCS models must be previously defined in order to be able to select them from the lists Warning A coordinate system is used to convert GNSS coordinates from WGS84 to the coordinates system used in the monitoring project The default coordinate system WGS84 can be used if no GNSS sensors are connected If one or more GNSS sensors are connected a coordinate system must be defined or GeoMoS will not be able to use the data from the GNSS senso
56. Bioperine Use this option to edit the name description and the path of an existing project 352 GeoMoS Analyzer Export Graphic Background information The graphs can be exported in EMF Enhanced Metafile Chart FX Bitmap BMP or text format The system exports the active visible view of the active pane Open the Graphics dialog Follow these steps to open the Graphics dialog Select menu File Export Graphic or press the Export Graphic button Eol The Export Graphic dialog appears Select a folder where the file should be stored and type in a file name without extension The extension will be added Press the Save button to create the file The system closes the Export Graphic dialog and creates the export file with the selected graphic in the selected folder with the selected file name 353 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Vectors CSV Background information Using this menu option it is possible to output the key information including times coordinates and displacements from the selected points as a comma separated ASCII file Note This export function works only for the Vector tab Open the Vectors dialog Follow these steps to open the Vectors dialog Select menu File Export Vectors CSV EZ The Export dialog appears Select a folder where the file should be stored and type in a file name without extension The extension will be added Press the Save button to create the file
57. Button This check box is used to activate deactivate sensors Only active sensors will be available for measurement and counted for Sensor Licenses This column displays an icon symbol for each sensor type Total station GNSS NMEA sensor GNSS Spider Positioning Product RT or PP Positioning Product Leica Disto Water level Leica Nivel 20 200 Humidity sensor Temperature sensor Combined temperature pressure Pressure sensor Rain gauge Combined temperature pressure humidity sensor Communication License Count GeoMoS Monitor Leica DNA and Sprinter Level Campbell Scientific datalogger This column displays the type of sensor Right mouse click to modify the type of sensor Refer to Supported Sensors for more information on sensor types This column displays the defined communication type Com port or TCP IP connection with IP address and port The required amount of Sensor Licenses per sensor or bus system The total amount of used and purchased activated Sensor Licenses will be listed at the bottom Example Licenses Count 31 100 If multiple Local Clients connect to a common Local License Server then the total amount of available Sensor Licenses for all Local Clients will be listed in brackets Example Local Client A with project A Licenses Count 31 100 70 Local Client B with project B Licenses Count 30 100 69 31 Sensor Licenses TPS and Meteo sensor are used
58. CO cCcOCOoOcCUcUOCCUOUcUCUOCCcUOCUCUOUOCUCUODCcUOCcUOUCUO Co Cc cul 97 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Action Overview To open Action Overview 1 Select from the menu View Action Overview 2 The Action Overview is displayed The Action Overview shows all the definitions you made between messages and actions E Overview System failure C Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Bin RebootWithQuancom exe 41717279587 No communication with sensor Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Communication lost Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Point group measurement finished Export Points Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Communication problem 41717279587 98 GeoMoS Monitor Action History To open ActionHistory 1 Select from the menu View Action History 2 The Action History is displayed The Action History shows a list of all actions which have been executed The list includes the time of the action the type of the action and the configuration details of the action Refer to the Message Configurator for more information on Actions Teieeered Actions at 794 Action of type Run Database se triggered pollen Paints eee fen points C Cen Files Leica ial 1 834 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 1 614 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xpor
59. Description State Port COM1 Connection successfull Port COM2 Connection successfull Port COM3 Connection successfull Port COM4 Connection successfull Control port for the Baud rate of COM2 Connection successfull Control port for the Baud rate of COM3 Connection successfull Control port for the Baud rate of COM4 Connection successfull Port meteo sensor Connection successfull Port webcam Connection successfull A Port LAN1 Connection failed A Port LAN2 Connection failed Port 1 0 card Connection successfull Port ComServer Connection successfull A Port VNC to MonBox Connection failed This message is valid if a device is connected to this port Close Description Possible States Module Port Port COM1 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the wireless router Port COM2 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port COM3 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port COM4 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with 141 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Control port for the Baud rate of COM2 Control port for the Baud rate of COM3 Control port for the Baud rate of COM4 Port meteo sensor Port webcam Port LAN1 142 the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connectio
60. Ensure that the total station is in the GeoCOM Online mode SignalScan IR The signal scan using the IR EDM has the following characteristics IR EDM produces a circular beam with point of highest signal return in the center of the beam The circular IR beam spreads as a function of distance At 1000m the beam is approximately 20 30cm 3 prisms wide Accuracy of the angle measurement decreases with distance due to the spread of the beam The IR beam works well through glass because there is minimal signal reflection 515 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Highest signal strength in O the centre of the beam Cross section of IR EDM beam Beam spreads linearly with distance SignalScan LO The signal scan using the red laser EDM has the following characteristics The red laser EDM used for reflectorless distance measurement is much narrower 1 10th of IR over long distances Due to the beam with a higher accuracy is possible using Signal Scan LO than Signal Scan IR If shooting through glass especially at oblique angles signal reflection can be a problem and result in outliers More complicated due to irregular non circular shape multiple centers and possible signal scattering Multiple centers points with highest h signal strength z _ Signal scatter A Cross section of red laser beam T a amp Beam spreads linearly with distance Narrower beam than with IR ED
61. Map Projection Ellipsoid CSCS Model Classical 3D Bursa Wolf model dX 674 374 m dY 15 056 m dZ 405 346 m Swiss Bessel use the CSCS model described above To work in LV95 select the Swiss95 projection and de select the CSCS model 692 Coordinate System Manager Programs Example of a User written Program The following example shows a User written Program written in Turbo Pascal for the Swiss Projection It transforms Swiss Grid coordinates to Geodetic coordinates and vice versa This map Projection is already included as a customized Projection The line numbers at the beginning of each line are for reference only They do not constitute part of the source code 001 Program CH_Projection_Set 002 003 const 004 pi 3 1415926535 005 eps 1 0e 10 convergence limit 006 007 constants for Bessel ellipsoid 008 ae 6377397 155 semi major axis 009 ex2 0 006674372231 e squared 010 lato 46 952405556 ell latitude of Bern 011 lono 7 439583333 pi 180 ell longitude of Bern 012 013 derived constants for sphere 014 r 6378815 9036 radius 015 alpha 1 00072913847 scale factor along meridian through Bern 017 rk 0 00306673233 integration constant 018 bo 46 907731456 pi 180 spherical latitude of Bern 019 020 var dumy extended 021 y x h y1 x1 extended 022 Iquer bquer wert wert1 wert2 bk Ik extended 023 cobo sibo cobi sibi coli sili extended 024 ex
62. Monitor Spider Positioning Products PIX Au Sensor N Product Name Ste Name Ref Eastng m North eigh HEER FELD Feldkirch Heerbru Heerbrugg 2764474 232 r ana HEER LIND Lindau Heerbrug Heerbrugg Lindau 2764474 232 sie ea Cancel LIND HEER Heerbrugg Linda Lindau 2770782 384 STGA LIND Lindau StGallen_ St Gallen 2743854 860 STGA HEER Heerbrugg StGall St Gallen 2743854 860 FELD STGA StGallen Heerbru Heerbrugg wa 2764474 232 STGA FELD Feldkirch StGallen St Gallen u 2743854 860 LIND STG4 StGallen Lindau_ Lindau wa 2770782 384 FELD HEER Heerbrugg Feldki Feldkirch 2762187 559 FELD STGA StGallen Feldkirch Feldkirch a 2762187 559 SARG FELD Feldkirch Sargans Sargans w 2757370 102 BW9S_LI Lindau Ravensbu BiW 395 2763748 829 LIND BW95 Ravensburg Lind Lindau 2770782 384 FELD SARG Sargans Feldkirch Feldkirch 2762187 559 OOOOOOOOOOOO88 This check box is used to activate deactivate GNSS Spider Products Only active products will be available for measurement Sensor You can enter a name of this individual sensor As default the Sensor Name Name is composed of SiteName_ReferenceName_PP_SpiderProductID_ComputerlD Product The Product Name configured in GNSS Spider Name SiteName The used Site configured in GNSS Spider for this baseline Reference The used Reference configured in GNSS Spider for this baseline Name Easting The transferred initial site coordin
63. Mrz 2009 17 16 Mrz 2009 19 1 Epoch After the selection the outlier is deselected 455 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Graphics amp Context Menu Background information The graphics of the selected points will be shown within the defined time period The time is displayed on the horizontal axis and displacement or velocity is displayed on the vertical axis The vectors of the selected points will be shown as a plan view The legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph It is also possible to show Comments in the graphic The comment legend is indexed for each comment which is shown in the graphic The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on the graph the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menus Displacements Velocity Vector Height Graphic Toolbar A special toolbar for the graphics can be shown Additional functions and display properties for the graphics can be accessed with the buttons on the toolbar Save The current graphic can be stored in different formats Chart Gallery Different graphic types can be selected Color Different colors for different elements in the
64. S oe oe Version 2 of SWEREF99RT90 contains corrections in 301176 points of the grid computed from coordinates of 8400 stations determined in the two systems by the on going project RIX 95 The coverage of the model can be seen on the map below and will be expanded as the project is completed The range of the grid is 54 to 70 in latitude and 10 to 25 in longitude Detailed information is available from http www lantmateriet se geodesi To convert coordinates from SWEREF 99 corresponds to WGS84 to RT 90 define a coordinate system comprising of 684 Coordinate System Manager Transformation None Ellipsoid Bessel CSCS Model SWEREF99RT90 Any map projection and additionally a geoid model may be used The RT 90 coordinates will then be displayed as your local coordinates in LGO 685 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en NZGD49 2000 New Zealand The New Zealand Geodetic Datum 2000 NZGD2000 is a new geocentric coordinate system which replaces the older New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949 NZGD49 The new NZGD2000 uses the GRS80 ellipsoid and a set of Transverse Mercator projections for details see http www linz govt nz staticpages pdfs linzpublications factsht_may99 pdf The NZGD49 2000 CSCS Model defines the differences between NZGD2000 and NZGD49 latitudes and longitudes on a grid of points given at spacings of 6 arcseconds approx 20 km across the land area of New Zealand The grid file has bee
65. Sencar Tern Drink PR WI IANA NT ATTN Overview LastActions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status User Level Administrator 08 06 40 loniitor Act Description The name of the connected Sensor will be displayed The Sensor is assigned to a point in the Sensor Location dialog This Point 345 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ID will be displayed The measurement time is displayed Values These fields are dependant on the connected Sensor For a temperature pressure Sensor the measured temperature and pressure values are displayed Please follow this link for more information on the Standard system observation types 346 GeoMoS Monitor Chart Background information The chart shows the most recent measurement coordinate and displacement results from total station GNSS and meteo sensors Create a chart Follow these steps to create a chart Select the Point to show in the graph Select the observation or result type to display Only observation result types with data will be listed Select the time range to display The display shows from the current time back the specified range 347 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 348 File View Configuration Measurement Tools Help SSal sa fle Sw 4 2 2 Monitoring System Projects Point Group Inside Control gt EN a J if d Ad l ry ry l ry
66. Send panel appears 14 Modify the settings if required Select the CONT F1 button o 31 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 16 The CONFIGURE NMEA Messages panel appears again Select the CONT F1 button The CONFIGURE NMEA Out 1 panel appears again Select the CONT F1 button 18 The CONFIGURE Interfaces panel appears again Rover antenna settings The rover can be connected via various communication possibilities Bluetooth cable Contact the Leica Geosystems Dealer Distributer in the country where you bought your product RTK corrections reference antenna settings The reference can be connected via various communication possibilities Bluetooth cable Contact the Leica Geosystems Dealer Distributer in the country where you bought your product Leica Sprinter Follow these steps to configure a Leica Sprinter Menu gt Settings gt RS232 gt Baud rate gt 9600 8 1 none Menu gt Recording gt Ext Using the footscrews the instrument can be levelled up 32 Introduction to GeoMoS Tour Il Connect a total station Basic monitoring system Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to setup a single Leica total station for a simple monitoring system Procedure Follow these steps to connect a total station for a basic monitoring system eS Pe Determine the control point coordinates Sensor configuration and cable connection Sensor Location and Orientation ct Connect th
67. Sensor_Log txt is written Deactivate Change the registry entry LogToFile back from TRUE to FALSE 584 Troubleshooting Configure GeoMoS to send e mail to an address that requires authentication e g GMail or Yahoo Overview of procedure Advanced SMTP Server Relay pranon Google E Mail Account Authentication ae a comi Login your gmail address d Password your password GeoMoS Localhost gmail address Procedure Follow these steps to Configure GeoMoS to send email to a SMTP server that requires authentication e g GMail or Yahoo EE Download and install a SMTP Server Configure GeoMoS Configure Advanced SMTP Server a Send a test e mail 1 Download and install a SMTP Server A SMTP Server is required to receive e mails from GeoMoS and send them to an e mail account For this example we will download a free SMTP Server trial version from a 3rd party http www softstack com advsmtp html This trial version of SMTP Server is free for 30 days after this time you will have to register and pay a single user licence fee 2 Configure GeoMoS Follow these steps to configure GeoMosS 1 Open GeoMoS Monitor Go to Configuration gt Message Configurator mi The Message Configurator dialog box will open Press the Mail Settings button 585 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Message Configurator DS Absolute limit check Failed x Absolute limit check level 1 exceed x Absolute limit check
68. Software Total Stations GPS GNSS Other Leica GeoMoS Leica TCA1800 2003 Leica GMX902 GG Leica Nivel210 220 Leica GNSS Spider Leica TCA1201M Leica GRX1200 Series Leica GPR112 Leica GNSS QC Leica TPS1200 Series Leica GPS1200 Series Monitoring Prisma Leica GeoMoS Web Leica GMX901 e when it has to be right eca Geosystems
69. TPS1_Station Campbell Datalo Logger_ExTemp_Temperature TPS1_Station Campbell Datalo Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel 2 Nivel20 2x0 Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel 3 Nivel20 2x0 Rebstein_GMX902 GG_RT_48_h Rebstein GNSS Spider RT Rhenusana_GMX902 GG_PP_89 Rhenusana PP GNSS Spider PP Rhenusana_GMx902 GG_PP_90 Rhenusana PP GNSS Spider PP Ruthi_GMx902 GG_RT_50_hpcg Ruthi GNSS Spider RT STS Temp TPS1 TPS1_Station Torsionl Torsion_point_1 Torsion2 Torsion_point_2 170 GeoMoS Monitor The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Sensor Location dialog box The name of the sensor Ge rl Setup is used to calculate the position of the sensor For total stations it is possible to use a Free Station or Distance Intersection For GNSS an average position may be calculated See Standpoint Coordinates ioen The orientation wizard is used to set the orientation and instrument height of the total station See Orientation Properties The properties dialog is used to edit the calculation and measurement options for the sensor Not all sensors have configurable properties Refer to the list below for the properties of the different sensor types e TPS Properties e GNSS Properties 171 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate Calculation Free Station Background information The Free Station calculation is used to determine the position of the Total Station coordinates by measuring angles and distances to control poi
70. Transverse Mercator Projection WGS84 Geodetic onns R gy WGS84 Ellipsoid nonoi WGS84 Coordinate Side GNSS Monitoring Local Coordinate Side TPS Monitoring 540 Troubleshooting Follow these steps to configure a local Coordinate System for a construction site In GeoMoS Monitor go to Configuration gt Options Properties The Options dialog opens select the _ Properes button The Coordinate System Manager dialog box opens 4 Coordinate System Manager contents Name Last Modified Transformation PEB Coordinate Systems None 07 14 2008 17 32 25 z Transformations was 1984 07 14 2008 17 32 25 2 Ellipsoids F E Projections State Plane Zones 2 CSCS Models The tree view on the left allows navigation of the Coordinate System Manager Transformation A Transformation is a description with calculation parameters on how to transfer from a global to local Cartesian Coordinate System Note For this use case you need the Leica LGO Datum Map tool to compute the parameters for a One Step Transformation Check if the appropriate Transformation One Step is available or compute a new Transformation One Step with the Leica LGO Datum Map tool and import it to the Coordinate System Manager 541 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Transformation properties General Name GGlobal Local Ellip amp None v t
71. Viewer After the user Administrator has defined the time range for the user Viewer the user Viewer can only select a time range within the range defined for the user Viewer GeoMoS Analyzer Time Period Background information The viewer can define the time period for all graphs report and the contents of the Data Editor dialog Procedure Follow these steps to configure the time period Select Menu View Time Period or press the toolbar Time Period button F The Time Period dialog is displayed PR 08 21 2005 11 28 55 a DK C Duration Cancel End 08 21 2005 11 28 55 X End time is always current time visible interval or Select the option Duration and enter the duration of the required visible interval Enter the end time and date for the End of the required visible interval With this field the end time of the visible interval can be fixed or Select the option End time is always current time This option is only active when the check box is checked If this option is active the end time of the visible interval is always taken as the current system time or the last stored record of the database i Select the option Start and enter the time and date for the beginning of the required 369 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en There are different options to define the time range End Current Time and fixed Start time End time is always current time and Duration Fixed End
72. Virtual Sensor Editor Active Name Formula Observation Ty Sensor Location _Min ddil Torsionl G4_DIFF 1505 7 Torsion Torsion_point 1 Torsion2 y1_DIFF 1505 Torsion Torsion_point_2 sert Inset Copy Remove lt i r Formula amp 1_DIFF 1505 74 62 1 2_DIFF 1505 74 62 5 30 eh beh Aliases Name Sensor Sensor Location Observation Ty Shift hs x1_DIFF Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel2 Inclination X Diff x2_DIFF Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel3 Inclination X Diff y1_DIFF Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel2 Inclination Y Diff y2_DIFF Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel3 Inclination Y Diff N 01 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Virtual Sensor Editor dialog box Virtual You can define virtual sensors using the Insert button Sensor This check box is used to activate deactivate virtual sensors Only active virtual sensors will be available for measurement Displays the name for the virtual sensor For example Pythagoras Displays the current valid computation of the virtual sensor The formula is entered in the Formula field below Observation Displays the Observation Type of the virtual sensor Type Sensor Displays the selected sensor control point of the virtual sensor Location Use this value to limit the virtual sensor results to a minimal and or maximum value No virtual sensor results outside the set limits will be st
73. You have now successfully completed this Quick Tour and are now familiar with the basic analyzing methods of monitoring system using the GeoMoS Analyzer To create your own color palette set daily averages and add comments with the GeoMoS Analyzer please refer to the related sections in the online help 57 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tour VI Re orientate a total station Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to reset the total station orientation using the Sensor Location dialog If the total station has been used manually moved or replaced the total station orientation must be reset Procedure The information in this steps describes how to determine the orientation with Method A Known points here instrument control point and target point Select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or press the toolbar Sensor Location button ESI The Sensor Location dialog appears Select the Sensor that needs to be orientated from the list and click the Orientation button The Orientation assistant is displayed The total station control point and sensor type selected in the Sensor Location dialog will be displayed These fields are not editable Click the Next gt button to display the next page Enter the instrument height if required Do not modify the orientation value because this value is only used for the orientation Method B set manually Click the Next gt button to display the next page Se
74. a password to change between user levels If only one password is entered the Settings dialog cannot be confirmed with the OK button 362 GeoMoS Analyzer Page Setup To open Page Setup Follow these steps to open Page Setup 1 Select the menu File Page Setup The Page Setup dialog is displayed Select the preferred printer and change the print properties as required 4 Confirm the selected printer and properties by pressing the OK button The Page Setup dialog will be closed and the Page Setup settings will be saved 363 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Print Preview To open Print Preview Follow these steps to open the Print Preview Select from the menu File Print Preview The GeoMoS Monitor print preview will be displayed The window shows the active view with the defined page setup The buttons have the following functionality Two Pages One Shows one or two pages ata time Zooms out Zooms in Closes the print preview window and returns to the application 364 GeoMoS Analyzer Print To open the Print dialog Follow these steps to open the Print dialog 1 Select Menu File Print The Print dialog appears Change the printer settings as required Press the OK button or press the Print button Bor press the keys Ctrl P The graph or the report of the active pane will be printed with the selected printer settings Exit Follow these steps to Exit Select Menu File Exit Th
75. address could not be established To check the service please go to Start Settings Control panel Administrative Tools Services GeoMoS WebCam pCamService The access to the GeoMoS Web FTP Push failed To check the service please go to to service Start Settings Control panel Administrative Tools Services GeoMoS Ftp PushService Configuration Binioriation data push to The message is given when the automatic measurement cycle is started Due possible GeoMoS Web initiated system configuration changes it is required to transfer the latest configuration to GeoMoS Web The message is given when the defined action Data push to GeoMoS Web was successful Too many E3warning 1 This message is given when the total amount pictures in of webcam images is reached Default storage database size is 1GB Measurement O information data push to 501 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 502 GeoMoS Web initiated Data push reset because of GeoMoS project switch Configuration data successfully pushed to GeoMoS Web Measurement data successfully pushed to GeoMoS Web Data push login failed Connection to GeoMoS Web server established Connection to GeoMoS Web server failed Data push to GeoMoS Web failed Export to GeoMoS Adjustment succeeded Export to GeoMoS information Not supported Not supported O information Not supported information Not supported E
76. an Ellipsoid Right click on an Ellipsoid in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting 630 Coordinate System Manager Ellipsoid Properties This Property Sheet enables you to display edit the Ellipsoid Properties Important Information e The Ellipsoids indicated by amp are hardwired and cannot be modified Edit an Ellipsoid Follow these steps to edit an Ellipsoid Right click on a Ellipsoid in the Explorer View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes in the page General Only the fields with white background may be edited at the particular instant Ps Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 631 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Ellipsoid Properties General Background Information This Property Page enables you to display edit the Ellipsoid Properties General Settings Field Description Name of Ellipsoid The Name can only be changed if the Ellipsoid is not hardwired or not used in any Coordinate System definition Semi Displays the value for the semi major axis major axis a Reciprocal Displays the reciprocal value of the flattening flattening 1 f Last Date and Time the Ellipsoid was last modified modified 632 Coordinate System Manager Projections Projections Overview For each different mapping area the user may define a Projection A Projection allows the conversion of Geodeti
77. and prisms See the technical description of the Distance Only Calculation for further information Warning The Only Measured Distance option should be used only if it is not possible to measure with ATR or Signal Scan f using the Only Measured Distance option all prisms should be measured with the measurement mode Distance IR or 191 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Distance LO ATR and other measurement modes should not be used with Only Measured Distance f using Only Measured Distance you should set the Distance Reduction to Use End Heights Meteo Model Reference Distance Temperature Pressure 192 The Meteo Model used for the atmospheric correction of the measured distances can be selected No atmospheric correction will be applied to the measured distances A scale factor PPM value is calculated from measured reference distances After a point group of type PPM or FreeStation plus the Scale Factor option is measured the scale factor PPM value is calculated and saved The PPM value is calculated from the ratio of the calculated reference distance and measured distance Important A Reference Distance correction can only occur when a point group with the type PPM or a FreeStation group plus the Scale Factor option exists and is measured in the Measurement Cycle If there is no point group with the type PPM or FreeStation Scale Factor existing in the Measurement Cycle then the last avail
78. angle face face Il is displayed The measured V angle for the particular measurement Note The displayed V angle depends on the measured telescope positions See the above description for Hz for more information The measured slope distance for the particular measurement Note The displayed slope distance depends on the measured telescope positions See the above description for Hz for more information PPM Type The used ppm type Temperature Pressure AtmosPPM or Reference Distance correction RefPPM for the particular measurement C emcee pan a 434 GeoMoS Analyzer Station Easting The used station coordinate for the particular measurement Station Northing The used station coordinate for the particular measurement Station Height The used station coordinate for the particular measurement Null Measurement Diff Null The computed longitudinal displacement of the particular Measurement measurement The profile direction defines the direction i e azimuth in which the displacement is determined The corrected and reduced horizontal distance Difference Outlier The value may computed with the Calculate Outlier button Transverse The computed transverse displacement of the particular measurement Displacement The profile direction defines the direction i e azimuth in which the displacement is determined Height The computed transverse displacement of the particular measurement Displacem
79. by right clicking on the desired location in the map Delete points Select a defined referenced point and right click on it to delete it Zoom in out 100 Zoom in or out within the map displayed Color Contrast Controls the intensity of color for the background map This adjustment is directly connected to the Color contrast adjustment in the Graphical Settings dialog View Point ID When checked the 4 character site code is displayed in the map Lower right Displays information about the file being used for the background map window Taken from the file name File name File name and path of displayed map Size o Size of displayed map file in KB Width Height Size of the displayed map in Pixels Lower left Contains a report view listing all the points which have been identified as window common points in the image mo Wepre rerio OO esx Peto nobis arar R e ea e 395 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Northing As entered Background The selected Background map file Map File When you have identified all common points press the Reference button to reference the background image Press this button to delete the selected background image Tips In colorful images it might be advisable to blend the image to achieve a better contrast of the identical points to their background image Select Color Contrast from the context menu This functionality is also available from Graphical Settings dialog to achieve a
80. changed Connect via LAN Internet Host name _mycombox dyndns org e g box1 dyndns org Port wireless router 50050 OK Cancel You can test the state of the Digital I O outputs of the ComBox over two possibilities LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where the ComBox Manager is running Internet To use the Internet connection the host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required 120 GeoMoS Monitor ComBox Configuration Background information The Setup ComBox wizard will guide you through the configuration procedure of a ComBox The configuration procedure is divided in four parts General General settings e g ComBox name type etc Mobile Provider Settings from the mobile provider e g phone number login data access point name etc DynDNS Settings from the DynDNS account host name server address login data etc Advanced Port settings port numbers baud rates of the ports etc Note To open the Setup ComBox wizard please follow the instructions on the page ComBox Manager Overview 121 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Procedure Follow these steps to configure a ComBox Step Register E Setup ComBox Insert ComBox JE General ComBox name myComBox1 ComBox type i i Integrated MonBox Yes No Comment optional Connected sensors 1 TM30 1 Nivel220 b
81. changes with the OK button 7 The dialog will be closed and the changes will be saved in the database If the coordinate Calculation method Only measured distance is selected in the Options dialog in the Calculation tab the direction of the profiles should be approximately the same as the direction of the line of sight of the measurements This measurement technique is highly dependent on the geometry of the measurement direction and the profile direction When the geometry of the measurements and the monitoring network is not suited to this technique the calculations and results will be inaccurate and subject to large variations 265 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Null Measurement Editor To open the Null Measurement Editor Follow these steps to open the Null Measurement Editor Select the menu Configuration Null Measurement Editor The Null Measurement Editor dialog will be displayed Each row shows one sensor or one observation type from a single sensor Select a sensor and press the Measure button to read out the current value Either manually enter the Null Value by right clicking on the cell for that sensor observation type and typing in the value or use the Update Null button to set the null value to the current value Important Default Null Value 0 EF Press the OK button to save the changes and to close the dialog Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing t
82. columns Select the Point ID from the list in the Point ID column The point must already exist in the system in order to enter manual coordinates New points can be created in the Point Editor in the Monitor application The time of the measurement can also be entered in the Date Time column The time is important for the correct chronological visualization in the graph and the computation analysis Coordinates can be entered in the Easting Northing and Height columns Coordinates must be entered in the same coordinate system as defined for the system The source of the coordinates can be from various measurements e g GNSS reduced Total Station network adjustment Upon entering a coordinate a displacement vector will be computed from the coordinate position and a result will be saved in the database The results from the manual coordinate calculation can be viewed in the graph in the same manner as normal measurement results Process for manual entering coordinates Follow these steps to manually enter coordinates Select the Point ID from the list 2 Enter the time and coordinates of the manually observed points in the appropriate columns Press the Calculate button to calculate the results of the coordinates 4 A result will be calculated based on the entered time and coordinate of the point The calculation uses the current profile information assigned to the point Every entry creates a separate result which can be viewed in the
83. dialog of the Analyzer application and the measurements can be reprocessed The additive constant shown in the Data Editor represents the additive constant of the measurement Every line in the Data Editor represents a measurement Editing the measurement additive constant has no effect on the additive constant of the point in the Point Editor dialog The reflector height shows the prism height used for the measurements The reflector height can be defined in the Point Editor dialog in the Monitor application The reflector height used for a measurement is copied from the reflector height assigned to the point at the time of the measurement The reflector height value for the measurement can be changed in the Data Editor dialog of the Analyzer application and the measurements can be reprocessed The reflector height shown in the Data Editor represents the reflector height of the measurement Every line in the Data Editor represents a measurement Editing the measurement reflector height has no effect on the reflector height of the point in the Point Editor dialog The ID Point Identifier and Time columns cannot be edited Only the Additive Constant and Reflector Height column can be edited Only existing values can be modified Additional records cannot be created 402 GeoMoS Analyzer Additive Constant Reflector Height Properties Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates
84. direction Longitudinal and transverse displacement 525 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The 4 longitudinal displacement vector is based on the profile direction The longitudinal displacement vector is not the 7 true displacement vector between the original prism position null coordinate and the real prism position scan coordinate 3b K3 3a Repeat Repeat the Step 8 and Step 9 for the monitoring points if the difference between the calculated and measured displacements will increase with time 526 Troubleshooting Examples of Coordinate Systems Coordinate Systems can be divided in two different types Global Coordinate Systems Calculations without Transformations Local Coordinate Systems Calculations with Transformations Available examples of Coordinate Systems International Coordinate System for example Europe Global 3 National Coordinate System for example Switzerland 4 Local Coordinate System for a construction site Example 1 International Coordinate System Europe Local Grid h E N h BA ae J GB Local ry Projection Universe Transverse Mercator UTM32 Local Geodetic h Ellipsoid GRS1980 WGS84 Cartesian Local Cartesian BNE s aye WGS84 Coordinate Side Local Coordinate Side GNSS Monitoring TPS Monitoring 527 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Follow these steps to configure a global Coordinate System e g Europe 1 In GeoMoS Monitor go to Configuration
85. displayed chronologically in the displacement and velocity graphic Enter Comments The Comments Editor dialog defines the comments for the points and profiles If a new comment is added a new line will be shown in the spreadsheet of the dialog It is possible to select the Point ID s or Profile names in the spreadsheet The start date will be initially set automatically based on the current date and time Select the end date and enter a value to define the comment over a defined time period The comment text can be edited in line The Tab key moves from one column to the next Follow these steps to enter comments Select menu Configuration Comments Editor or press the Comments button Add a comment or edit an existing comment Press the OK button The Comments Editor dialog will be closed and the new and modifications will be stored in the database 2 The Comments Editor dialog will be displayed 374 GeoMoS Analyzer Comments Editor Typ y Name Start yj General Comment 12 02 2003 07 32 Sensor 4 replaced after service Point 3938 1 01 14 2004 14 25 Height of prism changed from 0 234 to 0 243 W Profile EWall_profile 01 17 2004 09 32 Profile changed from 270 degrees to 290 eset Eee Comment 02 06 2004 11 58 02 06 2004 13 21 System down due to power failure Insert Point Comment Cancel Insert Profile Comment The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Comments Editor
86. established and all settings will be read 3 If the connection establishment was successfully the Setup ComBox wizard will be shown 4 Now you can edit your appropriate settings in the registers At the end of the editing press the button Apply All settings will be written to the ComBox and into GeoMoS You find more details about the settings under following link ComBox Configuration 5 After the configuration the ComBox will reboot Press the Remove button to delete a selected ComBox in GeoMoS Note It will just delete the ComBox settings in the GeoMoS database The correspondent settings on the appropriate ComBox are still stored Use the View Settings button to get an quick overview of all settings View Settings which are assigned to the selected ComBox Note There is no connection to the appropriate ComBox required The View settings dialog will just display the stored settings in GeoMoS Use the Test Link button to test the connection to the selected ComBox P 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to GeoMosS Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet 113 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en cable to the computer where GeoMoS is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required You find more details abou
87. get to the next register in the wizard Press the button Apply to start the transfer of all settigns to the ComBox Note Not till all appropriate settings are set in the wizard you can start the transfer Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog Note The made changes in the wizard will be lost and the settings will be not transferred to the ComBox E Setup ComBox Insert ComBox Host name mycombox dyndns org Server address members dyndns org i Server port 80 User name ComB ox10 Password Support e mail optional peter nuster qmail com Pressing the button Apply starts the transfer of all settings to the ComBox lt Back Next gt spi Cancel 125 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Enter the host name DynDNS name URL under which the ComBox will be available e g myComBox dyndns org Server address Enter the server address of the Dynamic DNS Server normally members dyndns org is used Server port Enter the TCP port of the Dynamic DNS Server normally 80 or 8245 Username Enter the User name of your DynDNS account Enter the Password of your DynDNS account Support e mail Enter an optional Support e mail address optional Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard Press the button Apply to start the transfer of all settigns to the ComBox
88. gridlines if they are displayed in the selected axis Labels on the selected axis will also be displayed according to the major unit setting Show Lets you show hide gridlines at major intervals on the selected axis Gridlines Tick mark Displays tick marks at the major gridlines of various shapes cross inside type outside none for the selected axis Type a value in the minor unit box to specify the increment you want minor tickmarks and minor gridlines if they are displayed for the selected axis Show Lets you show hide gridlines at minor intervals on the selected axis Gridlines Tick mark Displays tick marks at the minor gridlines of various shapes cross inside type outside none for the selected axis Allows you to edit the General Scale Labels and Grid line properties of the Details currently selected axis from the Axis Selector field above 462 GeoMoS Analyzer Click on the screen shot for more information X Axis Properties General Scale Labels Grid lines Further information Graphics amp Context Menu Axes Details 463 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Axes Details Each tab in the Axis Properties dialog allows the graphics of the selected Axis to be customized Select the axis in the Axis Selector field in the Properties Axes Tab Click on the screen shot for more information on each tab X Axis Properties General Sc General Tab ale Labels Grid lines Th
89. group such as which instrument is meant to measure it Select a point group from the list Click on an available point or profile with the left mouse button and while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse over the Assigned window for the point group and release the left mouse button Points and profiles can also be removed from the Assigned window for the point group using the same drag and drop technique The order of points and profiles within the point group list defines the sequence order of the measurements The re ordering of the list can also be done with the drag and drop technique The sequence of points within a profile is defined alphabetically by the Point ID and cannot be ordered independently A point or profile can be assigned to a point group more than once As many point groups as required can be defined A point or profile GeoMoS Monitor can be assigned to more than one point group The point group is only measured if it is defined in the measurement cycle Available Profiles A list of all profiles If you add a profile to a point group then all ee points in that profile will be included in the point group Assigned The list of all points and profiles in the currently selected point ee ee Insert Adds a new point group line and the fields can be defined by double clicking in the field ete The selected point groups in the table will be deleted A point group can only be deleted if it is no lon
90. in the project A 100 Sensor Licenses is the total amount of purchased and activated Sensor Licenses on this Local Licenses Server 70 Sensor Licenses is the total amount of available Sensor Licenses on this Local Licenses Server for the project A Press Insert to insert a new sensor A list box with all available sensor types appears Select the type of sensor you wish to connect Refer to Supported Sensors for more information on sensor types 153 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Right mouse click on an inserted sensor to modify the sensor type After modifying the sensor type the sensor specific settings must be applied oe Select a sensor and press Settings to define edit the sensor settings Define the settings such as the name description control point and other sensor dependant settings for the currently selected sensor See Sensor Settings below more detailed setting information The following sensors have additional or different settings e Total stations GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products and PP Positioning Products Nivel20 200 Campbell Datalogger c PE Select a sensor and press Communication to define edit the ommunication sensor communication configuration that is used to connect to the sensor for the currently selected sensor Define the communication options such as communication type communication channel baud rate IP address and port Connection channel Select the
91. level 2 exceed i Absolute limit check level 3 exceed B Access to Webcam failed x Burglary a Communication lost 2S Communication problem a Compensator out of range Computation not supported with tF 8 Configuration data push to GeaMo configuration data successfully pu eek Connection to GeoMoS Web server all Settngs Connection to GeoMoS Web server SMS Settings I Coordinate calculation failed 2S current position of GNSS differs gr Digital 10 ts Data push login Failed Data push reset because of GeoMc o Data push to GeoMoS Web Failed Displacement computation out of r 3 Division by zero while evaluating tF x Error in Formula Reset i Existing fields of table have been c gt bi x Overview mas siiaisigiigisigiisigigialsisisisiaists Configure the Mail Settings as shown in the screen shot SMTP Address localhost Mail Address of Sender Enter an e mail address of your choice E g r Administrator gt geomos hotmail com Mail Body Enter the content of that will be sent in the E mail EMail Settings Dial Up Connection T Cancel SMTF Server localhost Mail ddress of Sender Es Pete Brown lt pete brown hotmail com gt Administrator geomos hotmail com Mail Body Your e mail text e Click OK to save You will return to the Message Configurator window 586 Troubleshooting In the Message Configurator window press the button Insert
92. limits will be made to re measure the points 240 GeoMoS Monitor Properties Free Station Calculation Free Station Group Properties Calculation Checks Update Update Options Do Not Update M Orientation Correction I Yz Correction PPM Correction Update Average Over Hours I Do Not Update Height Update Immediately Warning Updates will only be executed if all chosen checks on the next tab are fulfilled The table below describes the fields in the Free Station Group Properties Calculation tab dialog box a a ee Do not The station coordinates will be calculated but the Total Station coordinates update will not be updated Update The station coordinates will be calculated and the Total Station coordinates immediately updated immediately with the computed values Update The station coordinates will be calculated and a median of all Free Station Average results of the last defined period will be used to update the Total Station Over coordinates 241 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Update Options Orientation In addition to the Total Station coordinates the orientation of the total station Correction will be calculated and updated Vz In addition to the Total Station coordinates the Vz correction will be Correction calculated and updated PPM In addition to the Total Station coordinates the PPM correction will be Correction calculated and updated If this option is selected th
93. measured in the first position and then the second position The second point is measured in the second position and then the first position The next point will be measured in the first position and then the second position and so for the following points For measurements in both positions and repeat measurements GeoMoS Monitor will compute an average for all face 1 and all face 2 observations and store only this average into the database In addition the result of the face 1 and face 2 is computed and stored to the database Actions can be added to be run after the measurement of the point group is finished e g an application can be started or in a defined time interval Actions are pre defined in the Message Configurator or in the service dialogs e g Webcams Data Push to GeoMoS Web Export Service to GeoMoS Adjustment Note There will be no message if the application is not available It is possible to have an action scheduled independently of a sensor Comment A comment can be entered for the measurement cycle Insert Adds a new entry in the measurement cycle 254 GeoMoS Monitor Delete The selected measurements in the table will be deleted from the measurement cycle EE The Point Group Editor will be displayed Related Topics Automatic Measurement Point Group Measurement Priority 255 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Limit Class Editor Background information The limit checks functionality is l
94. mode succeeds the measurement is calculated directly If due to weather conditions the normal ATR mode fails then the low visibility ATR attempts a second measurement a Repeat the Step 3 to 5 for the second point Select a third point from the list Press the Position button to automatically position the total station telescope to the point and then press the Measure button The measurement will be executed with the total station Confirm with the OK button and the calculated coordinates will be saved Note The coordinate types Reference Current Scan and Setup are updated after the Sensor Location is confirmed with OK e The Coordinate Calculation dialog will be closed When the second point has been measured the Total Station coordinates will be calculated The calculated Coordinates will be displayed with the standard deviation and the scale factor of the solution A measured point can be deleted from the calculated solution via the right mouse menu Delete Multiple points can be measured for an over determined solution of the coordinates using least squares techniques The Free Station solution calculates and applies the orientation of the total station which can be visualized in the Orientation Assistant The calculated coordinates are not editable The calculated coordinates are only used to manually determine the total station control point 173 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 174 Coordinate Calculati
95. more is recommended Processor Pentium Ill or higher is recommended Processor speed 600 MHz 1 GHz or more is recommended 10 GB hard disk space 50 GB or more is recommended DVD ROM drive Operating System Wind ows 7 Windows Vista SP1 Windows XP Professional SP3 Windows 2003 Server SP2 Important Notes All operating systems Disable in the control panel the power options system standby system hibernate and turn off hard disks Windows Vista only Activate in the Monitor Properties the compatibility mode for the Monitor application 595 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 7 Monitor Properties if you have problems with this program and it worked correctly on an earlier version of Windows select the compatibility mode that matches that earlier version Compatibility mode Run this program in compatibility mode for Windows XP Service Pack 2 X Settings E Run in 256 colors E Run in 640x 480 screen resolution E Disable visual themes E Disable desktop composition F Disable display scaling on high DPI settings Privilege Level E Run this program as an administrator Show settings for all users Other Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 or higher Printer COM ports sensor and computer connections Data transfer via cable radio link etc UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply Supported Sensors Leica TPS System 1000 Leica TPS 1100 Professional Series Leica TP
96. mouse click GeoMoS Analyzer Show Hide points Points can be hidden in the Site Map Follow these steps to hide and show points Right click on a point in the Site Map and select from the context menu the option Hide The Analyzer hides the point in the Site Map Points can be displayed again in the Site Map Right click on a point in the Tree View and select from the context menu the option Show a The point is displayed again in the Site Map Zoom The Site Map menu allows you also to access the Zoom In Zoom Out and Zoom 100 functions Graphical Settings The layout of the graphic can be customized 425 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Graphical settings Settings V Show Point Labels A V North arrow V Grid V Scale Bar V Show Background Map Set Limit Level Time Range day v Color Contrast 70 Cancel The table below describes the settings Graphical settings dialog box pe fener oaettomtonene ee tememnnenveme Scale Bar When checked a scale bar is shown Show Background Map Activates and deactivates showing the background map in the Site Map tab A background image has to be loaded and geo referenced before it can be shown in the map view Set Limit Level Time Allows you to restricts the number of displayed limits according to Range the selected time range 426 GeoMoS Analyzer Color contrast Controls the intensity of color for the background map A higher
97. of data to be used in the calculation Hours Limit 1 m The first level limit for the limit check Limit 2 m The second orange level limit for the limit check Limit 3 m The third red level limit for the limit check 260 GeoMoS Monitor Important Note If multiple limit checks of a measurement are exceeded simultaneously then only the highest limit level message will be displayed Sometimes the three limit checks are not used competently e g only limit level 1 and 2 are used and limit level 3 not Therefore define an very high and nearly impossible limit value to the unused limit level 3 This causes that system will produce an action that is defined to the lower limit levels and not to the unused limit level To delete a limit class right click on its name in the tree view and choose Remove Limit Class To rename a limit class right click on its name in the tree view and choose Rename Limit Class To delete an observation type right click on its name in the tree view under the relevant limit class and choose Remove Profile Editor Background Information A profile defines the direction i e azimuth in which the displacement will be initially analyzed for the tolerance checks Every point can be assigned to a selected profile which is used during the calculation of the displacement vector Profiles can be assigned to points in the Point Editor dialog The profile direction can be manually in
98. of the observations as an equation of parameters The stochastic model describes the precision of the observations and the correlations The differences of the mathematical observations and their true values are called the corrections or residuals The least squares method is based on the normal distribution This is the most common adjustment method The least squares method will fit the observations into their mathematical model whilst minimizing the sum of squares of the residuals The reference points are assumed to be stable The pre defined reference points will be considered in GeoMoS Adjustment depending on the selected network adjustment model minimum constraint reference points as fixed or reference points as fixed The datum is related to the reference points The monitoring points are assumed to be unstable The observations must be related to a reference frame on earth with the mathematical definition the so called datum The datum is based on the initial coordinates and geometry The network is adjusted without destroying the inner constraints of the mathematical model The coordinates of the reference points get a correction The standard deviations of the reference points get a variance The network is adjusted without destroying the inner constraints of the mathematical model The coordinates of the reference points get a correction The standard deviations of the reference points get a variance up to
99. of view of Leica total stations are as follow Instrument Telescope Telescope amp ATR ATR field of view Series field of view The ATR field of view is The telescope the ATR field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope 227 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 228 TPS 1000 1 33 Normal ATR has a EDM Series Small field of View TCA1800 20 view of 10 03 ATR Telescope s field of view e TM30 1 30 Normal ATR has a Small field of yiew view of 9 4 TPS 1100 Series Normal ATR has a same as the telesc Small field of view available TPS 1200 Series Normal ATR has a ATR and Telescope s field of view same as the telesc Small field of yiew view of one third of approx 30 TS30 1 30 Normal ATR has a Small field of view view of 30 ATR measurement If the reflector is in the ATR field of view the crosshairs are automatically positioned to the reflector and a measurement is done No ATR search is started The displayed values are always related to the centre of the prism after a measurement is done The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide with Reflectorless SignalScan IR SignalScan LO GeoMoS Monitor the centre of the prism when viewed through the telescope The remaining ATR offsets for the horizontal and vertical angles are measured by the ATR sensor and applied to the measured and displayed angles The search w
100. on a meridian plane The cylinder is tangent to the sphere ellipsoid along the equator The Projection is defined by e False Northing and False Easting e Central Meridian Transverse Mercator TM Conformal Projection on to a cylinder with its axis lying on the equatorial plane The cylinder is tangential to a meridian The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Scale Factor at Origin Central Meridian A zone width can also be defined Points that exceed the zone width by 1 are not converted For a scale factor 1 the cylinder is tangent to the sphere ellipsoid for a scale factor lt 1 itis secant Secant means the cylinder intersects the sphere along two straight lines equidistant from the central meridian In this case the scale is true 1 along these two straight lines Oblique Mercator Conformal Projection on to a cylinder The cylinder is tangent to any circle other than the equator or a meridian The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Angle Type Azimuth or Skew e Scale Factor at Origin For a scale factor 1 the cylinder is tangent to the sphere for a scale factor lt 1 it is secant Secant means the cylinder intersects the sphere along two straight lines equidistant from the central meridian In this case the scale is true along these two straight lines 638 Coordin
101. or more sensors that can be Sensor modeled using constants mathematical functions and or logic operators in a formula A virtual sensor is in some sense a model that is build from transmitting data and formulas Virtual sensors can be scheduled in the measurement cycle and are displayed in the tree view in the Analyzer application To open the Virtual Sensor Editor To open the Virtual Sensor Editor follow these steps EE Select the menu Configuration Virtual Sensor Editor 2 The Virtual Sensor Editor dialog will be displayed Press the upper right Insert button to add a new line to the Virtual Sensor Editor dialog Enter a virtual sensor Name the Observation Type Sensor Location and if required Min Max values and the Description ca The formula of a virtual sensor must be entered in the Formula field 200 GeoMoS Monitor 5 The output of physical sensor data can only be used in a formula with an Alias name The different alias names are defined in the Aliases field Confirm the entered configuration and changes with the OK button The dialog will be closed and the defined virtual sensors and aliases will be saved in the database Select the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor and add the Virtual Sensor as Sensor in the measurement cycle Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Virtual Sensor Editor Properties
102. or required reference points depends on the mathematical geometry of the measured network The pre defined reference points will be considered in GeoMoS Adjustment depending on the selected network adjustment model minimum constraint or reference points as fixed 313 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Parameters amp GeoMoS Adjustment Settings Active Project TEST PROJECT Reference Paints Parameters Location of Files ManualExport Overlap of Files 0 Hours OK Cancel Overlap of This value defines the time that a GeoMoS XML file will overlap with the Files previous file For example if an Interval of 4 hours and an Overlap of Files of 1 hour is entered the GeoMoS XML file will be repeatedly exported every 4 hours starting from the start time The total data that is included in the GeoMoS XML file is 5 hours Location of GeoMoS Adjustment Settings Active Project TEST PROJECT Files mi Reference Points Parameters Location of Files Manual Export Path C DATA_toeme G eoMoS Add project specific subfolder This path defines the location of the manual or automatic exported files The identical path must be defined in the Leica GeoMoS Adjustment software for automatic mode The Leica GeoMoS Adjustment software checks at a defined 314 Add project specific subfolder Manual Export Start Time End Time GeoMoS Monitor interval for new GeoMoS XML files T
103. or the port in case of a ComBox10 20 Typically a digital card has 8 or 16 output channels In the field Operation there is a listbox with the entries SET RESET TOGGLE and RECYCLE POWER With SET you switch on a digital output Example light on With RESET you switch off the channel Example light off If you choose the item TOGGLE this case will first switch on and by the next event it will switch off With RECYCLE POWER you switch off and on a digital output within two seconds Example switch off and on a total station within two seconds like a switch box it does With GeoMoS Monitor it is also possible to control a digital input Example burglary But for this definitions you need the Windows Registry Editor Press OK and the new action is in the right list of the Message Configurator Note The operation in the list box Operation for a COM port of a ComBox10 20 is always set to RECYCLE POWER Database Query GeoMoS Monitor Define Database Query Query Identifier Measurements Cancel Query select p name r epoch t easting rnorthing r height from Points p inner join Results r on p id r point_id where epoch gt CURRENT_TIMESTAMP 1 order by p name r epoch Outputfile C Documents and Settinas Desktop myMeasurements tet Define in the field Query Identifier a Name for the database query Enter in the field Query the SQL statement Define in the field Output the path for the output file Al
104. parameters using only three common points but using four produces more redundancy and allows for residuals to be calculated The Advantage e The advantages of this method of calculating transformation parameters are that it maintains the accuracy of the GPS measurements and may be used over virtually any area as long as the local coordinates including height are accurate The Disadvantage e The disadvantage is that if local grid coordinates are desired the local ellipsoid and map projections must be known In addition if the local coordinates are not accurate within themselves any new points measured using GPS may not fit into this existing local system once transformed e In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights the Geoid separation at the measured points must be known This may be determined from a geoidal model Many countries do not have access to an accurate local geoidal model See also Geoid Model 610 Coordinate System Manager Other transformation approaches Classical 2D One Step Two Step Interpolation Stepwise Which approach to use 611 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en One Step Background Information This transformation approach works by treating the height and position transformations separately For the position transformation the WGS84 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator projection and then the shifts rotation and scale from the temporary projection to the real p
105. points will be shown based on the time period settings The time will be displayed on the horizontal axis and the velocity is displayed on the vertical axis The point legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph It is also possible to show Comments in the graphic The comment legend is indexed for each comment which is shown in the graphic The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on the graphic the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menu Options Velocity 430 GeoMoS Analyzer Vector The point displacement of the selected points will be shown as a displacement vector length The displacement vector of the selected points will be shown as a plan view i e coordinate position the direction of the movement and the length of the vector shows the magnitude of the displacement The displacement vector is based on the defined profile for the point The axis shows the plane coordinates for the selected coordinate system The Easting is displayed on the horizontal axis and the Northing is displayed on the vertical axis The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on
106. referred to as LO is used Using Signal Scan the angle accuracy is much less accurate than with ATR mode and depends on the atmospheric conditions The signal scan only makes sense if the distance to a point is outside of the ATR range For Signal Scan you must ensure that the total station is in the GeoCOM Online mode for the angles and distance to be measured correctly 229 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Refer to the Signal Scan Measurement Mode technical description for further details ATR w o In this measurement mode only angles are measured Distance Notes For ATR ATR small field of view Reflectorless Signal Scan IR and Signal Scan LO measurement the TPS Properties Calculations of the Sensor Location Editor the Coordinate Calculation should be set to Full measurement and the Distance Reduction to Using Vertical Angles Otherwise invalid results will be calculated 230 GeoMoS Monitor Point Group Editor Point Group Editor Background information A point group can be created using individual points of profiles Point group can be scheduled at set time in the measurement cycle and are used as the basis for the tree view in the Analyzer application for viewing points Point groups can also be used to visualize the movement of total station control points To open the Point Group Editor Follow these steps to open the Point Group Editor Select the menu Configuration Point Group Editor or click the
107. settings saved Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Read below or click on the Message Configurator image to learn about all properties in detail Message Configurator 8 Active Ackno Message Selected Actions Condition Close No Absolute limit check failed oO g 41717273101 Ves B Absolute limit check level 1 ex oO L GeoMoS Team lt SurveyMonitoring Supp Yes E Absolute limit check level 2 ex 3 0 BD DigitalOut 1 SET it Yes E Absolute limit check level3 ex O GetResults Yes Burglary o C Program Files Leica Geosystems Geo o Ves 3 Communication lost Insert No Communication problem No Compensator out of range Edi Ves B Computation not supported w No amp Coordinate calculation failed o Bwe No Current position of GNSS differ No amp Displacement computation ou Yes g Division by zero while evaluati Ves g Error in formula Yes B Existing fields of table have be Yes p Failed to authenticate at asps Mail Settings i Yes Failed to send E Mail z Ves x Failed to send SMS over Leica SMS Settings Yes B Failed to send SMS over aspsm Digital ID Yes E Formula refers to a invalid poi No GNSS coordinates not convert No GNSS data received but poor Reset No Inclination measurement out o E i lt E a anan lt m Overview
108. tesa ea vac aca ce Nanette sd at cee shat lea ince E aE e a tila N Seats tecniad a 353 Vectors CSV i A cils tres E S T E nara E ate ane 354 DXF VeCtOREX POM a Torea ae ee e Ee a e la ea aaa EA 355 DXF Contours EXPO ren eede Eoaea EAE eaea ie S aae a eens ene 356 EXPO Sanare Sate Mos e L a a E A alte As A e ctiad 357 Import Database sioe ira a E ei Aten eee Aeon 359 Wser Level ter Tomati nr Madea ean ett EA e date fan ceedvss car aA 360 Page Selu oora eA reich eel rice el ee Ase tater bel reetee eee A teed 363 Print Preview 2552 ac353 E E E E T T anette 364 Pint eeste aaa a a rTP E Torre epee es 365 EEE E EEA E E EEE EA AE 365 COPY e TA T EEE i O EET E E 366 REEE EET AAA TEE E ATE oa ee Ree TAT 366 Setuser display NaS errr aE AAE EE 367 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Time Pernod nenesinin a Basen dee popes deel tens deepens a 369 Step MOUS intant Gh ised ee cake Sek es es ed St ce os el at 371 i o o o pauerrer een tree ent ie reer e o SEM Crepe etter here a ere eee ee 372 SLALUS D Le EEE ia et ee E tata oh het Peta ha a Bho ese Ae ee Ee 373 Comments Editor amip a aeaa a p aia a misese tena a a eee 374 Displacements Longitudinal Transverse and Height 0 ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 378 NM GIOGILY ETET A PEA ENEE PA EL EA EA EA O EE AE E E I T E ate 381 AVTO EEEE EEEE E E E ere irs Pe yar ete area eee eee 383 Multiple Sen es erie n a r A a maa sengtahixi E seis a a Takis ae ene aa 385 BaN Avera E si S cei nieces fe baie RE AAEE RE
109. that are to be transformed for grid coordinates as well as for geodetic coordinates has to be INPUT USR The name of the file to output the transformed coordinates for Grid coordinates as well as for Geodetic coordinates has to be OUTPUT USR The first line of the INPUT USR file containing the information flag for the type of coordinates is read in 1 geodetic coordinates 2 grid coordinates a The second line of the INPUT USR file containing the value for the semi major axis of the reference ellipsoid is read in In this example the value is not used because it is implicitly stated in the program parameters The third line of the INPUT USR file containing the value for the flattening of the reference ellipsoid is read in In this example the value is not used because it is implicitly stated in the program parameters The switch is set to transform from Geodetic to Grid coordinates The rest of the lines of the INPUT USR file containing in this case Geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude in radians are read in The resultant Grid coordinates are written to the OUTPUT USR file First Easting then Northing The switch is set to transform from Grid to Geodetic coordinates The rest of the lines of the INPUT USR file containing in this case Grid coordinates Easting and Northing are read in a The resultant Geodetic coordinates are written to the OUTPUT USR file first latitude then longitude in radians
110. the Local system A Coordinate System may be attached to a Project One or more of the following parameters define a Coordinate System Transformations Ellipsoids Projections or State Plane Zones Geoid Models Country Specific Coordinate System CSCS Models Select from the index below to learn how to manage Coordinate Systems Add a New Coordinate System Delete a Coordinate System Coordinate System Properties Coordinate System Properties General 600 Coordinate System Manager Add a New Coordinate System Enables you to define a new Coordinate System for further use in a Project Transformations Ellipsoids Projections and Geoid Models must be previously defined in order to be able to select them from the lists Right click on Coordinate Systems in the Tree View and select New Enter the Name of the Coordinate System Select a Transformation from the list Transformations may be calculated using Leica LGO Datum Map or in the case of a Classical 2D and 3D manually entered See also Add a New Transformation If you have selected a Transformation that was previously calculated using Datum Map you may choose how to distribute the Residuals The distribution weighting may be in relation to the distances between the point to be transformed and the control points or by using a Multi quadratic interpolation approach No distribution will be selected by default Select an Ellipsoid for the Loca system System B from the li
111. the Main Menu Programs Select the F1 EXTRA button 17 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 3 The EXTRA EXTRA FUNCTIONS panel appears Select from the menu 1 On line mode GeoCOM The NOTICE 59 Switches to on line mode Do you want to switch appears The F5 YES button activates the On line mode The operation of the instrument is now totally controlled acorss the interface Note The on line mode can be quitted only by pressing the ON OFF button Auto Start configuration Follow these steps to configure Auto Start ep The CONF SYSTEM CONFG panel appears Choose the Main menu application The chosen function application is started automatically every time the instrument is switched on Confirm the settings with CONT Leica TPS1200 and TM30 TS30 instruments Levelling up with the electronic bubble Follow these steps to level up with the electronic bubble 18 Introduction to GeoMoS 1 Press on the total station SHIFT and then F12 The longitudinal lt Tilt L gt and transverse lt Tilt T gt tilt of the instrument s vertical axis is displayed graphical and numerical Using the footscrews the instrument can be levelled up GeoCOM communication settings Follow these steps to configure the GeoCOM communication settings Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The TPS1200 Configuration panel appears Select the 4 Interfaces menu oO The CONFIGURE Inter
112. the default for all new sensors of this type that are connected to GeoMos GeoMoS Monitor TPS Properties Calculations The Calculation page contains the options for the Meteo Model Coordinate Calculations Compensator and Distance Reduction The table below describes the fields in the TPS Properties Calculations tab dialog box ee ccc Coordinate Calculations Full measurement recommended Only measured distance All angle and distance measurements are used to calculate the target point co ordinates This technique uses standard reduction techiques for the coordinate calculation and it recommended in most cases where ATR or other good pointing techniques are executed Warning The Full Measurement option should not be used with Distance IR Distance LO and ATR w o Distance Measurement Modes Poor quality results may be obtained if measuring with Signal Scan IR or Signal Scan LO Measurement Modes Refer to the technical description of Signal Scan for more information This is a special computation technique that uses only the measured distance to calculate the target point coordinates The technique is dependent on the geometry of the measurement network for the coordinate calculation of target points It can be useful in situations where the measured directions are of poor accuracy but the distance is reliable Such cases can be when measuring over very large distance between the Total Station
113. the normal ATR mode succeeds the measurement is calculated directly If due to weather conditions the normal ATR mode fails then the low visibility ATR attempts a second measurement EJ Repeat the Step 3 to 5 for the second point Select a third point from the list Press the Position button to automatically position the total station telescope to the point and then press the Measure button The measurement will be executed on the total station Confirm with the OK button and the calculated coordinates will be saved Note The coordinate types Reference Current Scan and Setup are updated after the Sensor Location is confirmed with OK e The Coordinate Calculation dialog will be closed When the second point has been measured the Total Station coordinates will be calculated The calculated Coordinates will be displayed with the standard deviation and the scale factor of the solution A measured point can be deleted from the calculated solution via the right mouse menu Delete Multiple points can be measured for an over determined solution of the coordinates using least squares techniques The Distance Intersection solution calculates and applies the orientation of the total station which can be visualized in the Orientation Assistant The calculated coordinates are not editable The calculated coordinates are only used to manually determine the total station control point 177 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 178
114. time range For more detailed information about this function see the Conditions Dialog Examples A Important Notes Actions may be hold back with the conditions but are never deleted from GeoMoS Monitor You can display all messages in Message tab and retrieve them from the database Conditions take in account every message that is linked to an action but conditions are not point related For messages to trigger and set conditions it may be reasonable to define identical actions more than once in the Message Configurator This helps that different messages can be triggered with different options to the same action e g an mobile phone f multiple limit checks of a measurement are exceeded simultaneously then only the highest limit level message will be displayed Sometimes the three limit checks are not used competently e g only limit level 1 and 2 are used and limit level 3 not Therefore define an very high and nearly impossible limit value to the unused limit level 3 This causes that system will produce an action that is defined to the lower limit levels and not to the unused limit level Using the Stop Start button deletes the counter of the conditions the so called cache If multiple messages belonging to a condition occurred but the condition was not yet fulfilled then the counter of the condition is deleted Insert Press the button and a sub menu appears where you can select the type of the ne
115. to GeoMoS Important Nivel220 Sensor Three sensor licenses are required for each Nivel220 sensor connected to the bus system Spider RT Positioning Products Ten sensor licenses are required for a connection to one GNSS Spider Site Server Spider PP Positioning Products Ten sensor licenses are required for a connection to one GNSS Spider Site Server Campbell Datalogger Each geotechnical sensor connected to the Campbell datalogger that is read out to GeoMoS requires one sensor license 79 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Customer Care Package CCP Background information With GeoMoS version 3 0 we have introduced new Customer Care Packages and integrated software maintenance and customer support A newer GeoMoS version can only be installed if you have a valid software maintenance key with an expiry date beyond the release date of the new GeoMoS version GeoMoS software maintenance keys are provided through our Customer Care Program Customer Care Packages CCP for GeoMoS provides you with customer support and software maintenance for your GeoMoS installation and can be ordered from Leica Geosystems Please contact your Leica representative to learn more about our Customer Care Program A software maintenance key is always linked to a software protection key software license or dongle La ACTIVE Customer care ee A powerful and competent worldwide service and support network backs up Leica Geosystems S
116. to be able to integrate it into a user defined Projection set 696 Coordinate System Manager The file name for the file containing the coordinates that are to be transformed for grid coordinates as well as for geodetic coordinates has to be INPUT USR The name of the file to output the transformed coordinates for Grid coordinates as well as for Geodetic coordinates has to be OUTPUT USR The first line of the INPUT USR file containing the information flag for the type of coordinates is read in 1 geodetic coordinates 2 grid coordinates a The second line of the INPUT USR file containing the value for the semi major axis of the reference ellipsoid is read in In this example the value is not used because it is implicitly stated in the program parameters The third line of the INPUT USR file containing the value for the flattening of the reference ellipsoid is read in In this example the value is not used because it is implicitly stated in the program parameters The switch is set to transform from Geodetic to Grid coordinates The rest of the lines of the INPUT USR file containing in this case Geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude in radians are read in The resultant Grid coordinates are written to the OUTPUT USR file First Easting then Northing The switch is set to transform from Grid to Geodetic coordinates The rest of the lines of the INPUT USR file containing in this case Grid coordinates Eastin
117. to create the instrument stand point The following sensors have additional or different settings Total Station 155 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en awa cisco Compensator ON Laserpointer ON Select the appropriate total station model for the connected sensor Turns the compensator in the total station on The compensator is used to correct for mislevelling of the instrument and is required for high accuracy angle measurement It should only be turned of if angles are not measured or if external effects such as vibration from nearby heavy machinery prevents the compensator from working correctly Note A mislevelling of the compensator outside the total station compensator specification may causes lower accurate compensation of the angle measurement working range causes in GeoMoS Monitor the message Point not found The total station compensator specification can be checked with the Tolerance Turns the visible light laser pointer on to show where the instrument is pointing This option is only available with total stations that support reflectorless mode If this option is activated the instrument will beep when it performs certain tasks or encounters errors GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products and PP Positioning Products A list of all active RT Positioning Products or PP Positioning Products configured in Leica GNSS Spider and with results sent to Leica GeoMoS will be shown 156 GeoMoS
118. to import the file The dialog will be closed and the new or not existing data will be imported to the database and stored in the database 359 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en User Level Background information There are three user levels which determine the functionality allowed by the operator in the system e Viewer eUs er e Adminis trator The Administrator has full access to all functionality while the User and Viewer have restricted access to the system as shown in the table below A password is required to change to a higher level of user access No password is required to change to a lower user level When the password is active the application starts in the lowest user level status of Viewer The password protection can be configured Viewer Re stricted Can view overview last actions messages and observations Cannot make any changes to operation configuration or close program Re stricted Can start and stop measuring edit points point groups profiles and measurement cycles Cannot change critical settings such as limit classes event messages point coordinates delete database records or close program Note The User Level is configured independently for Monitor and Analyzer 360 GeoMoS Analyzer To open User Level Follow these steps to open the user level If the new user level is lower than the existing user level then no further entry is necessary and the dialog can be close
119. to the OSGB36 mapping coordinates The ETRS89 Eastings and Northings are first obtained by applying the British national Transverse Mercator projection with the GRS80 ellipsoid OSTNO2 was developed by the Ordnance Survey the national mapping agency of Great Britain and superceeds the older OSTN9Q7 transformation Note that OSTN97 is still available within LGO to allow the transformation of existing OSTN97 coordinates to the new OSTNO2 coordinates O Ordnance Survey OSTNO2 enabled OSTNOZ2 consists of a 1250km by 700km grid of translation vectors at 1km resolution This provides a fit between the GPS coordinate system ETRS89 and the OSGB36 National Grid OSTNO2 is in agreement with major triangulation stations at the level of 0 1m root mean square OSTNOZ2 has been developed from the national primary secondary and tertiary triangulation station network It contains over 3200 points directly observed by GPS and more than 1000 from the original retriangulation observations adjusted on the ETRS89 datum Within Great Britain OSTNO2 in conjunction with the ETRS89 positions of the active GPS Network stations is now the official definition of OSGB36 National Grid coordinate system This means that using OSTNO2 with the National GPS Network surveyors using GPS have no need to occupy triangulation stations in order to relate GPS coordinates to National Grid coordinates More detailed information is available from http www gp
120. toolbar Point Group button By or press the Point Groups button in the Measurement Cycle Editor dialog The Point Group Editor dialog will be displayed Press the Insert button K A new line appears in the table The table values can be edited by double clicking on the value Enter the Name select a Type from the list and enter the size of the Search Window if necessary Define the contents of the point group by dragging and dropping selected points and or profiles from the respective lists of points and profile to the point group list 7 Confirm the entered data and changes with the OK button e The dialog will be closed and the defined point groups will be saved in the database Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only 231 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Read below or click on the Point Group Editor Image to learn about all properties in detail Point Group Editor Name Type Search window eh x 54 Fre rc 0 OBJECTO_TS4 Normal 360_TS4 Normal POSICOES_TS Normal LeFIXOS_T53 Free Station OBJECTO_T53 Normal LeFIXOS_T52 Free Station 7 ESTREF1 ESTREF2 ESTREFS ESTREF4 ESTREFS 75431003 75429001 75429002 75429003 15427001 Available Profiles WW PERFIS_DAS_TS WW PERFIL_150 UW PERFIL_110 WW PERFIL_130 WW PERFIL_170 Comment ESTREF1 ESTREF2 ESTREF3 ESTREFS ESTREF6 ESTREF1
121. value to calculate the updated coordinates in a separate dialog Calculate Selected Coordinate The old reference coordinates are not saved The new reference coordinates are valid from the time defined in the time column Reference PPM calculations will not be processed for measurements occurring before the defined time of the reference coordinates The table shows all reference point coordinates of the defined time period The reference points can be edited with the Calculate Selected Coord button A point that belongs to a point group of the type Free Station Distance Intersection Orientation PPM correction and Vz correction is automatically defined as a reference point Only points defined as reference points are displayed in the Data Editor dialog The reference point coordinates are measured in the automatic measurement cycle The Point ID column cannot be edited Only the columns for Time Easting Northing and Height can be edited It is not possible to add reference points directly in the table Reference Point Coordinates Properties Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates Manual Coordinates Time PointID Easting m Northing m Height m Calculate Selected Coord 5906 17 2008 11 TPS4_1001 ref 546142 527 5250785 707 473 864 06 17 2008 11 TP54_1008 ref 546299 507 5250924 056 497 900 06 17 2008 11 TPS4_1013 ref 546569 746 5251016 279 517 268
122. wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog Note The made changes in the wizard will be lost and the settings will be not transferred to the ComBox 123 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Mobile Provider Phone number User name Password Access point name Authentication method PPP DNS query B Setup ComBox Insert ComBox General Mobile Provider gg 118 corporate swisscom ch CHAP y Pressing the button Apply starts the transfer of all settings to the ComBox Cia tea Cancel Password Access point name Authentication method 124 Set the phone number that is to dial This may be a GPRS UMTS breakout number such as 99 1 or a standard telephone number from your mobile provider Per default the number 99 1 is set Enter an User name Get this information from your mobile provider Note This text field can be void Enter a Password Get this information from your mobile provider Note This text field can be void Enter an Access point name Get this information from your mobile provider Select the Authentication method Use the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or the Password Authentication Protocol GeoMoS Monitor PAP Specifies wether a DNS request Point to Point Protocol DNS query to the mobile provider is made or not Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to
123. 006 11 00 43 840 Reference coordinates of TP51 1016 E 1214 1226 N 1036 8612 H 1012 6138 14 09 2006 11 00 43 840 Calculated polar reference of TP51 1016 243 7255 96 3200 218 2246 14 09 2006 11 00 43 840 Measurement of TP51 1016 at 14 09 2006 11 00 44 Hz 249 7252 W 96 3204 Slope 218 2197 Temperature 28 2 Pressure 961 4 AtmosPPM 29 7 SlopeAtmosPPMCorrected 218 226 Nul1Dist 218 225 SlopeDistbiff 0 002 RefPPM 22 349 WzCorr 0 0004 Azimuth 89 0373 Orientation 245 3121 Number of measured reference points 3 Orientation 245 3117 o 0010 VeCorrection 399 9997 0 0006 PPM 27 1194 6 6551 Results of free station calculation Reduced Solution ROBUST GON M Station Coordinates 999 5176 999 5356 1000 0019 Standard Deviations 0 0006 0 0008 0 0013 Orientation 245 31165 0 000395 Scale 1 00000312 0 00000181 Hz HzResid HDist ResidhDist MeightDiff ResidHDiff E N H 138 45382 0 000770 362 8917 0 0001 37 6996 0 0021 907 9719 1350 6892 1037 6995 384 67121 0 000515 137 1319 0 0001 3 7489 0 0004 937 2932 877 3344 996 2526 243 72521 0 000260 217 8272 0 0003 12 6093 0 0025 1214 1226 1036 8512 1012 6138 Description Additional technical details Start of the control point group type Last TPSSetup is used to determine the free station Free Station Point ID of the used control point The coordinate type current is used and the coordinates Point ID of the first measured Th
124. 05 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Requirements To use a ComBox the following items are essential and must be organised locally prior to installation From your Mobile Provider A SIM card for the wireless router that supports the connection from the Internet to the wireless router via a public IP address A GPRS UMTS breakout number or a standard telephone number f essential an user name and a password The knowledge about the Access Point Name The knowledge about the Authentication method Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or Password Authentication Protocol PAP The knowledge about the PPP Point to Point Protocol DNS query Specification whether a DNS request to the provider is made or not From Dynamic Network Services Inc a DynDNS Account with following details an username and a password a host name for example myComBox dyndns org a server address normally members dyndns org is used a server port normally 80 or 8245 Refer to the chapter How to configure a DynDNS account for ComBoxes Open the ComBox Manager from the supplied M Com ComBox CD ROM Follow these steps to open the ComBox Manager from the supplied M Com ComBox CD ROM The ComBox is physically connected either via LAN or Internet to the computer where the ComBox Manager will be started Refer to the ComBox User Manual Chapter 3 Operation for more details about the preparation of the ComBox Insert the Leica M Co
125. 1 Cancel Insert Delete Delete Selected Items The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Point Group Editor dialog box Name The name of the point group A point group can have one of the following types Normal Special FreeStation Distance Intersection PPM Orientation Only Vz Correction Type Normal A maximum of two point groups with the type Normal can be 232 GeoMoS Monitor defined perTotal Station The Normal point groups have the following characteristics A point group with the type Normal can be selected to measure continuously or at a specified interval Only one point group with the Type Normal can be defined as continuous for each total station A second point group with the type Normal can be defined with the same priority as a continuous point group It will be measured at approximately the scheduled time but without interrupting any other scheduled point group measurements Therefore this point group could be scheduled to measure with a Search Window greater than 0 and once per day for example to update the target point positions with a scan measurement if there has been any movement The points and profiles in the point group should be ordered so that they reduce the Total Stations horizontal rotation necessary to measure the point sequence This reduces the time taken to measure the point group and reduce the wear and tear on the Total Station m
126. 2 22 _profile Good _Point 10645 814 20044 7 4082 23 Wall Good _Point 10873 816 20952 5 4082 3 Wall Good_Point 10936 400 20879 4 F Limit Class Editor 4130 14 _profile Good_Point 10961853 2040 4 i E 4130 17 Good_Point 10790 974 20081 2 i Poes 4178 15 _profile Good_Point 11192 701 20328 1 Fi 4178 17 _profile Good_Point 11167 368 20276 284 4177 868 4130 19 _profile Good_Point 10887 665 20094 294 4130 616 f i Leam 4058 1 _profile Good_Point 10869 425 20904 3867 4058 863 i aE 4034 3 _profile Good_Point 11015 512 20377 955 4034 788 l e 4034 4 _profile Good_Point 10983 155 20333 424 4034 023 frs YW 4034 5 _profile Good_Point 10924 809 20259 973 4035 535 f i 4034 7 Good _Point 10758 660 20205 620 4033 832 4034 8 _profile Good_Point 10664 192 20152 440 4029 943 i nea 4034 9 _profile Good_Point 10610 729 20079 214 4034 291 i 4034 10 _profile Good_Point 10541 8660 20020 557 4034 401 Import 505 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Point Group Types GeoMoS uses several different point group types as listed in the table below Priority Point Group Type Free Station Distance Intersection Related topics Measurement Priority 506 Description Used for to measure monitoring points Used to correct the sensor orientation of Total Stations Used to estimate the atmospheric PPM correction of Total Stations Used to estimate Total Station coordinates an
127. 2008 09 53 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 4 07 16 2008 09 54 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 5 S907 16 2008 09 55 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 5 07 16 2008 09 56 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 6 07 16 2008 09 57 01 TempPoint Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 8 07 16 2008 09 58 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 974 9 21 8 07 16 2008 09 59 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 974 9 215 07 16 2008 10 00 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 215 amp 07 16 2008 10 01 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 7 3907 16 2008 10 02 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 974 9 21 8 amp 307 16 2008 10 03 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 974 9 219 07 16 2008 10 04 01 TempPoint Meteo Sensor 974 9 22 1 07 16 2008 10 05 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 974 9 22 1 KRZKEKAKCA CAE EAA CALA CAE AEE RQLGAK CATE CAE CATA EAE CEE E The table below describes the fields in the Meteo tab Sat ee The date and time the pressure temperature was measured This column displays the Point ID on which the meteo sensor located The sensor name that is used for the pressure temperature measurement The measured pressure The measured temperature 405 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en OK The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will be stored in the database Cancel The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will not be stored in the database Further information Data Editor Overview Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Data Edito
128. 250762 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 15 01 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 5907 16 2008 15 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 amp 07 16 2008 15 31 50 TP54_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 S907 16 2008 16 00 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 07 16 2008 16 01 49 TPS4_Station 546626 388 5250782 910 472 855 0 000 907 16 2008 16 30 37 TPS4_Station 546626 388 250782 910 472 855 6 000 The table below describes the fields in the Setups tab 407 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Ea This column displays a icon symbol for the type of edited point and the unique point ID Original point value Bi The date and time the control point was measured The Point ID defined in the Point Editor dialog Edited point value Easting The computed easting value The computed northing value The computed height value Instrument The used instrument height Height i eee the database stored in the database Further information Data Editor Overview Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Data Editor Meteo Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates Data Editor Manual Coordinates 408 GeoMoS Analyzer Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates Background information The reference point coordinates can be updated by directly editing the coordinates in the Data Editor or by approximating the displacement from the graph and using the displacement
129. 295626 0 16752241 7295911 0 16752241 7295738 0 16752241 6378137 000 0 003352810665 763092 763092 763092 763092 409 24 411 24 413 24 408 24 5766 864 5766 855 5766 857 5766 862 1309 1668 2147 1113 1696 0838 0262 0202 1033 0997 Coordinate System Manager 699 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 763092 411 245766 854 763092 407 245766 850 763092 405 245766 845 763092 405 245766 856 763092 408 245766 858 763092 408 245766 857 Output usr This is the file into which the result of the Projection conversion i e the converted coordinates has to be written All lines Each line contains e incase of grid coordinates output easting and northing for one point e incase of geodetic coordinates output latitude and longitude in radians for one point Example of OUTPUT USR file for grid coordinates 763092 409 245766 864 763092 411 245766 855 763092 413 245766 857 763092 408 245766 862 763092 411 245766 854 763092 407 245766 850 763092 405 245766 845 763092 405 245766 856 700 763092 408 245766 858 763092 408 245766 857 Example of OUTPUT USR file for geodetic coordinates 0 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 82631 7296864 0 1 7295443 0 1 7295748 0 1 7296554 0 1 7295286 0 1 7294676 0 1L 7293899 0 1 7295626 0 1 7295927 Q 1
130. 5 0 826317295626 0 167522410305 0 826317295927 0 167522411010 0 826317295770 0 167522411004 646 Coordinate System Manager Example of a User written Program The following example shows a User written Program written in Turbo Pascal for the Swiss Projection It transforms Swiss Grid coordinates to Geodetic coordinates and vice versa This map Projection is already included as a customized Projection The line numbers at the beginning of each line are for reference only They do not constitute part of the source code 001 Program CH_Projection_Set 002 003 const 004 pi 3 1415926535 005 eps 1 0e 10 convergence limit 006 007 constants for Bessel ellipsoid 008 ae 6377397 155 semi major axis 009 ex2 0 006674372231 e squared 010 lato 46 952405556 ell latitude of Bern 011 lono 7 439583333 pi 180 ell longitude of Bern 012 013 derived constants for sphere 014 r 6378815 9036 radius 015 alpha 1 00072913847 scale factor along meridian through Bern 017 rk 0 00306673233 integration constant 018 bo 46 907731456 pi 180 spherical latitude of Bern 019 020 var dumy extended 021 y x h y1 x1 extended 022 Iquer bquer wert wert1 wert2 bk Ik extended 023 cobo sibo cobi sibi coli sili extended 024 ex lati loni ritko extended 025 id integer 026 a b text 027 647 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 028 11 Main Program 029 030 begin 031 032
131. 651 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en State Plane Zones State Plane Zones Overview The State Plane Zones are special predefined Projection zones used for the State Plane Coordinate System SPCS in North America They are hardwired in LGO and can neither be modified nor deleted State Plane Zones are available only if North America has been selected in Coordinate System Definitions during the installation of LGO Depending on the shape of a state the zones have predefined Projection types and parameters associated with them The following Projection types are used for the State Plane Zones Transverse Mercator TM Oblique Mercator Lambert one Standard Parallel Lambert two Standard Parallels Tip If you define a Coordinate System you may either use the configurable Projections or the State Plane Zones See also How to switch between Projections and State Plane Zones Related Topics Properties of State Plane Zones 652 Coordinate System Manager State Plane Zone Properties The State Plane Zone Properties are similar to the Projection Properties Since the State Plane Zones are pre defined Projections none of the parameters may be edited How to switch between Projections and State Plane Zones This function enables you to switch between selecting Map Projections or US State Plane Zones in the Coordinate Systems Property Page e Right click on the background of the Property Page of a Coordinate System and select be
132. 85 086 if id 2 then begin 087 088 Transformation GRID to ELLIPSOID 089 090 while not EOF a do begin 091 readin a y x 092 093 transformation military to civil coordinates 094 y1 y 600000 0 095 x1 x 200000 0 096 097 transformation plane to sphere 098 Iquer y1 r 099 bquer 2 0 arctan exp x1 r pi 4 0 649 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 100 101 transformation sphere to sphere 102 cobo cos bo 103 sibo sin bo 104 cobi cos bquer 105 sibi sin bquer 106 coli cos Iquer 107 sili sin Iquer 108 wert cobo sibi sibo cobi coli 109 bk arctan wert sqrt 1 0 wert wert 110 Ik arctan cobi sili cobo cobi coli sibo sibi 111 112 transformation sphere to ellipsoid 113 ex sqrt ex2 114 lati bk 115 repeat 116 ritko lati 117 wert1 pi 4 0 bk 2 0 118 wert1 sin wert1 cos wert1 119 wert1 In wert1 alpha 120 wert2 In 1 0 ex sin lati 1 0 ex sin lati ex 2 0 121 lati 2 0 arctan exp wert1 wert2 rk alpha pi 4 0 122 until abs ritko lati lt eps 123 loni lono lk alpha 124 125 output 126 writeln b lati 15 12 loni 15 12 127 end 128 end 129 close a 140 close b 141 end There are a few minor constraints in the user written program that must be observed in order to be able to integrate it into a user defined Projection set 650 Coordinate System Manager The file name for the file containing the coordinates
133. 9 2008 08 46 33 GEB17 Profil Default 2764463 452 1252929 600 12 09 2008 08 46 20 HAG Profil Default 2764158 097 1253353 150 12 09 2008 08 46 09 TEL_POLE Profil Default 2764143 604 1253309 081 451 04 TMa0 T530 oe 12 09 2008 08 45 56 WALL Profil Default 2764111 524 1253260 537 435 09 12 09 2008 08 45 46 HOUSE_BAL Profil Default 2763989 466 1253167 566 427 83 Leam 12 09 2008 08 45 34 LIGHT_KAPF Profil Default 2763768 263 1253294 370 472 56 30 07 2008 17 26 35 MONR_ANT Profil lt No Selec 2764475 708 1253172 483 428 33 Posit To 30 07 2008 16 40 18 Rhenusana_ Profil lt No Selec 2764426 211 1252947 961 414 15 TargetCapture 15 08 2008 13 32 14 FreeStation Profil Default 2764467 344 1253170 645 426 67 S Readout Meteo Sensors Import Coordinate File f Import GSI File gt 2 Ed 2 gt 2 3 e 3 gt The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Point Editor dialog box Field Button Description Type This column displays an icon symbol for the type of point Observation point prism Total Station control point GNSS NMEA sensor control point connected by serial GNSS NMEA sensor control point connected by TCP IP GNSS Spider Product RT Positioning Product or PP Positioning Product sensor control point Leica Disto control point 215 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en z Water level Leica Nivel 20 200 and other sensor control point v Humidity sensor control point _ T
134. After the software maintenance key is expired it is not possible to update the GeoMoS software with newer versions The measurement of the geotechnical sensor exceeds set minimum maximum limits Occurs if no new result is available in the Campbell datalogger table between the last the readout time and the current readout time This message is given when the user starts the measurement In the Virtual Sensor Editor of GeoMoS Monitor it is possible to enter a formula for virtual sensors On OK the formula will be checked for syntax errors Occurs if a formula with a syntax error is included in the measurement cycle Occurs if the formula refers to an alias with an invalid point The computation could not be executed because a missing measurement value This can happen if e g the Max Age h was reached The Max Age defines the expiry date of the real sensor data used in an alias If the customer wants to use virtual sensor computation he needs to purchase Monitor Option 1 499 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 500 software license or attached dongle Division by zero while evaluating the formula Result of formula is out of range Failed to send E Mail Failed to send SMS over Leica GFU Failed to send SMS over aspsms com Failed to authenticate at aspsms com Name of table changed Table no longer exists information Syntax error in the virtual sensor formula
135. Assign and open files 033 034 assign a input usr 035 reset a 036 assign b output usr 037 rewrite b 038 039 Read the first 3 lines 040 041 readin a id read type 042 readin a dumy read semi major axis not used fixed programmed 043 readin a dumy read flattening not used fixed programmed 044 045 046 if id 1 then begin 047 048 Transformation ELLIPSOID to GRID coordinates 049 050 while not EOF a do begin 051 readin a lati loni 052 053 transformation ellipsoid to sphere 054 ex sqrt ex2 055 wert1 pi 4 0 lati 2 0 056 wert1 alpha In sin wert1 cos wert1 057 wert2 In 1 0 ex sin lati 1 0 ex sin lati 058 wert exp wert1 alpha ex 2 0 wert2 rk 059 bk 2 0 arctan wert pi 4 0 060 Ik alpha loni lono 061 062 transformation sphere to sphere 063 cobo cos bo 648 Coordinate System Manager 064 sibo sin bo 065 cobi cos bk 066 sibi sin bk 067 coli cos Ik 068 sili sin Ik 069 wert1 cobo sibi sibo cobi coli 070 bquer arctan wert1 sqrt 1 0 wert1 wert1 071 Iquer arctan cobi sili sibo sibi cobo cobi coli 072 073 transformation sphere to plane 074 x1 r 2 0 In 1 0 sin bquer 1 0 sin bquer 075 y1 r lquer 076 077 transformation civil to military coordinates 078 x x1 200000 0 079 y y1 600000 0 080 081 output 082 writeln b y 15 4 x 15 4 083 end 084 end 0
136. Box20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the webcam must be 192 168 1 30 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the webcam The message state is only valid if a webcam PoE is connected to this port Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the IP device Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet 145 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en switch the IP address of the device must be 192 168 1 31 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device The message state is only valid if a IP device is connected to this port Port LAN2 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the IP device Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the device must be 192 168 1 32 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device The message state is only valid if a IP device is connected to this port Port I O card Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the I O card Port ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port VNC to Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed Th
137. Check 24 00 0 030 0 060 0 150 Regression Check 24 00 0 050 0 100 0 250 v Hz Slope Distance Tilt Nivel_Temperature Nivel Nivel_ GPS Regression Unit Observation type unit per 24 hours The table below describes the fields in the Limit Classes dialog box Fed Description The tree view contains a list of all limit classes configured in the system Under each individual limit class are shown the observation types that have been created for that class Limit Check Window The type of limit check to be computed The check box is used to activate and deactivate each limit check type Absolute Limit Check A limit check that compares the value of the observation to an absolute number Example The absolute limit check level 1 is set to 0 05 m for a point Then point moves from the original position null coordinate to a new position current coordinate The absolute limit check is exceeded when the point is outside of the range 0 025 and 0 025 m 258 GeoMoS Monitor Short Time Check Long Time Check The short time limit is defined by a displacement value and a time interval The displacement is calculated from the difference between the actual measured displacement and an interpolated displacement at an earlier time defined by the interval The interpolated displacement lies between at least two actual measurements The calculated displacement difference between measurements is compared to
138. Com port or TCP IP Baud rate only COM Select the defined baud rate IP address only TCP IP Enter the IP address or host name Port only TCP IP Enter the port number Password only Spider connections Enter the Spider Site server password Communication types Not specified LAN Ca_ ble Radi o Link 154 GeoMoS Monitor Interne WA N Mobile Link GPRS UMTS Select the type of communication you physical in use The selected communication defines limits for round trip delay and various communication time outs Note For the Web Thermo Hygrobarograph sensor the port is fixed to 80 The list boxes for the IP address and the port number are available if you have configured ComBoxes in the ComBox Manager Instead of typing in the appropriate IP address and port number you can select them in the list box Test Use this button to test the communication to the currently selected sensor Delete Press Delete to remove the currently selected sensor All sensor settings database links will be lost Sensor Settings The Sensor Settings Sensor Parameter dialog depends on the selected sensor All sensors have the following settings Description Enter the name of this individual sensor Sensor Description Enter the description of this sensor or its location Sensor Location Choose the instrument control point If the point is not yet defined use the Points button to switch to the Point Editor
139. ComBox Per default 50050 Port ComServer Set the appropriate ComServer port number of the ComBox Per default 50051 Port VNC to Set the appropriate VNC to MonBox port MonBox number of the ComBox Per default 50098 Note The text field is only active if in the register General an integrated MonBox is selected Press this button to set the default values in all paint text fields Press this button to get one register back in the lt B at wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the Next gt wizard Press the button Apply to start the transfer of all Apply settigns to the ComBox Note Not till all appropriate settings are set in the wizard you can start the transfer Press this button to close the wizard and get Cancel f back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog Note The made changes in the wizard will be lost and the settings will be not transferred to the ComBox 129 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ComBox View Settings Background information The View Settings dialog gives you an quick overview of all settings which are assigned to the selected ComBox without establishing a connection to this ComBox The View Settings dialog is divided in four parts General General settings e g ComBox name type etc Mobile Provider Settings from the mobile provider e g phone number login data access point name etc DynDNS Settings from the DynDNS account ho
140. DynDNS server was successfull and the settings are correct Connectiong to DynDNS server failed Either your DynDNS server address or your DynDNS server port is not valid Please verify your DynDNS settings Resolving ComBox Host name failed Your Host name DynDNS name is not valid Please verify your DynDNS settings Setting an IP address on DynDNS server failed Note If there is a problem with the DynDNS settings please check firstly these settings in the register DynDNS of the ComBox Setup wizard secondly check if there is a Internet connection and if there are still problems thirdly reboot the ComBox Port COM1 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the wireless router Port COM2 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port I O card Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the I O card Port ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port VNC to Connection successfull The port is open 140 GeoMoS Monitor MonBox Connection failed There is a problem with the MonBox Note The message state is only valid if a MonBox is connected to this port Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog ComBox20 Test Links LAN
141. ERE AERA ETERRA A EEEREN 80 Cotinga HAE aT A T A E E EE T mde A TEA 81 How to find a Help topic c ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseceacaeeeeeeeeeseccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeenieeeeeeeeeeees 81 How to print Help text ccccccceceeeceeeecneee cece ee ceeeeeaeaeceeeeeceesegaeaeeeeeeeeeseeennaeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Technical SUppOrts 2 scac i ccc AA EEA A E E E E 83 GeMo S Monitors a are lee a ela ed ne ee 85 PYOj GIS ia tien a eae nie eect on earn eee 85 ANALYZOD T E A A aes i aga ee a 87 User Levelt ei ri ys balay Oe bain ie a E died 88 Page Setups sat ad ad eas 91 Print Previews j vts tetaech aeteeaiae ease r a a a ee eee Reed 92 PAPUA ee A E A E T A A A TE 93 E E a ee 93 Configuration Toolbar iesita e ee a a a 94 P int Group Toolbar 2 aier n a a a aa aa eaaa aaa aiaa 94 Measurement TOO Da ee a aa a aa a aaa iiaei 95 S EA aie EA TE TE E A EA E A E 96 Cycle FUION a E E AEA 97 Acton OVeri W 5 22 sc2tteatictoats annes aaaea aa ai a a eaa aia a a a dane 98 Acton FIISTONY smaa a a a a a Pek Maccibd stocks 99 Free Station Log File esise eE EE 100 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Signal San ects ieee en Ane ieee ee ieee end 104 ComBox Manager Overview 0 00 0 eee eeeecceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 105 ComBox Connects s icche ct a ae he veteran pe 116 ComBox Configuration e aea EE AETA REA ATARE RE 121 ComBox VieW Settings aa EE T OE A A T 130 ComBox EET h Lak EEEE AEAT E E AE 137 ComBox Test Digital Q
142. ES EAE RNAS 389 Create Color Palette eccccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeaececeeeeeseaaaeeeceeeeesaesaaaaeaeeeeeeesetenninaeeneees 390 Background Map icici cei lies de nec nein leet Abe le iat 391 Post Processing aserne lid See 397 Data Editor OV rview issiron diuine iiia iii aie a aiia ie aai 401 Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height sssseseessssresesrreseerrssrrerrssrenssees 402 Data Editor Meteo iania hla ee ee ie a a a 405 Data Editor Setups iine evened es a aie dee dee 407 Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates cccccceeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeetees 409 Data Editor Manual Coordinates ccccccceceecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeaeceeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeeeeeees 413 CUSTOMIZE eaaa aghiteleats sieht agavteteedzs eet a ea a aaa dest aaa 416 Dd ATA Ls E E E ner reer ney trerrer wr rrr A E tere rerenr E Tereccrer errr reer 417 Fle lp TODICS desiere a aaa aaa ianitehaa hd Mest s aa 418 About GeoMoS Analyze esei Rectt eigen act Recdtiantie eae 419 Point Tie ViIGWi e a e ee a a sanseel add ices aa Eaa aa Aaa aaa a a E ae EEEE 420 EE EE E E E E E E TET 422 Site M Prso aeaaea a aea coe aaa a a e araa aa ee 423 Displacement Longitudinal Transverse and Height cececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 429 VGlOCIY OA E E trad E E E E E Ate 430 MOCION AAE A E EE ET E AAE A ASAE TE A AAE T EE AT 431 Height Vector os gas ens la Antes hanes AA EEA 432 REPOM miser uaria N e a N A a A A 433 Observa
143. Fields of table have been c gt gt Overview Close the Message Configurator ca M4 3 Configure Advanced SMTP Server Follow these steps to configure an Advanced SMTP Server Open the SMTP Server Windows Start gt All Programs gt Advanced SMTP Server gt Advanced SMTP Server The SMTP Server window opens 588 Troubleshooting E SMTP Server f Home Page Help Sq Authentication l md Logg l ng o Security Cunent Log level Log file path B IP Range Lists O Enos You can See last 1000 fines of the fog file m this window If you need to see more detats RBL Servers you can simoly open entire log l e in any text editor Log fie ie located in the fie which PB SMTP Gateways O Enrors and warnings lh peso Sf SMTP Options Enor aed WS C FkeySMTPASMTPServer log leew Message Queue I Timeouts Time stamp Thread Severily Message 06 Feb 2009 4672 Debug Checking root dr C FkeySMTP Queue 06 Feb 2009 4672 Debug Removing incomplete files A Server Replies D POP3 Options Loca Domans Select SMTP Gateway in the left hand tree view e Press the Check if port 25 is open by your ISP button SMTP Server O Help HomePage E Logging I riai SMTP Gateways Securty pases E IP Range Lists omotimes emal cannot be delivered directly to pour target for example your ISP is blocking pat 25 In this case you can use A RBL Servers nA ENTE LNA You can spe
144. GURE Interfaces panel appears The Interface NMEA Out 1 on Port 1 with the Device RS232 must be in use To set the communication parameters select on the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel the Interface NMEA Out 1 and the EDIT F3 button pe The CONFIGURE NMEA Out 1 panel appears Select the DEVCE F5 button The CONFIGURE Devices panel appears Select the EDIT F3 button 12 The CONFIGURE Edit Device NMEA Out 1 panel appears Set the required communication parameters Baud rate Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Store the settings with the STORE F1 button Introduction to GeoMoS 14 The CONFIGURE Devices panel appears again Select the CONT F1 button Select the CONT F1 button 8 1 1 1 ae The CONFIGURE Interfaces panel appears again NMEA Out 1 messages settings Follow these steps to configure the communication settings Step Action pele The Interface NMEA Out 1 on Port 1 with the Device RS232 must be in use To set the communication parameters select on the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel the Interface NMEA Out 1 and press the EDIT F3 button The CONFIGURE NMEA Out 1 panel appears Select the MESGS F2 button The CONFIGURE NMEA Messages panel appears Select the USE F5 button to activate the required message format GeoMoS supports NMEA GGA and NMEA GNS 12 Select the message format and press the EDIT F3 button 3 The CONFIGURE NMEA Message to
145. Geosystems product Responsibilities of the person in charge of the product WARNING The person responsible for the product must ensure that it is used in accordance with the instructions This person is also accountable for the training and the deployment of personnel who use the product and for the safety of the equipment in use The person in charge of the product has the following duties e To understand the safety instructions on the product and the instructions in the online help system e To be familiar with local regulations relating to accident prevention e To inform Leica Geosystems immediately if the product becomes unsafe Hazards of use Main hazards of use WARNING The absence of instruction or the inadequate imparting of instruction can lead to incorrect or adverse use and can give rise to accidents with far reaching human material financial and environmental consequences Precautions All users must follow the safety directions given by the manufacturer and the directions of the person responsible for the product GeoMoS Help 5 1 en CAUTION Watch out for erroneous measurements if the product has been misused or modified Precautions Periodically carry out test measurements and perform the adjustments indicated in the online help system before and after important measurements WARNING Unforeseeable events may cause disturbances breakdowns or defects in the system hardw
146. Height Calculated velocity from the slope distance Totals stations only Calculated velocity from the meteorological temperature and pressure Atmos PPM corrected slope distance Totals stations only Calculated velocity from the geometrical measurements to control points Ref PPM corrected slope distance Totals System Unit Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day Distance per day PPM Velocity 2D Vector Velocity 3D Vector GeoMoS Analyzer stations only Calculated velocity from the computed Distance per day 2D vector components Easting and Northing Calculated velocity form the computed Distance per day 3D vector components Easting Northing and Height 449 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Outliers Background information In the tabbed view Multiple Graphs it is possible to set a state for each measurement The state is set to valid or invalid An invalid measurement state is a so called outlier and in the tabbed view Multiple Graphs it is possible to hide or show these outliers Notes The outlier selection in the tabbed view Multiple graphs is only valid for the tabbed view Multiple graphs In the tab Report it is also possible to set Outliers for coordinates and displacements but this selection affects all tabs This outlier selection is only possible for standard s
147. LB2 ANTB Pass Trim BYS9 Active COM 1 Active Peter Loop MAX Breg ABTW FAT line160 Save As Print Ctrl P Find Ctrl F Properties Alt Enter The table below only describes the most important sensor commands Sensor command Connect Description Establishes a connection between the Spider server and the selected site via the defined communication method either serial modem or TCP IP connection This command is not active in case a connection is already established After the connection is established you are able to upload 475 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en settings To prevent accidental change of communication settings it is not possible to edit these settings for a connected sensor Terminates the connection between the PC and the sensor This command can be selected if the sensor is connected For all real time products or for creating of RINEX files from a raw data stream the sensor needs to stay connected at all times The Start command can only be selected if the sensor is connected but not started yet Upload The upload saves configuration data to the sensor and stops current product settings creation The Upload settings command can only be selected if the sensor is connected If Upload settings is sent to a sensor that is started product creation will be stopped Refer to the GNSS Spider Online Help for more detailed information on the other settings Connect Disconnect a Site
148. M 516 Troubleshooting Related Topics Measurement Modes Signal Scan View 517 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Distance Only Coordinate Calculation When to use Use the measurement mode Distance Only to measure the slope distances of a prism that is beyond the range of the Automatic Target Recognition ATR Background Information The measurement mode Distance Only requires a special coordinate calculation The distance only calculation is a special calculation that enables calculation of three dimensional displacements using only measured distances This calculation makes it possible to monitor over very long distances where ATR does not work and Signal Scan gives very poor accuracy Two distance only measurement modes are available Distance Only IR Distance Only LO These modes are based on the two types of EDM that are used in Leica total stations infrared IR and redlaser LO Distance Only Requirements GeoMoS Monitor Configuration Sensor Location Editor TPS Properties Calculations configured for 1D Monitoring Coordinate calculation set to Only measured distance Distance Reduction set to Using End Heights Orientation correction is determined with the point group Free Station or Orientation Only Control point coordinates are determined with the point group Free Station or Distance Intersection if required Signal Scan vs Distance Only Measurement Mode 518 Troubleshooting The
149. MoS software License Models and function The availability of different License Models and their function depends on the Leica Geosystems Software product The following license models and functionality is supported Floating licenses Re hosting 1 per year The following license models and functionality is not supported aN ode locked licenses Borrowing of floating licenses View Licenses dialog Follow these steps to view the currently activated Licenses the License Server and the Proxy Server Settings Step Action Select the menu Help View Licenses The View Licenses dialog will be displayed The View Licenses dialog shows the Entitlement ID and all currently activated ae Select the General tab 332 GeoMoS Monitor options of the software package Note For viewing the currently activated licenses the connection to the internet is not required View Licenses a a a a ED ee General Settings oo 00000 ETIT Entitlement ID 99999 99999 5C733 BCB6B CC 102 Licensed products and options Product Option License Model License Type Egiration Date Maintenance GeoMoS Monitor Maintenance Floating Maintenance 03 31 2010 GeoMoS Monitor Basic Floating Perpetual GeoMoS Monitor Sensorlicenses Floating Perpetual 03 31 2010 GeoMoS Monitor Computation Floating Perpetual 03 31 2010 GeoMoS Monitor Limitchecks and Mes Floating Perpetual 03 31 2010 X GeoMoS Monitor LandXML Export Floa
150. Mode ATR ATR For the ATR search the search window is small scanned line by line starting at the scan field of coordinate The reflector position will also be view updated for the automatic instrument pointing position Distance For the search without ATR the search IR window is scanned with the EDM signal Distance strength starting at the scan coordinate to find 237 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 238 Comment Drag and Drop LO a prism in the search window The reflector position will also be updated for the automatic instrument pointing position Note If the Search Window is set to zero no search will be executed and the instrument will always point to the last measured position current coordinate to make the measurement The scan coordinate is not updated If the point moves then the system will no longer be able to measure the point If the Search Window is too big it is possible the search routine could find another point within the defined search window radius To reduce the chances of pointing errors it is possible to set a tolerance for Point Blunder Checks in the TPS Properties Measurements dialog of the Sensor Location Editor If the Search Window and the Point Blunder Check is set the scan coordinate will be updated if the search routine was successful and the point blunder check was not exceeded This user defined comment may be used to record information about the
151. MosS will re measure the point This value defines the expected precision of the slope distance when 189 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 190 Distance making multiple measurements If the calculated standard deviation is less than this value then GeoMoS will re measure the point Blunder This value defines the maximum deviation from the expected position that tolerance will be allowed If the resulting coordinate is further from the last position 3D than this amount then it will be regarded as a blunder and only the raw measurements will be stored in this database No result will be computed The purpose of this check is to avoid the accidental measuring of a wrong prism which may happen if the prisms are closely spaced from the perspective of the total station To prevent a blunder from occurring a Measurement Mode of ATR Small Field of View can be used with some total stations If a blunder check occurs a Point blunder check failed message will be generated Reset theo Requires a switchbox Art No 744793 to be attached to the sensor If before normal this option is set GeoMoS will send a command to the switchbox to cycle group the power on the total station This option is used to avoid problems with instable firmware on the total station to enable continuos uninterrupted operation of the monitoring system Sensor Name The name of the sensor Set as default Check this option for the setting entered for this sensor to be
152. Online Help Leica GeoMoS v5 1 when it has to be right Seica Geosystems Table of Contents Introduction to GeOMOS i246 aetna eee ed ete ee ev eee eee 1 INtrOUUCHION AE EEE E TAEA ie tides age hein aoe deete Sade a teeta ati eS alts 1 Important NOtes 3 03 EEE Geen deviated eae neal eid sca 2 User Interface MON OT a a r a a aa aa a a EEr a aa 8 User Intertace AnaNZor ean a AEE E a eta 10 Tour l Configure an instrument OF SCNSOM ecceceeeeeee eset eeteeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaees 12 Tour Il Connect a total station Basic monitoring system eeeeeeseeeereseerreseees 33 Tour Ill Setup a total station with a co located GNSS sensor cceeeeeereeeees 45 Tour IV Setup a RT Positioning Product ec cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaees 50 Tour V Basic data AnalySis eceran aera a e a eaa 52 Tour VI Re orientate a total station ccccecccceceeeeeceeeneeceeeeeeeseceneaeceeeeeeesetsnaneeeees 58 Tour VII Setup and connect a Campbell datalogger cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaees 60 Tour VIII Configure a Coordinate system eeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeeneeeeeenaaes 62 GeoMos Montok naisin a ee ein dia a ee 72 Ge eoMos AnalyZer sinjorina nee deat eee eee 75 GEOMOS ACJUStMO IN osoren evi cetess lashed faate i A E A AE R 77 RICGNSES asine tecsre le tacts saat a feasebeda a mic Atenza mates mee Maleate 78 Customer Care Package COP J eaea er enaa REE
153. Out 4 After the test you can close the dialog Open the ComBox Manager in GeoMoS Monitor Follow these steps to open the ComBox Manager in GeoMoS Monitor The ComBox is physically connected either via LAN or Internet to the computer where GeoMoS Monitor is running Refer to the ComBox User Manual Chapter 3 Operation for more details about the preparation of the ComBox ca Select in GeoMoS Monitor the menu Configuration ComBox Manager The ComBox Manager dialog will be shown In the list on the left hand side of the dialog all configured ComBoxes are listed which are inserted into GeoMoS The list is devided into two sections The name and the host name of each ComBox is displayed On the right hand side you see all control buttons EJ Use the Insert button to configure and insert a ComBox into GeoMoS If you wish to edit a ComBox please select the appropriate ComBox in the list and using the Edit button 7 Use the View Settings button to get an quick overview of all settings which are assigned to the selected ComBox Eg Press the Remove button to delete a selected ComBox Use the Test Link button to test the connection to the selected ComBox and all its included modules K Use the Test Digital Out button to display and change the state of the Digital I O outputs of the selected ComBox Click the Close button The ComBox Manager dialog will be closed 110 GeoMoS Monitor Note The ab
154. Overvie Werin aa eane a a a a aAa 214 ET a A EEA P E AT E A A A E T E T E AAA 221 IMport Filer ies er a a hc E a E eE a a 223 Measurement M s i l erare aner e aaae aee e AEE anaa a EEEE 226 Point Group Editor triom aaa e i aa a iaaa a a aE eaa a aaa 231 Properties Normal Group cirese areon edanaren a a a a aaaea a E iaai 240 Properties Free Station ccccccccccceseescccececeeeeeececeeaeceeeeeeesessaeaeceeeeeeeeseesnnaaeeeeeess 241 Properties Distance Intersection ccccccceeeeeesecceeceeeeeeeseccncaeeeeeeeeesessncaeeaeeeeeees 245 Properties VZ COMeCHON aAa eea reae aae aaa a ada a a ANEI a Eea iai 248 Properties Orientation ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesecencaeceeeeeeeseccacaeceeeeeeeesetscnieaeeeeeess 249 Properties PPM ssa3 2020 dsfee siguientes T E E T 250 Measurement Cycle Editor ecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeees 251 Emit Class Edi A a ainerde tise ak etree tp E a ates eee een te 256 ProtilesEditorntas sites creck nd oat tae DA AA ee Oo ects 261 Null Measurement Editor cccccececeeseccececeeeeeesecneaeceeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeeeeesesecniaeeeeeess 266 Table of Contents Message Configurator naierara e A A a RE ee 269 Compute DalV Avefage sanitu e e aa a e 289 AGEPI Settings onire a e e a AAR 291 PUOMS aa teins thats a A eM et oe 293 CUSLONNIZC n in ni teens aa Gans deet mies deeb ste dat cetaeacete cast mas a nea eee 300 WEDCAIMNS sites Ope
155. Points Show Hide points Zoom Graphical Settings Site Map Context Menu Point Context Menu Icons The Site Map view shows the current status of the points using different colors see table below When the mouse is placed over a point a context sensitive information box appears which gives more detailed information about that point 423 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Symbol Description O Limit ok Limit level 1 Limit level 2 Limit level 3 The Site Map displays only limit levels that are not acknowledge The Site Map displays only the highest priority of a limit level per point that occurred in the set limit level time range The limit level time range can be customized and is not identical with the time period for the graphs and report Select the menu View Refresh or press the toolbar button Refresh or press F5 to update the current status of the points Move points The position of the points can be customized Follow these steps to move points 424 Right click on a point and select from the context menu the option Move The Analyzer shows the mouse cursor now as a cross Ex Select with a single mouse click a new position in the Site Map The Analyzer places the point to the selected new position and deactivates the Move mode automatically The cursor appears again as arrow The displayed position of each point is saved to the database Note To abort the Move mode select ESC or make a right
156. Projections which are hardwired Map Projections have to be defined before they become available in the list Note A Projection is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation f required select a Geoid Model from the list Refer to Coordinate System Properties General for the requirements to add a valid Geoid Model to the new Coordinate System If required select a CSCS Model Country Specific Coordinate System Model from the list CSCS Models have to predefined before they are available in the list Enter the optional Note to describe the Coordinate System New Coordinate System General Name Example_Coordinate_System Transformation Trans Type Residuals Local Ellipsoid Projection Proj Type Geoid Model CSCS Model Note Last Modified Example_Transformation hd Classical3D Ellipsoidal Bessel 1841 v Example_Projection TM None v None F Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Close the Coordinate System Manager to return to the GeoMoS Monitor Options dialog e Select your configured Coordinate System in the list box Introduction to GeoMoS For Distance Reduction select Projection Correction If you are working with a cylindrical projection then you can choose Automatic Map Projection only available for cylindrical projections otherwise choose Individual Map Projection Options Coordinate System Exam
157. QL Server 2005 must be purchased separately Automatic total station control point setup with different methods Free Station Distance Intersection and GNSS Update Calculation of any total station results including coordinates displacements profiles distance reduction may be added using Monitor Option 1 below Calculation of total station corrections with Free Station Distance Intersection Orientation PPM and Vz Correction groups may be added using Monitor Option 1 below Introduction to GeoMoS Calculation of daily average results of total station measurements may be added using Monitor Option 1 below Limit check computation may be added using Monitor Option 2 below Messaging may be added using Monitor Option 2 below Data analysis may be added using GeoMoS Analyzer Important Each sensor requires an amount of Sensor Licenses GeoMoS Monitor Options Monitor Option 1 TPS Computation Upgrade to support computation of total station results The following functionality is supported Automatic total station control point setup with different methods Free Station Distance Intersection and GNSS Update Calculation of any total station results including coordinates displacements profiles distance reduction a Calculation of total station corrections with Free Station Distance Intersection Orientation PPM and Vz Correction Calculation of daily average results of total station me
158. S 1200 Professional Series 596 System Requirements Leica TM30 TS30 Series Important Switch off the TPS sleep mode for monitoring applications Leica GPS System 500 Leica GPS System 1200 NIVEL20 NIVEL200 STS DTM Meteorological Sensors Leica DNA Leica Sprinter Leica Disto DIMETIX disto Leica GNSS Spider RT and PP Positioning Products GPS NMEA GGA and GNS format Campbell Scientific Datalogger with analog geotechnical sensors 597 Coordinate System Manager Coordinate System Management Within LGO the user can work in the global coordinate system WGS1984 or in a local coordinate system The local coordinate system may be a geodetically defined system or it may be a simple grid system with neither an Ellipsoid nor a Projection associated with it The Coordinate System Management is linked to a database which is responsible for storing the parameters This database is independent from the Project database Select from the list below to learn more about Coordinate System Management Coordinate Systems Transformations Ellipsoids Projections State Plane Zones Geoid Models Country Specific Coordinate System CSCS Models 599 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate System Coordinate Systems Overview A Coordinate System provides the information necessary to convert coordinates to different representations Cartesian Geodetic Grid and to transform coordinates between the WGS1984 and
159. S Models are OSTNO2 Great Britain 668 Coordinate System Manager OSTN97 Great Britain GR3DF97A France ETRS89 RD Netherlands Danish CSCS Models SWEREF99RT90 Sweden NZGD49 2000 New Zealand NADCON U S A Models for which the correction files have to be purchased are also supported It may be necessary to convert the files to LGO s binary CSC file format For more information see Other CSCS Models Note e CSCS Models that are currently used in a Coordinate system are indicated by and cannot be deleted e f coordinates which fall outside the area covered by the CSCS model are to be converted then the CSCS model is ignored Related topics CSCS Model Properties Create CSCS Model field file 669 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Add a new CSCS Model Follow these steps to add a new CSCS Model Right click on CSCS Models in the Tree View and select New Enter the Name of the CSCS Model displayed if a valid CSCS file has been selected Enter the optional Note to describe the CSCS Model Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Enter path and name of the grid file or press to select from the browser The Method Interpolation method and the Coordinate type will be 670 Coordinate System Manager Create CSCS Model field file Background Information CSCS Models may also be used on the receiver in the field This command enables you to create a CSCS Model field file Creat
160. S Monitor Procedure Follow these steps to setup and connect a Campbell datalogger Install PC200W Datalogger Support Software Set up communication between datalogger and computer Develop program for the datalogger Connect with Leica GeoMoS Step 1 Install PC200W Datalogger Support Software The Campbell datalogger requires a very small and simple onboard program for retrieving and storing geotechnical sensor data We recommend using the free of charge PC200W Datalogger Support Software This is a simplified windows based software with quick start tutorials that help the user through the complete process Leica support specialists will help you providing the optimal datalogger program Step 2 Set up communication between datalogger and computer To upload the program for the Campbell datalogger with the PC200W Datalogger Support Software it is required that you are connected directly via a serial COM port 60 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 3 Develop program for the datalogger The Campbell datalogger records data over time from connected geotechnical sensors outputs measurement values to Leica GeoMoS Anemometer D for measuring wind speed Rain gauge for measuring the amount of liquid Table_1 EE Measurement value A Date amp Time Wind speed 29 4 kn YW Each geotechnical sensor connected to the Campbell datalogger records the data into a table Each measurement value is recorded to a field in the
161. S y Sy Projections UTM32 Last Modified O7 17 2008 08 37 07 Zone Number 32 Central Meridian 9 00 00 00000 E Hemisphere Northern UTM 14 North UTM 15 North UTM 16 North UTM 17 North UTM 18 North UTM 19 North UTM 20 North UTM 21 North UTM 22 North UTM 7 North UTM 8 North UTM 3 North LITMAR 529 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate System properties Define a new coordinate System with the following settings Name e g ETRS89 UTM32 No Transformation Ellipsoid GRS1980 Proje ction UTM32 No Geoid Model No CSCS Model Coordinate System properties General Name ETRS89 UTM32 Transformation Trans Type Residuals Local Ellipsoid Projection Proj Type Geoid Model CSCS Model Note Last Modified None v ars 1980 xl urm32 UTM None None SS 07 17 2008 09 29 03 7 Close the Coordinate System Manager In the GeoMoS Monitor Options dialog Select your predefined Coordinate System e g ETRS89 UTM32 Selec t Projection correction Distance Reduction The Projection correction scale factor is used automatically 530 Troubleshooting Options m Coordinate System ETRS89 UTM32 Properties m Distance Reduction Automatic Map Projection C No Reduction v False Eastin Sealevel Reduction ws I False Northing Projection Correction Scale Factor at Origin Individual Map Projection Scale Factor
162. State Plane Zones in GeoMoS they must be converted in Projections New Projection General Name Example Projection Type TM M False Easting 3500000 0 0 m False Northing po o O m Latitude of Origin O O 0 00000 N Central Meridian 9 0 0 00000 E A Zone Width F p 0 0 Scale Factor at Origin fi q Press OK to accept entered values or Cancel to abort the function Continue to Step 5 Add a new Geoid Model Step 5 If required add a new Geoid Model Follow these steps to import a new Geoid Model Note In order to import a new Geoid Model into the Coordinate System Management it must be available in the Windows directory For more details refer to Geoid Models How to write your own Geoid Model and Compute Geoid Separations with Leica LGO 66 Introduction to GeoMoS Step Action Right click on Geoids in the Tree View and select New 2 The New Geoid Model dialog appears 3 Enter the Name for the new Geoid Model Select the Coordinate Type Geodetic or Grid that the Geoid Model shall be defined for For coordinate type Geodetic with height scaling see Geoid models with height scaling If the Geoid Model is defined using a GEM file then the coordinate type is defined with the Geoid Model file Select the reference Ellipsoid which the model shall refer to If the Geoid Model is defined using a GEM file then the Ellipsoid is defined with the Geoid Model file Note For the Geodetic G
163. TR range Signal scanning is inherently slower and less accurate than ATR measurement The distance only measurement mode only makes sense if the distance to a point is outside of the ATR range and the customer is only interested in Longitudinal displacements slope distance measurements and ppm values Signal Scan SignalScan IR LO Advantage V Disadvantage X 510 Determines the three dimensional position of a prism Angles are recorded as well but will be very inaccurate Depends on the atmospheric conditions Over very long distances several kilometers signal scan is not practical because the angle measurements become very inaccurate A single signal scan to one prism may take between 30 seconds and two minutes or even longer under certain atmospheric conditions Distance Only DistanceOnly IR LO The slope distance is measured high precise Detects movements only in the direction of the distance measurement Measures only the slope distances using the EDM A single measurement is very fast Accuracy is based on EDM Longitu dinal displacement Slope distance and PPM can be used for analysis No angles are measured Requires a special monitoring setup geometry to be able to detect movements The profile direction should be similar to the measurement direction of the instrument because of the special calculation method Transverse and Height
164. Target 04 08 2005 20 50 23 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 24 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz z T GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 25 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz T GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 26 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz 04 08 2005 20 50 27 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz 04 08 2005 20 56 00 GRX1230_1 GPS1_Serial GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 56 00 GRxX1230_2 GPS2_TCPIP GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 57 59 GRX1230_1 GPS1_Serial i GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 57 59 GRX1230_2 GPS2_TCPIP GPS Target 04 08 2005 21 00 00 GRxX1230_1 GPS1_Serial GPS Target 16 09 2046 20 59 47 PBRO_BRO PBRO_BRON_GeoMoS 04 08 2005 21 00 00 GRX1230_2 GPS2_TCPIP T GPS Target 16 09 2046 20 59 47 FLDK_BRON FLDK_BRON_GeoMoS gt GPS Target 04 08 2005 21 00 16 TCA1800 Controli Inside_Control je Free Sta 81 4380 04 08 2005 21 00 29 TCA1800 Control Inside _Control ye Free Sta 359 3074 04 08 2005 21 00 31 TCA1800 TPS amp Station 04 08 2005 21 01 00 TCA1800 TPS amp Station 04 08 2005 21 01 00 TCA1800 Monitoring Inside_Monitoring Normal 278 5736 v ala la la Q ke wv 4 g G Ei GPS Target iiit iii V Automatically display the last action Overview Last Actions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status User Level Administrator 21 01 04 The table below describes the fields in the Last Actions tab The time of the action The sensor performing the action 339 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Profile
165. The result of the virtual sensor exceeds set minimum maximum limits Occurs if the E Mail address is wrong or the configured SMTP cannot be reached Occurs if the mobile number pin code port or baud rate is wrong Occurs if the aspsms com server cannot be reached Occurs if the authentification fails caused by a wrong user an or password The internet connection exists Not supported Occurs if the Campbell datalogger program was modified without adapting the current configuration in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager GeoMosS cannot read in any new measurements from this Campbell datalogger table because the table is deleted Troubleshooting 88 Table has now information 3 Occurs if the Campbell datalogger program additional fields was modified without adapting the current Existing fields E3Warning of table have been change Access to E3warning Webcam failed configuration in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager The new fields have been added at the end of the table on the datalogger To read in any of these new measurements it is required to re configure the table Occurs if the Campbell datalogger program was modified without adapting the current configuration in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager GeoMoS cannot read in any new measurements from this Campbell datalogger table because the configuration is inconsistent The access to the webcam failed Occurs if the Service is not started or the access to the IP
166. UT aaiae a e a E I TARA TA A TAS 147 Sensor MaNna gaT oaar E AE EEE EE AA 151 Supported Sensors serpe a a rads E E ade a acai 163 Sensor Location Editor Overview ccccccceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeeeees 170 Coordinate Calculation Free Station ccccccccccecseceeceeeeeeeeseccecaeeeeeeeeesensanneeeees 172 Coordinate Calculation Distance Intersection 0 cccccecceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 176 Coordinate Calculation GNSS cccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeesecaeaeceeeeeeeeessananenees 180 Coordinate Calculation Manual cccccceeeeeeeenecceeeeeeeeseceeaaeaeeeeeeesecsncaeeeeeeeeess 181 Total Station Standpoint Coordinates ccccccececeececceceeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeesessnnaneeeees 182 Orientationiens ck nee ie lire Mt ae a ee 184 TPS PropertieS ech hve eo ae ai Ga etna ee eee 188 TPS Properties Measurement cccccecceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeesesesnenaeees 189 TPS Properties Calculations cccccccceseeceeceeeeeeeeeceaeeaeceeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeesetensieaeeees 191 TPS Properties Corrections vetesss cteteides a a heacechaaa tate a aaaea 196 TPS Properties GNSSUpdate Ieeiea aa a aaa E a A Eaa 197 GNSS Properties ooien hia eieaa eaan aaae a aa aiai aaiae aE aaa Ea 198 Virtual Sensor oraa e a a a aaa a aae a aiaa 200 ObServation LWPS eioen E E 205 Available F nctioNSe meea aa aa eaa a a aaa 211 Point Editon
167. Web dialog Press to apply to save the settings before you select the Settings tab GeoMoS Monitor ca Select the Settings tab The View Licenses dialog shows the License Server and the Proxy Server Settings of the software package View licenses lll mma General Settings License Server Configuration For network licenses specify the license server here Host localhost Proxy Server Configuration If you access the intemet through a proxy server specify the configuration here Host Port e g hostname port User Password License Server Configuration License Server Shows the Local License Server name Address IP address and port or host name computer name The Local Clients product software connects to this Local License Server to retrieve products options 335 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Proxy Server These settings are only important if you use a proxy server for Configuration your LAN Host Port Enter the proxy server with IP address and port fuser Required authentication for your proxy server Required authentication for your proxy server Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog Press to cancel and close the Data push to GeoMoS Web dialog Press to apply to save the settings before you select the General tab About GeoMoS Monitor Displays the version and build information of GeoMoS 336 GeoMoS Monitor Tabs Tabs
168. XF Contours button E The Export DXF Contours dialog appears Select a folder where the data should be stored and key in a file name without extension The extension dxf will be added Type in the contour interval for the contour lines Press the Save button to generate the export file The system closes the Export DXF Contours dialog computes the contour lines and creates an export file with the defined settings and stores it in the defined folder with the defined name Remark The contour lines will not be stored in the system The contour lines are only computed for the export Comments will not be exported The defined time range and point selection will be used for the export 356 GeoMoS Analyzer Database Export The manual export of data can be done from GeoMoS Analyzer The data can be exported manually To manually Export data Follow these steps to manually export data Ee From the File menu select Database Export The Export dialog will be displayed Manual Export PR Buon M Waat e Cancel End 08 21 2005 11 34 09 End time is always current time Export file name od E l sen The date and time of the first data to be exported The period back from the current time to be exported Only available if the End time is always current time option is selected pend The data and time of the last data to be exported End time is always Sets the end time to the
169. a defined limit The network is adjusted and the inner constraints of the mathematical model may be slightly changed The coordinates of the reference points do not change The standard deviations of the reference points are fixed to zero Variance factor estimation S Transformation Two step strategy Testing Fisher test GeoMoS Monitor A posteriori variances are estimated close to sigma 0 1 With this condition the parameters can be compared and used for further statistical analysis The S Transformation is used to switch the datum to a different base without adjusting the network again The base is the reference points initial coordinates and with their geometry Within the deformation analysis the S Transformation is required to compare epoch by epoch the identical base The deformation analysis is based on the two step strategy All measured points are sorted in either stable reference points or unstable monitoring points Step 1 adjusts the epoch with identical reference points Step 2 compares two epochs against each other The identical reference points are absolutely required because non identical network geometry mathematical model causes significant differences in the results of a network In addition the identical stochastic model is computed with a variance covariance estimation Reference points with significant movements will be eliminated out of the stable reference point grou
170. a valid 68 Introduction to GeoMoS New CSCS Model General Extents Name Example_CSCS Path of grid file C Documents and Settings Desktop E xample csc Method Grid shifts Interpolation method Bi linear 4 points 2 values Coordinate type Grid Note Last Modified Continue to Step 7 Configure a Coordinate System Step 7 Configure a Coordinate System Follow these steps to configure a Coordinate System Right click on Coordinate Systems in the Tree View and select New The New Coordinate System dialog appears LGO Datum Map you may choose how to distribute the Residuals The distribution weighting may be in relation to the distances between the point to be transformed and the control points or by using a Multi quadratic interpolation approach No distribution 3 Enter the Name of the Coordinate System Selec ta Transformation from the list Transformations may be calculated using Leica LGO Datum Map or in the case of a Classical 2D and 3D manually entered If you have selected a Transformation that was previously calculated using Leica will be selected by default 69 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Select an Ellipsoid for the Local system System B from the list Note An Ellipsoid cannot be selected if it is already defined in the Transformation or is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation Selec ta Projection from the list Except for the Customized
171. able PPM value will be used to correct the measurements The temperature and pressure measurements from a single meteorological sensor will be used to correct the measured distances A combined temperature and pressure sensor at the Monitoring System will be used If more than one meteorological sensor is present the multiple meteorological data will not be used to calculate the atmospheric correction for the Temperature Pressure option Refer to Multiple Temperature Pressure the 3D distance between the setup coordinate of the temperature and pressure sensor and the total station setup coordinate determines which meteorological data will be used for the correction If no temperature pressure sensor is available the system will then use the Meteo Model No Correction Multiple Temperature Pressure Distance Reduction Use Vertical Angles Use End Heights GeoMoS Monitor The temperature and pressure measurements from multiple meteorological sensor will be used to correct the measured distances according to the spatial position of the measurement line within the network of meteorological sensors Two meteorological sensors are used to interpolate the target temperature and pressure One meteorological sensor must be located above the target point and one must be located below the target point and the target temperature and pressure will be linearly interpolated between the two sensors The tem
172. abs in days Maximum number of days 1000 panes Max row The maximum number of rows to be displayed in the Last Actions Observations for panes and Messages tabs Maximum number of rows 500000 Fonts Overview Pane Use this button to set the font and style to be used for the table headings Use this button to set the font and style to be used for the table content P Select the Animated GIF to be displayed on the overview tab for each system state Overview Picture Select the picture Bitmap or JPEG to display on the overview tab or use the default Display Check or un check to display webcam image image from webcam if available 302 GeoMoS Monitor Services Webcams Background Information Webcam images show at a glace the situation on site Images collected over time can be used for and aid site analysis Webcam requirements Various webcam manufacturers are on the market with many different hardware and software options It is important to note that Leica GeoMoS only supports IP cam models with the following features P address dynamic or static or an unique path to the latest webcam image For example http your_camera_address current_image jpg jpg jpeg or png format Important Webcams that are connected via USB are not supported Webcams that require a login with user ID and password are not supported When you connect a webcam powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20
173. ack in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard The button Apply in this dialog is always inactive due to it is not possible to edit any settings Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 133 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en DynDNS B Setup ComBox View settings General Mobile Provider DynDNS Advanced Host name Server address Server port User name Password Support e mail optional Ca Field Button Description of the displayed settings Text field with the entered host name DynDNS name URL under which the ComBox will be available e g myComBox dyndns org Server address Text field with the entered server address of the Dynamic DNS Server normally members dyndns org is used Server port Text field with the entered TCP port of the Dynamic DNS Server normally 80 or 8245 Text field with the entered User name of your DynDNS account Password Text field with the entered Password of your DynDNS account Support e mail Text field with entered Support e mail address optional 134 GeoMoS Monitor Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard The button Apply in this dialog is always inactive due to it is not possible to edit any settings Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the
174. alculations corrections and the update of the control point using GNSS results TPS Properties Measurements Calculations Corrections GNSS Update 188 GeoMoS Monitor TPS Properties Measurements The table below describes the fields in the TPS Properties Measurement tab dialog box eee lL O O Multiple Measurements Number of This value defines how many times the measurement is repeated for a measurements single measurement The Hz angle Vz angle and slope distance are averaged and the standard deviation is calculated Retries if out This value defines how many times GeoMoS will re measure the point of tolerance until it achieves the specified precision Point Not Found Retries if point This value defines how many times GeoMoS will re try to measure the not found point if it is not found The purpose of this option is to avoid the case that a point was not measured because of some temporary obstruction Delay in This value defines the delay between each subsequent attempt to between measure the point after a point was not found than this value then GeoMoS will re measure the point V This value defines the expected precision of the vertical angle when making multiple measurements If the calculated standard deviation is less This value defines the expected precision of the horizontal angle when making multiple measurements If the calculated standard deviation is less than this value then Geo
175. ale Factor at Origin 1 the plane is tangent to the sphere if it is lt 1 it is secant Secant means the plane intersects the sphere along a circle In this case the scale is true along this circle Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic This is a special type of Oblique Mercator Projection defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Angle Type Azimuth or Skew e Rectify Type Azimuth or Skew e Scale Factor at Origin For a scale factor 1 the cylinder is tangent to the sphere ellipsoid for a scale factor lt 1 itis secant User defined projections For Projections which cannot be defined by the implemented standard Projections the user can write his own program for a particular Projection The necessary input for the program has to be read from an ASCIl file the produced output has to be written to an ASCII file A Projection set accessing this user program can then be created by specifying the program s name and path 641 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Description Name Name of the user defined Projection Path of Path and file name including the extension EXE EXEMIG To select from the browser click E Requirements for the user program e t must be an executable program e No interaction is allowed e Input and output for the user program has to be organised according to a specified File Format Related topics Input Output file format for User define
176. alyzer Multiple Graphs 184 4000 Toolbar 184 3000 Legend box ke Gallery LI Color 184 2000 Font I Properties Options 184 1000 Reset graphic Export Hz gon Series Show Outliers Blunder Tolerance Move Y axis up Move Y axis down 183 9000 16 Mrz 2009 11 16 Mrz 2009 13 16 Mrz 2009 15 16 Mrz 2009 17 16 Mrz 2009 19 1 Epoch Press the Refresh button rA in the Configuration Toolbar to refresh the view All data points are displayed again from the same series with outliers now shown You can check this with a right click on an outlier 453 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Multiple Graphs 184 4000 184 3000 184 2000 Hz gon 184 1000 184 0000 183 9000 16 Mrz 2009 11 16 Mrz 2009 13 16 Mrz 2009 15 16 Mrz 2009 17 16 Mrz 2009 19 1 Epoch To hide the outliers again right click somewhere in the graphic and de select Show Outliers Press the Refresh button r4 in the Configuration Toolbar to make a refresh of the view From now on the outliers will be hidden Reset outliers Follow these steps to select measurements and set outliers 1 Select the Multiple Graphs tab To de select an outlier display all Outliers see above then right click on the appropriate 454 GeoMoS Analyzer outlier and select Outlier Multiple Graphs 184 4000 184 3000 184 2000 Hz gon 184 1000 184 0000 v Outlier 183 9000 16 Mrz 2009 11 16 Mrz 2009 13 16 Mrz 2009 15 16
177. an access information from anywhere without needing multiple windows The default appearance of the GeoMoS GUI consists the following main components ES GeoNct Analyzer Acie Prose Prats Menu Bar GB Eig 2 Ss Root CE Campbell Datalogger amp COL Control1 Oe Controt 2 a DE Controt 3 me E D Fixpoint1 O Fix point 2 O9 Fix point 3 Se Fix point 4 D Fixpoint 5 D Fix point 6 D Fix point 7 a Monitoring i a DE Monitoring 2 Configuration Toolbar S Q Atma tt Longitudinal Displacement Tree View Graphics Toolbar only for Graphs ANGIS Main Window HINES Monitoring 4 O Profilet D gt Profile2 O Profile3 CI Profiles Sensor OF Combined Temperatur 0 0008 4 a 0 0012 Longitudinal Displacement m 3 EJ D8 Fixpoint3 ager OA Virtual Sensor 0 0016 0 008 t te 0 0020 H z S 25 05 2005 04 06 2005 14 06 2005 24 06 2005 04 07 2005 14 07 2005 2407 2005 03 08 2005 13 02 2005 2306 201 Epoch Fix point 2 smoothed Fix point 2 Fix point 4 smoothed Fix point 4 Ste Longitudinal Disp Ve v Hagh Dsol Transverse Disp Height Migle R Observa Start 25 05 2005 10 39 42 End 24 08 2005 10 39 49 0 0030 m relative User level Administrator
178. and is to be used to update the coordinates of the Total Station control point Note GNSS Update should not be combined with Free Station or Distance Intersection Point Groups Only one method for updating the station coordinates should be used for a given total station The table below describes the fields in the TPS Properties GNSS Update tab dialog box a Update The TPS Station Coordinate With GNSS Coordinate Before Every Normal Group Parameters Do not update height This option defines if the GNSS will be used to update the Total Station coordinates The update is done immediately before a Point Group of type Normal is measured Select the GNSS sensor that will be used Be sure that the offsets for this GNSS are set correctly in the GNSS Sensor Setup in the Sensor Location Editor If this option is checked only the horizontal position of the control point will be updated by the GNSS coordinate and not the height The purpose of this option is to avoid updating the height with a low accuracy estimate from the GNSS The height component is less accurate than the horizontal coordinates when using GNSS due to the satellite geometry Sensor name The name of the sensor 197 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en GNSS Properties GNSS sensors have many configuration options related to the measurement procedure and calculations GNSS Properties Update Use Average Over Min Number Of Measurements V Do No
179. and select E Mail Insert Application SMS Digital Out Database Query Add an e mail recipient Name Enter the name of the recipient Address Enter the e mail address of the recipient Subject Enter a subject description This is the e mail subject heading Add EMail Recipient Name Peter Muster Address aeomos spider amail com Subject Monitoring let e Click OK to save You will return to the Message Configurator window The details of the e mail recipient are now shown as an action in the Message Configurator 587 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Message Configurator Absolute limit check Failed L Peter Muster lt geomos spider gmail com gt x Absolute limit check level 1 exceed x Absolute limit check level 2 exceed 3 Absolute limit check level 3 exceed x Access to Webcam failed x Burglary Communication lost a Communication problem a Compensator out of range Computation not supported with tF o Configuration data push to GeoMo 8 Configuration data successfully pu P 5 8 Connection to GeoMoS Web server __MailSettings _ Connection to GeoMoS Web server SMS Settings Coordinate calculation failed 2S Current position of GNSS differs gr Digital 10 o Data push login failed Data push reset because of GeoMc o Data push to GeoMoS Web failed Displacement computation out of r 3 Division by zero while evaluating tF x Error in Formula Reset Qo Existing
180. ap Projection Select one of the 6 Customized Danish map projections DK Jylland DK S34 Jylland DK Sjelland DK S34 Sjelland DK Bornholm DK S34 Bornholm Ellipsoid International Hayford CSCS Model Select the CSCS Model matching with the selected projection DK Jylland Denmark DK 34 Jylland Denmark DK Sjelland Denmark DK S34 Sjelland Denmark 682 Coordinate System Manager DK Bornholm Denmark DK S34 Bornholm Denmark Note The DK S34 map projections and CSCS models have to be used to make the Easting coordinates run positive towards the West 683 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en SWEREF99RT90 Sweden SWEREF99RT 90 is a transformation from SWEREF 99 which is the Swedish realization of ETRS 89 to RT 90 which is the old Swedish National Coordinate Datum The connected CSCS Model file contains corrections to latitudes and longitudes which can be used to directly convert from SWEREF 99 to RT 90 without any 3D transformation In addition to the datum shift the corrections also include the distortions in the RT 90 system The model defines the differences RT 90 minus SWEREF 99 on a grid of points given ata spacing of 0 02 in latitude and 0 04 in longitude approx 2 km Corrections for any point will be computed by a bilinear interpolation between four neighbouring points of the grid SWEREF99RT90 was developed by Lantm teriet the National Land Survey of Sweden http www lantmateriet se LANTMATERIET
181. are or in the GeoMoS software E g power failures computer viruses sensor failures network breakdowns can limit or disrupt system functions As a result of the above monitoring shifts in buildings embankments dams structures etc may no longer be carried out properly Precautions Measured results are to be checked for their plausibility and verified continuously using a second redundant measuring system GeoMoS is not an alarm system for further action but exclusively a measuring system The user has to interpret the measurements and decide on the appropriate measures to take WARNING Improper installation and maintenance of the measuring system sensors network and software may cause errors in measurements or reliability problems Precautions Your measuring system should only be installed and operated by an authorized technician also for implementing measures that improve reliability e g installation of an uninterrupted power supply a Watchdog PC card etc Introduction to GeoMoS The system s measuring accuracy is to be verified and checked for plausibility after installation System components are to be protected against adverse influences from the surroundings and from the environment Set preventive and regular maintenance intervals for your system components By keeping replacement components in stock the system is quickly restored in case of a failure Regularly back up and check your d
182. asting m Bas 47g 00 l Eont E color I Properties 685 47 3 ne GeoMoS Analyzer or without these blunders The current graphic will be moved the Y axis up or down to the right or left Menu Item Description The font font style size effect color and script can be selected Different colors for different elements in the graphic can be selected Properties The Properties dialog shows all possibilities for customizing the graphics 459 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Properties Each tab in the Chart FX Properties dialog allows customizing of the graphics Click on the screen shot for more information on each tab Chart FX Properties General Series Axes General Tab The table below describes the settings in the General Tab m p e armen eer ene oe Displays horizontal or vertical gridlines at the major interval of the numerical y or categorical x axis respectively Sets a specific scheme to elements in the chart area Default is solid colors you can also choose B amp W or colored patterns 460 GeoMoS Analyzer Series Tab The table below describes the settings in the Series Tab sang Peet Series Choose a particular series or lt lt All series gt gt to apply different formats an Selector options Fill Color Click the fill color you want for the selected series Same as The line will be drawn using the fill color color markers Applies the cust
183. asurements Monitor Option 2 Limit Checks and Messaging Upgrade to support Limit Checks and Messaging With this option the Limit Class Editor and the Message Configurator in GeoMoS Monitor is enabled The following functionality is supported Automatic computation of limit checks of measured and calculated results 73 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Multiple levels of limit checks yellow orange red Limit Level 1 Level 2 and Level 3 can be assigned independent actions Four different types of limit check computation absolute short time long time and regression Allows emails and SMS to be sent applications to be run the database to be queried and digital outputs to be set when defined messages are generated by the system Monitor Option 3 Export Service to GeoMoS Adjustment Upgrade to support the XML file export of monitoring data The following functionality is supported Automatic and manual export of monitoring data to GeoMoS Adjustment 74 Introduction to GeoMoS GeoMoS Analyzer GeoMoS Analyzer is an analysis tool that can be used to view data collected by any GeoMoS Monitor The following functionality is supported Numerical and graphical analysis of data from the same PC as GeoMoS Monitor or the database or another PC More than one installation of Analyzer may access the data and do analysis simultaneously Site Map with images or geo referenced maps using traffic lights symbols
184. at For certain files you can do so using the tool CSCSModelConvert EXE located in the LEICA Geo Office Combined Bin directory of your installation Contact your local Leica representative for further assistance Models that can be converted using this tool are Canadian ATS 77 Datums for e Nova Scotia East West e Prince Edward Island e Ne w Brunswick The conversion tool provides the conversion from the NTv2 GSB file structure to the Leica CSC file structure Start the tool select NTv2 files GSB browse to the GSB file as the Input File and select an Output file name The converted CSC file can be used to add a new CSCS Model Note that for Nova Scotia also the older DAC file structure can be converted Select NTv1 files DAC in the conversion tool to create the CSC file Canadian NADCON files Files containing geodetic corrections between NAD27 and NAD83 are available for Canada in the NTv2 GSB file format Refer to the Geodetic Survey of Canada website http www geod nrcan rncan gc ca or to the Common folder of your LGO installation CD 690 Coordinate System Manager The GSB files can be converted to LGO s CSC file structure Select NTv2 files GSB in the CSCSModelConvert EXE tool The converted files are also available in the Common folder of your LGO installation CD Australian Datum conversions Australia is changing to a new corodinate system the so called Geocentric Datum of A
185. ata WARNING Spontaneous and abrupt movements and shifts in the monitored objects cannot be detected by the GeoMoS system Precautions Do not use the GeoMoS system as a stand alone measuring system to monitor spontaneous and abrupt movements of objects GeoMoS Help 5 1 en User Interface Monitor General The GeoMoS graphical user interface GUI has been designed to be simple and efficient to use and configure The design of the Monitor GUI is based around tab views which enable you to switch between the key information displays quickly and easily with a single mouse click The default appearance of the GeoMoS GUI consists the following main components GeoMoS Monitor Active Project GeoMoS Database Menu Bar Fie View Configuration Measurement Services Tools Help snl rt rovnala Point Group Menon a m aj Project GeoMoS Database Description Configuration Toolbar Monitoring Toolbar Measurement Toolbar Main Window Measurement missing to evaluate formu Tabbed View Overview LastActions Messages Observations Status Bar Menu Bar The Menu Bar is a special Toolbar at the top of the screen that contains the menus File View Configuration Measurement Tools and Help The Menu Bar lists the available commands If a command is not applicable it is grayed out and not accessible Configuration Toolbars allow you to organize the commands you use most often the way Toolbar y
186. atabase The default internal system units are listed in the table below and may be important for the computation of virtual sensors Available system units Internal unit Distance Pressure Temperature C If there is for an user defined observation type no suitable system unit available the default system unit Custom should be selected Default system units Internal unit Description A user defined remark or comment about the observation type For example a text description of the use or unit of the observation type incall If the required observation type is not yet defined in the standard system observation types use the Insert button to create a new user defined observation type A new line is created in the table for the new observation type The selected observation type in the table will be deleted 207 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Standard system observation types 2 This table lists alphabetical ordered all pre defined standard system observation types in the GeoMoS software In some cases the observation type and the system unit is identical Standard system Description Monitor Analyzer observation types Virtual Multi Graph Sensor Atmospheric PPM Corrected Hz Angle Corrected Slope Calculated corrections Distanc Distance Atmos from measured e PPM meteorological values temperature and pressure applied to the slope distance TPS only Corrected V Angle o al O Computed coordina
187. ate System The note may be up to 48 characters long Last Modified Displays the Date and Time the Coordinate System was last modified Select from the index below to learn how to manage Coordinate Systems Coordinate System Overview Add a New Coordinate System Delete a Coordinate System Coordinate System Properties 607 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Transformation Transformation Overview Background Information The Transformation is normally used to transform coordinates from WGS1984 to a Local system or vice versa However it may also be used to perform a Transformation between two local systems A Transformation is a set of parameters that describe the conversion of coordinates from one system to another Transformation parameters are handled using the Coordinate System Management but they may be determined with the LGO Datum Map tool The following Transformation approaches are available Classical 2D Classical 3D One Step Stepwise Interpolation Two Step Select from the index below to learn how to manage Transformations Add a New Transformation Delete a Transformation Transformation Properties Related topics Which approach to use 608 Coordinate System Manager Classical 2D Background Information The Classical 2D transformation approach allows you to determine parameters for transforming the position coordinates Easting and Northing from one grid system to another grid system No pa
188. ate System Manager Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Transverse Mercator Projection with fixed zone defining constants Thus it is sufficient to define e Zone Number 1 60 e Hemisphere north or south Zone defining constants e Origin Intersection of equator and central meridian of each zone e Scale factor at central meridian 0 9996 e Zone width 6 3 east and 3 west of the central meridian e Zone numbering starting with number 1 for zone 180 west to 174 west and increasing eastwards e False Northing 0 for northern hemisphere 10 000 000 m for southern hemisphere e False Easting 500 000 m Note e The Central Meridian is selected automatically according to the selected Zone Number e Points which exceed the zone width by 1 are not converted 4 east and 4 west of the central meridian Cassini Soldner Projection on to a Cylinder It is neither equal area nor conformal The scale is true along the central meridian and along lines perpendicular to central meridian The Projection is defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian 639 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Lambert one Standard Parallel Conformal Projection on to a cone with its axis coinciding with the z axis of the ellipsoid defined by e False Easting and False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Central Meridian e Standard Parallel e Scale Factor at Origin If the Scale Factor at Origin
189. ate in GNSS Spider for this baseline The Northing coordinates configured in GNSS Spider will be transformed into the Height monitoring coordinate system Use this button to automatically create points in the Point Editor for all active Products The coordinates configured in GNSS Spider will be transformed into the monitoring coordinate system and used to set the Null and other coordinate types Notes e For high accuracy monitoring applications only the GPS quality indicator level 4 ambiguity fixed phase position is accepted The quality level refers to the GPS Quality Indicator in the NMEA GGA 157 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en format e Each baseline product can be also activated and deactivated in GNSS Spider Only active Products are displayed in Leica GeoMoS Nivel20 200 Nivel IDs Each Nivel sensor has an address ID that is configured with the Nivel configuration software that is included with the sensor Since up to 32 Nivel sensors can be configured in serial GeoMoS needs the ID to be able to identify individual Nivel sensors In this field the IDs of all Nivel sensors connected to this serial port should be listed separated by commas Nivel Parameters General n Sensor Name Nivel20 2x0 Cancel Description Sensor Location Point1 ki Points Specific Nivel IDs 28FZ Ex 1 2 8 1 9 4 2 You must enter at least one but maximum 32 IDs Every Nivel sensor has a unique address c
190. ation End Date The end date for the manual daily average calculation Press this button to calculate the daily average for all points between the start and end date entered above 290 GeoMoS Monitor Auto Export Settings Background information The export of data can be done from GeoMoS Monitor The data can be exported automatically For the automatic export the SQL Server Agent has to be started Important The export is not available for external devices The used SQL command not supports the access to any external device To open the Auto Export Settings dialog Important MSDE only For the automatic export the SQL Server Agent has to be started Fo SQL Server Service Manaus ses l E Server HNBBRON si SOL Server Agent v Hetresh services b Start Eontinue n Pause Stop Services JV Auto start service when OS starts erveragent Follow these steps to open the Auto Export Settings dialog From the File menu select Configuration Auto Export Settings The Auto Export Settings dialog will be displayed 291 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Auto Export Settings Local Export Automatically Export Data Older Than Days Cancel Store Files In E Fms mesoa Beoeo r r Select a time range in days All data older than the selected range will be exported If you select 30 days data older than 30 days will be every 30 days exported Enter a path where the data s
191. ation configuration or close program Re stricted Can start and stop measuring edit points point groups profiles and measurement cycles Cannot change critical settings such as limit classes event messages point coordinates delete database records or close program Note The User Level is configured independently for Monitor and Analyzer 88 GeoMoS Monitor To open User Level Follow these steps to open the user level E The User Level dialog is displayed Select the desired user level Select from the menu File User Level or click on the toolbar User Level button level is higher than the existing user level a Password dialog will be displayed 4 If the new user level is lower than the existing user level then no further entry is necessary and the dialog can be closed by pressing the OK button If the new user automatically 5 Enter the Password for the new user level and press the OK button The password is case sensitive The User Level dialog will be automatically closed if the password is correct The available functionality and access rights for the selected user level will be activated The functionality that is not accessible for a particular user level will be grayed out The current user level is displayed in the Status Bar Set Password Passwords can be defined to protect the access to the various user levels When Administrator is selected as the user level in the User Level dia
192. ation process by describing the minimum settings only 49 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tour IV Setup a RT Positioning Product Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to configure a RT Positioning Product in GNSS Spider and connect it in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager Procedure Follow these steps to setup a RT Positioning Product Step 1 Configure RT Positioning Products in GNSS Spider Follow these steps to configure RT Positioning Product in GNSS Spider Open the local site server Switch with the Tabbed View to the Site tab Start the reference and monitoring sites Switch with the Tabbed View to the RT Positioning tab Click into the RT Positioning Products window and select New amp ldots from the context menu Now the RT Product dialog appears Create a new RT Positioning Product with the following settings Set Send positions to as GeoMoS Set the Initialisation as Quasi Static Set the Data Rate as 1Hz Licenses in the sensor manager per product where as the GNSS Spider sensor uses only 10 Sensor Licenses for all products Ensure sites are connected started that the RT Positioning Products are active and that RTK solutions are available CQ m GDOP Sats _ Last Change x si z Distance Product Name Site code Ref Site code Sendto _ Proces _ Initialisation wt 0 051 3 1 6 20 12 2005 13 21 41 4278707 8517 722199 2679 4659686 2355 19 934 k
193. ations in X Y and Z direction For a Classical 2D a One Step or a Two Step Transformation dx and dy correspond to translations in local Easting and Northing 624 Coordinate System Manager Rx Ry Rotations around the X Y and Z axis For a Classical 2D Transformation as Rz well as for the One Step and Two Step Transformation only Rz is available With plane grid coordinates this is the axis being perpendicular to the plane Any rotation of such a plane system is about the Z axis SE Scale factor in ppm e g mm km 625 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Transformation Properties Pre transformation Background Information This page is only available for Two Step transformations and enables you to display the properties of the Pre transformation used in the calculation of Two Step transformations The parameters are not editable Pre transformation Settings Fid Description Name Name of Pre transformation Type The Type is fixed to Classical 3D Only Classical 3D transformations are allowed 7 emanaren o Last Date and Time the Transformation was last modified mama TS Displays the ellipsoid A and ellipsoid B properties of the selected Pre transformation Note When applying a Two Step transformation in a coordinate system always the ellipsoid associated with that coordinate system is used for the calculation even if this collides with ellipsoid B of the Pre transformation The ellipsoid B of the Pre transformation
194. ause state it is possible to continue or stop the measurement cycle To continue the measurement cycle press the Pause button again When the system is paused for more than 10 minutes the system will automatically reactivate the measurement cycle The measurement process is continued from the next measurement or action and not re initialized Attention Pausing the measurement cycle can lead to delays in the scheduled times or in extreme cases bottle necks in the measurement process Measure Point Group p This button is used for Manual Measurement 319 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Manual Measurement A individual point group can be selected and measured The function is only possible when the automatic measurement process is inactive Manual measurements are useful to check the measurement cycle of a point group after the points have been learnt Select a Point Group from the list in the main window Select the menu Measurement Start Stop Point Group or click the toolbar button Measure Point Group B Click the toolbar button again or select the menu Measurement Start Stop Point Group to stop the measurement of the point group a The results are calculated and saved in the database 320 GeoMoS Monitor Measurement Priority Background information The various Point Groups have different priorities in the measurement sequence The priority determines the behavior of the system in the case that there is an overlap in
195. automatic measurements can not be started if a Normal point group does not exist in the measurement cycle The measurements from the point group with type Normal should be configured as the main point group of the measurement cycle The control point coordinate calculations and other point group measurements such as FreeStation PPM Orientation Only Vz Correction and the Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements are executed in relation to the Normal point group The control point coordinate calculations and the Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements can be configured in the Options dialog Point Groups with Type Free Station or Distance Intersection When a point group with the type FreeStation or Distance Intersection is measured the control point coordinates will be calculated when the point group has been measured If the option to calculate the control point coordinates is also set in the Options dialog then the coordinates of the control point will be calculated at the beginning of the point group with the type Normal according to the settings in the Option dialog The point group with the type FreeStation Distancelntersection has the highest priority and will not be interrupted by other overlapping point groups in the measurement cycle If the FreeStation Orientation has been selected in the Options dialog then the orientation of the Total Station will also be updated when the FreeStation Distancelntersection point group is measured
196. ay measurement values ie Hz angle Vz angle Slope Distance etc in the report table 389 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Create Color Palette Follow these steps to create Color Palette Select from the menu Configuration Create Color Palette The Create Color Palette dialog appears Create Color Palette PR Name MiningPalettel OK Cancel Press OK to confirm of Cancel to abort the function The new color palette must be activated in the Chart FX Properites dialog The Chart FX Properites dialog show all possibilities for customizing the graphics Select from the Graphic toolbar the A button or right click and select from the context menu the Properties menu 3 Enter a Name for the new color palette 7 The Chart FX Properites dialog appears Edit the new color palette to your needs 8 Press OK to confirm of Cancel to abort the function 390 GeoMoS Analyzer Background Map Background information The geo referencing component enables you to manage background images for use within the Site Map A referenced image is attached to a project and can appear as background image in the Site Map Background images support you in identifying the location of monitoring points in a map and navigation to the corresponding time line diagrams Procedure Follow these steps to load and configure a background map Open the Background Map dialog Assign a background image 3 Reference a background image See a
197. baselines are not permitted and the rover site and reference site must be of the same type real or simulated Select the real time output None GeoMoS Modem COM port TCP IP port NTRIP caster Select the output format with the Message type field Select L1 only or L1 L2 Processing L1 L2 processing is of course recommended in case the sensor supports it Select the satellite system Select the type of Ambiguity initialisation On Known Point While Moving or Quasi Static The Channel tab is inactive when selecting GeoMosS in the Send Position To field If you select TCP IP in the Send positions to field you must configure the Channel tab Select the Logging tab 479 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en New RT Positioning Product INACTIVE General Channel Logging Rates iV Path le temp E Product length i g Archive type Noe S i Clean up files Neve o Cho ose a Path to log the real time output to files if desired Each RT Positioning Product must have a unique path Hint Hourly files will be created with the file naming convention ProductName_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS rll Select the Rates tab 480 GNSS Spider New RT Positioning Product INACTIVE General Channel Logging Fates Data rate Is Enter the position output Date rate Note Calculation is done at a minimum of 1 Hz faster rates can be selected if the streaming rate are of a corresponding rate Th
198. be displayed in the Data Editor or Cancel to abort the displacement computation When the coordinates are changed the time is automatically set to the current time Note The time should be edited after the coordinates have been changed The reference coordinates are valid from the time defined in the time column Reference point group calculations will not be post processed for measurements occurring before the defined time of the reference coordinates Changing the time for the reference coordinates should be done with extreme care because it influences the time period of the post processing calculations Erroneous input can cause drastic effects in the calculations and post processing functionality 411 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Reference Point Co ordinate Calculation Stand Point Station Displacement 1 0 m 984 532984 m f 049 446069 m f5 9602 m Apply Cancel AW Station point The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will be stored in the database The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will not be stored in the database Further information Data Editor Overview Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Data Editor Meteo Data Editor Setups Data Editor Manual Coordinates 412 GeoMoS Analyzer Data Editor Manual Coordinates Background information Type the coordinates of the manually measured points in the respective coordinate
199. better contrast of the representation of points to the attached background image 396 GeoMoS Analyzer Post Processing Background information The post processing functionality is license protected This functionality can be purchased with GeoMoS Analyzer Option 1 article number 774 138 Please contact your Leica representative The post processing re computes the data over the effected time period All data between the period of the earliest edited data and the latest edited data will be post processed The data will be processed according to the options selected in the Post Processing dialog e g Type of Meteo Model When the Process button is pressed the data will be saved and post processed The original results will be overwritten with the new computed results and stored in the database It is recommended to back up the database before doing post processing This is especially so when you are not experienced or a complicated reprocessing may be done e g to correct the effects of an unstable reference point The time period for the post processing is dependent on the time of the measured data that was edited It is possible that the measured data that is edited can effect other data outside the selected time period In this case it is possible that the post processing processes data that is before or after the selected time period This must be done to keep the data and computations consistent Open and use the Post Processin
200. ble below describes the fields in the Messages tab 342 GeoMoS Monitor Information messages are displayed with an exclamation mark Messages are displayed with an exclamation mark in a yellow triangle Messages cannot be acknowledged Messages that have been manually acknowledged are displayed with a green tick mark Messages that are acknowledged automatically are displayed with a black tick mark Warning messages are displayed with a white cross on a red circle Warning messages can be manually or automatically acknowledged Acknowledgeable Messages The user must manually or automatically acknowledge acknowledgeable messages when the column Acknowledge is set to Yes and the symbol appears Not acknowledgeable Messages The column Acknowledge is set to No and the symbol a appears The time the message was generated The sensor that is associated with the message The profile of the point associated with the message The name of the point associated with the message 343 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Example 17 11 2009 17 37 07 EMail B TPS1200 Absolute limit check level 1 exceeded 17 11 2009 17 37 07 3D Vector Movement 0 029 Tolerance 0 020 m Automatically If selected the view will be automatically scrolled to show the most recent message display the last message Note fa message occurs more than once during one minute the message will be displayed only once Acknowledge Messag
201. bsolute limit ed N Limit 1 nent 0 6 0 5 mm m f Ackno D 05 20 K vel20 Absolute limit Nivel_Y Limit 1 it 0 6 ance 0 5 mm m Ackno O 3 30 0 Absolute limit ded Nivel_ Limit 1 Movement 0 6 mmm f Ackno O 20 44 00 0 vel20 A e lim ded Nivel_Y Limit 1 Movement 0 6 mmimJ Ackno 04 20 44 30 vel20 vel20 A mit ed Nivel_Y Limit 1 Movement 0 6 ance 0 5 mmjm Ackno 04 5 00 e120 livel20 A Nivel_Y L t 0 6 0 5 mmym Ackno 04 45 3 vel20 te vel_Y Li Movernent 0 6 To e 0 5 mm m A Message Monitoring1 Info 0 5 3 C41800 group measurement Finished Pointgroup Inside g Ackno 0 6 0 Nivel20 A t ded Nivel_Y Limit 1 Movement 0 6 mmm ackno 0 3 30 vel20 Nivel20 Abso t exceeded Nivel_Y Limit 1 Movement 0 7 anc mmjm Warning TCA1800 Control2 Short time limit exceeded Hz Limit 1 Movement 0 0041 Tolerance 0 0030 dec Info 04 08 2005 21 00 31 TCA1800 Point group measurement finished Pointgroup Inside_Control A Message 04 08 2005 21 01 00 TCA1800 Monitoring1 Point not in profile Warning 04 08 2005 21 01 00 TCA1800 Monitoring Short time limit exceeded Hz Limit 1 Movement 0 0031 Tolerance 0 0030 dec Info 04 08 2005 21 01 00 TCA1800 Point group measurement Finished Pointgroup Inside_Monitoring v lt gt IV Automatically display the last message Overview Last Actions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status User Level Administrator 21 01 25 The ta
202. c contents Background Information GeoMoS software License Models and function View Licenses dialog Background Information The Leica Geosystems Software Licensing is based on a reliable and secure technology that does not require a Software Protection Key Dongle The new Leica Geosystems Software Licensing requires an Entitlement ID for example 00101 60609 00013 85723 8FF41 The Entitlement ID can be found on the Invoice and on the Delivery Note of the purchased software product In addition it can be also found on a separate Entitlement Certificate on paper or in digital form i e HTML document Leica GeoMoS uses the License Model Floating Floating licenses can be shared between multiple users working on different PCs within the same local network When one user finishes using a license another user can begin to use it The Floating Licenses are managed by a Local License Server running in the customer s network called CLM Administrator Server Important You need an active Internet connection to activate and update your license Once installed and activated this internet connection is no longer required 331 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Ai For more detailed information about the new Leica Geosystems Software f X Licensing please refer to the document Leica Geosystems Software Licensing Introduction amp Installation www leica geosystems com geomos gt Select the Download tab Geo
203. c coordinates to Grid coordinates or vice versa Most of the Projections can be defined using one of the methods below Alternatively you may define your own User defined Projection in the form of a user written program or you may use one of the Customized Projections see below The Projection types that can be user defined are Mercator Transverse Mercator TM Oblique Mercator Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Cassini Soldner Lambert one Standard Parallel Lambert two Standard Parallels Polar Stereographic Double Stereographic Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic User defined Certain map Projections that are not definable using one of the methods above have been hardwired in LGO and can neither be deleted nor changed These Projections are called Customized Projections and they have pre defined Ellipsoids The relationship between these Projections and the Ellipsoids are fixed as follows Projection Ellipsoid Czech and Slovak Bessel DK S34 Bornholm International Hayford DK S34 Jylland International Hayford lt DK S34 Sjelland International Hayford 633 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Dutch Finnish KKJ x Hungarian x Malayan x New Zealand x Romania Stereo 70 x Swiss x Swiss95 x Note Bessel International Hayford GRS 1967 Everest International Hayford Krassowski Bessel Bessel e Defining a Coordinate System the user has the choice between Projections
204. cal 3D Classical 2D One Step or Two Step is displayed and hall gauged Height Displays the height mode of the selected Transformation The height mode is Last Date and Time the Transformation was last modified cette eee o Restricts the use of the Transformation to convert coordinates of the selected Ellipsoid Datum only For Classical 3D One Step or Two Step it is usually set to WGS1984 Ellip A can only be modified if the Transformation is not currently in use in any Coordinate System definition If an Ellipsoid for System B is defined the Transformation is restricted to be used to convert to the selected Datum only For Classical 3D it is usually set to a local Ellipsoid Since One Step Transformations typically work without knowledge of a local ellipsoid Ellip B is usually set to None in this case Projection Restricts the use of a Classical 2D Transformation to a particular Projection When editing the properties of a One Step Transformation the projection edit field is not shown at all since One Step Transformations are based upon their own kind of projection They are not related to a classical map projection In case of a Two Step transformation the projection used is pre defined as the projection attached to the System B Project in Datum amp Map With the Classical 3D Transformation you are allowed for the choice of two different transformation models Bursa Wolf or Molodensky Badekas dx dy dz Transl
205. ccceceeeeeeeeececeeeeeceeeceaanaeceeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeeeeessunaeeeeess 684 NZGD49 2000 New Zealand ccececeeceececeeeeeeeceneeeeceeeeeeeseceacaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeaeeeeeess 686 NADGON U SA nd oe lle lvl ee ended eee ee 688 Other CSCS Mode S r a e aae aa ai a bette dan a aaa a a adebed eE 690 Example of a User written Program cccccecececeeeeeeeceenceeeseeeeeeseeaeeeteeaeeeseenaaeees 693 File Format of INPUT USR and OUTPUT USR sasssassessssnsseesrnrrrnssresrrrrrrnrsrrsrrrrrrnn 698 vii Introduction to GeoMoS Introduction GeoMoS is a system to permanently observe movements of objects such as buildings dams and slopes GeoMoS checks the measurements and results against user defined limits If a limit has been exceeded a message can be sent The measurement and results can be analyzed with a special application It is possible to connect different sensors total stations GNSS meteo geotechnical The position of a total station instrument can be defined with GNSS or reference points The system also contains a sophisticated measurement cycle manager different modern and flexible communication possibilities cable bus system radio LAN WLAN GSM GPRS UMTS and WiMax automatic calculation functionality and a variety of graphical and numerical representations of measurements and results GeoMoS consists of two main components Monitor and Analyzer The network adjustment and deformation analysis
206. ce an image the local grid coordinates of the image points have to be known so that points can be matched Once the points have been matched the image can be oriented i e referenced to the local grid Follow these steps to reference a background image and match common points To identify a point in the background image zoom into the area of the image where the common point is located When you have identified the point double click onto it or select Set Reference Point from the context menu to insert it into the image A little cross S indicates the location of the point The Geo Referencing Point dialog appears Geo Referencing Point Geo Referencing Point Define Point From List TPS1 Station v C Define Point With Coordinates Easting Northing You can either define a point from the existing point coordinates or enter the Easting or Northing of each common point manually The image coordinates and the local grid coordinates of the point are matched When you have identified all common points proceed with the Reference button The image will be oriented according to the local grid 393 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Note The more common points you have the better image distortions can be accounted for You need to define at least two reference points Referenced images are indicated with the following icon R in the upper right corner of the view In the lower right window the status of the image changes from u
207. changed even if the result has changed The results set as invalid are not displayed in the graphic The graph curve connects the last valid result to the next valid result as a continuous line The effect on the graphic can be seen by setting results valid or invalid and pressing the refresh button in the Displacement graphic Invalid results will not be shown in the graphic Important The valid or invalid status has no effect on the Multiple Graphs tab Export the report The contents of the active report report pane data editor comment editor will be export in an ASCII file format Follow these steps to export a report Press the right mouse button in the report view and select Save As from right mouse menu The Save dialog appears Select a folder where you want to store the file and type in a file name Select one of the available formats txt csv or prn EJ Press Save to create an ASCII file The system closes the dialog and creates a export file of the current active report in the selected folder with the selected filename 437 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Notice Only the visible columns will be exported If there is no selected lines in the table the whole table will be exported If lines have been selected only the selected lines will be exported TXT The columns will be separated by a tabulator The columns will be separated by a comma This format can be directly imported to EXCEL PRN Th
208. cify one of more servers here and loca detvery fails for some reason they wil be iied gt DIE 4s one alter another in sequence unl ane of them accepts the message This maximizes the chance of successhd delivery SMTP Gateway S SMTP Options F Tiy to dekver messages directly to destination Mees Message Queue 2 Timeouts A Check poit 25 is open by your ISP Server Rephes GBP POP3 Optom E Loca Domains Gateways List Press Add to add a new SMTP Gateway Enter the SMTP Gateway details 589 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Edit SMIP Gateway details Description Sometimes email cannot be delivered directly to your target for example your ISP is blocking port 25 In this case you can use intermediary SMTP gateways You can specify one or more servers here and if local delivery fails for some reason they will be tried one after another in sequence until one of them accepts the message This maximizes the chance of successful delivery Gateway details Host name smtp gmail com SMTP Port 25 User name geomos spider gmail com Password MMMRMRRKKK Verify Password i Press OK to save The new SMTP Gateway will be visible in the main SMTP Server window 590 Troubleshooting SMTP Server 2h fe Save settings Restore sethings Help Home Page iw Logging Eg Authentication A SMTP Gateways Secuity Descnption B IP Range Lists Sometimes email cannot be delivered directly to pour
209. ck on the new limit class and choose Add Observation Type Choose Observation Type List OF Observation Types 4 Cancel Longitudinal Displacement Transverse Displacement Height Displacement MyObservationT ype 1 MyObservationT ype 2 Select the observation that you would like to make a limit check on from the list The new observation type will be shown in the tree view under the limit class that you created It is possible to select standard system observation types and user defined observation types Select the Type from the list In the right hand window will be shown the four limit check types Activate the types of limit checks you wish to make on this observation type Enter the tolerance and time values for the limit check Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all different limit classes and observation types pe Confirm the entry with OK e The dialog will be closed and the new limit classes will be saved in the database Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only 257 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Read below to learn about all properties in detail Limit Classes Default Limit Classes Al Type Interval hours Limit 1 m Limit 2 m Limit 3 ml O Absolute Limit Check 0 020 0 040 0 100 Longitudinal Displac E Short Time Limit Check 4 00 0 015 0 030 0 075 Transverse Displace Height Displacemen 2D Vector TPS Long Time Limit
210. connected correctly Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 150 GeoMoS Monitor Sensor Manager Sensor Manager Topic contents Open the Sensor Manager Sensor Settings Total Stations GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products and PP Positioning Products Nivel20 200 Campbell Scientific Datalogger Adda Campbell Scientific Datalogger Campbell Datalogger Parameters dialog Context menu Open the Sensor Manager Select from the menu Configuration Sensor Manager or click the toolbar Sensor amp The Sensor Setup dialog is displayed Manager button Sensor Manager AE active ype Lsensoe Teoman cere TPS1000 10 50 19 241 4001 Cancel TM30 TS30 12 25 32 251 7001 o Ca TPsSigon 10 50 19 242 400i GNSS NMEA AHLADBUSTO1 10003 Insert GNSS Spider PP Praducts SHLADBUSTO1 S877 GNSS Spider RT Products AHLADBUSTO1 9877 i Settings GNSS Spider PP Products lacalhasti9877 10 GNSS Spider RT Products localhost 9877 Communication Nivel20 2x0 COM1 9600 Campbell Datalogger test selfip org 50099 Temperature 515 10 50 19 291 4002 Combined Temperature Pressure STS COMS 9600 Rain Gauge COM3 19200 al Delete License Count 195 999 St a be be be gt 90 ry r Test o O o o Em Oe 151 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 152 The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Sensor Manager dialog box Field
211. coordinates or coordinate system invalid Data is being received from the GNSS sensor but the quality is not equal to that set in the Sensor Settings There is a very big difference between the coordinate received from the GNSS sensor and the null measurement The Total Station control point and the target point being measured are the same The GNSS coordinate could not be transformed possibly due to an invalid coordinate or because the Coordinate System is not set correctly The observation exceeded the specified Short Time limit level 2 set in the limit class Short time limit E3warning check level 2 exceeded Short time limit EQwarning check level 3 exceeded Long time limit E3Warning check level 2 exceeded Long time limit E3warning check level 3 The observation exceeded the specified Short Time limit level 3 set in the limit class The observation exceeded the specified Long Time limit level 2 set in the limit class The observation exceeded the specified Long Time limit level 3 set in the limit class Not enough Message 2 Not enough target points were measured for measurements the reference group FreeStation for reference Distancelntersection PPM VzCorrection or group OrientationOnly to be calculated See the point calculation group properties in the Point Group Editor 496 exceeded Absolute limit check level 2 exceeded Absolute limit check level 3 exceed
212. count when designing the executable program Output from the Geoid Model The Geoid Model must then write its values to a file called OUTPUT USR This file is a free format file that contains no header information The only additional requirement regarding the format of this file is that the Geoid Separations in meters must be written in the first column of the file For Geoid Models of Coordinate Type Geodetic or Grid any additional information 662 Coordinate System Manager i e column 2 column 3 etc which is written to the file will be ignored by LGO Each column must be separated by at least one blank space Geoid Models of Coordinate Type Geodetic with height scaling can be used to correct the geoid separations with a height dependent scale factor In this case the output file must contain two columns in each line which are separated by at least one blank space The first value is interpreted as the separation and the second value as a scale factor correction Note If a geoid separation bigger than 500 meters is written to the OUTPUT USR file the geoid separation will not be displayed in your project Such values can be used to mark areas where the geoid model is invalid 663 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Compute Geoid Separations This command enables you to compute Geoid Separations for the points in a Project if a Geoid Model is defined in the Coordinate System used It replaces the requirement for you to man
213. ct the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor The Measurement Cycle Editor dialog will be displayed Press Insert A new line appears and the webcam can be added as Action to the measurement schedule Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Please read the remainder of this topic for more detailed information 304 GeoMoS Monitor Webcam Settings GeoMoS Webcams Stand Point Store Address Leica GeoMoS Cam GNSS Monr PP yes http geomoswebcam dyndns org record current http www n2z ch imagesvradar_gross_1 166 ait Field Button Description The name of the webcam Stand Point The sensor location of the webcam Indicates via Yes or No if the webcam images are stored in a database Address The address of the webcam Tem Press Insert to configure a webcam The Webcam Insert Camera dialog box will open GeoMoS Webcam Insert Camera Webcam Settings Name Address http Fi C Store Pictures in Database Standpoint GNSS Monr PP Comment 305 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Name o Enter the name of the webcam Enter the address of the webcam Store pictures in Check or un check to store the Database webcam pictures in a database If you want to store the webcam images to the SQL database you must check this box The webcam images can be accessed via SQL statem
214. ctive settings of the graphic options and the selected time range Press the keyboard Cursor Down key to show the graph of the next point in the point view tree With the Cursor Up key it is possible to show the previous graph Navigating in the Point View Tree To navigate in the point view tree it is necessary to click in the window Use the cursor keys on the keyboard to navigate through the tree The system navigates stepwise through all visible open nodes of the tree and shows the corresponding graphs in the main window Print The Step Mode supports the same printing capabilities as the normal mode Selec t Menu File Print or press the button Print amp or press Ctrl P 371 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Toolbar a Selec tMenu View Toolbar The Toolbar will be shown or hidden A checkmark will be shown in the menu if the Toolbar is visible 372 GeoMoS Analyzer Status Bar Select from the menu View Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar A check mark is shown next to the menu item when the Status Bar is visible Status Bar Benutzerebene Administrator 14 30 44 373 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Configuration Comments Editor Background information It is possible to define comments for points and profiles These comments can be defined for a particular time or over a time period The columns in the Comments Editor dialog can be sorted to make it easier to search for comments The comments can be
215. current system time current time 357 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Export file name The name of the DAT file to which the data will be exported Enter the time range where data should be exported Enter a path and file name where the data should be stored Click the OK button to exit this dialog All data of the selected time range will be exported The data will not be deleted from the database The dialog will be closed and the export file will be created in the selected directory The data can be imported to the database Only data older than the selected time range will be exported The data will be exported stored in the path and deleted in the database The name of the exported data is GeoMoS Export date time dat e g GeoMoS Export 19 October 2001 16 30 02 dat The data can be imported to the database Remark The dat file will be much smaller if it is zipped using WinZip or a similar tool 358 GeoMoS Analyzer Import Database Background information Already exported data that does not exist in the database can be imported to the database The import does not overwrite existing data Only new data that does not exist in the database will be imported and added to the database To open the Database Import dialog Follow these steps to open the Import Database dialog From the File menu select Database Import The Open dialog will be displayed Select the file you want to import Click Open
216. cycle The system cannot warn of overlapping measurement processes because the time of a single measurement is not exactly known Measurement time is dependent on external factors including atmospheric conditions fog and sun intensity and the type of instrument that is used To open the Measurement Cycle Editor Follow these steps to open the Measurement Cycle Editor Select the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor or click the toolbar Measurement Cycles button Sl The Measurement Cycle Editor dialog will be displayed Select the Sensor with which the point group should be measured Select the desired point group from the list Enter the required measurement information for the selected point group 7 Select the telescope position to use for the measurements ie Pos I or Pos amp Il Es Press the Insert Measurement button to insert a new measurement line Confirm with the OK button The dialog will be closed and the new measurement cycle will be saved in the 251 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en database The new measurement cycle will be activated when the automatic measurement cycle is started Pax TPSSensor i OK SI TPS1_Normal Vo Cancel TPSL TPS1_FreeStation 00 00 00 No 00 30 00 23 59 59 z o STS 00 00 00 No 00 05 00 23 59 59 Nivel220 ID N2 00 00 00 No 00 00 10 23 59 59 Nivel220 ID N3 00 00 00 No 00 00 10 23 59 59 Insert Torsion1 00 00 05 No 00 00 10 23 59 59 Torsion2 00 00 05 No 00 00 10 23 59
217. d OK Cancel Name of a W amp T Digital I O Card Address The IP address that the digital card is connected to Port The port used by the digital card Connection The used connection type LAN or cable WLAN radio link Internet mobile link This connection uses pre defined communication time out settings that apply best for the used connection type Enter a password if it is required Digital O Card from a No additional settings are required 285 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ComBox10 20 z All the links between messages and actions will be deleted GSR Displays a list of all configured actions Conditions Dialog Examples Condition Trigger Condition Trigger On Every Message Trigger On Every fio thMessage M Or o RET Sros C Trigger If ja z Delay Action I Trigger Only Between 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 What The first Message 1 that is generated in GeoMoS Monitor starts an internal happens timer After 60 minutes GeoMoS Monitor dispatches the configured Action 2 The internal timer is stopped The next Message 3 that is generated starts again an internal timer In this case additional Messages 4 are generated before the 60 minutes are elapsed GeoMoS Monitor dispatches the configured Action 5 when the 10th Message is generated The internal timer is stopped 60 minutes after the Message 3 was generated nothing happen
218. d You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established and all settings will be read 3 If the connection establishment was successfully the Setup ComBox wizard will be shown 4 Now follow the wizard step by step and insert all settings in each register At the end of the wizard press the button Apply All settings will be written to the ComBox and into GeoMos You find more details about the settings under following link ComBox Configuration 5 After the configuration the ComBox will reboot Use the Edit button to edit a selected ComBox 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to GeoMoS Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where GeoMoS is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the 112 GeoMoS Monitor ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect Note If you would like to edit your ComBox over a LAN connection make sure that the selected ComBox in the ComBox Manager dialog corresponds to the ComBox which is physically connected to the LAN 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be
219. d orientation of Total Stations Used to estimate Total Station coordinates and orientation of Total Stations Used to estimate vertical circle correction of Total Stations Used to measure critical monitoring points Point Type Used Meteo Corrections Troubleshooting Two different types of correction can be used to account for scale PPM errors in the measured slope distances from the total station corrections calculated from distance measurements to control points PPM Point Groups and corrections calculated from measured meteorological values temperature and pressure The meteo model that is used is configured in the TPS Properties Calculations in the Sensor Location Editor Both techniques have advantages and disadvantages as listed in the table below Advantage V Disadvantage X Meteo Sensor s Can be used if instrument control point is unstable Sensors are not very expensive Additional data is available for analysis May give erroneous results if not sited properly needs be in shade protected from snow Additional sensor s and cable s required A single sensor will not be able to pick up directional variations in the atmosphere Reference Distances Generally gives more accurate PPM values than meteo sensors Need good control any way for orientation Need control and instrument control point with very well known and stable coordinates
220. d Map Projection Example of a User written Program 642 Coordinate System Manager File Format of INPUT USR and OUTPUT USR Whenever LGO converts Grid coordinates to Geodetic coordinates or vice versa intermediate files are created internally which are passed to the applied Projection program In the case of a User defined program the programmer has to know the format of these intermediate files Input usr This is the file which has to be accessed to read in the coordinates to be converted into the user defined map Projection program Line 1 e Flag for identification of coordinate type e 1 geodetic coordinates e 2 grid coordinates Line 2 e Semi major axis of reference ellipsoid Line 3 e Flattening of reference ellipsoid Following lines Each line contains e incase of geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude in radians for one point e incase of grid coordinates easting and northing for one point 643 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Example of INPUT USR file for geodetic coordinates 6378137 000 0 003352810665 0 826317296827 0 167522411309 0 826317295438 0 167522411668 0 826317295735 0 167522412147 0 826317296574 0 167522411113 0 826317295208 0 167522411696 0 826317294691 0 167522410838 0 826317293977 0 167522410262 0 826317295626 0 167522410202 0 826317295911 0 167522411033 0 826317295738 0 167522410997 Example of INPUT USR file for grid coordinates 2
221. d and can neither be deleted nor edited e The Projections which are currently being used in a Coordinate System are indicated by and cannot be deleted Delete a Projection Follow these steps to delete a Projection Right click on a Projection in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting 636 Coordinate System Manager Projection Properties Background Information This Property Sheet enables you to display edit the Projection Properties Important Information e The Projections indicated by amp are hardwired and cannot be modified e The Projections which are currently being used in a Coordinate System are indicated by and cannot be renamed but the parameters may be edited Edit a Projection Follow these steps to edit a Projection Right click on a Projection in the Explorer View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes The parameters may vary depending on the type of Projection that is selected Mercator Transverse Mercator TM Oblique Mercator Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Cassini Soldner Lambert one Standard Parallel Lambert two Standard Parallel Polar Stereographic Double Stereographic Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic User defined Ps Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 637 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Mercator Conformal Projection onto a cylinder with its axis lying
222. d axis Lets you displayed interlaced colors between a range of gridlines in the chart area The main color is taken from the color used in the major gridlines and the secondary color is taken from the background box set in the general dialog Graphics amp Context Menu Properties 467 GNSS Spider Add and Configure Sites Background information A site is a GNSS sensor connected to a Spider server Sites can be created and configured in GNSS Spider either with the Site Setup Wizard or manually The Wizard will start automatically if you open a server that has no site defined yet Procedure Follow these steps to add and configure Sites Create and configure a Site with the Site Setup Wizar Create and configure a Site manuall Connect Disconnect a Site 1 Create and configure a Site with the Site Setup Wizard The Site Setup Wizard is a tool that guides you through the following stages of a site configuration Setting up communication to the a sensor Providing site location information Configuration of sensor operation parameters 469 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Follow these steps to create and configure a Site with the Site Setup Wizard 470 1 Open Local site server Click on Tools from the menu From the drop down menu select N Wizard or select the corresponding toolbar button 4 The Wizard Welcome dialog will be displayed You can use Next gt and lt Back to navigate through the Wiza
223. d by pressing the OK button If the new user level is higher than the existing user level a Password dialog will be displayed automatically Enter the Password for the new user level and press the OK button The password is case sensitive The User Level dialog will be automatically closed if the password is correct The available functionality and access rights for the selected user level will be activated The functionality that is not accessible for a particular user level will be grayed out The current user level is displayed in the Status Bar Set Password Passwords can be defined to protect the access to the various user levels When Administrator is selected as the user level in the User Level dialog the Settings button is active The password for the User and the Administrator can be set in the Set Password dialog 361 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Follow these steps to set a Password Change to the user level to Administrator Gg Select the menu File User Level ea Click the Set Password button The Settings dialog is displayed re ewer eean Remnant cenit After the second confirmation the passwords will be saved and activated A password dialog will appear when changing to a higher user level It is only possible to change the user level when the correct password for the respective user level is entered When the password fields for the User and Administrator are empty it is not necessary to enter
224. d the Page Setup settings will be saved 91 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Print Preview To open Print Preview Follow these steps to open the Print Preview Select from the menu File Print Preview The GeoMoS Monitor print preview will be displayed The window shows the active view with the defined page setup Prints the current print preview Shows the print preview of the next page Shows the preview of the previous page Two Pages One Shows one or two pages at a time Zooms out Zooms in Closes the print preview window and returns to the application 92 GeoMoS Monitor Print To open the Print dialog Follow these steps to open the Print dialog Select Menu File Print The Print dialog appears Change the printer settings as required Press the OK button or press the Print button Bor press the keys Ctrl P The graph or the report of the active pane will be printed with the selected printer settings Exit To Exit e Select from the menu File Exit Ends the GeoMoS Monitor application All measurement cycles and data transfer is stopped If the measurement cycle is active when the program is close the measurement cycle will be activated and continue to measure when the GeoMoS Monitor is started again 93 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en View Configuration Toolbar e Select from the menu View Configuration Toolbar Shows or hides the Configuration Toolbar A check mark is shown next to the menu
225. d to read from this directory Switch with the Tabbed View to the Manual Export tab n case you need to process data history you can select the start and end time with the XML file length Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog Select the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor The Measurement Cycle Editor dialog will be displayed Press Insert A new line appears and the XML Export can be added as Action to the measurement schedule Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog GeoMoS Adjustment Settings Active Project GeoMoS Database Reference Points Parameters Location of Files Manual Export GeoMoS Monitor The table below describes the fields in the GeoMoS Adjustment Settings dialog box w ac Reference E GeoMoS Adjustment Settings Active Project TEST PROJECT Points pa a Reference Points Parameters Location of Files Manual Export Select all stable reference points TPS1 KAPF_ST A Check all TPS1 TEL_POLE donc Uncheck All T TPS2 CHURCH_BA_D TPS2 CHURCH_BA_U TPS2 CHURCH_REBSTEIN TPS2 GEB3 TPS2 HAG TPS2 HOEHLERSTR TPS2 HOUSE_BAL TPS2 KAPF_ST TPS2 MOHREN 2 O O O O E O Oo oO O jC C O OK Cancel This list displays per default all point names that are measured with the measurement mode ATR or ATR small field of view It is important to pre define reference points that are assumed to be stable The minimum number
226. deleted Delete a Transformation Follow these steps to delete a Coordinate System Right click on a Transformation in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting 622 Coordinate System Manager Transformation Properties This Property Sheet enables you to display edit the Transformation Properties Important Information e Only the Properties of Classical 3D Classical 2D One Step or Two Step Transformations may be displayed e For Two Step transformations an additional page Pre transformation is accessible Edit a Transformation Follow these steps to edit a Transformation Right click on a Transformation in the Report View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes in the page General Note Only the fields with white background may be edited at the particular instant Rat Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 623 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Transformation Properties General Background Information This Property Page enables you to display edit the Transformation Properties In addition to the Properties of a Classical 2D or Classical 3D Transformation those of any One Step or Two Step Transformation may be displayed General Settings feet ee Name of Transformation The Name can only be changed if the Transformation is not being currently used in any Coordinate System definition Type The Type Classi
227. dels all TCRA models all TCRP models TCA1201M for long range monitoring only available as TPS1200 series Note The TCA1201M should only be used with the IR EDM modes e g Distance IR SignalScan IR The EDM mode LO is not available TM30 and TS30 Series The TM30 series and TS30 series of total stations from Leica Geosystems includes the following instruments that are supported M30 0 5 164 GeoMoS Monitor TM30 1 TS30 0 5 GNSS Sensors GPS NMEA The GPS NMEA sensor is used to read in NMEA GGA format messages from a GPS sensor via a serial COM port All sensors that support the NMEA GGA message are supported including the following sensors from Leica Geosystems GX1230 RTK SR530 RTK GPS NMEA TCP IP The GPS NMEA TCP IP sensor is used to read in NMEA GGA format messages from a GPS sensor via a TCP IP connection All sensors that support the NMEA GGA message are supported including the above sensors from Leica Geosystems GNSS Spider RT Positioning Product This sensor type is used to connect to RT Positioning Products configured in a Leica GNSS Spider site server All active RT Positioning Products configured in GNSS Spider with the Send To option set to GeoMoS can be used in GeoMoS Thus many GNSS sensors maybe connected using a single connection in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager to a GNSS Spider server GNSS Spider PP Positioning Product This sensor type is used to connect to PP Pos
228. dialog box Type Indicates via Comment Point or Profile the type of the comment Lists the point name or profile name in case of a point of profile comment Stat o Defines the time when the comment begins pEnd ss Defines the time when the comment ends General o Shows the text of the comment fae ee Adds a new general comment insert Powe Conmnert Adds a new comment specifically related to a chosen point Incest Profile Comment Adds a new comment specifically related to a chosen profile Delete Selected Comment Deletes a comment To Edit comments To edit a comment double click in the comment field to modify a comment Press the enter button to finish editing Every field is editable 375 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Comment Filter Each column of the dialog can be filtered Click on the black arrow in the header of the column you want to filter The Show All option shows all comments without filtering Select individual to make a query with a maximum of two conditions You can select the filters out of the lists amp endash the comments will be shown defined by the selected options Sorting It is possible to sort the columns ascending or descending It is also possible to hide and show the different columns by pressing the right mouse button on the column header to select a option Print Comments Follow these steps to print comments Press the right mouse button in the spreadsheet and select Print
229. dinate system The coordinate system for the project can be selected Follow these steps to configure the coordinate system Select the menu Configuration Options or click the toolbar Options button D The Options dialog window opens Change the settings as required Confirm the changes with the OK button 35 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Step 6 Determine the control point coordinates The control point of a total station is a point in the Point Editor dialog and displayed with the symbol The total station has to be connected in the Sensor Manager dialog or the Sensor Setup dialog with a point There are two possibilities to get the coordinates of the control point 1 Manual Coordinates If you know the coordinates of the control point you can enter them in the Point Editor dialog 2 Free Station with imported coordinates If you do not know the coordinates of the control point you can import known points connect the sensor to the point in the sensor location dialog and make a Free Station for the control point To make it easier for the beginning only the Manual coordinates are explained now Please read in the help for further information for the import of points and free station Follow these steps to configure manual coordinates Select from the menu Configuration Point Editor or click the toolbar Point Editor The Point Editor dialog will be displayed Press the Insert Point button to create a ne
230. displacement cannot be used for analysis Operation of system and analysis of data is more complicated in a 1D than in a normal 3D system Depends on the atmospheric conditions The atmospheric corrections should be Troubleshooting The signal scan applied for long distance measurements procedure requires a very good fast full duplex communication line Accuracy is approx 0 3m Warning The measurement mode Signal Scan should only be used if it is not possible to measure with ATR It is not possible to use the measurement mode Signal Scan and Distance Only together because the coordinate calculation and distance reduction parameters are globally applied for a total station See TPS Properties Calculations for information on how to configure the coordinate calculation to full measurement and the distance reduction to using vertical angles Principle of Signal Scanning A scan is made to find the edges of the signal above below left and right of the prism which are then used to calculate the position of the centre of the prism for the angle measurements Due to the typical pattern of the signal return shown in the diagram below a pair of limits upper and lower and some special calculations are used to reliably determine the edge of the signal Since many measurements must be taken to find the edges signal scan is quite slow A single scan may take between 30 seconds and two minutes
231. displayed The button System Info shows all relevant information about the current system 419 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tree Point Tree View Background information The tree view lists all points profiles point groups you created and the sensors stored in the database The points profiles point groups and sensors can be selected for display in the graphics and reports Set the check mark in front of the point profile point group or sensor in the tree to select it for display Root C Campbell Datalogger O North BA Sensor Dts Bregenz O f smxgoz Of Gmxgo2 O5 Nivel 2 D1 Nivel 3 O i Rebstein O i Rhenusana PP 10m O f Rhenusana PP 24h O fE Ruthi Ces Temp Mes Temp Campbell OR 1PS1_Station O TPS2_Station OE 1P51_FreeStation Oit 1P51_Normal Ob 1P51_ORIENTATION Dk 1P51_SignalScan Dk 1P52_FreeStation i 1P52_Normal Oit 1P54_Distanceintersection Ot 1P54_Normal HF virtual Sensor Torsion_point_1 Torsion_point_2 Note The specific sensor values e g Total Station Compensator Longitudinal tilt can only be displayed on the Multiple Graphs tab Change Selection The point can be selected or de selected by clicking the check box front of the point name Selecting a point group profile or sensor group automatically selects or de selects all points 420 GeoMoS Analyzer in the point groups or profile Clicking the root node of the tree selects or de selects all poi
232. duces the messages Point not found Point out of tolerance or Positioning failure the point will be included in the Repeat Measurement point group A point that produces the message Blunder tolerance is not included in the Repeat Measurement point group The point groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat measurements will be executed at the end of the point group with type Normal The two point groups have the lowest priority The point groups are re initialized before every point group with the type Normal is measured and then dynamically defined during the measurement process 324 GeoMoS Monitor Tools Point Viewer Background information The point viewer lists the 5 coordinate types used by GeoMoS Null Reference Current Scan Setup for each point It is useful especially for checking the Null coordinate that is set See Coordinate Types for further information To open the Point Viewer Step Action pede Select from the menu Tools Point Viewer 2 The Point Viewer window is displayed 325 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Shrink Database To open Shrink Database 4 Select from the menu Tools Shrink Database 2 The Shrink Database window is displayed Shrink Database Messages TPSMeasurements Close l Observations Results Pictures Delete all object from the selected tables that are older than 30 Days Shrink Database The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Shr
233. ducts are GNSS baselines that are computed using logged RINEX file products PP Positioning Products enable accurate position computation also in extremely difficult GNSS environments caused for example by severe obstructions where real time processing may fail or gives unsatisfying results Topic contents Create File Products Create and Edit PP Positioning Products Logging of Results Create File Products A file product is a recorded data set of GNSS raw observations Usually they are stored in RINEX format but it is also possible in LEICA MDB format Quality files are also considered to be file products File Products are needed for archiving of the raw data and GNSS monitoring using PP Positioning Products Follow these steps to create a File Product 1 Open a server Switch with the Tabbed View to the File Products tab Click into the File Products window and select New from the context menu The New product dialog will be displayed 484 GNSS Spider New product General Contents FTP Advanced Product name New product Site name and code Product type Archive type V Use multiple extensions Root path CAGPS SpideData Directory naming convention Site Year Month Day of Month Clean up files Atert week Example path and filename C GPS Spider Data 200541 241 6 unkn350q mx zip Enter a Product name Each File Product must have a name Select
234. dvantage of the interpolation approach is that it is restricted in the area over which it can be applied This is mainly due to the fact that there is no provision for scale factor in the projection In practical terms the area over which this transformation approach can be applied is about 10 15km square Other transformation approaches Classical 3D Classical 2D One Step Two Step Which approach to use Stepwise 619 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Which approach to use This question is almost impossible to answer since the approach used will depend totally on local conditions and information If you wish to keep the GPS measurements totally homogenous and the information about the local map projection is available the Classical 3D approach would be the most suitable If you are unsure of the local height information but the position information is accurate and you wish to keep the GPS measurements homogenous in position then the Stepwise approach may be the most suitable For cases where there is no information regarding the ellipsoid and or map projection and or you wish to force the GPS measurements to tie in with local existing control then the One Step approach may be the most suitable Alternatively if a large number of common points are available and a more accurate approximation is required the Interpolation approach can be used The Two Step approach also treats position and height information separately which al
235. e dec v Number of decimal places for angles Inclinations mm m v Number of decimal places for inclinations Temperature Celsius v Number of decimal places for temperatures Pressure mB ar v Number of decimal places for pressures Default Values Select a time format from the list It is also possible to turn the Splash window during the start of the application on and off Select the units for distances angles inclinations temperature and pressure Press the OK button The selected options will then be active 416 GeoMoS Analyzer Tools DXF Viewer Select from the menu Tools DXF Viewer Shows the DXF Viewer E DXFViewer C data GeoMoS GeoMoS 2 0 Specifications Isolinien dxf 1 1713 15 37063 1 44245 8 The following buttons are available Reset Zoom in Zoom out and Move the current graphic will be moved up or down to the right or left 417 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Help Help Topics The help topics of the GeoMoS Analyzer application will be shown at Select the Menu Help Topics The Help dialog appears Ea Search for the topic you are interested in and close the help dialog a The dialog Help will be closed The help dialog can be used to read through the topics listed in the content window to quickly go through the index or to search the help using key words 418 GeoMoS Analyzer About GeoMoS Analyzer Information of the GeoMoS Analyzer will be
236. e In order to use the Geoid Model on a GPS sensor the disk space has to be reduced and a special field file has to be created which will allow the field system to interpolate Geoid Separations This command enables you to extract a Geoid height grid from an existing Geoid Model for a particular area The area boundary can be defined by a rectangle or circle and a grid spacing in meters can be selected The file can then be uploaded to the receiver using the Data Exchange Manager From the Tools menu select Create Geoid Model field file Select a Geoid Model from the list or click on View and Add a New Geoid Select the method to define the limits of the Geoid Model field file Select ae al Be Enter the Coordinates of the Center point the Radius and the Grid Spacing or enter the Coordinates of the South west and North east corner and the Grid Spacing ES Ea Check the File size If you wish to use the file on the System RAM it must not exceed a certain size Note The maximum possible file size may vary depending on the free memory in the receivers system RAM Refer to the Technical Reference Manual on how to free system RAM of the receiver Click on Save 7 From the browser select the path where the file shall be created 8 Enter a File name without extension Extension gem will be added 665 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en automatically Click on Save to confirm Note Depending on the file size this may take a
237. e TPS1000 TPS1000 16 07 2008 16 33 08 Point group measurement fir Meteo Sensor Pressure Reduced to Sea Level Virtual Sensor 23 07 2008 12 19 00 Measurement missing to eva Meteo Sensor WT Web Temperature Pressure Humidity 23 07 2008 12 18 42 No communication with sensc lt gt Measurement Status Sensor Point ID Progress Actually Measured amp R TPs1000 Weather Sensor Point ID Time Temperature Pressure Humidity amp Meteo Sensor Temp Point 23 07 2008 12 20 6 975 9 48 6 Overview Last Actions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status User Level Administrator 09 50 13 The name of the sensor The type of the sensor Status The status of the sensor active measuring waiting Next Event The next scheduled event or measurement for the sensor Last The last sensor generated by the sensor Message 349 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 350 Measurement This display shows measurement status of all total stations which unlike Status other sensors are able to measure multiple points Sensor The name of the total station Point Group The name of the Point Group being measured or last measured by the total station Poit The name of the point currently being measured Progress The progress of the measurement showing how many points in the point group of measured and the total number of points in the point group Actually The number of points in the point group which
238. e GRS80 ellipsoid OSTN97 was developed by the Ordnance Survey the national mapping agency of Great Britain oO Ordnance Survey OSTN97 enabled Detailed information is available from http www gps gov uk To directly convert from WGS84 coordinates in the ETRS89 reference system to the OSGB36 using LGO define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation None Map Projection TM Central meridian 2 W Latitude of Origin 49 N False Easting 400 000 False Northing 100 000 Scale factor at origin 0 9996012717 678 Coordinate System Manager Ellipsoid GRS80 CSCS Model OSTN97 Note You have to select the GRS80 ellipsoid in the definition of your coordinate system as this is what the preliminary ETRS89 Eastings and Northings coordinates are based upon Ordnance Survey and the OS symbol are registered trade marks and OSTN9Q7 is a trade mark of Ordnance Survey the national mapping agency of Great Britain 679 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en GR3DF97A France The GR3DF97A is CSCS Model which contains Cartesian shift corrections needed to convert from the French RGF93 Geodetic Reference System to the new NTF System Nouvelle Triangulation de la France A Cartesian shift vector dX dY dZ is interpolated and applied to get local cartesian coordinates upon which the specified local ellipsoid and map projection is applied to get the final Eastings and Northings The table of corrections
239. e Messages tab Displays the current unit that corresponds to the selected Observation Type Use this button to create additional Observation Types that can be used for the sensors connected to the Campbell Datalogger or for the virtual sensors 161 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 162 Points Overview Context menu If the control point is not yet defined use the Points button to switch to the Point Editor to create the sensor control point Press this button to get an overview of the complete Campbell Datalogger configuration Use this button to confirm all changes and decide if the clock of the attached datalogger s will be synchronised with the current Leica GeoMoS Monitor computer time Note Once a day at midnight the datalogger s will be automatically synchronised with the current computer time With a right click in the Campbell Datalogger Parameter dialog a Context Menu is available A Context Menu lists all useful commands at a particular instant for a particular item on the screen een tet Add Campbell datalogger Add table Remove Adds a Campbell Datalogger Read above for a step by step description Adds a table from the connected Campbell Datalogger Read above for a step by step description The Pakbus Address and the Datalogger Name or read out time interval the can be modified The selected Campbell datalogger or Campbell Datalogger table will be deleted from
240. e a CSCS Model field file Follow these steps to create a CSCS Model field file From the Tools menu select Create CSCS Model field file Select a CSCS Model from the list or click on View and Add a New CSCS Model Select the method to define the limits of the CSCS Model field file Select between Centre amp radius and Extents Enter the Coordinates of the Center point and the Radius or enter the Coordinates of the South west and North east corner Check the File size If you wish to use the file on the System RAM it must not exceed a certain size Note The maximum possible file size may vary depending on the free memory in the receivers system RAM Refer to the Technical Reference Manual on how to free system RAM of the receiver 7 From the browser select the path where the file shall be created Enter a File name without extension Extension csc will be added I automatically Click on Save to confirm Note Depending on the file size this may take a while Related Topic CSCS Models Overview 671 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Delete a CSCS Model Important Information e CSCS Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by A and cannot be deleted Delete a CSCS Model Follow these steps to delete a CSCS Model Right click on a CSCS Model in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting 672 Coordinate System Manager
241. e best frequency or combination of frequencies for the final solution will be selected If dual frequency data is available both frequencies will typically be used The same processing parameters are used as the defaults in Leica LGO Note Refer to the corresponding topic of the GNSS Spider Online Help for additional information on PP Positioning Products Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function The PP Positioning Products will immediately become active after they have been created Logging of Results The results are automatically recorded in a special SQL database called SpiderPositioning 488 GNSS Spider The results are also recorded in ASCII files with a roll over of 1 day and with the file naming convention ProductName_YYYYMMDD rt1 in the folder Cc GPS Spider Data PostProcessing NMEA PPI files with the full processing results are also created and stored in the folder C GPS Spider Data PostProcessing PPI Note The PPI files have an automatic cleanup of 1 week Important Notes For a PP Positioning Product to function both sites must be connected and started and the File Products must be activated One or both of the File Products must contain ephemeris data File Products of at least 10 minutes must be used if processing L1 only data If the File Products are split because a site is disconnected and re connected then only the first one will be processed PP Positioning Products will
242. e box The residual of the measurements calculated from the linear regression will be displayed in a separate column for each measurement in the Report The residual and the exclamation icon are only temporarily displayed in the Report tab and are not saved in the database The calculated outlier values and icon symbol will be re initialized when the selected points are refreshed Remark When the selected points are changed the Refresh huton must first be pressed to display the measurements that are used for the outlier tests Setting Results to Valid Invalid The results in the Report can be set to invalid or valid When a result is set to invalid it will not be shown in the graph The outlier test is a helpful tool to indicate which results are outside the standard deviation and assist in the decision to mark a result as invalid Follow these steps to set Results to Valid or Invalid 436 GeoMoS Analyzer Select the Report tab The valid results have a check mark in the Point ID column For an invalid result the check mark is not displayed Set the result to invalid if the result should not be displayed in the graph The result can be reset to valid at any time by setting the check mark again The valid or invalid status is saved for each result in the database Invalid results are not deleted from the database Invalid results can always be reset to valid When the data is edited or post processed the status remains un
243. e confirmation GeoMoS Analyzer dialog appears range point selection in the point view tree will be saved 3 Press the OK button to confirm that the application should be closed GeoMoS Analyzer will be closed and the current configuration settings e g time 365 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Edit Copy The displayed graph or report can be copied to the clipboard To Copy Selec t Menu Edit Copy or press the Copy button BS or press Ctrl C on the keyboard The graph or report will be copied to the clipboard and can be copied afterwards from the clipboard with the keyboard commands Ctrl V into another application e g MS Word MS Excel View Refresh Select the menu View Refresh or press the toolbar button Refresh r4 or press F5 The system refreshes the report and the graphs based on the selected points and the defined time range The graphs only show the valid results based on the settings made in the report The point tree view will not be updated If new points profiles point groups etc have been added in the monitor application the Analyzer will not immediately show these points in the tree It is necessary to restart the Analyzer application to update the tree view in the Analyzer application 366 GeoMoS Analyzer Set user display rights Background information The user Administrator can set the display rights for the user Viewer The user Viewer only has the rights to access the data betw
244. e coordinate type reference is used reference point in the Free Station point group with the used coordinates of type reference Calculated polar values from the For the reference point the coordinate type reference control point to the measured is used reference point 101 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 5 Raw measurement of the values Hz V Slope Distance Used atmospheric conditions Temperature ee NullDist Calculated polar slope distance Computed results out of the raw measurements AtmosPPM PPM corrected slope distance NullDist SlopeDistDiff RefPPM Vz Correction Azimuth SlopeDistDiff Difference between NullDist and measured Slope Distance Orientation Step 3 to 5 for the second reference point 7 Step 3 to 5 for the third reference point Number of measured reference The message Point not found or Out of tolerance points decreases the number of measured reference points If the minimum number of reference points is not reached the control point coordinate is not updated with new coordinates groups OrientationOnly Vz Correction and PPM OrientationOnly point groups If a single reference point is measured in the OrientationOnly point group this values is used 1 Start of the computation robust Computed orientation Vz Correction The computed orientation Vz correction and PPM and PPM with the standard value as average of the measurements to the deviati
245. e displayed Press the Insert button and enter the Profile name for the new Profile in the table The Profile name must be unique A message will be displayed if the Profile name already exists Enter the azimuth value for the Profile direction Tip The sign of the deformations can be reversed by changing the profile direction by 180 or 200gon onfirm the entered data and changes with the OK button The dialog will be closed and the changes will be saved in the database Delete The profiles selected in the table will be deleted A profile cannot be deleted when it is still associated with a point or when it is used in a Point Group definition Calculate In the Profile Editor dialog press the Insert Profile button Select the new Profile and press the Calculate Selected Profile button The Calculate Azimuth dialog is displayed 264 GeoMoS Monitor Calculate Azimuth R Stat Point End Paint ESTREF11 Cancel Azimuth e8 4286 dec Select the Start Point and End Point for the Profile definition The Profile azimuth will be calculated from the Start and end points and displayed in the dialog Press the Apply button to accept the calculated profile azimuth Tip The sign of the deformations can be reversed by changing the profile direction by 180 or 200gon The Calculate Azimuth dialog will be closed and the calculated azimuth will be displayed in the table Confirm the entered data and
246. e g Slope Distance 934 45 meters The difference option shows the graph with the absolute displacement value compared to the null measurements e g 0 320 meters The null measurement is either defined in the Null Measurement Editor geotechnical sensors or in the Point Editor geodetic sensors with coordinates Important The option with difference to the null measurement is not available for the series Hz Angle Corrected Hz Angle V Angle Corrected V Angle Slope Distance Corrected Slope Distance Atmos PPM Corrected Slope Distance Ref PPM Orientation Vz correction Atmos Correction and Ref PPM Correction If selected the graph is displayed as absolute graph Hint If you display multiple points and the option absolute is selected together with an absolute series for example Slope Distance the absolute values are displayed To interpret the graphics more powerfully it may help to display absolute series relative to the 1st measurement in time period 387 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 388 SlopeDist m Muti Grape 207 5655 damaie 12 OON2RO5O4 DAM eMe MAIE OAOD MOE Epoch SlopeDist m Mult Graph moo opos0 000804 0 paan 4 ddo 0 0000 y oom 0 0040 D 00m0 0 0060 IERE NNA CENIDE MAEI MOEREN MOEG Epoch GeoMoS Analyzer Daily Average Backgr
247. e instrument height if required and enter manually the GeoMoS orientation value 0 000 Enter in the total station onboard program as Az value 0 000 Hz or Az depends on the used total station type Confirm the manually set orientation with the Finish button The Orientation assistant will be closed and the data orientation and instrument height will be saved and used for further measurements and calculations 186 GeoMoS Monitor Set instrument height only The information in this steps describes how to set the instrument height of a total station Select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or press the toolbar Sensor p Location button _2 Select the Total Station that requires an instrument height from the list and click the Orientation button The Orientation assistant is displayed The total station control point and sensor type selected in the Sensor Location dialog will be displayed These fields are not editable Click the Next gt button to display the next page Enter the instrument height Do not modify the orientation value Confirm the instrument height with the Finish button The Orientation assistant will be closed and the instrument height will be saved and used for further measurements and calculations The orientation value remains constant 187 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en TPS Properties Total stations have many configuration options related to the measurement procedure c
248. e pre installed in the Coordinate System Management NADCON ConUS NADCON Alaska NADCON Hawaii To convert coordinates between NAD83 corresponds to WGS84 and NAD27 define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation None Ellipsoid Clarke 1866 CSCS Model NADCON 688 Coordinate System Manager Any map projection or State Plane Zone and additionally a geoid model may be used Enter NAD83 coordinates as WGS84 coordinates and the NAD27 coordinates will be displayed as your local coordinates in LGO Other grid conversion files for the conversion between North American Datums which are available from the NGS can also be used Download the LAS and LOS files containing the correction values in latitude and longitude convert it to the Leica CSC file structure and add a new CSCS Model Grid files for conversions between NAD83 and NAD27 are also available for Canada from the appropriate government agencies and can be converted for further use as a CSCS Model in LGO For more information on CSCS models for Canada and on how to convert binary grid files into Leica CSCS Model files please refer to Other CSCS Models 689 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Other CSCS Models LGO accesses CSCS Model corrections from a binary CSC file strucure For models for which the correction files have to be downloaded or purchased from the corresponding mapping authority it may thus be necessary to convert the files to LGO s binary CSC file form
249. e selected axis For example if you have 10 000 000 and want to display 10 as labels in the selected axis type 1 000 000 as the Scale unit and all axis labels will be divided by this factor Format Applies a specific format to the labels in the selected axis Select the options you want to specify a number format Decimal Enter a number to specify the number of digits displayed to the right of the Places decimal point Labels Tab The table below describes the settings in the Axes Labels Tab eee eee Orientation Sets the amount of text rotation for labels in the selected axis Use a positive number in the Degrees box to rotate labels from lower left to upper right Use negative degrees to rotate labels from upper left to lower right We 465 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en recommend the use of notable 30 45 60 Show Hides or shows labels for the selected axis Labels 2 Levels Displays staggered labels This option is particularly useful if labels overlap because of lack of space in the selected axis Rotate Ensures that labels will rotate according to the angles set in the 3D rotation with chart dialog Use this option if you want to give labels a special effect when the chart is rotated Displays the text the axis title Grid Lines The table below describes the settings in the Axes Grid Lines Tab a er LU Major Choose a specific format for gridlines displayed at the major interval in the gridlines sel
250. e table below describes the settings in the Axes General Tab 464 Show gridlines Tick mark type The axis selected in the Properties Axes Tab Either Y axis Secondary Y axis or X axis Lets you show hide the axis in the chart area When hidden the axis will not display gridlines tickmarks or labels Type a value in the major unit box to specify the interval of major tickmarks gridlines if they are displayed in the selected axis Labels on the selected axis will also be displayed according to the major unit setting Lets you show hide gridlines at major intervals on the selected axis Displays tick marks at the major gridlines of various shapes cross inside outside none for the selected axis Type a value in the minor unit box to specify the increment you want minor tickmarks and minor gridlines if they are displayed for the selected axis GeoMoS Analyzer Show Lets you show hide gridlines at minor intervals on the selected axis Gridlines Tick mark Displays tick marks at the minor gridlines of various shapes cross inside type outside none for the selected axis Scale Tab The table below describes the settings in the Axes Scale Tab Sets the smallest data value for the selected axis Sets the highest data value for the selected axis Type a number to divide numbers and reformat labels displayed in the selected axis This option is particularly useful when you have big numbers in th
251. e total station to the GeoMoS Monitor applicatio Create Profiles Create Limit Classes 12 Monitoring Points Create new points Learn points Create Point Groups Create a measurement cycle 33 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 15 Start the measurements Step 1 Start GeoMoS Monitor If the application GeoMoS Monitor is not running click on the desktop the Monitor shortcut 9 to start the Monitor application Step 2 Project Management The database and settings are stored to specific projects Follow these steps to create a new project 1 Select from the menu File Project The Projects dialog will be displayed Create with the New button a project or use the default project GeoMoS Database 4 Select a project and press Open to activate it Confirm the entry with OK Step 3 User level To setup the monitoring system it is necessary to have full access to all functionality Follow these steps to configure the user level he User Level dialog will be displayed 3 Select the Administrator user level 34 Introduction to GeoMoS 4 Confirm the entry with OK Step 4 Units The units for the distance and angle values can be selected Follow these steps to configure the units 1 Select from the menu Configuration Customize or click the toolbar Customize button 2 i 2 The Customize dialog will be displayed Change the settings as required Confirm the changes with the OK button Step 5 Coor
252. ecceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeseeenaeees 661 Compute Geoid Separations cccccccceccecceceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeesesececnaeceeeeeeesensaneeeeees 664 Create Geoid Model field file 2 2 2 0 2 cc cecececeecccceeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeseeecaaeaeeeeeeeseseeccasaeeeeeess 665 Geoid models with height SCALING eceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeteeaeeeeeeaaees 667 CSCS Models Overview ccccceceeeeeeececneaeceeeeeeececcaeaeeeeeeesesecnaeaeeeeeeeseteensnceeseees 668 Add a new CSCS Model cc cccecececcccce cece ee eeceeeaececeeeeeesgsecaaeaeeeeeeesaesncieeeeeeeeeeeneeees 670 Create CSCS Model field file ccc cececcceenececeeeeeeeeeneaeceeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeesecescnaaeeeeeees 671 Delete a CSCS Modell EAEE 672 CSCS Model Properties c ccccceecceseeccceceeeeeceeeeaaeaeeeeeeesenaeaeeeeeeeeeseesecaeeaeeeeeess 673 CSCS Model Properties General ccccccceeeeeeecececeeceeeeeeeseceeeaeceeeeeeesensnsaneeeees 674 Geoid Model Properties Extents ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecenaeceeeeeeesensnnaneeeees 675 OSTNO2 Great Britain zseni e a a a e a aa 676 OSTN97 Great Britain sissi nre aeia aa aa i a ae aaia i ataa 678 GR3 DF 97A France iraan eae a e ae es 680 ETRS89 RD Netherlands cccccccecseccececeeeeeeeecencaeceeeeeeesecacaeceeeeesesecsacaeeeeeeeeess 681 Danish CSCS Mod ls iasan a a ee iad ee ae ee 682 SWEREF99RT90 SWeEdeN 2 cc
253. eck if the instrument is connected correctly Port COM2 Displays the state of port COM2 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power with the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to check if the instrument is connected correctly Port COM3 mace Only available for ComBox20 Port COM4 s Inactive Only available for ComBox20 Press this button to recycle the power of the appropriate COM port Within two seconds the port will be switched off and on This action gives you the opportunity to check if a connected instrument to the ComBox is connected correctly Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 148 GeoMoS Monitor ComBox20 PEE amie hielo Digital Outputs Port Power On of Port Power2 O tn Of Port COM1 Recycle Power Port COM2 Recycle Power Port COM3 Recycle Power Port COM 4 Recycle Power Close Port Power1 Displays the state of port Power1 The active radio buttons On Off allows to switch on and off this port manually Only available for ComBox20 Port Power2 Displays the state of port Power2 The active radio buttons On Off allows to switch on and off this port manually Only available for ComBox20 Port COM1 Displays the state of port COM1 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power wi
254. eck if the appropriate Transformation Classical 3D is available or add a new Transformation Classical 3D 532 Troubleshooting Transformation properties General Name BaWue Ellip A Type Ellip B Height Mode Ellipsoidal Last Modified 08 07 2008 10 23 26 Model Bursa Wolf z de 518193 m Rx foziss2 dy 435810 m Ry 2 17756 dz 466142 m Re fosos sF 921 ppm Ellipsoid A national ellipsoid is for example Bessel1841 Check if the appropriate local Ellipsoid is available or add a new local Ellipsoid 4 Coordinate System Manager H Ellipsoids A Mame Bessel 1841 ATS 77 Last Modified 02 27 2009 08 10 18 Airy Semi major axis a 6377397 1550 Australian National Reciprocal Flattening 1 F 299 15281285000 Beijing 54 Bessel Clarke 1866 Clarke 1880 Everest Everest Brunei E Malaysia Everest W Malaysia Singap Fisher 1960 Mercury Fisher 1960 South Asia Fisher 1968 GRS 1967 GRS 1980 HayFord24 Helmert 1906 Hough 1956 International Hayford By kraccomeki of CD Go oD Ga a Ce o Projection Check if the appropriate Projection e g Gauss Krueger GK3 Transverse Marcator TM is available or add a new Projection 533 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Projection properties General Name Type False Easting 3500000 0 m False Northing 0 0 m Latitude of Orign o O 0 00000 N Central Meridian 3 O 0 00000 E Zone Width Fay 0 0 Scale Fact
255. ecks Orientation Vz Correction PPM Correction Set as Default GeoMoS Monitor If check this option will cause the system to re measure the point group if one of the above checks fails This setting defines the number of times the system will re measure the point group if the above checks continue to fail This setting defines the delay between the re tries The purpose of this setting is to allow time for a temporary obstruction to be moved allowing the system to measure all of the points in the group This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Orientation calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Vz Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the PPM Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied Check this option for the setting entered for this sensor to be the default for all new point groups of this type that are created 247 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Properties Vz Correction Checks The table below describes the fields in the Vz Correction Properties Checks tab dialog box ma eee O Minimum The minimum number of points tha
256. ected axis Please note gridlines must be displayed in the Axis General dialog Select an option in the color box to change the gridline color for gridlines displayed at the major interval in the selected axis Select an option in the Style box to specify the line style for the gridlines displayed at the major interval in the selected axis Select an option in the Weight box to specify the line weight for gridlines displayed at the major interval in the selected axis In some systems if the line style is different than solid the line or border weight must be 1 pixel Minor Choose a specific format for gridlines displayed at the minor interval in the 466 gridlines Align with labels Interlaced Further information GeoMoS Analyzer chart area Please note gridlines must be displayed in the Axis General dialog Select an option in the color box to change the gridline color for gridlines displayed at the minor interval in the selected axis Select an option in the Style box to specify the line style for the gridlines displayed at the minor interval in the selected axis Select an option in the Weight box to specify the line weight for gridlines displayed at the minor interval in the selected axis In some systems if the line style is different than solid the line or border weight must be 1 pixel Ensures that labels are displayed centered and aligned with tickmarks at the major interval in the selecte
257. ected time range do not fit into this Y axis range the system does not automatically enlarges the Y axis range to the maximum value of the displacement vectors The scale of the graphic is not modifiable and will be set by the system dependant on the selected options and time range The graphic can be shown Raw data Smoothed or Both graphs of the selected points It is possible to enter a Smoothing factor The smoothing factor can only be entered if the smoothed option is active Note The Fritsch Carlson interpolation mathematics is used to smooth the curves The Fritsch Carlson interpolation produces a neat monotone piecewise cubic curve which is especially suited for the presentation of scientific data References F N Fritsch R E Carlson Monotone Piecewise Cubic Interpolation SIAM J Numer Anal Vol 17 No 2 April 1980 The displayed measurements of two subsequent points will be connected with a line if the time difference is less than a day This option can be changed in the Graphics ini file TimeLine_Options MaxDiffDays 1 00000000 Labels The diagram labels Diagram title and Sub title can be entered Entering the lt gt character shows the default subtitle in the diagrams The print out 379 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en shows the diagram creation date and time date of the last measurement X and Y axis axis label and a point legend Comments The comments can be displayed in the graphic The comments can be
258. ection Ellipsoid Bessel CSCS Model ETRS89 RD Netherlands Geoid Model In order to directly convert to orthometric heights a geoid model can be included as well The executable which can be used is included on the Installation CD and is based on the Geoid Model developed by the Dutch Survey Department The table of corrections used in the ETRS89 RD was developed by the Dutch Cadastre the national mapping agency of the Netherlands Detailed information on the Dutch transformation and the Dutch geoid model can be accessed from http www rdnap nl 681 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Danish CSCS Models For the Danish territory 6 different CSCS Models are supported These models provide Eastings and Northings shift corrections which can be used to directly convert from WGS84 coordinates to the Danish S34 System The interpolated corrections are applied after the local map projection specified in the Coordinate System The supported models are DK Jylland Denmark DK Sjelland Denmark DK Bornholm Denmark DK 34 Jylland Denmark DK 34 Sjelland Denmark DK 34 Bornholm Denmark To convert from WGS84 coordinates in the EUREF Reference System to the Danish System 34 coordinates ED50 Datum using LGO define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation Classical 3D Bursa Wolf Model dx 81 0703 m dY 89 3603 m dz 115 7526 m Rx 0 48488 Ry 0 02436 Rz 0 41321 Scale factor 1 000 ppm M
259. ed Regression limit check level 2 exceeded Regression limit check level 3 exceeded FTP Upload done FTP Download done FTP Upload failed FTP Download failed Measurement failed Not enough measurements for GNSS average No GNSS measurement E3warning E3Warning Troubleshooting The observation exceeded the specified Absolute limit level 2 set in the limit class The observation exceeded the specified Absolute limit level 3 set in the limit class The observation exceeded the specified Regression limit level 2 set in the limit class The observation exceeded the specified Regression limit level 3 set in the limit class Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported If the sensor type level does not send a result the system will react with this message To avoid this message the switchbox is recommended The number of results available to compute a GNSS average does not correspond to the settings in the GNSS Properties dialog No results of the configured GNSS data source are available to update the Total Station 497 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 498 found to update TPS station Old GNSS measurement used to update TPS station No GNSS Spider PP Product results within the expected time range Limit checks are not supported by the current software license or attached dongle Reference group calculations are not
260. ee Gnestep Te Elin B Noe tis Height Mode Ellipsoidal Last Modified 11 12 2008 16 59 09 dx 1253168 1182 m Rz 2 5 dec dy 2764494 6535 m SF 42 9397 e Ellipsoid There is no Ellipsoid needed Projection There is no Projection needed Coordinate System properties Define a new coordinate System with the following settings Name e g Local System One Step Transformation Global_Local No Ellipsoid No Projection No Geoid Model No CSCS Model 542 Troubleshooting New Coordinate System General Name Local System Transformation Global Loca x Trans Type Onestep Ellipsoidal Residuals No distribution Local Elipsoi Nore Projection Noe e Yi Proj Type Geoid Model CSCS Model Note Last Modified Cancel Close the Coordinate System Manager In the GeoMoS Monitor Options dialog Select your predefined Coordinate System e g Local System Selec t Projection correction Distance Reduction Options Coordinate System v __ Properties Cancel Distance Reduction C No Reduction Sealevel Reduction gi Messages Manual Acknowledge Only C Automatically Acknowledge After h I Sound tone for Messages I Print Messages To ca Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 543 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Related topics Options dialog Tour VIII Configure a Coordinate System 544 Troubleshooting NMEA Format
261. eeeeeeceececeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeesecsnnaeeeeees 624 Transformation Properties Pre transformation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseesenneeeeees 626 Ellipsoids Overview cceceeeecceceeeeeeeeeceaceeeeeeeeeeesecacaeceeeeeeesencacaeceeeeeesesetsnnieaeeeeeees 627 Add a New Ellipsoid sezsin a she che a a a a a arabe 629 Delete an Ellipsoid iiss hie ee eared Ae ace ae a a ae 630 Ellipsoid Properties miui faves bel ae eal eben ee ee 631 Ellipsoid Properties General ecceeecccceceeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseesecaeaeeeeeeeeesennenaeeeeeeteees 632 Projections OVervie Wasis dariis ionii a nile nee 633 Add a New Projection eniennecaieennradnii aai a a A 635 Delete Projection seien tineo ee ee ee Ta NE 636 Projection Propenies niin Ak ie en ie Ae 637 Mercator daea ride aa a aaa aes ae dese a Eaa 638 Transverse Mercator TM eiin a E E E 638 Oblidue Mercator ioes aea ae a a a ae a aaae biaa 638 Universal Transverse Mercator UTM sessssrseesrieeiirscerinsisrriresiirnneieiredreineerineneees 639 Cassini SOlUNCRe sexilajeccttiis tees heceebias aa ahs ate aai hehe a ada tad 639 Lambert one Standard Parallel ccccceeceecceeeccececeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeenneeeeeeeeeneees 640 Lambert two Standard Parallels ccccccccceceeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseenieeeeeeeeneees 640 Polar StereOgra pie sei iscscses ts eece ea EEE etetemeteaee a 640 Double StereograpnC raean R ASE EE die ein ee cian 641 Rectified S
262. een the time period defined by the Administrator Procedure Follow these steps to set the user display rights Select Menu View Set user display rights The for Viewer dialog appears for Viewer Start 08 21 2005 11 28 55 C Duration j Cancel End 08 21 2005 11 28 55 X End time is always current time 7 Select the option Start and enter the time and date for the beginning of the visible interval or Select the option Duration and enter the duration of the visible interval Enter the end time and date for the End of the visible interval With this field the end time of the visible interval can be fixed or Select the option End time is always current time This option is only active when the check box is checked If this option is active the end time of the visible interval is always taken as the current system time or the last stored record of the database There are different options to define the time range 367 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 368 End Current Time and fixed Start time End time is always current time and Duration Fixed End time and Duration Fixed End time and fixed Start time The system shows the graphs and report from the end time back to the start time It is possible to define the end time via the current system time by checking the check box or by defining a fixed end time Press the OK Button The user Administrator defines the display rights for the user
263. einhardt The Combi Sensor DFT 1MV sensor must be ordered directly from Reinhardt http www reinhardt testsystem de SENSOR HTM Humidity Reinhardt W amp T Web Temperature Pressure Humidity This sensor refers to the Web Thermo Hygrobarograph from the company W amp T The sensor measures temperatures relative humidity and air pressure The sensor must be ordered directly from W amp T http www wut de e 57612 ww daus 000 php Note The standard port of the Web Thermo Hygrobarograph sensor is port 80 Levels DNA The DNA is the high precise digital level from Leica Geosystems Sprinter The Sprinter is a low cost digital level from Leica Geosystems 167 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Campbell Scientific datalogger CR1000 The CR1000 datalogger can be used together with Leica GeoMoS as data acquisition system It consists of a measurement and control module and a wiring panel A complete system would include a power supply weatherproof enclosure sensors programming communication software and communication peripherals http www campbellsci com cr1000 Geotechnical and other sensors 168 Leica Disto The Leica Disto is a low cost electronic distance meter from Leica Geosystems The latest Leica Disto sensors do not support a serial interface Rain Gauge This sensor refers to a meteo sensor from the company Reinhardt The Rain Precipitation Sensor Ombrometer Pluviometer RMS 2M sensor must be ordered direct
264. el was last modified maa TT 659 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Geoid Model Properties Extents This page enables you to display the extents of the Geoid Model South west The coordinates of the lower left South west corner of the model are corner displayed as local grid coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the Coordinate Type of the Geoid model North east The coordinates of the upper right North east corner of the model are corner displayed as local grid coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the Coordinate Type of the Geoid model Spacing The spacing of the grid is displayed according to the Coordinate Type 660 Coordinate System Manager How to write your own Geoid Model The Geoid Model s purpose is to provide Geoid Separations in meters that are spatially referenced either in terms of Grid or Geodetic coordinates When developing such a model there will be a data file of Geoid Separations that are ordered either on a regularly spaced grid or in some other way i e in an irregular pattern A computer program can then be written that will read from the database perform some kind of spatial interpolation and thus estimate the Geoid Separation at any specific point within the area covered by the model In LGO the requirement is for the Geoid Model to output Interpolated Geoid Separations that coincide with the locations of points that exist in the Local Grid or Geodetic coordinate
265. ement Graph Comments Velocity range p s000 m day I General Smoothing factor 0 9 Labels Velocity Diagram title Velocity relative to 1st measurement in time period Sub bite fp with respect to Null measurement absolute 381 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The table below describes the fields in the Options Velocity tab dialog box ee eee To display the velocity graph it is necessary to define a velocity range in displacement day The defined value will be shown on the Y axis The scale for the time axis is defined by the system based on the settings of the Time Period dialog This graphic shows only smoothed curves The smooth factor can be defined by the Smoothing factor Labels The diagram labels Diagram title and Sub title can be entered Entering the lt gt character shows the default sub title in the diagrams The print out shows the diagram creation date and time date of the last measurement X and Y axis axis label and a point legend Comments The comments can be displayed in the graphic The comments can be entered in a separate dialog Velocity The velocity can be defined relative to the 1st measurement in time period or with respect to the Null measurement The Null measurement is the first defined measurement The relative option shows the graph beginning on the 0 value of the Y axis The velocity will be calculated relative to the first measurement of the selected time range With respect to
266. ement and the actual measurement is more then the limit you defined for the Blunder tolerance See TPS Properties Measurements Not supported The communication is not possible Check cable power and communication parameter If GeoMoS cannot communicate with GNSS Spider or GNSS Spider does not send results for a particular RT Positioning Products the system will react with this message If GEoMoS cannot connect to the GNSS Spider Positioning database the system will react with this message The Total Station cannot reach the angle position Instable setup or vibration in the area of the Total Station can be the reason for this problem Troubleshooting Slope distance A message Not supported not measured Communication Not supported lost Point not in information 3 This is only an information message In the profile point editor you have not linked a profile to the monitoring point In this case the system will work with a virtual profile direction Profile direction Measurement direction Instrument Setup minus Monitoring point Point group A message measurement finished correction This is only an information message The measurement of a point group cycle is finished Not supported No projection A message scale correction GNSS message coordinates not Not supported Occurs if the GNSS coordinates cannot be converted from the WGS1984 coordinate converted system into the
267. ement timeline graph will be displayed Velocity To set Velocity options and display Velocity graphs refer to the related sections in the online help Vector Follow these steps to configure the Vector graphics Select from the menu Configuration Graphic Options or press the button Options 2 The Options dialog will be displayed 3 Select the page called Vector in the Options dialog Enter the displacement range depending on the measured movements of your points 5 Select the point displacement relative to 1st measurement in time period 55 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 6 Click the button OK to exit this dialog Select the third page called Vector Select from the menu View Refresh or F5 or the Refresh button 4 to query the data out of the database e The vector will be displayed Step 8 Advanced Graphics The Multiple Graphs tab is a powerful graphing tool to display multiple series in a single graphic Follow these steps to configure advanced graphics Select in the tabbed view the Multiple Graphs tab Select from the Graphic toolbar the L button or press the right mouse button and select from the context menu the entry Series Note Only two different units can be displayed at the same time on the Multiple Graphs tab The order of the Standard Series dialog decides which scale is displayed on the left hand side and right hand side The order of the standard series can be changed wit
268. ements The distance measurement from total stations is highly accurate even over very long distances The method is only limited by range of EDM Operation of system and analysis of data is more complicated than in a normal system Method of Distance Only Coordinate Calculation The intersection of the profile direction and the distance measurement is used to calculate the position of the target see the diagram below This calculation mode is the only case where the scan coordinates and current coordinates are not equal In time the reference coordinates will differ substantially from the current coordinates The difference between the actual and measured displacements will increase with time the accuracy of the calculation will reduce with time It is necessary to periodically conduct a control survey to update the reference coordinates Step Example landslide monitoring system TPS Properties Define in the Sensor Location Editor TPS Properties dialog an 1D monitoring system with the following settings Only measured distances and Using End heights These two total station settings refer to the so called distance only computation Setup T he 1 true direction of movement and expected direction of movement should be similar to the measurement direction of the instrument 45 because of the special calculation method Side view 521 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Top vi
269. emperature sensor control point E T Combined temperature pressure sensor control point E Pressure sensor control point Rain gauge i 7 Combined temperature pressure humidity sensor fi s control point 1 Leica DNA and Sprinter Level control point Campbell Scientific datalogger es Virtual sensor i Multiple sensors located on a single point ID co Modified The date and time the point was measured and the coordinate type current updated The Point ID is used to identify the point throughout the system For example in point groups and profiles If the profile is changed then the calculation of the displacement will be immediately effective using the new profile This can cause large variations in the calculated displacement from the previous measurements and can cause tolerance exceeded messages to be generated When the profile of a point is changed it can also affect 216 Limit Class Measurement Mode Easting m Northing m Height m Reflector Height M Add Const m Insert GeoMoS Monitor the measurement cycle order if profiles have been used to define point groups The limit class is used to test the conditions if a tolerance has been exceeded The Measurement Mode Important Applies only to total stations The coordinate type current is displayed The column Epoch displays the date and time the point was measured and coordinates were computed Defines the spatial posi
270. en only the horizontal coordinates Easting and Northing will be updated not the Height Note e Updates are only executed if all chosen checks on the Checks tab are fulfilled e The Update Options Orientation Vz and PPM Correction are updated if all chosen checks on the Checks tab are fulfilled regardless of which Update scenario Do not update Update immediately or Update Average Over is selected e Free Station should not be combined with the Distance Intersection Point Group or GNSS Update in the Sensor Location Manager Only one method for updating the station coordinates should be used for a given total station 242 Checks GeoMoS Monitor Free Station Group Properties Calculation Checks Number Of Points IV Minimum Number Of Valid Points 3 S Basic Checks l Hz Angle Horizontal Distance Yz Correction Height Difference PPM Correction Repeat Group Repeat if one of the checks fails m Correction Checks F Orientation I Set as Default Cancel The table below describes the fields in the Free Station Group Properties Checks tab dialog box C Number of Points Minimum Number of Valid Points Basic Checks Horizontal Distance Height Difference The minimum number of points that must be successfully measured before the corrections will be computed and applied The purpose of this option is to prevent jumps caused by different measureme
271. ent Point Group The point group in which the particular measurement was done z Calculates the outliers results are outside the standard deviation Calculate Outliers according to the value selected in the Confidence Interval list box Confidence Used confidence interval for outlier calculation Interval ee All numerical values are saved within the time range to a CSV file Allow you to scroll through the listed data 435 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Outlier Tests The calculated data can be tested for outliers The outlier test is integrated in the Report tab The outlier test calculation uses the displacement vector in the profile direction A linear regression solution is fitted through the measurements The individual measurements are tested for the probability that the measurement lies statistically on the line for the defined confidence interval 95 0 97 5 or 99 0 All measurements that are outside the defined standard deviation will be marked as outliers Follow these steps to perform an outlier test Select the Report tab and choose the desired Confidence Interval from the list The outliers will be determined based on the selected confidence interval and will be marked with an exclamation icon A in the Report Ea Click the Calculate Outlier button The outliers are only determined from the measurements that are listed in the Report The overall result of the outlier test will be displayed in a messag
272. ents If you want to push the webcam image to Leica GeoMoS Web you must check this box Please read the topic Data Push to GeoMoS Web for further information If the box is left unchecked the single webcam image can be viewed in the Overview tab once measuring is activated The check box Display image from webcam if available must be checked Open the Measurement Cycle Editor and find the action for your webcam image The Interval field will determine how regularly the webcam image is updated The database size can grow considerably when storing 306 GeoMoS Monitor webcam images Webcam images can be deleted with Tools Shrink Database older than the specified age Stand point Enter the sensor location Comment Enter a comment or a possible description about the webcam For example the location of the webcam or its product details Edit Select a webcam and press Edit to change its settings Select a webcam and press Remove to delete it Remove Test Press Test to test the webcam settings When the test is successful a new window will open showing the webcam image 307 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Data Push to GeoMoS Web Background Information In order to view your monitoring project GeoMoS Web you must configure a data push to GeoMoS Web The Data push to GeoMoS Web service pushes via FTP the monitoring and configuration data from the GeoMoS database to the Leica GeoMoS Web server The
273. ents to the fixed or stable points contained in the point group The Vz Correction is an estimation of refraction calculated from coordinates of the Total Station control point and target points Vz Correction Vz Reference Vz Actual The new Vz Correction value is used to correct the next V angle measurements in the measurement sequence For this correction to be applied a point group with the type Vz Correction must be available in the measurement cycle To ensure that the Vz correction is computed reliably a number of measurement options are available in the Vz Correction Group Properties Remarks The point groups with the type Special will be measured with a higher priority than point groups with the type Normal Point groups with the type FreeStation and PPM have the highest GeoMoS Monitor priority and will be measured immediately and interrupt any existing point group measurements Search Window The search window defines the maximum distance see diagram below from the target that the instrument will search for the reflector if it is initially not found The search window depends on the distance between the total station control point and the target point This feature is useful for when the reflector position is slowly moving Search VV indow If the reflector is not in the field of view when a point is measured and the Search Window is greater than zero an search is started Measure Description ment
274. eoid Models which refer to the WGS84 Ellipsoid you may select Apply on the local side The geoid separations will then be applied after the Transformation i e to the local Ellipsoidal heights Enter the path and name of the Geoid Model file You can either select an executable file exe or a Geoid Model field file gem To select from the browser press Enter an optional Note to describe the Geoid Model New Geoid Model General Name Example_Geoid Coordinate Type Geodetic 0 Ellipsoid Bese S Apply on the local side IF Interpolation Method E File Path C Documents and Settings Desktop Example gerd Note 67 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 4 Press OK to accept entered values or Cancel to abort the function Continue to Step 6 Add a new CSCS model Step 6 If required add a new CSCS Model Follow these steps to create a new CSCS Model Note In order to import a new CSCS Model into the Coordinate System Management it must be available in the Windows directory For more details refer to CSCS Models and Other CSCS Models 1 Right click on CSCS Models in the Tree View and select New The New CSCS Models dialog appears CSCS file has been selected Enter an optional Note to describe the CSCS Model 3 Enter the Name for the new CSCS Model Enter a path and name of the grid file or press B to select from the browser The Method Interpolation method and Coordinate type will be displayed if
275. ere is a problem with the MonBox MonBox Note The message state is only valid if a MonBox is connected to this port Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 146 GeoMoS Monitor ComBox Test Digital Out Background information The Test Digital Out dialog displays the state of the Digital I O outputs of the selected ComBox The dialog gives also the opportunity to recycle the power of the appropriate COM ports Note This test can be only executed if the selected ComBox is physically connected via an Ethernet cable or Internet to the computer where the ComBox Manager is running To open the Test Digital Out dialog please follow the instructions on the page ComBox Manager Overview Procedure Depending on the ComBox type the Test Digital Out dialog differs in the display of the number of digital outputs ComBox Description of the Test Digital Out dialog type ComBox10 Ee rra brace een Digital Outputs Port COM1 Port COM2 Recycle Power Close 147 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Port Power1 Inactive Only available for ComBox20 Port Power2 Inactive Only available for ComBox20 Port COM1 Displays the state of port COM1 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power with the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to ch
276. eries If you would like to select an outlier of a velocity series then you have to select the outlier of the appropriate standard series because the velocity series are dependent on the standard series Topic contents Set outliers and display graphs without outliers Display graphs with or without outliers Reset outliers Set outliers and display graphs without outliers Follow these steps to select measurements and set outliers Select in the Multiple Graphs tab To select an outlier right click on the appropriate data point outlier and select Outlier 450 GeoMoS Analyzer Multiple Graphs 184 4000 184 3000 184 2000 Hz gon 184 1000 184 0000 Outlier 183 9000 16 Mrz 2009 11 16 Mrz 2009 13 16 Mrz 2009 15 16 Mrz 2009 17 16 Mrz 2009 19 Epoch After selection the outlier is hidden automatically by default 451 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Multiple Graphs 184 4000 184 3000 184 2000 Hz gon 184 1000 184 0000 183 9000 16 Mrz 2009 11 16 Mrz 2009 13 16 Mrz 2009 15 16 Mrz 2009 17 16 Mrz 2009 19 1 Epoch To display all outliers right click somewhere in the graphic not on a point and select Show Outliers Display graphs with or without outliers Follow these steps to select measurements and set outliers Select the Multiple Graphs tab To display all outliers right click somewhere in the graphic not on a point and select Show Outliers 452 GeoMoS An
277. ervice provider ISP connections for email This topic gives you guidelines for how to configure dial up connections The most of the settings to be done will be given by your provider however note some GeoMoS specific configurations Dial up connection to an Internet Service Provider ISP Pre requirements for a dial up connection to an ISP Modem ISDN card or similar device attached to the GeoMoS PC a avalid account for an Internet Service Provider If you want to send emails you need an ISP which gives you access to the Internet First of all you have to set up a dial up connection in Windows If the dial up connection is not already installed on the PC where GeoMOS is running follow the installation guideline from your ISP on how to set up such a dial up connection Beside your ISP s guideline also note the following setting during the dial up configuration Network Connection Wizard Connection Availability You may make the new connection available to all users or just yourself You may make this connection available to all users or keep it only for your own use amp connection stored in your profile will not be available unless you are logged on Create this connection For all users Only for myself Back Cancel 567 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en It is important to choose For all users otherwise GeoMoS cannot access this dial up connection If the dial up connection to your ISP is set u
278. es Right click on a Coordinate System in the Explorer View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes in the page General Only the fields with white background may be edited at that particular instant 3 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Select from the index below to learn how to manage Coordinate Systems Coordinate System Overview Add a New Coordinate System Delete a Coordinate System Coordinate System Properties General 604 Coordinate System Manager Coordinate System Properties General This Property Page enables you to display edit the Coordinate System Properties a a Name of Coordinate Name of Coordinate System Ka Dai the selected Transformation Transformations may be calculated using Leica LGO Datum Map or in the case of a Classical 2D and 3D manually entered See also Add a New Transformation Trans Type Displays the type of the Transformation selected above Its height mode Ellipsoidal or Orthometric is displayed too Residuals For Transformations calculated using Leica LGO Datum Map you might choose how to distribute the residuals The distribution weighting may be in relation to the distances between the point to be transformed and the control points or by using a Multi quadratic interpolation approach No distribution is selected by default Local Ellipsoid Displays the Ellipsoid of the Local System System B Most of the commonly used El
279. es Series Abbreviation Slope Distance SlopeDist Corrected Slope Distance Ref PPM SlopeDist RefPPM corr Corrected Slope Distance Atmos PPM SlopeDist AtmosPPM corr Hz Angle Face I Hz Move Up Corrected Hz Angle Face I Hz corr Y Angle Face I y Corrected Angle Face I corr Easting Easting Northing Northing Height Height Move Down kaa Standard Velocity W cas This check box is used to activate and deactivate series Only active series will be displayed on the Multiple Graphs tab The scale of the 1st series and associated unit is displayed on the left hand side The scale of the 2nd series and associated unit is displayed on the right hand side The order of the series can be changed with the Move Up and Move Down buttons Note Only two different units can be displayed at the same time on the Multiple Graphs tab Series Displays the current available series on the Multiple Graphs tab Abbreviation The point legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph In addition to the point name the abbreviation of the series name is displayed 445 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The current series will be moved in the order up Move Up The current series will be moved in the order down The current series order will be reset to the default order The complete series dialog will be reset to the default dialog Reset All Velocity series Series Inverse Inst
280. es can be user configured to be manually or automatically acknowledged The message settings can be found in the menu Configuration Customize dialog Messages can be manually acknowledged using the right mouse function Acknowledge 344 GeoMoS Monitor Observations Background information The table displays the individual measurements from the Geotechnical Sensors connected to the Monitoring System Every Sensor can be assigned to a point in the Sensor Location dialog The current Meteo Model that is selected in the Options dialog is displayed below the table Up to 10 temperature sensors can be connected The Meteo Sensors must be first initialized in Sensor Manager in the Monitor application The following information is displayed in the table GeoMoS Monitor Active Project Leica GeoMoS Web Demo Fie View Configuration Measurement Services Tools Help O BSR e Zvu Observations Sensor Point ID Time Temperature Pressure mBar Humidity Rel Pressur Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 25 9 968 1 60 100 si ss t Temp Point l Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 5 60 600 F H Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 04 00 amp i Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 03 00 i 60 800 Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 03 00 l Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 02 00 60 100 Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 02 00 Mete
281. essage is cancelled via the right mouse menu or reset by the software to indicate that the message has been acknowledge Acknowledge All of This Type Pressing this button will acknowledge all messages of the type displayed in the Last Message section above 338 GeoMoS Monitor Last Actions Background information This table displays the actual results from the last 100 position measurements of the current Monitoring System The duration that status measurements are displayed in the table can be defined in days in the Customize dialog under the Panes options The Time column can be sorted to display the newest results at the top or the bottom of the table Except for the first column all other columns can be hidden or shown as required All columns can be sorted as required GeoMoS Monitor Professional Version 1 6 Active Project Project1 BAE File View Configuration Measurement Tools Help iaesgals r e Sval Ee Monitoring System Proje 7 Point Group inside Contre 7 gt mule Actions Time sensor Profile Poito Point group Type He Angle dec 04 08 2005 20 50 17 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz g TP GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 18 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz T GPs Target 04 08 2005 20 50 19 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz z T aps Target 04 08 2005 20 50 20 GRx1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz T GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 21 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz z T GPS Target 04 08 2005 20 50 22 GRX1230_4 GPS2_TCPIP_1Hz GPS
282. et graphic 8 Export Show Outliers entry to active or not active in Select the right mouse menu and set the Series order to show or hide outliers EAI Show Outliers BT Blunder Tolerance Examples The graphic displays the raw Hz angle and the orientation corrected Hz angle to a monitoring point 441 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Multiple Graphs dec ek Lee 1 i a FETTET Tet et ee 8 ee ee aa a aa ree 08 ae i T 03 16 2008 03 22 2008 03 28 2006 04 03 2006 04 09 2006 04 15 2008 04 21 2008 04 27 2006 0503 2006 05 09 2006 05 15 2006 Epoch 442 GeoMoS Analyzer Series Topic Contents e Background Information e Velocity graph types e Open the Series dialog e Standard Series e Velocity Series e Available Series Standard and Velocity Background Information The Series dialog is part of a powerful graphing tool used to display stand ard series and or velocity series in a single graphic The graphics of the selected points profile physical sensor or virtual sensor will be shown within the defined time period The time is displayed on the horizontal axis and the selected series is displayed on the vertical axis The series graphics are subdivided in two groups Standard and Velocity series The additional functions and display properties for the series graphics can be accessed as usual with the buttons on the Graphic toolbar The contents of the series graphic ca
283. evelling up with the electronic bubble 12 Introduction to GeoMoS PPM settings Levelling up with the electronic bubble GeoCOM communication settings Deactivate the Sleep Mode EDM Mode and Additive Constant PPM settings 13 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en GPS1200 NMEA Out 1 communication settings NMEA Out 1 messages settings Rover antenna settings RTK corrections reference antenna settings Leica Sprinter instruments Leica TPS1800 and TPS2003 instruments Levelling up with the electronic bubble Follow these steps to level up with the electronic bubble Press on the total station the button The longitudinal and transverse tilt of the instrument s vertical axis is displayed graphical and numerical Using the footscrews the instrument can be levelled up GSI communication settings Follow these steps to configure the GSI communication settings Go to the Main Menu Programs Select the F3 CONF button The CONF SYSTEM CONFG panel appears Select 3 GSI communictions param The CONF GSI COMMUNICATION panel appears Set the following GSI communication parameters 14 Introduction to GeoMoS Baud rate Protocol GSI Parity No Terminator CR LF Data bits 8 Note If using the switchbox it is essential to configure the baud rate to 9600 es Confirm the settings with CONT GeoCOM communication settings Follow these steps to configure the GeoCOM communication settin
284. ew Point coordinates Import the point coordinates into the Point Editor with a GSI or Koo file For each point the coordinate types null reference current scan are identical Check with Tools Point Viewer Profile direction Use the Profile Editor to define the profile direction The 2 profile direction should be similar to the true direction of movement and measurement direction of the instrument 45 because of the special calculation method The profile for each point is defined with the reference coordinate and the profile direction 522 Troubleshooting 1st measurement The total station aims to the point IDs scan coordinate and measures the prism only with a slope distance No Hz and V angles are recorded The intersection of a line 2 profile direction and a circle 3 arc of constant slope distance is now used to calculate the position of the points coordinate and the longitudinal displacement The calculated position is represented with the current coordinate 3 arc of constant distance Following measurements After time the monitoring point starts to slide This is the direction of the real movement The position of the coordinate is computed with the intersection of the 2 profile direction and the 3 arc of slope distance 523 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The null scan and current coordinates start to differ The null and the
285. executable file i e the program name or press to select from the browser Enter an optional Note to describe the Geoid Model Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 656 Coordinate System Manager Delete a Geoid Model Important Information e Geoid Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by amp and cannot be deleted Delete a Geoid Model Follow these steps to delete a Geoid Model Right click on a Geoid Model in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting 657 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Geoid Model Properties Background Information This Property Sheet enables you to display edit the Geoid Model Properties Important Information e Geoid Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by and cannot be renamed but only modified Edit a Geoid Model Follow these steps to edit a Geoid Model Right click on a Geoid Model in the Report View or Tree View and select Properties Make your changes in the page General Note Only the fields with white background may be edited at the particular instant If the Geoid model is defined from a gem file view the extents and spacing of the model in the Extents page Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 658 Coordinate System Manager Geoid Model Properties General Background Information This Pro
286. f panel appears Select Autoexec Measure amp Record and Power mode Remains on Select from the list box Remains ON e Confirm the settings with CONT PPM settings Follow these steps to configure the PPM settings eooo Ea Select the F2 PPM button 7 The MEAS ATMOSPHERIC CORR panel appears Set the following parameters Atm pressure 1013 3mBar Temperature 12 0 C ppm total 0 0 Ea Confirm the settings with CONT Note The ppm correction must be determined within GeoMoS 27 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 28 Additive Constant amp EDM Mode Follow these steps to configure the additive constant and the EDM Mode settings Go to the Main Menu Programs Select the 5 Configuration button The Main Configuration panel appears Select the 1 Instrument config button The Main Instrument config panel appears cs Select the 03 Power EDM program selection button The Main EDM program selection panel appears Set the following parameters Target Typ Reflector EDM Prog Standard Refl list Leica circ prism Add Const 0 0mm ca Confirm the settings with CONT Note The additive constant is set in the GeoMoS Point Editor dialog for each point Online mode Do not use the GEoCOM On Line mode for TPS1100 series TPS1100 instruments must be always in the Measure amp Record menu Introduction to GeoMoS Offsets Follow these steps to configure Offsets Go to the Main Menu Programs
287. f projection central meridian and the 295 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en projection scale factor at the central meridian for example Gauss Kruger 1 0 UTM 0 9996 etc Notes The fields False Easting False Northing and the Scale Factor at Origin are not editable in this dialog This information is read from the projection properties of each projection The projection correction for measured distances will be calculated if the appropriate False Easting or False Northing is not set to 0 If you like to set the appropriate False Easting or False Northing to 0 then put a value close to 0 e g 0 0001 in the field Individual Map For all projection types Projection Enter the projection scale factor directly Note This setting is a factor and is unit less If you have a ppm value then you have to first convert this value into a factor The formula is Scale Factor 1 ppm 1000000 Database Global distance reduction setting 2 Messages Manual Messages will only be acknowledged by the operator Acknowledge 296 GeoMoS Monitor Only v Automatically Messages will be automatically acknowledged by the system after the Acknowledge specified time After d Note GeoMoS Monitor will check every minute for messages that need to be automatically acknowledged Sound tone for If activated GeoMoS will make a sound whenever a message is created Messages by the system Print If activated select the pri
288. faces panel appears The Interface GeoCOM Mode on Port 1 with the Device RS232 GeoCOM must be in use To set the communication parameters select on the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel EDIT F3 The CONFIGURE GeoCOM Mode panel appears Select the DEVCE F5 button oO The CONFIGURE Devices panel appears Select the EDIT F3 button The CONFIGURE Edit Device RS232 GeoCOM panel appears Set the following GeoCOM communication parameters Baud rate Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 19 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Note If using the switchbox it is essential to configure the baud rate to 9600 Store the settings with the STORE F1 button Deactivate the Sleep Mode Follow these steps to deactivate the Sleep Mode Step Action 7 EDM Mode and Additive Constant Follow these steps to configure the EDM Mode and Additive Constant Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The TPS1200 Configuration panel appears Select the 2 Instrument Settings menu The CONFIGURE Instrument Menu panel appears 20 Introduction to GeoMoS 6 Select the 1 EDM amp ATR Settings menu The CONFIGURE EDM amp ATR Settings panel appears Set the following parameters EDM Type Reflector IR EDM Mode Standard Reflector Leica Circ Prism Add Constant 0 0mm Automation ATR EF Confirm the settings with CONT F1 Note The additive constant is set in the GeoMoS Point Editor dial
289. ferred DNS server 192 sae WA Wl Altemate DNS server r C onnect via Internet the host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required 117 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Use Cases E ComBox Connect Start up Initial start up Use this option for the first configuration of the ComBox 4 LAN connection is required General start up Use this option to edit a configured ComBox Connect via LAN _Cancel_ Initial start up When you configure your ComBox the first time you have to select Initial Startup and the connection type LAN The ComBox must be physically connected with a Ethernet cable to the computer where GeoMosS is running Local Area Network LAN Please refer to the ComBox User Manual Chapter 3 1 Preparation how to connect the ComBox to the computer General start up If your ComBox is already configured all settings are already stored on the ComBox and you just would like to insert the ComBox into GeoMoS then you can select General start up and choose between a LAN or Internet connection To use the Internet connection the host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required 118 GeoMoS Monitor E ComBox Connect Start up General start up Use this option to edit a configured ComBox Connect via LAN Internet Initial start up This
290. ffects the type of height transformation produced No of height points Height transformation based on 0 No height transformation 1 Constant height transformation 2 Average constant between the two height points 3 Plane through the three height points more than 3 Average plane The Advantages e Errors in local heights do not affect the position transformation e The points used for determining the position and height transformation do not necessarily have to be the same points e The distortions of the map projection are taken into account which enables you to use this kind of transformation for larger areas The Disadvantage e Knowledge of the local projection and local ellipsoid are required Other transformation approaches Classical 3D Classical 2D One Step Interpolation Stepwise Which approach to use 615 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Stepwise Background Information The Stepwise transformation approach is effectively a combination of the Classical 3D approach and the Interpolation method The position and height transformations are split into two separate components A Classical transformation approach is used for the position transformation and an Interpolation method used for the height For this method we recommend that you have at least four points for which the coordinates are known in the local grid system and in WGS84 It is possible to compute transformation parameters using only three common p
291. fi 000000 m Messages Manual Acknowledge Only Automatically Acknowledge After Sound tone for Messages Print Messages To Pe Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Example 2 National Coordinate System Baden Wurttemberg Germany wan 84m Lem jt Projection Transverse Mercator Gauss Knieger GKI l ape ma Local Ellipsoid Bassel 1841 WGS84 Cartesian Classical 3D Transformation Local Cartesian ee ror eso moras TE WGS84 Coordinate Side Local Coordinate Side GNSS Monitoring TPS Monitoring 531 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Follow these steps to configure a national Coordinate System for Baden Wurttemberg Germany In GeoMoS Monitor go to Configuration gt Options Properties The Options dialog opens select the _ Properties button The Coordinate System Manager dialog box opens 2 Coordinate System Manager Contents Name Last Modified Transformation EED Coordinate Systems None 07 14 2008 17 32 25 z Transformations wes 1984 OF 14 2008 17 32 25 2 Ellipsoids z 2 Projections 2 State Plane Zones zi 7 Geoids 7 CSCS Models The tree view on the left allows navigation of the Coordinate System Manager Transformation A Transformation is a description with calculation parameters on how to transfer from a global to local Cartesian Coordinate System Ch
292. for example Bessel Check if the appropriate local Ellipsoid is available or add a new local Ellipsoid 537 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 2 Coordinate System Manager Sy Ellipsoids a ATS 77 Last Modified 02 27 2009 08 10 18 Airy Semi major axis a 6377397 1550 Australian National Reciprocal Flatkening 1 F 299 15281285000 Beijing 54 a z El essel 1841 larke 1866 c El Clarke 1880 B B Ev Everest Brunei E Malaysia E Everest WMalaysia Singap E Fisher 1960 Mercury E Fisher 1960 South Asia E Fisher 1968 E GRs 1967 E ers 1980 E Hayford24 E Helmert 1906 El Hough 1956 E International Hayford BV kraccomeki Projection Check if the appropriate Projection e g Swiss95 Customized is available or add a new Projection 2 Coordinate System Manager a jections Swiss95 Last Modified 05 09 2008 16 37 33 EE HHH Lambert one Lambert two Polar Stereographic Double Stereographic C OH HHH assini Soldner Mercator Ga JEECCEEBEEBZ 1 ustomized Czech and Slovak DK Bornholm DK Jylland E DK 534 Bornholm E DK 534 Jylland E DK 534 Sjelland E DK Sjelland B Dutch Finnish KKJ Hungarian Malayan New Zealand Romania Stereo 70 E Swiss Swiss Coordinate System properties Define a new coordinate System with the following settings Name e g CH1903 538 Troubleshooting Classical 3D Transformation CHTRS95 CH1903 Local E
293. g and Northing are read in a The resultant Geodetic coordinates are written to the OUTPUT USR file first latitude then longitude in radians 697 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en File Format of INPUT USR and OUTPUT USR Whenever LGO converts Grid coordinates to Geodetic coordinates or vice versa intermediate files are created internally which are passed to the applied Projection program In the case of a User defined program the programmer has to know the format of these intermediate files Input usr This is the file which has to be accessed to read in the coordinates to be converted into the user defined map Projection program Line 1 e Flag for identification of coordinate type e 1 geodetic coordinates e 2 grid coordinates Line 2 e Semi major axis of reference ellipsoid Line 3 e Flattening of reference ellipsoid Following lines Each line contains e incase of geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude in radians for one point e incase of grid coordinates easting and northing for one point 698 Example of INPUT USR file for geodetic coordinates 6378137 000 0 003352810665 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 0 82631 Example of INPUT USR file for grid coordinates 2 7296827 0 16752241 7295438 0 16752241 7295735 0 16752241 7296574 0 16752241 7295208 0 16752241 7294691 0 16752241 7293977 0 16752241 7
294. g dialog Follow these steps to open and use the Post Processing dialog Select the menu Configuration Post Processing The Post processing dialog will be displayed Select a total station control point from the list This is the Total Station coordinate that will be post processed Only data from this station will be shown in the Data Editor Note Only one instrument station can be processed at a time 4 Activate the checkbox if you want to Process only one target point Only data form this point will be shown in the Data Editor 397 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 5 Select the Coordinate Calculation options used for the post processing Select the Distance Reduction options used for the post processing Select the type of Meteo Model used for the post processing options Edit the existing data with the Data Editor button as required Start the post processing with the Process button The new computed results and all modified data will be stored in the database Notes The original data can only be restored by re entering the original values There is no UNDO functionality for post processing Depending on the amount of data in the database it may take some minutes for the Data Editor to load Click the Close button The Post Processing dialog will be closed As long the Process button has not been pressed the data will not be stored in the database and it is possible to abort the dialog with the Close button Note T
295. ger used in the measurement cycle Point groups can be removed from the measurement cycle in the Measurement Cycle Editor dialog Only the point group information is deleted The points and profiles contained in the point group are not deleted Properties Opens the properties dialog for the selected point group For more information click on the appropriate heading Properties Normal Group Properties Free Station Properties Distance Intersection Properties PPM Properties Vz Correction Properties Orientation cetera pres Removes the selected points or profiles from the point group 239 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Properties Normal Group Remeasure Criteria Normal Group Properties gt Remeasure Criteria l Remeasure Points That Could Not Be Measured l Remeasure Points That Were Not Within Limits The table below describes the fields in the Normal Group Properties dialog box ea ia Remeasure Criteria Remeasure If this option is selected then the system will re attempt to measure any Points that points that could not be measured at the end of the Normal group Only a could not be single attempt will be made to re measure the points measured Remeasure If this option is selected then the system will re attempt to measure any Points that points that were outside the tolerances specified in the TPS Properties were not Measurements dialog of the Sensor Location Editor Only a single attempt within
296. graph Manual Coordinates Properties All data in the manual coordinates table can be modified Right click on a field and select Modify 413 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates Manual Coordinates Time Pointin Easting m Northing m Height m Insert Coordinate 07 22 2008 10 21 54 Test 0 000 0 000 0 000 Import OK Cancel The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Manual Coordinates tab Pomo ereere o e OOO eer a Trewin pe Coe Press this button to insert a coordinate Thee ee oe Press this button to delete a coordinate A coordinate must be selected before this button is activated Press this button to import a coordinate 414 GeoMoS Analyzer OK The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will be stored in the database Casi The Data Editor dialog will be closed and the data changes will not be stored in the database Further information Data Editor Overview Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Data Editor Meteo Data Editor Setups Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates 415 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Customize Follow this procedure to customize settings General Time format 31 03 2006 10 50 24 v V Display splash screen at startup Units Distances Metres m v Number of decimal places for distances Angles Degre
297. graphic can be selected The vertical grid can be selected 456 grid Horizontal grid Legend box Context Menu Reset graphic GeoMoS Analyzer The horizontal grid can be selected The legends can be turned on and off Selecting Properties opens a separate dialog box Each tab allows customizing of the graphics Click on the screen shot for more information Chart FX Properties General Series Axes It is possible to zoom in and out on a region of the graphic with the mouse By pressing the left mouse button and dragging a rectangle in the graphic area an area of the graph can be enlarged To return to the original graphic without zooming press the zoom toolbar button again Legend and toolbar buttons can be activated and deactivated The options of the selected graphic can be edited The current graphic will be shown centered The current graphic will be exported in a comma separated csv file The current graphic will be moved the Y axis up or down to the right or left 457 Easting m GeoMoS Help 5 1 en With a right click on the Main Window a Context Menu is available A Context Menu lists all useful commands at a particular instant for a particular item on the screen Toolbar aoe eee OO OO 685 473 6800 Legend box K Gallery The toolbar can be turned on and off Color gt Eont The legends can be turned on and off misi Gallery Different graphic t
298. graphical and numerical Using the footscrews the instrument can be levelled up GSI communication settings Follow these steps to configure the GSI communication settings e ee ee Pe eer oooO The Main GSI parameters panel appears Set the following GSI communication parameters Baud rate Protocol GSI Parity No Terminator CR LF Data bits 8 Stop bit 1 Note If using the switchbox it is essential to configure the baud rate to 9600 25 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 26 6 Confirm the settings with CONT GeoCOM communication settings Follow these steps to configure the GeoCOM communication settings Go to the Main Menu Programs Select the 5 Configuration button The Main Configuration panel appears Select 2 Communication Mode The Main Communication mode panel appears EF Select 2 GeoCOM parameters The Main GSI parameters panel appears Set the following GEoCOM communication parameters Baud rate Protocol GEoCOM Parity No Terminator CR LF Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Note If using the switchbox it is essential to configure the baud rate to 9600 e Confirm the settings with CONT Deactivate the Sleep Mode amp Auto Start configuration Follow these steps to deactivate the Sleep Mode and to configure Auto Start Go to the Main Menu Programs Introduction to GeoMoS 2 Select ne 5 Configuration e Select 04 Power On Power Off The Main Power On Power Of
299. graphs of the selected points It is possible to enter a Smoothing factor The smoothing factor can only be entered if the smoothed option is active Note The Fritsch Carlson interpolation mathematics is used to smooth the curves The Fritsch Carlson interpolation produces a neat monotone piecewise cubic curve which is especially suited for the presentation of scientific data References F N Fritsch R E Carlson Monotone Piecewise Cubic Interpolation SIAM J Numer Anal Vol 17 No 2 April 1980 Labels The diagram labels Diagram title and Sub title can be entered Entering the lt gt character shows the default subtitle in the diagrams The print out shows the diagram creation date and time date of the last measurement X and Y axis axis label and a point legend The labels can only be entered on the Multiple Series 1 tab Comments The comments can be displayed in the graphic The comments can be entered in a separate dialog The checkbox on the Multiple Series 1 tab activates the 386 GeoMoS Analyzer comments Point The point displacement can be defined Displacement a R relative to the 1st measurement in time period absolute or with difference to the null measurement The relative option shows the graph beginning on the 0 value of the Y axis The displacements will be calculated relative to the first measurement of the selected time range The absolute option shows the graph with the absolute values
300. ground information The report is one of the main tab pages of the Analyzer main windows The report shows the most important measurements and results of the selected points It is possible to sort the columns ascending or descending It is also possible to hide and show the different columns by pressing the right mouse button on the column header to select a option Topic contents Click the following links for further information contained in this topic Report Tab Properties Outlier Tests Setting Results to Valid Invalid Export the report Printing the Report Report Tab Properties The columns of the report can be displayed or hidden as desired The contents of the columns can be sorted ascending or descending The table below describes the fields in the Report tab The state is set to valid or invalid Only valid results are displayed in the Displacement graphs The name of this individual point Profile Name The used profile for the particular measurement The profile direction 433 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en defines the direction i e azimuth in which the displacement is determined The time of the particular measurement The measured Hz angle for the particular measurement Note The displayed Hz angle depends on the measured telescope In case of face measurements the Hz angle face I is displayed face Il measurements the Hz angle face II is displayed face face Il measurements the combined Hz
301. gs Go to the Main Menu Programs Select the F3 CONF button The CONF SYSTEM CONFG panel appears Select 4 GeoCOM communictions param The CONF GeoCOM COMMUNICATION panel appears Set the following GeoCOM communication parameters Baud rate Protocol GeoCOM Parity No Terminator CR LF Data bits 8 Note If using the switchbox it is essential to configure the baud rate to 9600 ca Confirm the settings with CONT 15 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Deactivate the Sleep Mode Follow these steps to deactivate the Sleep Mode Go to the Main Menu Programs Select the aF button Ce EDM Mode GeoMoS sets automatically the precise mode for TCA1800 and TCA2003 instruments PPM settings Follow these steps to configure the PPM settings eel The MEAS TARGET DATA panel appears Select the F2 PPM button The MEAS ATMOSPHERIC CORR panel appears The standard values Temperature 12 Atm press 1013 3mBar and Rel humid 60 must be set Introduction to GeoMoS 9 To set the standard values select the F5 ATM 0 button Confirm the settings with CONT Note The ppm correction must be determined within GeoMoS Additive Constant Follow these steps to configure the Additive Constant Step Action 7 7 Note The additive constant is set in the GeoMoS Point Editor dialog for each point Online mode Follow these steps to configure the Online mode Go to
302. gt Options Properties The Options dialog opens select the __ Properties button The Coordinate System Manager dialog box opens i Coordinate System Manager contents Name tast Modified Transformation i Coordinate Systems None 07 14 2008 17 32 25 1 C Transformations wes 1984 07 14 2008 17 32 25 7 7 Ellipsoids 7 Projections 7 State Plane Zones D Geoids 2 CSCS Models The tree view on the left allows navigation of the Coordinate System Manager Transformation There is no transformation needed Ellipsoid A global ellipsoid is for example WGS84 or GRS80 Check if the appropriate global Ellipsoid is available or add a new global Ellipsoid 528 Troubleshooting 2 Coordinate System Manager Sy Ellipsoids Name GRS 1980 ATS 7 Last Modified 02 27 2009 08 10 18 Airy Semi major axis a 6378137 0000 El Australian National Reciprocal Flatkening 1 F 298 25722210088 2 Beijing 54 E Bessel Bessel 1841 El Clarke 1866 El Clarke 1880 E Everest 2 Everest Bruneis E Malaysia B Everest W Malaysia Singap E Fisher 1960 Mercury E Fisher 1960 South Asia E Fisher 1968 E crs 1967 E E Hayford24 E Helmert 1906 E Hough 1956 E International Hayford El vraccomeki Projection Check if the appropriate Universal Transverse Mercator Projection UTM e g UTM32 is available or add a new UTM Projection 2 Coordinate System Manager S
303. h the Move Up and Move Down buttons The abbreviation of the Standard Series dialog can be changed to the customer needs The abbreviation is used in combination with the point name in the point In addition to standard series it is possible to also display Velocity series Select the tab Velocity in the series dialog P The Series dialog with the Velocity series will be displayed 56 Introduction to GeoMoS 9 To set and display Velocity Series refer to the related sections in the online help Click the button OK to exit this dialog 11 Select from the menu Configuration Graphic Options or press the button Options t 1 The Options dialog will be displayed 14 13 Select the page called Multiple Graphs Unit 1 or Multiple Graphs Unit 2 in the Options dialog Kg To see the timeline without filter check Raw data Select the point displacement relative to 1st measurement in time period Click the button OK to exit this dialog Select from the menu View Refresh or F5 or the Refresh button r4 to query the data out of the database The multiple graphs timeline will be displayed Remarks The measurements and calculations use the current computer time Do not change the system time of your computer due to summer winter time It can effect the computations and the storage of the data in the database If the computer time has to be changed for any reason GeoMoS should be stopped Congratulations
304. h fe A Local Local Eliipsoid Bassol WGS84 Cartesian Classical 3D Transformation Local Cartesian xyz a Height Mode Ellipsoidal ale RY iz WGS84 Coordinate Side Local Coordinate Side GNSS Monitoring TPS Monitoring Follow these steps to configure a national Coordinate System for Switzerland In GeoMoS Monitor go to Configuration gt Options Properties The Options dialog opens select the __ Properties button The Coordinate System Manager dialog box opens 536 Troubleshooting t Coordinate System Manager MR contents Name Last modified Transfc PEB Coordinate Systems amp None 07 14 2008 17 32 25 C Transformations wes 1984 07 14 2008 17 32 25 2 Ellipsoids 2 Projections C State Plane Zones 2 Geoids 2 CSCS Models The tree view on the left allows navigation of the Coordinate System Manager Transformation A Transformation is a description with calculation parameters on how to transfer from a global to local Cartesian Coordinate System Check if the appropriate Transformation Classical 3D is available or add a new Transformation Classical 3D Transformation properties General Name CHTRS95 CH1 903 Ellip amp Type Ellip B Height Mode Ellipsoidal Last Modified 07 25 2008 15 02 51 Model Bursa Wolf z dx 674 374 m Rz dy 15 056 m Ry dz 405 346 m Rz SF Ellipsoid A national ellipsoid is
305. he Hz Correction to On 10 Confirm the settings with CONT F1 Optional Instrument Protection with PIN The onboard instrument settings can be protected by a Personal Identification Number If the PIN protection is activated the instrument will always prompt for a PIN code entry after starting up and before TPS1200 TS30 TM30 Main Menu comes up If a wrong PIN has been typed in five times a Personal UnblocKing code is required The PUK code can be found on the instrument delivery papers The instrument protection with PIN PUK does not embarrass the operation with GeoMoS Follow these steps to configure the Instrument Protection with PIN 1 Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The TPS1200 Configuration panel appears Select the 3 General Settings menu The CONFIGURE General Menu panel appears Select the 6 Start Up amp Power Down menu The CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down panel appears a Toggle with PAGE F6 to the PIN code tab pa Activates the PIN code protection Set the Use PIN to Yes Type in a New PIN code The PIN code must be a number with four to six digits Confirm the settings with CONT F1 Introduction to GeoMoS Leica TPS1100 instruments Levelling up with the electronic bubble Follow these steps to level up with the electronic bubble fe Press on the total station SHIFT and then The longitudinal and transverse tilt of the instrument s vertical axis is displayed
306. he Switchbox with a level Switchbox Commands 553 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Use the Switchbox with a total station Follow these steps to use the Switchbox with a total station 734 698 Wr 759 257 Q 744 793 772 630 664 662 757 129 764 824 Switchbox article number 772630 Set in the Sensor Setup dialog the baud rate to 9600 or 115200 of each total station that is used with the Switchbox Activate the checkbox Reset theo before normal group If this option is set GeoMoS will restart the total station before each normal group This option is used to enable continuos uninterrupted operation of the monitoring system 554 Troubleshooting Normal group VES Restart TPS is scheduled with GeocoM NG Restat TPS with owitthbox If the total station is active GeoMoS will send before each normal group a command to restart the software If the total station is not active because of problems with the firmware GeoMoS will send before each normal group a command to the switchbox to cycle the power on the total station Warning Use the supported baud rates Do not use the internal battery of the total station 555 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Use the Switchbox with a level Follow these steps to use the Switchbox with a level Use an external power supply Do not use the internal battery 3 Set in the Sensor Setup dialog the baud rate to 9600 of each level that is used with the Switchbox 4 Configu
307. he above description guided you through the post processing by describing the minimum settings only Post Processing Properties Postprocessing Station To Process Close Monitoring System TPS Station Process only one target point Data Editor Timerange l 14 02 2006 15 59 59 20 02 2006 12 05 12 r Coordinate Calculation Distance Reduction Meteo Model Process y No Correction Full Measurement Using Vertical Angle C Reference Distances C Only Measured Distance Using End Heights C Temperature Pressure z C Multiple Temperature Pressure 398 GeoMoS Analyzer The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Postprocessing dialog box Station to Process Coordinate Calculation Distance Reduction Meteo Model Horizontal angles vertical angles and slope distances are measured from a total station If you are use more than one total station in your monitoring project it is required that the correct station is selected The coordinate calculation is set as default to the identical coordinate calculation method as used in the Monitor application The coordinate calculation is either Full Measurement recommended or Only Measured Distance Full Measurement All angle and distance measurements are used to calculate the target point coordinates Only Measured Distance This is a special computation technique that uses only the measured distance to calculate the target po
308. he minimum settings only Please read the remainder of this topic for more detailed information 266 GeoMoS Monitor Null Measurement properties Null Measurements hc am m i sm Point Time Observation Type _ Curent Logger_ExTemp_DailyAverage TPS1_St 18 01 2008 17 55 05 Temperature amp Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel 2 20 12 2007 14 32 14 Inclination X 0 0 Cancel Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel 2 20 12 2007 15 14 02 Inclination Y 0 2 Nivel220 ID N2 Nivel 2 15 01 2008 11 37 06 Nivel_Temperature 11 5 Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel 3 20 12 2007 14 32 19 Inclination X 04 Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel 3 20 12 2007 15 14 11 Inclination Y 0 3 Nivel220 ID N3 Nivel3 15 01 2008 11 37 06 Nivel_Temperature 11 5 ease FISTS Temp 15 01 2008 11 37 05 Temperature 12 2 Update Null Fists Temp 15 01 2008 11 37 06 Pressure 972 0 Torsion1 Torsion 20 12 2007 15 18 05 Torsion 0 039 5 Torsion2 Torsion 20 12 2007 15 18 07 Torsion 0 005 The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Null Measurements dialog box The name of the sensor and an icon showing the sensor type Leica Disto control point Water level Leica Nivel 20 200 and other sensor control point Humidity sensor control point Temperature sensor control point Combined temperature pressure sensor control point Pressure sensor control point 267 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 268 Rain gauge a Combined temperature pressure humidity sensor contr
309. he new options will be stored The multiple graphs page is defined by four main groups Graph Labels Comments and Point Displacement Options Displacement Velocity Vector Height Transverse Displacement Multiple Graphs Unit 1 Multiple Graphs Unit 2 Graph Comments 4 1 C Displacement range m day l General Raw data Smoothed Smoothing factor Both Labels Point Displacement Diagram title Multiple Graphs relative to 1st measurement in time period C Absolute Sub title E Difference to Null measurement The table below describes the fields in the Options Multiple Graphs Unit 1 and Unit 2 tab dialog box a ee 385 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Graph There are two options available to show the displacement graphic 1 1 Displa cement Range The option 1 1 shows the displacement 1 1 on the screen based on the selected printer The graphic will be enlarged by the system if the displacements of the selected time range are bigger than possible to display The displacement range defines the range of the Y axis If the displacement vectors of the selected time range do not fit into this Y axis range the system does not automatically enlarges the Y axis range to the maximum value of the displacement vectors The scale of the graphic is not modifiable and will be set by the system dependant on the selected options and time range The graphic can be shown Raw data Smoothed or Both
310. he unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the device must be 192 168 1 32 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device The message state is only valid if a IP device is connected to this port Port I O card Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the I O card Port ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port VNC to Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the MonBox MonBox Note The message state is only valid if a MonBox is connected to this port Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 143 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ComBox20 E Test Links Internet Description State DynDNS server DynDNS settings OK Port COM1 Connection successfull Por Com2 Connection successfull Port COM3 Connection successfull Port COM4 Connection successfull Port meteo sensor Connection successfull 7 Port webcam Connection successfull Ab Port LAN1 Connection failed A Port LAN2 Connection failed Port 1 0 card Connection successfull o Port ComServer Connection successfull A Port VNC to MonBox Connection failed This message is valid if a device is connected to this port Close Description Possible States Module Port DynDNS settings OK Connection to DynDNS
311. heck failed check failed Absolute limit message 2 check failed Regression A message 2 limit check failed Spider Post A message 2 Not supported Processing not configured The precision of the reference group is below the specified limits The short time limit could not be calculated This usually occurs when there is insufficient data The long time limit could not be calculated This usually occurs when there is insufficient data The short time limit could not be calculated This usually occurs when there is no Null Value set in the Null Measurements Editor The regression limit could not be calculated This usually occurs when there is insufficient data Measurement information This message is given when the user stops the Process measurement Stopped No results for A message Spider Post Processing available Message measurement not defined Observation amp Message Not supported The Null Value has not been set in the Null Measurements Editor An observation type was received from the type not sensor that is not supported supported Not enough No enough measurements are available to be 495 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en measurements able to compute the limit check for limit check received but of poor quality Current Message position of GNSS differs greatly from null coordinate l Target point message identical with station point Wrong Message
312. hese steps to configure the Period of Time Select from the menu View Time Period or press the toolbar button Time Period A The Viewer dialog will be displayed Set the start date just before you started the measurements Click the check box End time is always current time to set the automatic end time Confirm the changes with the OK button Step 6 Tree view The tree view lists all points profiles point groups you created and the sensors stored in the database Check the point group you created previously These points will be shown in the graph Step 7 Basic Graphics The application Analyzer shows different graphs Displacements over time velocity and vectors can be visualized Timeline Longitudinal Displacement Follow these step to configure the timeline Longitudinal Displacement graphics Select from the menu Configuration Graphic Options or press the button Options 54 Introduction to GeoMoS es The Options dialog will be displayed Select the first page called Longitudinal Displacement in the Options dialog To see the timeline without filter check Raw data Select the point displacement relative to 1st measurement in time period Lea Click the button OK to exit this dialog 7 Select in the tabbed view the first tab called Longitudinal Displacement Select from the menu View Refresh or F5 or the Refresh button 4 to query the data out of the database e The longitudinal displac
313. hese steps to create Point Groups Step Action 1 Select from the menu Configuration Point Group Editor or click the toolbar Point Group button Bd The Point Group Editor dialog will be displayed Click the Insert button to create a new point group row Enter the Name of the point group Select the Type Normal from the list K Set the Search window to 0 5 The search window sets the range where the instrument can search the prism The range depends on the measured distance Press the Properties button to define for each point group settings if necessary 8 Define the contents of the point group by dragging and dropping selected points and or profiles from the respective lists of points and profile to the point group list Confirm the Point Group dialog with OK Select in the Monitoring System Point Group Toolbar the previously created point groups Press the button Measure Point Group Bto check the total station measures all assigned points correct 12 Optimise the measurement order of the points within the point groups if necessary 42 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 14 Create a measurement cycle The created point groups can be added to the automatic measurement cycle Follow these steps to create a measurement cycle toolbar Measurement Cycles button l Select from the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor or click the The Measurement Cycle Editor dialog will be displayed
314. his checkbox creates a project specific subfolder in the above defined path The purpose of this check is to avoid the accidental importing of different project specific GeoMoS XML files S GeoMoS Adjustment Settings Active Project TEST PROJECT Reference Points Parameters Location of Files Manual Export Start Time End Time 25 01 2009 00 00 20 26 01 2009 23 59 20 Interval 12 00 00 i Hours Minutes Seconds Export rr ni oen Defines the time when the manual GeoMoS XML file will be exported The interval defines the time period calculated from the start time at which the GeoMoS XML will be repeatedly exported For example if an Interval of 4 hours is entered the GeoMoS XML file will be repeatedly exported every 4 hours starting from the start time It is recommended that the Interval is entered as an even fraction of a day so that the exports always occur at the same time of day Press Export to manually export GeoMoS XML files during the defined start and end time with the interval to the configured path 315 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Terms amp Definitions 316 Mathematical model Stochastic model Least squares method Reference points Monitoring points Free adjustment or minimum constraint Weighted constrained adjustment or reference points as fixed Absolute constrained adjustment The mathematical model describes the network geometry
315. hould be stored Hint Export files will be created with the file naming convention GeoMoS Export Date Time dat Example GeoMoS Export 19 October 2001 16 30 02 dat The files can be re imported to the monitoring system Check the check box Zip Files to compress the exported data If the check box Delete Exported Data to activate the data will be deleted after the automatic export is executed successfully Click the OK button to exit this dialog If this dialog is closed the first time with an active auto export the upcoming next hour an export will be done All following exports are done at midnight 292 GeoMoS Monitor Options Background information The Options contain various settings for the Measurement Cycle Computations Test Conditions and database The settings are valid for all points and respectively for the whole system To open the Options dialog Follow these steps to open the Options hs Select the menu Configuration Options or click the toolbar Options button 2 The Options dialog window opens Change the settings as required Confirm the changes with the OK button Read below or click on the Options Image to learn about all settings in detail Options Coordinate System _ Properties Cancel Distance Reduction Automatic Map Projection v r C No Reduction C Sealevel Reduction Projection Correction C Individual Map Projection Messages Manual
316. i otic A BAL eee es 558 How to Configure the GeoMoS Auto Start 20 ceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeieeeereeeeeee 560 How to connect GeoMoS Analyzer to a different computer ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 564 How to activate an UPS uninterrupted power supply ccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 566 Troubleshooting eeneioe i ec 567 How to Configure Dial Up Connections cee eeeeeeeeeneeeeteneeeeetinieeeeeeneeeeee 567 COMMUNICATION 2 325582 Secetetd stecee sede Secu k ao cctiets ceded E icceecka hte eetiad cha beaded dee 570 Hyper Threading Technology c cccceceecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeees 581 SOL Servar INStanG menene eee eh cect e ebtetece A lends EA ESA 582 How to activate the Sensor Log txt file oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeeaeees 583 Configure GeoMoS to send e mail to an address that requires authentication e g GMailsOr Yahoo urcena A senieenestlits 585 How to configure a DynDNS account for COMBOXES cceceeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeetnneeeeeene 593 System REQUIFGMENIS casceriged shen seri kc EESTE tiene An ane aun tee 595 System RECUIFEMEMS esirdin Teeceiaanstenecaazetcnevaciaveinsdebeusagedeehibededensatedeneenateys 595 Coordinate System Managel cccccecccneeeee scene erties eee tineee ee eneeeeetieeeeeeeeeeesiieeeeetieeeeereaa 599 Coordinate System Management ccccecceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeesenaeeeeeeaaees 599 Coordinate S
317. ialog is displayed Sensor Location Name Point 1D TCAZ003 Station TP51000 GPS NMEA Station GPS NMEA Select the identical control point for the GNSS sensor and the Total Station ey Select the Setup button in the Sensor Location dialog for the GNSS sensor 46 Introduction to GeoMoS 9 The Coordinate Calculation dialog is displayed Enter the coordinate offset of the GNSS Sensor in the GNSS Offset fields as Easting Difference Northing Difference and Height Difference The offset indicates the eccentricity of the GNSS antenna to the point Use the Start and Stop button to record and average GNSS coordinates and the standard deviation of the coordinates Coordinate Calculation GNSS Station Paint ID Sensor Name Timestamp Station GNSS NMEA 25 03 2009 08 58 38 Easting Northing Height ae aes GNSS Offset Diff Easting Diff Northing Diff Height 2 500 4 500 5 300 Position Accuracy Easting Northing Height SSS aad Ws Confirm the entries with OK Select the Properties button in the Sensor Location dialog for the GNSS sensor The GNSS Properties dialog is displayed Activate the check box Use Average Over and define an average the minimal number of measurements and a blunder tolerance These values are important to increase the GNSS data accuracy for the purpose of updating the total station 47 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en GNSS Properties Update V Use Ave
318. icense protected This functionality can be purchased with GeoMoS Monitor Option 2 article number 774 136 Please contact your Leica representative The point displacement can be indicated with defined tolerances Every point can be assigned an individual limit class The limit class defines the allowable tolerance for point displacement When a tolerance defined in a limit class is exceeded a limited exceeded status message will be sent Four limit types can be tested Absolute Limit Check Short Time Limit Check Long Time Limit Check Reg ression Limit The tolerances are defined in the Limit Class Editor Every point can be assigned an individual limit class As many Limit Classes as required can be defined Each limit class can contain checks on five different observation types Each limit check type has three different levels Use the different levels to generate warnings at different threshold levels To open the Limit Class Editor Follow these steps to open the Limit Class Editor Select the menu Configuration Limit Class Editor or click the toolbar symbol for Limit Classes or select Limit Class Editor in the Point Editor dialog The Limit Class Editor dialog will be displayed Right click on Limit Classes in the tree view and choose Add Limit Class Enter the name of the new limit class and continue with OK The new limit class will be shown 256 GeoMoS Monitor in the tree view Right cli
319. ick the toolbar Points button a 2 The Point Editor dialog will be displayed EE Click the Import GSI File button 224 GeoMoS Monitor 4 The Import GSI File dialog will be displayed ey Select the GSI file and press OK to import the points 225 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Measurement Modes Please note the following important points when choosing the Measurement Mode Messmode in the Point Editor Measurement Description Mode Distance IR The system will only measure the slope distances using the infra red EDM angles are recorded as well but will be very inaccurate In this situation points are not in the range of the ATR or are being measured with an instrument without ATR functionality This mode makes sense if you are only interested in distance measurements With accurate distances you can detect movements only in the direction of the distance measurement The system follows the point movements only with a simple search function For the system to follow a point the search window in the point group editor must be greater than 0 Distance LO As with Distance IR except the visible red laser EDM is used Distance IR and Distance LO should not be mixed with ATR and Signal Scan measurement modes A sensor should user either Distance measurement or ATR Signal Scan for all points that it measures For Distance IR and Distance LO measurement the TPS Properties Calculations of the Sensor Location Edi
320. ifferent computer When to use Use this remote connection feature of Leica GeoMoS Analyzer only if you are in a network the SQL server port 1433 is open the GeoMoS Monitor and GeoMoS Analyzer programs have separate dongles Important Firewalls can create an additional issues Establish a remote connection Follow these steps to switch on the Analyzer remote connection Close GeoMoS Monitor Select in Windows Start Run and type in regedit 4 3 The Windows Registry opens Open the path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LEICA Geosystems Leica GeoMoS Database Click on the Database entry to display the available registry options 3 Leica Geomos Name Data E E Database ab Default value not set i ListofServers ab ChooseDatabaseServerOnStartingup TRUE a DataDispatcher ab DBVersion 5004 aa Bb Name GeoMoS Database a Landxm ab OleDEProvider SQLNCLI 1 Logfiles b Server AHERNOBROEMEO1 ab TimeOutSeconds E Monitor L 5 ProcessIDs ab Try AgainIFServiceNotYetRunning H E Projects Look for the ChooseDatabaseServerOnStartingUp registry entry Right mouse click and select Modify Change from the default value from FALSE to TRUE 564 Troubleshooting 7 Open GeoMoS Monitor The dialog Database Server appears Database Server Location GEOMOS CLIENT Enter either the PC name or the IP address of the GeoMoS Monitor computer that you like to connect to Note For you
321. indow in the point group editor dialog is used to define the ATR search window Hint The search window values in the point group editor dialog can be used together with the point blunder check to help prevent measurements to the wrong points ATR Normal ATR Low Vis and ATR automatic TM30 TS30 only Different ATR modes help to increase the measurement reliability during suboptimal weather conditions Normal The measuring ability during normal weather conditions is ensured Low Vis The measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions e g fog rain is increased Automatic Combination of the Normal and Low Vis ATR modes within GeoMoS Monitor The measuring ability is increased in all weather conditions and distances By default the GeoMoS software attemps measurements in both modes Normal and Low Vis ATR In this mode you can work with a Total Station that supports the reflectorless measurements of a point TCRA1101plus TCRA120x Reflectorless measurement does not require a prism but the total station is not able to track a discrete point This mode used the return strength of the infra red electronic distance meter IR EDM to find the centre of the prism A scan is made to find the edges of the signal above below left and right of the prism which are then used to calculate the position of the centre of the prism for the angle measurements As with Signal Scan IR except the visible red laser EDM
322. ing option Following sending option are available Leica GFU ASPSMS com and ComBox10 20 The field Description is only a remark and has no additional functionality so it works also if this field is empty Press OK and the new action is in the right list of the Message Configurator Notes The default length of a SMS is limited to 160 characters e g the Leica GFU can only send SMS with 160 characters The default length of a SMS can be changed in the Windows Registry for the ASPSMS com service HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Leica Geosystems Leica GeoMoS Projects lt project_name gt EventManager SmsMaxSize 160 Sending SMS over a ComBox10 20 is only available when a MonBox is integrated in the ComBox and the ComBox is configured in the right manner Digital Out 275 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 276 Configure Digital Out Digital 1 0 Card Pin Operation wij Cancel ComBox_20 ComBox20 Powerl TOGGLE Description This function works only if you have installed an ICP DAS I O Card in your PC a W amp T Digital Web I O device is connectable via an IP address or a ComBox10 20 is configured within your GeoMoS project If GeoMoS Monitor generates an event this action will switch ON OFF the digital output channel For example it is possible to switch on a flashing light In the list box Digital I O Card you select your configured digital I O card In the field Pin you define the number of the channel
323. ink database dialog box Messages Check this option to enable deletion of messages older than the Observations Check this option to enable deletion of observations from non TPS TPS Check this option to enable deletion of Total Station measurements Check this option to enable deletion of results older than the Check this option to enable deletion of webcam images older than the specified age Deletes all of the checked items that are older than the specified age A confirmation message is given after the delete button is pressed 326 Shrink Database GeoMoS Monitor GeoMoS Monitor f You are about to delete 6202 messages 0 observations 33634 results and 29763 TPS Measurements Are you sure that you want to continue Note Deleting records from the database will not free disk space After doing a delete the Shrink Database button should be used to free disk space Removes blank parts of the database resulting from deleted records reducing the disk usage 327 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en TPS Read Out To open the TPS Read Out EE Select from the menu Tools TPS Read Out 2 The TPS Read Out window is displayed TPS Read Out TPS Sensor C Inclination Longitudinal Tilt Transverse Tilt Angles Hz Angle Y Angle Slope Distance Slope Distance Battery State Battery State 328 Read Inclination Read Angles Read Slope Distance Read Battery State GeoMoS M
324. int coordinates The reduction of the distance to horizontal can be selected to use the measured vertical angle recommended or the end heights i e elevations of the Total Station control point and target points The meteorological data is measured at regular interval and stored in the database with a time stamp The time period for the display of the meteorological data is set in the Time Period dialog The meteorological data is displayed according to the defined time period Temperature Pressure Meteo Model options are dependent on the availability of meteorological measurements of temperature and pressure in the database If no meteo data is available in the database this selection may produce invalid results The use of Reference Distances model requires that at least one PPM group is defined for the measurement cycle The current PPM group defines the reference points that will be used for the Reference Distance PPM calculation The points in the current PPM group will be shown in the 399 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 400 Data Editor Process Important Data Editor The Post Processing dialog will be closed As long the Process button has not been pressed the data will not be stored in the database and it is possible to abort the dialog with the Close button For more information on the Data Editor see the following topics Data Editor Overview Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Data Edi
325. ions from type TM30 or TS30 e The TargetCapture feature is only available in the manual mode It is not possible to use the TargetCapture feature in the automatic measurement cycle and to capture images once a day for example e The TargetCapture feature has no zoom function The zoom factor is set to endless Make an TargetCapiure of a point Follow these steps to make an TargetCapture of a point Before you begin The total station should be orientated and the selected point should already be learnt Select the appropriate total station in the list box TM30 TS30 al I Select a point to be aimed at by the total station Posit T Press the button Potto The total station posits to the currently selected target Press the button TargetCapture e Large 700 x 480 pixels GeoMoS retrieves the telescopic camera image from the total station The time that this process takes is dependent on the size of the image and the communication connection between the total station and GeoMoS Select the size of the picture There are three different sizes available e Small 175x120 pixels e Medium 350x240 pixels The TargetCapture will be automatically stored on you local hard disk C Documents 219 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en and Settings All Users Documents Leica Geosystems GeoMoS TargetCapture When finished the TargetCapture is displayed as a non modular window on the screen C Documents and Setting
326. iption select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 2 606 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 2 336 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 3 227 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 0 942 Action of type Send SMS triggered Command 31620611593 Description Adriaan Condition Message Absolute limit exceeded 3D 4 023 Action of type Send SMS triggered Commai 31620611593 Description Adriaan Condition Message Absolute limit exceeded 3D 4 292 Action of type Send SMS triggered Commai 31620611593 Description Adriaan Condition Message Absolute limit exceeded 3D 9 162 Action of type Send SMS triggered Commai 31620611593 perena rn Condition Message Absolute limit exceeded 3D 3 690 Action of type Send SMS triggered Comman ee Message Point group measurement finis 5 071 Action of type Send SMS triggered Commai ipti iti Message Point group measurement finis 6 952 Action of type Send SMS triggered Comma X ipti y Message Point group measurement finis 8 233 Action of type Send SMS triggered Comma ipti PA iti Message Point group measurement finis 0 856 Action of type Send SMS triggered C
327. ire books e If you open a topic via the Index the Search functionality or as one of your Favorites only single topics may be printed at once 82 Getting Help Technical Support Technical information is available through several online services All registered Leica Geosystems customers have access to this information You can obtain product support in several ways World Wide Web The Leica Geosystems Web Site www leica geosystems com provides unlimited access to a variety of company services and product information Email Fax Contact the Leica Geosystems Dealer Distributor in the country where you bought your product 83 GeoMoS Monitor Menu File Projects To open the Projects dialog Follow these steps to open the Projects dialog Owner Neil Description Location C Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Data Created 02 08 2005 21 03 21 Project Settings The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Projects dialog box Existing A list of the existing projects Projects 85 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Close Close window Oper Opens the selected project Note A different project may be open in both Monitor and Analyzer New S Properties Project Description Name Cancel Description Path to Files C Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Enter the name of the new project This name will also be used as the name of the database Descrip Enter a desc
328. is 1 minute 568 Troubleshooting Note When connecting to a GeoMoS via a direct dial up connection we recommend to always provide the PC name instead of the IP address Leica recommends the 3COM Courier V Everything modem as preferred modem type for analog dial up connections 569 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Communication Background information Windows HyperTerminal can be used to check whether the COM ports or TCP IP are working For Total stations you can send GEoCOM commands and see if how the sensor responds For GNSS sensors you can test if NMEA strings are received For mobile phones you can test if the standard AT Commands GSM 7 05 commands SMS are working Important Remember to check that GeoMoS is closed so the COM port is free for HyperTerminal Test Total Stations Follow these steps to test the Total Stations Configure the sensor Basic check with COM ports Advanced test only with Total Stations 570 Troubleshooting Step 1 Configure the sensor Follow these steps to configure the sensor 1 Configure the sensor baud rate Turn the sensor off Step 2 Basic check with COM ports Follow these steps to perform a basic check with COM ports The Connection Description dialog is displayed Enter a name and press OK Connection Description ale New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name Troubleshooting Communicatior
329. is file format can be used for printing Printing the Report Follow these steps to print the report Select with the right mouse menu Print or select the menu File Print or click the toolbar Print button amp or press Ctrl P The Print dialog is displayed Click the OK button The Print dialog will be closed and the report will be printed with the selected settings Ea Change the print settings as required 438 GeoMoS Analyzer Observations The table displays the individual measurements from the Geotechnical Sensors connected to the Monitoring System Every Sensor can be assigned to a point in the Sensor Location dialog The Monitor and Analyzer Observations tab is identical Soe od The name of the connected Sensor will be displayed The Sensor is assigned to a point in the Sensor Location dialog This Point ID will be displayed Time The measurement time is displayed Values Dependant on the connected Sensor the measured values are displayed For a temperature pressure Sensor the measured temperature and pressure values are displayed 439 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Multiple Graphs Multiple Graphs Background information The movements and measurements of the selected points profiles or sensors will be shown based on the time period settings The time will be displayed on the horizontal axis and the series are displayed on the vertical axis The table below describes the functio
330. is will result in a higher output rate as well Refer to the corresponding topic of the GNSS Spider Online Help for additional information on RT Positioning Products 7 EF Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function The RT Positioning Products will immediately become active after they have been created as long as the configured sites are connected and started To edit a RT Positioning Product it is necessary to de activate it first Activate and Inactivate RT Positioning Products 481 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The status of a product is shown by an icon Active products are created as long as the configured sites are connected and started Inactive products X are not created but are available for later activation Change the status of a product by checking or unchecking Active in the product s context menu Use Spider RT Positioning Products in the GeoMoS Spider RT Positioning Products must be connected in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager Related topics Tour IV Setup a RT Positioning Product Important Notes For a RT Positioning Product to function both sites must be connected and started Che ck the Raw Data Status to make sure the status is Receiving data Either the reference and or the rover data stream must contain ephemeris data Hence it is not possible to make a RT Positioning Product using two Passive RTCM 2 3 sites No position will be calculated if no data are received f
331. ism that is beyond the range of the Automatic Target Recognition ATR Background Information To be able to determine the three dimensional position of a prism that is beyond the range of Automatic Target Recognition ATR a special measurement mode known as Signal Scan has been implemented Signal scanning uses the return strength of the EDM to centre on the prism so that angle measurements may be recorded with some degree of accuracy Signal scanning is inherently slower and less accurate than ATR measurement Two signal scan measurement modes are available Signal Scan IR Signal Scan LO These modes are based on the two types of EDM that are used in Leica total stations infrared IR and redlaser LO Each type of each has certain characteristics that make it more or less suitable for signal scanning Signal Scan Requirements GeoMoS Monitor Configuration Sensor Location Editor TPS Properties Calculations configured for 3D Monitoring Coordinate calculation set to Full measurement Distance Reduction set to Using Vertical Angles Orientation correction is determined with the point group Free Station or Orientation Only Control point coordinates are determined with the point group Free Station or Distance Intersection if required Signal Scan vs Distance Only Measurement Mode 509 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en The signal scan measurement mode only makes sense if the distance to a point is outside of the A
332. isplacements dialog t Select menu Configuration Graphic Options or press the button Options The Graphic Options dialog appears The dialog shows option pages for the available graphics Activate the page Displacement Height or Transverse Displacement Define the right options Press the OK button Press refresh to show the Longitudinal Transverse or Height Displacement graphic with the new options The dialog will be closed and the new options will be stored The displacement page is defined by five main groups Graph Labels Comments Point Displacement and Absolute Limit Levels Longitudinal Displacement Options Graph Comments Sei 0 100 m Smoothing factor Displacement range General Raw data C Smoothed C Both Labels Diagram title Longitudinal Displacement Sub title Point Displacement relative to 1st measurement in time period C Absolute Cancel The table below describes the fields in the Options Displacement tab dialog box GeoMoS Analyzer There are two options available to show the displacement graphic 1 1 Displa cement Range The option 1 1 shows the displacement 1 1 on the screen based on the selected printer The graphic will be enlarged by the system if the displacements of the selected time range are bigger than possible to display The displacement range defines the range of the Y axis If the displacement vectors of the sel
333. item when the toolbar is visible Configuration Toolbar a lezva Point Group Toolbar e Select from the menu View Point Group Toolbar Shows or hides the Point Group Toolbar A check mark is shown next to the menu item when the toolbar is visible Remark When the automatic measurement cycle is not running the selected Point Group can be manually measured from the toolbar with the menu item Measurement Start Stop Point Group When the Measurement Cycle is started the point group field is deactivated and the current point group that is being measured is displayed Point Group Toolbar Point Group Monitoring X 94 GeoMoS Monitor Measurement Toolbar Select from the menu View Measurement Toolbar Shows or hides the Measurement Toolbar A check mark is shown next to the menu item when the toolbar is visible Remarks The buttons Start Stop Hand Pause Ware associated with the automatic measurement cycle and the Measure Point Group button is associated with manual measurements Measurement Toolbar p 95 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Status Bar Select from the menu View Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar A check mark is shown next to the menu item when the Status Bar is visible Status Bar Done Benutzerebene Administrator 14 30 44 96 GeoMoS Monitor Cycle History To open Cycle History 1 Select from the menu View Cycle History 2 The Cycle History is di
334. ities to get the orientation of the total station 1 Orientation with Know points 2 Orientation with Set manually To make it easier for the beginning only the Set manually orientation is explained now Please read in the help for further information about Orientation Follow these steps to set manually the orientation Select from the menu Configuration Sensor Location Editor or click the toolbar Sensor Location button _2 The Sensor Location dialog appears The total station is now connected to the point The next step is the orientation Check the sensor is assigned to the correct Point ID Modify the Point ID if required 38 Introduction to GeoMoS 4 Select the Sensor that needs to be orientated from the list and click the Orientation button The Orientation assistant is displayed The total station control point and sensor type selected in the Sensor Location dialog will be displayed These fields are not editable Click the Next gt button to display the next page Aim manually the total station telescope to the defined null orientation to set manually the orientation value Enter the instrument height if required and enter manually the GeoMoS orientation value 0 000 Enter in the total station onboard program as Az value 0 000 Hz or Az depends on the used total station type Confirm the manually set orientation with the Finish button The Orientation assistant will be closed and the data orie
335. itioning Products configured in a Leica GNSS Spider site server All active PP Products configured in GNSS Spider can be used in GeoMosS Thus many GNSS sensors maybe connected using a single connection in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager to a GNSS Spider server 165 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Inclination Sensors Nivel20 200 The Nivel20 and Nivel200 are a series of highly precise inclination sensors from Leica Geosystems The following instruments are supported Niv el210 Niv el220 Nivel20 RS232 Nivel20 RS485 Meteo Sensors 166 Temperature STS This sensor refers to a DTM temperature pressure sensor from the company STS Using this sensor type only the temperature will be read from the sensor The STS DTM sensor may be ordered directly from Leica Geosystems with article number 667725 Pressure STS This sensor refers to a DTM temperature pressure sensor from the company STS Using this sensor type only the pressure will be read from the sensor The STS DTM sensor may be ordered directly from Leica Geosystems with article number 667725 Combined Temperature Pressure STS This sensor refers to a DTM temperature pressure sensor from the company STS The STS DTM sensor may be ordered directly from Leica Geosystems with article number 667725 GeoMoS Monitor Note The standard baud rate of the STS sensor is 4800 Combined Temp Pressure Humidity Reinhardt This sensor refers to a meteo sensor from the company R
336. jective In this Quick Tour you will learn some basic methods to analyse the data of your monitoring system Procedure Follow these steps to perform basic data analysis 1 Start GeoMoS Analyzer Project Management Ce Period of Time Ez Tree view Basic Graphics Timeline Longitudinal Displacement Velocity Vector Advanced Graphics ea Congratulations Finish Step 1 Start GeoMoS Analyzer If the application GeoMoS Analyzer is not running click on the desktop the Analyzer symbol to start the application Analyzer The GeoMoS Analyzer application will be started 52 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 2 Project Management The database and settings are stored to specific projects Follow these steps to configure the project management Select from the menu File Project The Projects dialog will be displayed Create with the New button a project or use the default project GeoMoS Database Confirm the entry with OK Siep 3 User level Follow these steps to configure the user level ee Step 4 Units The units for the distance and angle values can be selected Follow these steps to configure the units Select from the menu Configuration Customize or click the toolbar button Customize The Customize dialog will be displayed 53 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 3 Change the settings as required Confirm the changes with the OK button Step 5 Period of Time Follow t
337. kewed Orthomor phic cccceceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseccneaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeeeees 641 User defined projeCtiOns errimari cecceca een ce epetetesaveseccsteeeebed deuectateleetstedede atten tease 641 File Format of INPUT USR and OUTPUT USR 0 ccceeceecececeee eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeettees 643 Example of a User written Program cccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeteeeaeeeseeaaeees 647 State Plane Zones OVErViCW ccccccecceeeecceeceeeeetecencaeeeeeeeeeseeseceaeaeceeeeeeesensnnieeeees 652 State Plane Zone Properties cccccecececccececeeeeeeececeeeceeeeeeeesesaeaeceeeeeeesensinaeeeeees 653 How to switch between Projections and State Plane Zones eseese 653 Geoid Models Overview cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeeseseeccecaeeeeeeeeesensacieeeeess 654 Add a New Geoid Model ccceceececcececeeeeeeenneceeeeeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeseescnieeeeeeeeeeeeteees 656 Delete a Geoid Model c ccccceceeeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeseceacaececeeeeesecsacaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeneees 657 Geoid Model Properties cccccecceeeeeeceeceeeeecesceaecaeceeeeeseseeaneeceeeeeseseanaeeaeeneeess 658 Geoid Model Properties General c ccccccceeeeeeeeneecaeceeeeeeesecencaeceeeeeeesensaneeeeees 659 Geoid Model Properties Extents ccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeesensncaneeeees 660 Table of Contents How to write your own Geoid Model c
338. lacement Velocity Vector Height Displacement Transverse Displacement Height Vector Multiple Grap Status Bar The status bar contains important analysis information such as the start and end time of the display and the display options 11 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Quick Start Tour Configure an instrument or sensor Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to prepare and configure a Leica total station GNSS sensor or inclination sensor for monitoring purpose Important Leica instruments are manufactured assembled and adjusted to the best possible quality Quick temperature changes shock or stress can cause deviations and decrease the instrument accuracy It is therefore recommended to check and adjust the instrument refer to the User Manual of the instrument in the following situations before the first use before every high precision survey after rough or long transportations after long working periods after long storage periods if the temperature difference between current environment and the temperature at the last calibration is mor than 20 C The EDM mode the additive constant for prisms and the PPM corrections of total stations will be handled with the GeoMoS Monitor software Do not set the EDM mode the additive constant for prisms and the PPM corrections in the total station Procedure Follow these steps to configure an instrument or sensor Leica TPS1800 and TPS2003 instruments L
339. lati loni ritko extended 025 id integer 026 a b text 693 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 027 028 11 Main Program 029 030 begin 031 032 Assign and open files 033 034 assign a input usr 035 reset a 036 assign b output usr 037 rewrite b 038 039 Read the first 3 lines 040 041 readin a id read type 042 readin a dumy read semi major axis not used fixed programmed 043 readin a dumy read flattening not used fixed programmed 044 045 046 if id 1 then begin 047 048 Transformation ELLIPSOID to GRID coordinates 049 050 while not EOF a do begin 051 readin a lati loni 052 053 transformation ellipsoid to sphere 054 ex sqrt ex2 055 wert1 pi 4 0 lati 2 0 056 wert1 alpha In sin wert1 cos wert1 057 wert2 In 1 0 ex sin lati 1 0 ex sin lati 058 wert exp wert1 alpha ex 2 0 wert2 rk 059 bk 2 0 arctan wert pi 4 0 060 Ik alpha loni lono 061 062 transformation sphere to sphere 694 Coordinate System Manager 063 cobo cos bo 064 sibo sin bo 065 cobi cos bk 066 sibi sin bk 067 coli cos Ik 068 sili sin Ik 069 wert1 cobo sibi sibo cobi coli 070 bquer arctan wert1 sqrt 1 0 wert1 wert1 071 Iquer arctan cobi sili sibo sibi cobo cobi coli 072 073 transformation sphere to plane 074 x1 r 2 0 In 1 0 sin bquer 1 0 sin bquer 075 y1 r lquer 076 077 transformati
340. lect the target point to measure for the orientation calculation Click the Next gt button to display the next page Aim manually the total station telescope to the selected target point selected in Step 5 a Select Use ATR and press the Measure button to take the measurement to a known point prism is necessary GeoMoS Monitor reads the angles and the distance to the known target point The orientation will be calculated and displayed in the dialog 58 Introduction to GeoMoS b Do not select Use ATR and press the Measure button to take the measurement to a known point GeoMoS Monitor reads only the angles from the total station pointing to the known target point The orientation will be calculated and displayed in the dialog Confirm the calculated orientation with the Finish button The Orientation assistant will be closed and the data orientation and instrument height will be saved and used for further measurements and calculations Hint Check for example with a manual point group measurements if the orientation was successful Related topics Orientation Wizard dialog 59 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tour VII Setup and connect a Campbell datalogger Note Sorry this section is currently under construction For more detailed information please contact your Leica representative Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn some basic steps to connect the Campbell Scientific datalogger to the Leica GeoMo
341. lected from the choice list containing the existing point groups The Point Group button can be 252 GeoMoS Monitor pressed to display the Point Group Editor and additional point groups can be defined No point group is required for Generic sensors Note Points that are included in profiles and are assigned to a point group will be measured in alphabetical order Start Time Defines the time when the point group will be measured for the first time If no End Time is defined the point group will be measured between Start Time and midnight Continuous Only point groups with the type Normal can be set to measure continuously After the last point in the point group is measured the measurements will continue from the first point without pausing A point group with a type other than Normal has a higher priority and will interrupt the continuous cycle to measure the point group and on completion will return to the continuous measurements For each total station only one point group type Normal can be set to measure continuous The interval defines the time period calculated from the start time at which the point group will be repeatedly measured For example if an Interval of 4 hours is entered the point group will be repeatedly measured every 4 hours starting from the start time It is recommended that the Interval is entered as an even fraction of a day so that the measurements always occur at the same time of day If an In
342. lied a point group with the type PPM must be available in the measurement cycle and the respective Reference Distances option must be active in the Options dialog To ensure that the PPM correction is computed reliably a number of measurement options are available in the PPM Group Properties Note Unstable points should not be added to the PPM group Relating topics Meteo Corrections 235 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 236 Type Orientation Only Point groups with the type Orientation Only will be used to determine the orientation of the Total Station from measurements to the fixed or stable points contained in the point group The Orientation is calculated using a robust least squares solution The new orientation value is used to correct the next measurements in the measurement sequence For this correction to be applied a point group with the type Orientation Only must be available in the measurement cycle See also orientation options available with the automatic FreeStation To ensure that the orientation is computed reliably a number of measurement options are available in the Orientation Group Properties Note For every automatic deformation monitoring system it is very important to correct for changes in the orientation caused by movements of the pillar due to e g temperature differences Type Vz Correction Point groups with the type Vz Correction will be used to determine the vertical circle angle correction from measurem
343. lipsoids are hardwired However you may define your own Ellipsoid See Add a New Ellipsoid Note An Ellipsoid cannot be selected if it is already defined in the Transformation or is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation Projection Displays the Map Projection or the State Plane Zone Except for the Customized Projections and the State Plane Zones which are hardwired the Map Projections have to be pre defined before they become available in the list See also Add a New Projection Note To switch between Projections and State Plane Zones right click on the background of the Property Sheet and select between Projections and 605 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Zones A Projection is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation When using a Stepwise or a Two Step transformation the Projection is already defined Proj Type Displays the type of the above selected Projection See Projections for a complete list of all available Projection Types Geoid Model Displays the Geoid Model Geoid Models are not hardwired and need to be defined before they become available in the list See also Add a New Geoid Model Note A geoid model which is intended to be applied to a coordinate system defined on a local ellipsoid has to generally be based upon the same local ellipsoid One Step Interpolation Stepwise and Two Step transformations cannot be combined with
344. llipsoid Bessel Projection Customized Swiss95 No Geoid Model No CSCS Model Coordinate System properties General Name EH1903 Transformation CHTRS95 CH1903 v Trans Type Classical3D Ellipsoidal Residuals Nodistibution x LocalEllipsoid Bss o id Projection Swiss95 v Proj Type Customized Geoid Model None X CSCS Model None Note Last Modified 07 17 2008 09 15 35 Cancel Close the Coordinate System Manager In the GeoMoS Monitor Options dialog Select your predefined Coordinate System e g CH1903 Selec t Projection correction Distance Reduction The Projection correction scale factor is used automatically 539 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Options Coordinate System _ Properties m Distance Reduction i Automatic Map Projection C No Reduction Sealevel Reduction pies a i Projection Correction Scale Factor at Origin Individual Map Projection Scale Factor r Messages Manual Acknowledge Only Automatically Acknowledge After F Sound tone for Messages Print Messages To ca Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Example 4 Local Coordinate System for a construction site One Step Transformation Classical 2D Transformation r AT Height Mode Ellipsoidal 7 Preliminary Grid l Local Grid orn oe ae Olea E oem nee ium ae yeast Height Approximation z Temporary
345. local coordinate system Check in the Options dialog the coordinate system No reference message 2 Not supported PPM correction Station A message Not supported coordinates not 493 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en computed Velocity could sMessage Not supported not be computed Displacement Message Not supported computation out of range Not enough message 2 The hard disk space is too low for GeoMoS to space on disk store new measurements and results to the database Communication message 2 Implemented in GeoMoS Monitor Occurs if the problem message 11 No communication with sensor is produced more than 5 times within 60 minutes Compensator Message In the Option Dialog of GeoMoS Monitor it is out of range Nivel inclination A message Not supported measurement out of range possible to activate the compensator check If the tolerance is exceeded the system will produce this message Coordinate message Not supported calculation failed Regression E3warning 1 The observation exceeded the specified limit check Regression limit level 1 set in the limit class level 1 exceeded Not all message 2 Not supported coordinate types in database Absolute limit The observation exceeded the specified 494 Troubleshooting check level 1 Absolute limit level 1 set in the limit class exceeded Reference E3warning 1 group out of tolerance Short time limit SMessage 2 c
346. local geodetic geoid models as these transformation types convert directly to local grid Geoid models based on local grid are allowed with these transformation types though Use of geoid models based upon the WGS84 ellipsoid Additionally global geoid models which are based on the WGS84 ellipsoid can be attached to a coordinate system which itself is defined on a local ellipsoid different to the WGS84 ellipsoid if the following conditions are met The transformation is of type Classical 3D One Step Two Step or None The height mode of the transformation is Ellipsoidal which means that the transformation results in local ellipsoidal heights 606 Coordinate System Manager The resulting WGS84 geoid separations will always be converted to the local system and be stored as local geoid separations The orthometric heights will be calculated by applying the geoid separations directly to the WGS84 ellipsoidal heights Geoid Model Displays the Geoid Model Geoid models need to be defined before they become available in the list See also Add a New Geoid Model Note Displays the optional Note to describe the Coordinate System CSCS Model Displays the Country Specific Coordinate System Model CSCS Model CSCS models need to be defined before they become available in the list See also Add a new CSCS Model Note Displays the optional Note to describe the Coordinate System Enter an optional note to describe the Coordin
347. log the Settings button is active The password for the User and the Administrator can be set in the Set Password dialog Follow these steps to set a Password Change to the user level to Administrator Select the menu File User Level 89 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 3 Click the Set Password button The Settings dialog is displayed Edit the passwords for User and Administrator ga Click the OK button The Settings dialog will be displayed again Es Repeat the entry for the passwords and confirm with the OK button Ea The Settings dialog will be closed and the passwords will be saved After the second confirmation the passwords will be saved and activated A password dialog will appear when changing to a higher user level It is only possible to change the user level when the correct password for the respective user level is entered When the password fields for the User and Administrator are empty it is not necessary to enter a password to change between user levels If only one password is entered the Settings dialog cannot be confirmed with the OK button 90 GeoMoS Monitor Page Setup To open Page Setup Follow these steps to open Page Setup 1 Select the menu File Page Setup 2 The Page Setup dialog is displayed Select the preferred printer and change the print properties as required Confirm the selected printer and properties by pressing the OK button The Page Setup dialog will be closed an
348. lows for position only control points to be used as well Compared to the One Step approach information regarding the ellipsoid and map projection has to be known The advantage is that this approach can be used for larger areas than the One Step Further Information Classical 2D Classical 3D One Step Stepwise Interpolation Two Step 620 Coordinate System Manager Add a New Transformation A Transformation is usually calculated using the Leica LGO Datum Map tool However a Classical 2D and Classical 3D may also be added manually Follow these steps to add a new Transformation 4 Right click on Transformations in the Tree View and select New Enter the Name of the transformation Select the Type of the transformation Note Only the types Classical 2D and Classical 3D may be added manually Other transformation types can only be added determined using the Leica LGO Datum Map tool or Orthometric Note The Height Mode may only be selected for Classical 3D Transformations It can also be determined using the Leica LGO Datum Map tool Enter the necessary parameters of the selected transformation type Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function i Select the Height Mode of the Transformation Choose between Ellipsoidal 621 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Delete a Transformation Important Information e Transformations that are currently used in a Coordinate Systems are indicated by A and cannot be
349. lso Edit Delete common reference points Background Map properties Tips Step 1 Open the Background Map dialog Follow these steps to open the Background Map Select from the menu Configuration Background Map The Background Map dialog is displayed 391 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en W Background Map Image Name Filename Width Height Background Map File Cancel Note Each field of the Background map dialog is explained in detail below Click on the image or see Background Map properties om Continue to Step 2 Assign a background image Step 2 Assign a background image Before you can start referencing a background image in GeoMoS you have to register the image Only one image can be registered for one project at any one time The following graphic files are supported bmp jpg jpeg and gif Follow these steps to assign a background image 1 Load a Background Map File by pressing the Browse button The Register Image dialog is displayed Browse to the location where you have stored your background images By default All supported graphic file types found in the selected location will be listed for 392 GeoMoS Analyzer selection Select an image and press the OK button to add the image to the current GeoMoS project and save it in the database Continue to Step 3 Reference a background image Step 3 Reference a background image To referen
350. ltitude above below mean sea level Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported If the local ell height is not available either the WGS84 ell height will be exported Units of altitude meters fixed text M Units of geoidal separation meters fixed text M Age of differential GPS data null wnen DGPS not used XXXX X X GGA xxxx gt Differential Reference Station ID 0000 1023 GNS x x gt Example GPGGA 092525 00 4724 5249318 N 00937 1057283 E 4 07 1 8 474 150 M 0 00 0001 23 GPGNS 134335 00 4724 5287561 N 00937 0830584 E R 06 1 3 470 377 0 24 0000 15 546 Troubleshooting GSI format Points can be imported into the monitoring system using the Leica GSI Geo Serial Interface format The GSI data structure is used for all data transferred between Leica Geosystems electronic survey instruments There is a choice between storing 8 characters places or 16 Wi Word index 84 10 12345678_ Al Additional information DA Data BR DI BL Blank 84 1041 234567890123456__ I When 16 characters are stored and supported a measurement block is tagged with at the first position 547 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Database Topic contents Common GeoMoS database management tasks GeoMoS SQL database structure Check if SQL Server is running Test if database is working Simple SQL queries to extract data Extract data from the database T
351. ly from Reinhardt http www reinhardt testsystem de SENSOR HTM Water Level Piezo DynaOpt DIMETIX Disto The DIMETIX disto is a third party electronic distance meter from the company DIMETIX with serial interface The sensor DLS B sensor must be ordered directly from DIMETIX http www dimetix com support EN _ FRMsupportDLSB html GeoMoS Monitor The DIMETIX sensor is connected in the Sensor Manager via the Leica Disto sensor driver Set the following serial interface parameters Sensor Manager baud rate 19200 Windows Registry Databits 7 and Parity 2 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LEICA Geosystems Leica GeoMoS Projects lt project_name gt Sensors GenericSensors 1 3421 7xxx 169 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Sensor Location Editor Sensor Location Editor Overview To open the Sensor Location Editor Follow these steps to open the Sensor Location Editor Select from the menu Configuration Sensor Location Editor or click the toolbar Sensor Location button E Combined Temp TPS1000 Virtual Sensor Virtual Sensor Cancel Setup Neate Properties Select a Sensor and assign a point from the point list Change the settings as required Click the OK button The Sensor Location dialog will be closed and the settings will be The Sensor Location dialog will be displayed Sensor Location Name Point ID Type GMX_Ruthi NMEA GMx902 GNSS NMEA Logger_ExTemp_DailyAverage
352. m 0 1 to 48 0 hours Per default the value is 24 hours Not available Reset All The complete series dialog will be reset to the default dialog Default Press Default to reset the time interval to the default value 24 hours Available Series Standard series Refer to Observation Types for more detailed information about the standard series 447 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Velocity series 448 This table lists all pre defined velocity series observation types in the GeoMoS software Velocity system observation types Velocity Longitudinal Displacement Velocity Transverse Displacement Velocity Height Displacement Velocity Easting Velocity Northing Velocity Height Velocity Slope Distance Velocity Corrected Slope Distance Atmos PPM Velocity Corrected Slope Distance Ref Description Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component displacement Longitudinal Displacement related to the Null coordinate Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component displacement Transverse Displacement related to the Null coordinate Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component displacement Height Displacement related to the Null coordinate Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component Easting Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component Northing Calculated velocity from the computed coordinate component
353. m ComBox CD ROM in your CD DVD drive of your notebook or desktop PC and start the CD Select Software Leica ComBox Manager The ComBox Manager dialog with the control buttons will be shown Use the Configure ComBox button to configure a connected ComBox 106 GeoMoS Monitor 6 Use the Test Link button to test the connection to the selected ComBox and all its included modules Use the Test Digital Out button to display and change the state of the Digital I O outputs of the connected ComBox EJ Click the Close button The ComBox Manager dialog will be closed Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Read below or click on the ComBox Manager image to learn about all properties in detail E ComBox Manager PIR Close Configure ComBox Test Link Test Digital Dut The table below describes the fields and buttons in the ComBox Manager dialog box Field Button Description Press the Close button to close the ComBox Manager dialog Use the Configure ComBox button to configure ComBox Configure ComBox 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your 107 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ComBox is connected to ComBox Manager Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where ComBox Manager is running Connect
354. m Heerbrugg Feldkirch_GGA FELD HEER TCP IP Lifl2 Quasi Static 0 016 39 7 20 12 2005 13 21 40 4278707 8218 722199 2930 4659686 2657 7 825 km Feldkirch Ruthi_GGA FELD RUTH TEPIP LijL2 Quasi Static 0 042 3 9 6 20 12 2005 13 21 41 4264776 1027 701896 3450 4675676 7399 30 234 km St Gallen Lindau_GGA STGA LIND TEPIP LifL2 Quasi Static Note You can also set the Send To to TCP IP and the format as GGA or GNS GeoMoS can then connect using the sensor type GPS NMEA TCP IP Note that this requires 10 Sensor 50 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 2 Connect GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager Follow these steps to connect GNSS Spider RT Positioning Products in the GeoMoS Sensor Manager Create a coordinate system to convert from WGS84 to the local system Add a sensor of type GNSS Spider RT Products to the Sensor Manager Set the IP address or computer name of the GNSS Spider site server and the site server password Open the RT Positioning Products dialog All the RT Positioning Products configured for GeoMoS will be shown and can be activated or deactivated Close the Sensor Manager dialog with OK Select the menu Measurement Start automatic or click the toolbar Start button gt Check with the Last Actions Messages and Chart tab the results of the RT Positioning Product zJ Add the RT Positioning Product in the Measurement Cycle Editor 51 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tour V Basic data analysis Ob
355. m have the following meanings DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Introduction to GeoMoS WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an unintended use which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an unintended use which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury and or appreciable material financial and environmental damage ES Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner Trademarks Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Safety directions The following directions should enable the person responsible for the product and the person who actually uses the product to anticipate and avoid operational hazards The person responsible for the product must ensure that all users understand these directions and adhere to them Intended use of the product Permitted uses GeoMosS is intended for the following applications e temporary or permanent monitoring installations e connection control and run of different sensors e g total stations GNSS GeoMoS Help 5 1 en e collection storage and presentation of measurement data ecomp utation evaluation a
356. ments Orientation Method A known poinis Follow these steps to determine the orientation with two known points 184 GeoMoS Monitor Select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or press the toolbar Sensor Location button The Sensor Location dialog appears Select the Sensor that needs to be orientated from the list and click the Orientation button The Orientation assistant is displayed The total station control point and sensor type selected in the Sensor Location dialog will be displayed These fields are not editable Click the Next gt button to display the next page Enter the instrument height if required Do not modify the orientation value because this value is only used for the orientation Method B set manually Click the Next gt button to display the next page Select the target point to measure for the orientation calculation Click the Next gt button to display the next page a Aim manually the total station telescope to the selected target point selected in Step 5 Select Use ATR and press the Measure button to take the measurement to a known point prism is necessary GeoMoS Monitor reads the angles and the distance to the known target point The orientation will be calculated and displayed in the dialog Note for TM30 TS30 only The Measure button uses the EDM Standard mode The used ATR mode depends on the Windows Registry By default the software attempts measurements in both mode
357. monitoring data then can be accessed anytime anywhere using a standard web browser All settings and configuration can only be edited whilst measuring is stopped Once measuring is activated the monitoring and updated configuration data will be pushed to GeoMoS Web Before you begin The Data push to GeoMoS Web service requires outbound TCP IP ports 308 For monitoring data access with GeoMoS Web via internet For transferring monitoring data from the field to the GeoMoS Web server Port Description Direction Seo We GeoMoS Web Services end outbound point GeoMoS Web https outbound 30000 31000 GeoMoS Web ftp passive outbound mode GeoMoS Monitor Configure a Data push to GeoMoS Web Follow these steps to configure a data push to GeoMoS Web Select the menu Services Data push to GeoMoS Web Check the Active box Enter the GeoMoS Web Administrator ID and GeoMoS Web Administrator Password Test the data push or press OK to save the settings and close the dialog Select the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor The Measurement Cycle Editor dialog will be displayed Press Insert A new line appears and the Data Push to GeoMoS Web service can be added as Action to the measurement schedule Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Please read the remainder of this topic for more detailed information Data pu
358. mport of GeoMoS XML files Network adjustment computation as minimal constraint network reference points as fixed or absolute fixed Deformation analysis based on the two step method Numerical and graphical analysis of the network adjustment and deformation analysis data Network simulation capability In the GeoMoS Adjustment the following functionality is not supported Connection of sensors Remote control of measurement cycles and measurements Limit checks and Messaging GeoMoS Monitor Option 3 Export to GeoMoS Adjustment Support for manual and automatic export of GeoMoS XML files The service Export to GeoMoS Adjustment in Leica GeoMoS Monitor is required to write GeoMoS XML files for the GeoMoS Adjustment software 77 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Licenses GeoMoS is a scalable and flexible software The new licensing concept takes the complexness of sensors in account The customer needs only to buy the required amount of sensor licenses for the number and sensor types that are connected Sensor Types Amount required per sensor TPS Sensor TPS 1000 Series 1100 1800 2003 TPS 1100 Series TPS 1200 Series GNSS Sensor GPS NMEA Temperature Sensor STS Pressure Sensor STS Combined Temperature Pressure STS Nivel Sensor Humidity Reinhardt Combined Temp Press Humidity Reinhardt Each geotechnical sensors connected via the Campbell Datalogger C 78 Introduction
359. n SQL Server Instance Within GeoMoS different SQL Server instances can be used for GeoMoS This topic gives you guidelines for how to configure a different instance that is already installed and used by a different application Select Start Programs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Configuration Tools SQL Server Configuration Manager In this example the instance name of the SQL Server is ERICH E SOL Server Configuration Manager File Action View Help 888 25098 F SQL Server Configuration Manager Local Name state start m Log On As Process 1D Service Type sieve mi FED SOL Server MSSQLSERVER Running Automatic NT AUTHORITY NetworkService 1620 SQL Server HB SQL Sereg 2005 Network Configuration DSQ Server Browser Running Manual LocalSystem 3380 SQL Browser SQL Native Client Configuration Esa Server Agent ERICH Running Manual LocalSystem 2252 SQL Agent pE RICH Running Automatic LocalSys SQ ve 5QL Server FullText Search ERICH Running Automatic LocalSystem Full Text F stern ryer You need to configure the instance name ERICH in the GeoMoS registry s Registry Editor File Edit View Favorites Help sag Database All Name Type Data b C ListofServers ab Default REG_SZ value not set E DataDispatcher ab chooseDatabaseServerOnStartingLip REG SZ TRUE E Dongle ab DBVersion REG_SZ 309 ca E aB Name REG_SZ Baugrubenueberwachung ta Monitor abpassword REG_SZ Z2VvbiW92 R P
360. n at the same time The view is intended only for single total stations Related Topics Measurement Modes Signal Scan Measurement Mode 104 GeoMoS Monitor Configuration ComBox Manager ComBox Manager Overview Background Information The ComBox Manager helps you to configure each connected Leica ComBox and to manage the connected ComBoxes within GeoMoS The ComBoxes can be configured with the Leica ComBox Manager on the Leica M Com ComBox CD ROM with the Leica ComBox Manager in the Leica GeoMoS Monitor Software Note The difference between these two options is that in the first option you just configure the ComBox With the second option you configure and insert the ComBox settings into the database of GeoMoS which are required if you use a ComBox in a GeoMoS project There are two different communication boxes available Leica ComBox10 Leica ComBox20 The Leica ComBoxes are part of the Leica M Com series The communication boxes provides the communication from the sensors in the field to the Internet via a mobile communication provider The ComBox10 can connect up to two sensors to the Internet The ComBox20 can connect up to four sensors to the Internet Additionally the box contains one meteo sensor and three Power over Ethernet PoE access points for example to connect a PoE webcam Both ComBoxes are also available together with a MonBox30 which can be mounted on a frame in the boxes 1
361. n be defined with the graphic options menus Multiple Series 1 and Multiple Series 2 Note The Series dialog can only be accessed on the Multiple Graphs tab Velocity graph types In GeoMoS Analyzer you can display four types of velocity graphs 443 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Instantaneous Velocity The velocity is shown on an epoch by epoch basis Each set of data e g coordinates is compared to the previous set of data You can define the time interval in the computation field Accumulated Velocity The velocity is shown by comparing each successive set of data e g coordinates with a value at a specified earlier time which you define when you set the start time in the viewer Inverse Instantaneous This allows you to look at the number of days it would take to Velocity displace a defined distance at the current velocity It is the reciprocal value of the Instantaneous Velocity Inverse Accumulated This allows you to look at the number of days it would take to Velocity displace a defined distance at the current velocity It is the reciprocal value of the Accumulated Velocity Open the Series dialog 1 Select the Multiple Graphs tab 2 Right mouse click and select Series from the context menu or press the button be in the graphic toolbar The Series dialog will be displayed 4 The Series dialog consists of two tabs The Standard series tab and the Velocity series tab 444 GeoMoS Analyzer Standard seri
362. n developed by Land Information New Zealand LINZ Toitu te Land whenua Information New Zealand Detailed information is available on http www linz govt nz rcs linz pub web root core SurveySystem Geodeticlnfo GeodeticDatum s nzqd2000factsheet index jsp To convert coordinates from NZGD2000 corresponds to WGS84 to NZGD49 define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation None Ellipsoid International Hayford CSCS Model NZGD49 2000 Any map projection and additionally a geoid model may be used The NZGD49 coordinates will then be displayed as your local coordinates in LGO 686 Coordinate System Manager For working directly in NZGD2000 simply apply a coordinate system comprising of one of the new map projections and the GRS80 ellipsoid Choose transformation and CSCS Model None then 687 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en NADCON U S A NADCON is the standard for conversions between the old North American Datum of 1927 NAD27 and the readjusted North American Datum of 1983 NAD83 The shift between the two datums is given by a grid of geodetic correction values provides by the NGS For detailed information please refer to http www ngs noaa gov TOOLS Nadcon Nadcon html Grid files containing the corrections are available there as well The NADCON conversion is supported in LGO through Geodetic CSCS Models Three NADCON CSCS models for the Conterminous US for Alaska and for Hawaii ar
363. n failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the meteo module Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the webcam Note When you connect a webcam powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the webcam must be 192 168 1 30 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the webcam The message state is only valid if a webcam PoE is connected to this port Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the IP device Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the device must be GeoMoS Monitor 192 168 1 31 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device The message state is only valid if a IP device is connected to this port Port LAN2 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the IP device Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of t
364. n for the PPM Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied Check this option for the setting entered for this sensor to be the default for all new point groups of this type that are created GeoMoS Monitor Properties Distance Intersection Calculation The table below describes the fields in the Distance Intersection Properties Calculation tab dialog box ma cc a Do not update Update immediately Update Average Over Update Options Orientation Correction Vz Correction PPM Correction The station coordinates will be calculated but the Total Station coordinates will not be updated The station coordinates will be calculated and theTotal Station coordinates updated immediately with the computed values The station coordinates will be calculated and a median of all Free Station results of the last defined period will be used to update the Total Station coordinates In addition to the Total Station coordinates the orientation of the total station will be calculated and updated In addition to the Total Station coordinates the VZ correction will be calculated and updated In addition to the Total Station coordinates the PPM correction will be calculated and updated If this option is selected then only the horizontal coordinates Easting and Northing will be updated not the Height 245 Ge
365. n is to prevent jumps caused by different measurement geometry This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Orientation Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied The table below describes the fields in the Orientation Properties Repeat Group tab dialog ee e a box Repeat if one of the checks fails Max Number of Repetitions Delay between Cycles If check this option will cause the system to re measure the point group if one of the above checks fails This setting defines the number of times the system will re measure the point group if the above checks continue to fail This setting defines the delay between the re tries The purpose of this setting is to allow time for a temporary obstruction to be moved allowing the system to measure all of the points in the group 249 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Properties PPM Checks The table below describes the fields in the PPM Properties Checks tab dialog box ee peer S Minimum The minimum number of points that must be successfully measured before Number of the PPM Correction will be computed and applied The purpose of this Valid Points option is to prevent jumps caused by different measurement geometry Tolerance This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the PPM Standard Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation wor
366. nality in the Multiple Graphs tab ea ree OO The displayed graphs can be selected with the Series dialog Select the right mouse menu and select the Series entry Legend The point legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph It is also possible to show Comments in the graphic The comment legend is indexed for each comment which is shown in the graphic Layout The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on the graphic the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics Content The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menu Options Multiple Series Select the right mouse menu and select the Options entry 440 GeoMoS Analyzer Specific content Data that exceeded the blunder Total Station raw measurements that exceeded tolerance the blunder tolerance can be hidden amp Select the right mouse menu and set the Options Blunder Tolerance entry to active or not Reset graphic ee active P S Series VL Show Outliers BT Blunder Tolerance Data that is set to valid or Each measurement has a state which can be invalid set to valid or invalid An invalid measurement state is a so called outlier ha Options Res
367. nce when making products This allows you to define a single product that is used for all sites Select the Antenna tab 473 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Receiver Operator Thematic RINEXx Headers Sensor comm 1 Sensor comm 2 General Antenna Marker coordinates Latitude 10 O 0 00000 N Longitude O O 0 00000 E Height oo m JE r Geoid separation Antenna type RINEX name Antenna serial number Setup ID Horizontal offset 000 Vertical offset 000 Height reading 000 Measurement type Vertic o Total vertical height ooo 0 Enter accurate WGS84 or ITRF coordinates Select from the Menu View Settings for changing from cartesian to geodetic coordinates The Geoid separation will be added to NMEA GGA strings created by positioning products Use the default if in doubt Enter the correct Antenna type Enter the correct Height reading xa Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function EE Upload the settings to the sensor Only for active sensors Connect the sensor 474 GNSS Spider 11 Start the sensor Sensor commands SAPOS Ravensbg New LGTB Ant B merma New Copy LGTB Bregenz LGTB Rebstein Delete DEL AGNES SARG LGTB Kaltbrunn LGTB Abtwil SG LGTB R thi LGTB WERT Connect LGTB FLUM Active Thomas Sensor communication gt Pass 2 3 Ruth Pass 2 3 Breg Pass 3 0 Breg Pass 3 0 Ruth MAX Breg Pass
368. nd post processing of data Prohibited uses e Use of the product without instruction e Use outside of the intended limits e Disabling safety systems e Modification or conversion of the product e Use after misappropriation e Use with accessories from other manufacturers without the prior express approval of Leica Geosystems e Use of the product as an alarm management system e Use as an exclusive measurement system for monitoring of deformation measurement WARNING Adverse use can lead to injury malfunction and damage It is the task of the person responsible for the product to inform the user about hazards and how to counteract them The product is not to be operated until the user has been instructed how to work with it Responsibilities Area of responsibility of the manufacturer of the original equipment LEICA Geosystems AG CH 9435 Heerbrugg Switzerland hereinafter referred to as Leica Geosystems Leica Geosystems is responsible for supplying the product including the online help system and original accessories in a completely safe condition Responsibilities of the manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories S Introduction to GeoMoS The manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories for the product are responsible for developing implementing and communicating safety concepts for their products and are also responsible for the effectiveness of those safety concepts in combination with the Leica
369. ng C Users lt your_user gt AppData Roaming Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs Startup Important The folder AppData is a hidden folder Select in the Windows Explorer the menu Organize Folder and Search Options Select the View tab Activate the Setting Show hidden files folders and drives Create a GeoMoS Monitor shortcut and drag the shortcut into the Startup folder Open the command line interpreter Select Start type into the search field the command msconfig and press ENTER The command line interpreter opens Select the Startup tab Check the GeoMoS Monitor appears Check with a PC reboot that the settings are working correctly Windows Vista Step 1 Set the password in the registry Open the Windows Registry 2 Go to Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft WindowsNT CurrentVers ion Winlogon Modify the AutoAdminLogon 1 Es Add the new String Value DefaultUserName and enter the correct values Add the new String Value DefaultPassword and enter the correct values Note The password is not stored in encrypted form Step 2 Insert GeoMoS Monitor in the Startup folder Select Start All Programs right click the Startup folder and then click Open Create a GeoMoS Monitor shortcut and drag the shortcut into the Startup folder 561 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 3 Check with a PC reboot that the settings are working correctly Windows XP 562 Step 1 Set the password for the Aut
370. nreferenced to referenced After an image has been referenced you can view the residuals of the transformation from image coordinates to grid coordinates in the lower left window Confirm the transformation between image coordinates and local grid coordinates with OK The dialog will be closed and the transformation will be saved in the database Edit Delete common reference points Any of the geo referenced points can be deleted or edited if the background image is not referenced To delete points from the image either select a point in the image or select the point s to be deleted in the corresponding lower left window Choose Delete from the context menu to delete the selected point s To modify the point select in the lower left window Modify from the context menu The referencing information can now be edited In edit mode the point on the map image cannot be moved only the true coordinate values or image pixel values can be changed If you wish to change the position of the referencing point on the map you must first delete the incorrect point and create a new one 394 GeoMoS Analyzer Background Map properties The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Background Map dialog box Field Button Description Contains the map image Right click in this window pane and the following context menu is displayed I e E Set reference point You can define the coordinates for a reference point
371. nt geometry The maximum accepted standard deviation of the horizontal angles for the result to be calculated and applied The maximum accepted standard deviation of the horizontal distances for the result to be calculated and applied The maximum accepted standard deviation of the height differences for the result to be calculated and applied 243 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 244 Repeat if one of the checks fails Max Number of Repetitions Delay between Cycles Correction Checks Orientation Vz Correction PPM Correction Set as Default If check this option will cause the system to re measure the point group if one of the above checks fails This setting defines the number of times the system will re measure the point group if the above checks continue to fail This setting defines the delay between the re tries The purpose of this setting is to allow time for a temporary obstruction to be moved allowing the system to measure all of the points in the group This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Orientation calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Vz Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this figure than the correction will not be applied This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviatio
372. ntation and instrument height will be saved and used for further measurements and calculations Click the OK button to exit the Sensor Location dialog The coordinates and the orientation for the standpoint are set The points which should be monitored have to be entered imported or learned to the system This will be explained in the next steps Step 10 Create Profiles Follow these steps to create Profiles Select from the menu Configuration Profile Editor or click the toolbar Profiles The Profile Editor dialog will be displayed Click the Insert button to create a new profile row Enter the profile name and the azimuth Confirm the entry with OK 39 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en In the next steps a point will be assigned to a selected profile which is used during the calculation of the displacement vector Profiles can be assigned to points in the Point Editor dialog Step 11 Create Limit Classes Follow these steps to create Limit Classes el symbol for Limit Classes mz The Limit Classes dialog will be displayed Create a new Limit Class Confirm the entry with OK In the next steps a point will be assigned to a selected limit class which is used during the Select from the menu Configuration Limit Class Editor or click the toolbar messaging Limit classes can be assigned to points in the Point Editor dialog Step 12 Monitoring Points All points which should be monitored have to be c
373. nter that will be used to print the messages from Messages To the system Background information for the reduction of distances Curvature of the path of the beam Light waves are not propagated in a straight line between two points Due to refraction they have a curved path As a result the length of the arc D1 has to be reduced to that of the chord D2 The effect of the curvature of path needs to be taken in account over large distances exceeding 50 km A Point A B Point B 297 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Chord to arc correction 298 D2 R Radius of the Earth r Path radius D1 Arc D2 Spatial chord Since the surface of the earth is curved the chord D1 has to be converted to the arc D2 The chord to arc correction need to be taken into account only when distances are greater than 10 km R Radius of the Earth D1 Chord D2 Arc Reduction to sea level GeoMoS Monitor Reduction of the spatial chord D1 toa chord at sea level D2 can be carried out either with using heights or using the vertical angle GeoMoS uses the directly reduction to sea level with known heights A Point A B Point B HA height of A HB height of B R Radius of the Earth D1 Spatial chord D2 Chord at sea level 299 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Customize Background information This dialog contains the different settings for time format point obstruction stat
374. ntersection Group Properties dialog there are various options available for the automatic determination of the Total Station coordinates over a defined time period The coordinate solutions of the Distance Intersection point group can be averaged over a defined time e g 24 hours The automatic calculation of the Total Station coordinates can be turned on or off in the Distance Intersection Group Properties dialog The average of the Total Station coordinates using Distance Intersection is only applied when the respective option is active in the Properties dialog Before a point group with the type Normal is measured the coordinates of the control point will be calculated and used for the reduction of measurements If a point group with the type Distance Intersection is available in the measurement cycle the respective option must be activated in the Options dialog before the control point coordinates are updated from the Distance Intersection solution Note One point should not be entered more than once ina Distance Intersection group Type PPM Point groups with the type PPM will be used to determine the atmospheric scale factor from measurement to the fixed or stable points contained in the point group The PPM value is calculated from the ratio of calculated reference distances and actual measured distance The new PPM value is used to correct the next measurements in the measurement sequence For this correction to be app
375. nts point groups profiles and sensors for display in the graphic Refresh of the Selection Select a time period for the display of the desired points and press the refresh button r4 to refresh the graphic and reports Hint Database changes e g new points and profiles are loaded to the Analyzer with the combination Shift r Step Mode The Step Mode automatically selects a single point or profile one at a time The current selected point or profile will be shown in the graphic 421 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tabs Tabs Upon opening GeoMoS Monitor tabs at the bottom of the view allow you to quickly switch from one view to another Tabs _Site Map Longitudinal Displacement Velocity Vector Height Displacement Transverse Displacement Height Vector Multiple Graphs Report Observations Select from the menu Configuration Customize to change the settings 422 GeoMoS Analyzer Site Map Background information The Site Map gives you a graphical overview of the status of the monitoring project A background map can also be uploaded to enable thematic information to be seen Note The site map is able to have one image stored as background map The image must be geo referenced one time before it can be shown as background map Please read the topic geo referencing for more information on this process The Site Map shows as default the position of the Null Coordinates Topic contents Icons Move
376. nts with known coordinates When to use Use the Free Station coordinate calculation to determine the initial total station control point with minimum two known points in a coordinate system after moving the total station control point to re compute the total station coordinates before starting the measurements Procedure Follow these steps to configure the coordinate calculation Free Station Select the Setup button in the Sensor Location dialog for a total station The Free Station tab page is active Select a point from the list that will be measured for the Free Station Aim manually the total station telescope to the selected point and press the Measure button The measurement will be executed with the total station and the point will be listed in the Measured Points list The selected measurement mode Point Editor for this point will be used For example measurement mode ATR The horizontal angle vertical angle and distance will be measured 172 GeoMoS Monitor Measurement mode Distance IR The distance will be measured and used for the free station computation The angles have a low accuracy and are based on the positioning angle Note for TM30 TS30 only The Measure button uses the EDM Standard mode The used ATR mode depends on the Windows Registry By default the software attempts measurements in both modes normal ATR and low visibility ATR For example when the normal ATR
377. o Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 08 01 45 59 800 BE Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 58 10 H Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 58 00 59 300 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 57 10 j Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 57 00 59 600 F Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 56 10 2 H Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 56 00 59 400 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 55 10 j Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 55 00 d 59 200 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 54 10 l Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 54 00 P 59 500 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 53 10 j Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 53 00 k 59 400 F Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 52 10 s Fl Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 52 00 X 59 500 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 51 10 Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 51 00 i 59 500 EB Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 50 10 fi Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 50 00 si 59 800 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 26 Jul 2008 07 49 10 i Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 49 00 l 60 300 EB Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 48 10 i Meteo Sensor Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 48 00 t 60 500 Fi Meteo Sensor Pressur Temp Point 28 Jul 2008 07 47 10 t Matan
378. o configure an ODBC driver Import data example with MS Excel Common GeoMoS database management tasks Manual export of a database of backup Automatic export of a database Import a database a Shrink a database GeoMoS SQL database structure Information on the database structure is available on request Check if SQL Server is running L The icon will be shown in the system tray if MS SQL Server is running A fthere is a problem the icon will be shown instead Open the MS SQL Server to check what server it is using It should show the name of the local machine 548 Troubleshooting Tip If the MS SQL Server stops working it may be due to a changed Windows Login password Test if database is working To make sure the GeoMoS database is properly configured run the following command below from the DOS prompt osql E Q use GeoMoS Database select from points If database is functioning correctly data will be output to the screen Otherwise an error message will be given Simple SQL queries to extract data All GeoMoS settings measurements and results are stored to an open MS SQL database SQL Structured Query Language is a standard computer language for accessing and manipulating databases There are many SQL resources on the internet for example http www w3schools com sql default asp Information on the database structure including SQL queries are available on req
379. o edit any settings Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard The button Apply in this dialog is always inactive due to it is not possible to edit any settings Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog 136 GeoMoS Monitor ComBox Test Link Background information The Test Link process tests the connection to the selected ComBox and all its included modules respectively the ports of the modules Note This test can be only executed if the selected ComBox is physically connected via an Ethernet cable or Internet to the computer where the ComBox Manager is running To open the Test Link dialog please follow the instructions on the page ComBox Manager Overview 137 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Procedure Depending on the ComBox type and the connection type LAN or Internet the Test Link process differs in the tested modules ComBox Description of the tested modules Connection Type ComBox10 E Test Links LAN Description State Port COM1 Connection successfull Port COM2 Connection successfull Control port for the Baud rate of COM2 Connection successfull Port 1 0 card Connection successfull Port ComServer Connection successfull amp Port VNC to MonBox Connection failed This message is valid if a device is connected to this port Cl
380. o increase the displacement range value The 383 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en displacement vectors will be drawn in the right position and direction and the length is based on the selected profile The two axis show the coordinates of the selected coordinate system The horizontal axis shows the Easting Y and the vertical axis shows the Northing X Labels The diagram labels Diagram title and Sub title can be entered Entering the lt gt character shows the default subtitle in the diagrams The print out shows the diagram creation date and time date of the last measurement X and Y axis axis label and point legend Increasing Check or uncheck to reverse the displayed axis for either the Northing Direction and or Easting coordinates Point The displacement vector can be defined relative to the 1st measurement in Displacement time period or with respect to the Null measurement The null measurement is the first defined measurement 384 GeoMoS Analyzer Multiple Series Follow these steps to open and configure the Multiple series dialog Select menu Configuration Options or press the button Options i i The Graphic Options dialog appears The dialog shows option pages for the available graphics Activate the page Multiple Series 1 or Multiple Series 2 Define the right options Ea E a Press the OK button Press refresh to show the Multiple Graphs with the new options The dialog will be closed and t
381. o run the bat file in a command line Define in the Measurement Cycle Editor in the column Action the configured application Actions can be added to be run after the measurement of the point group is finished Select the menu The dialog will be displayed Select the type of connection Set the interval for the FTP connection Enter the correct and for your FTP server and the directories Ez Use the button to check the FTP connection is ok Press the button to save the changes and to close the dialog 559 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en How to Configure the GeoMoS Auto Start Select your operating system Windows 7 Windows Vista a Windows XP Windows 7 Step 1 Set the password in the user accounts Open the command line interpreter Select Start type into the search field the command cmd and press ENTER The command line interpreter opens Enter the command control userpasswords2 and press ENTER The User Accounts dialog opens Important The User Account dialog can only be opened if the user is logged in with Administrator rights or as Users and enters an Administrator password De activate the check box Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function The Automatically Log On dialog opens Enter user name and password Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Select the Startup folder 560 Troubleshooti
382. oMoS Help 5 1 en Note Updates are only executed if all chosen checks on the Checks tab are fulfilled The Update Options Orientation Vz and PPM Correction are updated if all chosen checks on the Checks tab are fulfilled regardless of which Update scenario Do not update Update immediately or Update Average Over is selected Distance Intersection should not be combined with the Free Station Point Group or GNSSUpdate in the Sensor Location Manager Only one method for updating the station coordinates should be used for a given total station Checks The table below describes the fields in the Distance Intersection Properties Checks tab dialog box ee ea Number of Points Minimum The minimum number of points that must be successfully measured before Number of the corrections will be computed and applied The purpose of this option is Valid Points to prevent jumps caused by different measurement geometry Basic Checks The maximum accepted standard deviation of the horizontal angles for the result to be calculated and applied Horizontal The maximum accepted standard deviation of the horizontal distances for Distance the result to be calculated and applied Height The maximum accepted standard deviation of the height differences for the Difference result to be calculated and applied 246 Repeat if one of the checks fails Max Number of Repetitions Delay between Cycles Correction Ch
383. oS Tour Ill Setup a total station with a co located GNSS sensor Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to setup a Leica total station with a co located GNSS sensor The Total Station coordinates are updated with GNSS observations Procedure Follow these steps to setup a total station with a co located GNSS sensor Configure a GNSS sensor with 1Hz NMEA GGA output Only a quality level of 4 ambiguity fixed phase position will be used for monitoring To define a coordinate system in the Coordinate System Manager select the menu E Configuration Options or click the toolbar Options button The Options dialog is displayed Either define your own coordinate system or choose a existing coordinate system from the list box The set transformation is used to transform 45 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en coordinates from WGS1984 to a Local system To connect the GNSS sensor and the total station select the menu Configuration Sensor Manager or click the toolbar Sensor Manager button The Sensor Manager dialog is displayed Sensor Manager Communication GNSS NMEA CoM1 9600 Soe a TPS1000 COM3 9600 She Insert p Dee License Count 40 999 Insert the total station and the GNSS sensor and confirm the entries with OK To assign the connected GNSS receiver to the total station sensor select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or click the toolbar Sensor Location button ES The Sensor Location d
384. oS software and can be used with the available system units that are configurable in the Customize dialog Whereas a user defined observation type can be added from the customers and has either one of the available system units or no unit Observation types are used throughout the system for virtual sensors datalogger configuration limit checks and visualization in the different views or the GeoMoS Analyzer To open the Define Observation Types dialog Follow these steps to open the Define Observation Types dialog Select the menu Configuration Virtual Sensors and press the Types button or select the menu Configuration Sensor Manager and press the Types button during the configuration of the Campbell datalogger parameters The Observation Types dialog will be displayed Each row shows one observation type Select the Insert button to create a new observation type and enter the observation type Name select a suitable System Unit and if required a Description Ea Press the OK button to save the changes and to close the dialog Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only 205 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Read below to learn about all properties in detail Observation Types Peeeeeeeoeeeoeseeoeeed Name System Unit_ Deser Temperature Pressure Humidity Horizontal Dist Relative Height Corrected Slop Corrected Slop Hz
385. og for each point PPM settings Follow these steps to configure the PPM settings pe The CONFIGURE Instrument Menu panel appears e Select the 4 TPS Corrections menu The CONFIGURE TPS Corrections panel appears Set the following AtmosPPM parameters Temperature 12 0 C Atm Pressure 1013 3 mbar Rel Humidity 60 Atmospheric ppm Toggle with PAGE F6 to the GeoPPM tab Set the following GeoPPM parameters Calc Scale Manually Scale at C M 1 000000000000 21 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 22 All other values must be set to zero Toggle with PAGE F6 to the Refraction tab Set the following Refraction parameters Correction Off Confirm the settings with CONT F1 Note The ppm correction must be determined within GeoMoS Online mode Not available for Leica TPS1200 Instruments Auto Start configuration Follow these steps to configure Auto Start Pep mra Pe emcee pee Introduction to GeoMoS Offsets Follow these steps to configure Offsets Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The TPS1200 Configuration panel appears Select the 1 Survey Settings menu efor e arene Le ae nee Compensator and Hz Correction Follow these steps to configure Compensator and Hz Correction Go to the Main Menu Select the 5 Config menu The TPS1200 Configuration panel appears KAE a Set the Compensator to On 23 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 24 9 Set t
386. oint group TM30 1S30 If you have multiple total stations make sure you select the correct sensor before pressing the Learn Posit To or TargetCapture buttons E See Learn for more information The total station selected in the list box above is used to learn the point Posit To Use this button to make the currently selected total station position to aim at the currently selected point TM30 TS30 only Use this button to retrieve an telescopic camera TargetCapture image from the aimed direction of the selected total station naan nine Soe Use this option to read out the current temperature and pressure from the attached meteo sensors This will ensure that the correct meteo information is used in the coordinate calculation when learning points import Coordinate Fie Import points from an ASCIl file See Import file for more information import GSI Fi Import points from a GSI file See Import file for more information Note Changes to the data are valid from the time of the changes It may not be possible to reprocess previous measurements if changes have been made except for Additive Constant TargetCapture 218 GeoMoS Monitor TargetCapture makes the telescopic camera image available for visual documentation of the point measured Obstructions in the line of sight can be inspected remotely avoiding safety concerns in high risk environments e The TargetCapture feature is only supported by Total Stat
387. oint to the north Total Station points The standard profile direction will be calculated from the station point to the target point GNSS points The standard profile direction will be calculated from the station point to the north Read below or click on the Profile Editor Image to learn about all properties in detail Profile Editor Names Azimuth dec Remark OK UW PERFIS_DAS_TS 0 0000 WW PERFIL_150 99 6886 WW PERFIL_110 111 3119 WW PERFIL_130 105 4227 WW PERFIL_170 93 6117 Cancel Wi PERFIL_190 88 0564 WW PERFIL_210 82 1047 WW PERFIL_230 77 1013 WW PERFIL_250 70 4232 WW PERFIL_270 66 1922 WW PERFIL_290 63 0577 lt Calculate The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Profile Editor dialog box The Profile name is used to identify and select the Profile in the Point Editor Point Group Editor and Reports When the profile azimuth is edited the new value will be used for all following calculations and measurements results This will cause previous results calculated on the old azimuth to be inconsistent from all future results which will use the new azimuth which may cause steps in the measurement data Remark A remark may be entered to describe the profile 263 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en at Follow these steps to insert a manual Profile definition Select the menu Configuration Profile Editor or click the toolbar Profiles button W The Profile Editor dialog will b
388. oints but using four allows for residuals to be calculated In addition you need to know the type of map projection on which the local coordinates are based and it s parameters as well as the local ellipsoid used Because this approach splits the transformation into two separate components position and height are independent of each other as with the Interpolation method This means that the points used for determining the position and height transformation do not necessarily have to be the same points As the position transformation is determined using the Classical 3D approach the transformation area may be larger than with the Interpolation Transformation The limiting factor for the transformation area is the accuracy of the height transformation Basically the method works like this 1 The center of gravity of the common points is computed 2 The shifts between WGS84 and the local ellipsoid are computed 3 The map projection is applied to the WGS84 points 4 The Classical 2D transformation parameters are determined 5 The height interpolation is determined 616 Coordinate System Manager In flat or relatively flat areas where good heights are available in the local system the approach will have no problem in constructing a good height transformation for relatively large areas The more height points included the better the height transformation will be In areas where it is suspected that the geoid undulation i
389. oints in the Vz Correction point group to determine the vertical angle correction The Vz Correction point group has the highest priority and will interrupt any overlapping point group with a lower priority in the measurement cycle Note The Vz Correction is essentially an estimation from the refraction effects which change according to atmospheric conditions It is essential that measurements taken using this correction technique are measured within small time intervals and that the Total Station control point and the reference points used in the Vz Correction point group are absolutely stable This correction should only be used in cases where variations in the measurements are specifically identified with refraction problems related to the vertical angle measurements System Control Point Groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements The point groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements are controlled internally by the system They are activated using the Remeasure Points that could not be measured and Remeasure Points that were not within limits options in the Normal Point Group 323 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Properties The points contained in these point groups and the measurement times are not user definable The Tolerance Exceeded point group contains all the points that have exceeded the defined limit and created a limit exceeded message When a point cannot be measured or the measurement to a point pro
390. oints that are not measured or do not pass the plausibility checks will be automatically added to the system Control Group Tolerance Exceeded and will be measured at the end of the normal point group Depending on the selected Meteo Model the meteorological data will be collected and a Correction will be calculated for the measurements The results are calculated and the tolerance checks made depending on the active tolerance checks When a Tolerance Limit is exceeded a status message will be generated and the point will be added to the system Control Group Repeat Measurements The system point groups Control Groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat GeoMoS Monitor Measurements will be measured at the end of the point group with the type Normal They are assigned the lowest priority Stop E Selecting Stop will end the current measurement and complete the computation and tolerance checks for the current measurement and send any outstanding status messages The status messages and data will be saved and the system Control Groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements will be re initialized After a Measurement Cycle is stopped the system information is re initialized Pause Continue Hl Selecting Pause will interrupt the measurements at the current state of the Measurement Cycle When a measurement to a point is in progress it will be completed before the measurement cycle is interrupted When the system is in the P
391. ol os point t Leica DNA and Sprinter Level control point Campbell Scientific datalogger s Virtual sensor Poit The name of the sensor control point The date time that the null measurement was last updated Observation The observation type Some sensors will have more than one observation Type type and will use more than one row in the dialog Current The current reading from the sensor observation type Value Null Value The null value set for the sensor observation type Important The default Null Value is set to zero junit The display units Description Enter a description to record important information about the null value that has been entered Measures from the sensor and updates the Current Value Update Null Sets the Null Value to match the Current Value GeoMoS Monitor Message Configurator Background Information The messaging functionality is license protected This functionality can be purchased with GeoMoS Monitor Option 2 article number 774 136 Please contact your Leica representative The Message Configurator is used to dispatch system messages For example you can send the message long time limit exceeded to different E Mail addresses It is also possible to run external applications or switch ON OFF a relay on a digital input output card All of these different events are referred to as Actions The following actions are available n Trun to external application command line
392. ollow these steps to configure the Coordinate calculation GNSS 180 Enter the coordinate offset of the GNSS Sensor in the GNSS Offset fields as Easting Difference Northing Difference and Height Difference if required The offset indicates the eccentricity of the GNSS antennae to the point Press the Start button to begin the GNSS measurements The GNSS coordinates will be recorded and averaged and the standard deviation of the coordinates is calculated and displayed Note The coordinate types Reference Current Scan and Setup are updated after the Sensor Location is confirmed with OK GeoMoS Monitor Coordinate Calculation Manual The Total Station coordinates values of Easting Northing and Height can be entered manually in the Point Editor dialog After confirming with the OK button the coordinates will be saved and used for the next measurements in the measurement cycle The instrument height can input in the Orientation dialog 181 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Total Station Standpoint Coordinates Background information The Total Station coordinates can be determined by various techniques e Manual entry of the coordinates e Free Station using measured horizontal directions and distances e Distance Intersection using measured distances e GNSS Coordinates requires a connected GNSS Sensor The Free Station and Distance Intersection can only be measured with an initialized Total Station The GNSS techni
393. ollowing link ComBox Test Digital Out 4 After the test you can close the dialog 115 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ComBox Connect Background information The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown whenever you would like to create a connection to a ComBox This happens when you press in the ComBox Manager dialog the button Insert Edit Test Link Test Digital Out You always have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to the ComBox Manager C onnect via LAN the ComBox is physically connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where the ComBox Manager is running Do not forget to change the IP address of the notebook or desktop PC in order that the computer works in the same network as the ComBox Please use for your computer following IP address 192 168 1 10 Refer to the ComBox Manual Chapter 3 3 Configuration for more information 116 GeoMoS Monitor Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 10 Subnet mask 25S 255 255 De Default gateway z L Cblan DNS server addiess allomatieally Use the following DNS server addresses Pre
394. ologon There are many Autologon tools on the internet for example Tweak UI for Windows from Microsoft 1 Install the Tweak UI software on your computer and start the software tool Select in the Tree View the menu Logon Auto Logon Check the Log on automatically at system startup box to bypass the initial logon dialog box Note The password is stored in encrypted form Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Step 2 Insert GeoMoS Monitor in the Startup folder Select Start Programs Startup Right click to open the Context Menu and select Open All Users Es The Startup folder will be displayed Ee Drag and drop the GeoMoS Monitor into the Startup folder Troubleshooting amp C Documents and Settings All Users Start Menu Programs Startup File Edit View Favorites Tools Help T J Search Kz Folders JES F x it Ez o A B C Documents and Settings All Users Start MenuiPrograms Startup Acrobat Assistant fall Adobe Reader Speed Launch BTTray A Cisco Systems VPN Client al Digital Line Detect g Microsoft Office Bp Service Manager Baa Monitor Close the Startup folder e Check with a PC reboot that the settings are working correctly 563 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en How to connect GeoMoS Analyzer to a different computer If Leica GeoMoS Monitor is running on a computer in a network it is possible to connect to this GeoMoS database with Leica GeoMoS Analyzer from a d
395. om border and line formats you choose for the selected series Select an option in the color box to change the border or line color for the selected series Style Select an option in the Style box to specify the line style for a line or border Select an option in the Weight box to specify the line weight for a line or border In some systems if the line style is different than solid the line or border weight must be 1 pixel Gallery Select a chart type for the selected series or the entire chart If a particular series is selected a multi type chart will be displayed in the chart area Please note not all chart types can be combined Select an option to customize the marker or point shape for a line polar step lines or curve chart Show Lets you choose how frequent data markers are shown in the selected series 461 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en every For example if you have 100 points you can choose to show the point shape every 10 markers Changes the size of the data marker or point for a line polar step lines or curve chart Shows or hides the selected series Axes Tab The table below describes the settings in the Axes Tab Setting Desorption O OE Axis Selector Choose the axis to be formatted Visible Lets you show hide the axis in the chart area When hidden the axis will not display gridlines tickmarks or labels Type a value in the major unit box to specify the interval of major tickmarks
396. omma i ipti l i ing geeft aan dat er deformatie is op pu 19 08 2005 10 53 03 278 Action of type Send SMS triggered Command 31651298805 Descintion Ted De Leica monitoring geeft aan dat er deformatie is op pu v gt 99 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Free Station Log File To open the Free Station Log File Select from the menu View Free Station Log File For each free station computation the Free Station Logfile is updated All values are given in m for distances and gon for angles in this Free Station Logfile The units cannot be changed in the Free Station Log File The free station kernel uses a robust computation method For the weighting a modified form of the general principle of least squares adjustment is applied amp endash in simplest terms the least squares technique is adopted with robust weighting Weights are calculated depending on the fit between the observed and the computed value for an observation Therefore observations which are in good agreement with the computed values are awarded higher weights relative to those which have large differences between observed and computed values The advantage of the robust weighting is that it enables good results to be obtained even if errors are within the data Bad data is effectively de weighted and therefore has little or no influence upon the results Note If all measurements are of high quality the results for the robust method will be consistent
397. on Free Station Distance Intersection Station Point TPS Sensor Date Time TSi TSi 24 06 2005 04 10 33 Easting Northing Height Instrument height 11467 149 5259 543 10 344 Reference points measured for Station calculation Results Measured points Average Error Eee Pitesti From the Points list select the point to which you want to measure the direction and distance Combined Temp A ESTREF1 The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Coordinate Calculation dialog box The name of the Total Station control point TPS Sensor The name of the sensor GeoMoS Monitor Reference points measured for Station calculation Poms The list of available points in the system Measured points Contains a list of all points that have been measured Positions the total station to the selected point This button is only active after two points have been measured Measures with the total station the selected point Lists the average error in the computation Scale Lists that scale factor from the computation Note The Average Error and Scale indicate the initial precision for the total station control point 175 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate Calculation Distance Intersection Background information The Distance Intersection calculation is used to determine the position of the Total Station coordinates by measuring distances to control points with known coordinates
398. on The Additive Constant and Reflector Height will be set to zero as default 222 GeoMoS Monitor Import File Import Coordinate File The points can be imported from a formatted ASCII file e g koo xyz csv txt The format can be selected from the list of existing formats or edited to suit the file to be imported The Point ID and coordinates can be imported Follow these steps to import a Coordinate File Select the menu Configuration Point Editor or click the toolbar Points button 3 The Point Editor dialog will be displayed Click the Import Coordinate File button The Open Point File dialog will be displayed Select the file to be imported and select the required import Format required Enter a coordinate Offset to be added to the imported coordinates if required Format Example The koo file has by default the following format 1_10p 30_40x 42_52y 54_63z The Point ID is read from the position 1 to 10 the X coordinate math axis or Easting coordinate x from position 30 to 40 the Y coordinate math axis or Northing coordinate y from the position 42 to 52 and the Z coordinate math axis or Height coordinate z from the position 54 to 63 Note It is not possible to change the x and y in the mask but it is possible to change the positions The xyz csv txt file has the following format p x y z The values are read in the following order Point ID p X c
399. on civil to military coordinates 078 x x1 200000 0 079 y y1 600000 0 080 081 output 082 writeln b y 15 4 x 15 4 083 end 084 end 085 086 if id 2 then begin 087 088 Transformation GRID to ELLIPSOID 089 090 while not EOF a do begin 091 readin a y x 092 093 transformation military to civil coordinates 094 y1 y 600000 0 095 x1 x 200000 0 096 097 transformation plane to sphere 098 Iquer y1 r 695 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 099 bquer 2 0 arctan exp x1 r pi 4 0 100 101 transformation sphere to sphere 102 cobo cos bo 103 sibo sin bo 104 cobi cos bquer 105 sibi sin bquer 106 coli cos Iquer 107 sili sin Iquer 108 wert cobo sibi sibo cobi coli 109 bk arctan wert sqrt 1 0 wert wert 110 Ik arctan cobi sili cobo cobi coli sibo sibi 111 112 transformation sphere to ellipsoid 113 ex sqrt ex2 114 lati bk 115 repeat 116 ritko lati 117 wert1 pi 4 0 bk 2 0 118 wert1 sin wert1 cos wert1 119 wert1 In wert1 alpha 120 wert2 In 1 0 ex sin lati 1 0 ex sin lati ex 2 0 121 lati 2 0 arctan exp wert1 wert2 rk alpha pi 4 0 122 until abs ritko lati lt eps 123 loni lono lk alpha 124 125 output 126 writeln b lati 15 12 loni 15 12 127 end 128 end 129 close a 140 close b 141 end There are a few minor constraints in the user written program that must be observed in order
400. onitor The table below describes the fields and buttons in the TPS Read Out dialog box TPS Sensor Select the active total station sensor a Station is pointing Transverse Tilt The current tilt in the transverse direction orthogonal to the direction the Total Station is pointing Total Station The current horizontal angle V VAngle The current vertical The current vertical angle ReadAnges M ee this button to read the angle measurements from the Total Station Slope Distance Slope Distance Distance The current The current slope distance tothe target o distance to the target Read Slope Distance oe Distance clei this button to read the slope distance from the Total Station State Battery ame The ee capacity of the currently used battery or external power source as a percentage Read Battery State d Read Battery State State Press this button to read the battery status from the Total Station 329 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Help Help Topics The help topics of the GeoMoS Analyzer application will be shown 4 Select the Menu Help Topics The Help dialog appears 3 Search for the topic you are interested in and close the help dialog 4 The dialog Help will be closed The help dialog can be used to read through the topics listed in the content window to quickly go through the index or to search the help using key words 330 GeoMoS Monitor View Licenses Topi
401. onitor dispatches an SMS with the last Message 5 that generated the Action 6 287 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 2 1 3 4 56 75 min PUIDU d wto time 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 24 04 2008 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 288 GeoMoS Monitor Compute Daily Average Background information The daily average is the average position of each point for each calendar day The daily average is used for analysis of long term tends and may be displayed in the Analyzer Note The Daily Average only calculates the average of the results Results that are de activated in the GeoMoS Analyzer Report tab are excluded in the calculation of the Daily Average A manual re processing may be required To open the Daily Average Follow these steps to open the Daily Average EE Select the menu Configuration Daily Average pe The Daily Average dialog window is displayed Daily Average Automatic Update daily average of results every day aan Manual Start date End date 23 07 2008 23 07 2008 Update The table below describes the fields in the Daily average dialog box 289 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en If this option is selected then the daily average will be calculated automatically The daily average may be displayed in Analyzer These settings may be used to manually calculate the daily average for a given time period Start Date The start date for the manual daily average calcul
402. ons reference points These values are only used for the point 102 method Computed new control point coordinates easting northing height with the standard deviations Computed orientation and scale Input of the measured reference points and residuals of the computation GeoMoS Monitor The new determined control point inserts a new TPSSetup entry The computed orientation and scale factor from the robust computation method The orientation is only used if the in the Free Station Group Properties the checkbox Orientation is selected The scale is never used OrientationOnly point groups If more than one reference point is measured in the OrientationOnly point group this value is used Input values Hz angle horizontal distance height difference easting northing and height coordinates type reference The horizontal distances and height differences are computed with the corrections and reductions as configured in the Options dialog Output values Hz residuals Horizontal Distance residuals and Height Difference residuals 103 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Signal Scan To open Signal Scan Select from the menu View Signal Scan Refer to the Signal Scan Measurement Mode technical description for a description of the signal scan and an explanation of the view Note The Signal Scan view will not be displayed correctly if more than one total station are measuring using signal sca
403. onsisting of the two characters Nx e The first character is always N the second character is alphanumerical from 0 9 and A Z e 36 individual addresses are available A maximum of 32 Nivel sensors can be connected to a data bus Example 5 Nivels N1 N2 NB NF and NZ are connected to a single serial port Note Never use the Nivel address NO because this address calls very Nivel sensor in a network 158 GeoMoS Monitor Campbell Scientific Datalogger The Campbell Datalogger and the connected geotechnical sensors differs slightly in the workflow from all other sensors you may use together with Leica GeoMoS because in addition a small and very simple program at the onboard measurement and control module of the Campbell Datalogger is required Add a Campbell Scientific Datalogger Follow these steps to add a Campbell Scientific Datalogger 1 Open the Sensor Settings of the Campbell Datalogger The Campbell Datalogger Parameters dialog will be displayed Right click on the IP address in the tree view and choose Add Campbell Datalogger Add Datalogger Pakbus Address Select the correct Pakbus Address enter the Datalogger Name of the new Campbell Datalogger and continue with OK The Campbell Datalogger will be shown in the tree view Right click on the Campbell Datalogger and choose Add Datalogger Table Leica GeoMosS will connect to the Campbell Datalogger and read the available tables i Selec
404. oordinate x Y coordinate y Z coordinate z The values are separated with a comma The X Y and Z are related to mathematical axis and can be converted similar to the given example above 223 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en For newly imported points the following settings are standard No Profile standard Limit Class Additive Constant 0 and Reflector Height 0 Offset If it is necessary to add an offset to the imported coordinates the offset values can be entered in the available Offset fields If the imported coordinates are in the same coordinate system as the defined in the system then these offsets will normally be zero EJ Click the Open button to import the file An Import Point message box will be displayed to ask if existing points should be overwritten Existing points can be overwritten or skipped with the following options Overwrite Overwrite All Skip Skip All or Cancel The Open Point File will be closed The Import Summary will be displayed Import Coordinates Summary General Information Total number of rows 29 Imported Points 29 No of rows processed 29 No of new points 29 No of rows not processed 0 No of points overwitten 0 Details gt gt Click the Close button The Import Summary dialog will be closed and the imported points will be shown in the table Import GSI File Follow these steps to import a GSI File Eg Select the menu Configuration Point Editor or cl
405. option cannot be chosen due the ComBox is already configured and inserted in GeoMoS General start up Use this option to edit a configured ComBox You can choose between a LAN or Internet connection For the option Internet the host name DynDNS name and the port number of the wireless router will be automatically set in the text field They cannot be changed Note If you would like to edit your ComBox over a LAN connection the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where GeoMoS is running make sure that the selected ComBox in the ComBox Manager dialog corresponds to the ComBox which is physically connected to the LAN E ComBox Connect Test Link The connection to the ComBox and all its included modules will be tested Connect via LAN Intemet Cx You can test the connection to the ComBox and all its included modules 119 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en over two possibilities LAN the ComBox must be physically connected with a Ethernet cable to the computer where the ComBox Manager is running Local Area Network LAN Please refer to the ComBox User Manual Chapter 3 1 Preparation how to connect the ComBox to the computer Internet To use the Internet connection the host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required Test Digital Out E ComBox Connec The state of the Digital 1 0 outputs will be displayed and can be
406. or at Origin 1 0 Last Modified jor 6 2008 16 37 52 Coordinate System properties Define a new coordinate System with the following settings Name e g BaWue Classical 3D Transformation BaWue Local Ellipsoid Bessel 1841 Proje ction GK3 No Geoid Model No CSCS Model 534 Troubleshooting Coordinate System properties General Name Bawue Transformation Bawue X Trans Type Classical3D Ellipsoidal Residuals No distribution z Local Elipsi esan SY Projection GK3 x Proj Type TM Geoid Model None v CSCS Model None Note Last Modified 07 16 2008 16 37 52 Cancel Close the Coordinate System Manager In the GeoMoS Monitor Options dialog Select your predefined Coordinate System e g GK3 Selec t Projection correction Distance Reduction The Projection correction scale factor is used automatically Options Coordinate System TE Properties Cancel Distance Reduction Automatic Map Projection Vv r C No Reduction C Sealevel Reduction Projection Correction Individual Map Projection Messages Manual Acknowledge Only C Automatically Acknowledge After Sound tone for Messages Print Messages To ea Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 535 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Example 3 National Coordinate System Switzerland Local Grid h EIN ai QU wa gt Projection Customized Swiss95 Local Geodetic j h iN
407. or even longer under certain conditions 511 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Highest signal return is often not in the center of the prism Expected Profile Measured Profile Less noisy signal in the transition sections of the signal return Upper scan limit Lower scan limit Signal Return SNR Left Edge Right Edge Scan Range m Estimated Center Center of prism The flow of the signal scan is Search for good signal If no signal found then a Point not found message is generated KITT x Signal 70 Steps 6 Limits 30 85 512 Find right edge Show Signal Scan i x Signal 95 Steps 1 Gi 209 0284 93 3529 Limits 30 85 Find left edge Show Signal Scan i x Signal 95 Steps 1 209 0635 209 0284 93 3529 Limits 30 7 85 Find top edge Troubleshooting 513 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en x Signal 105 Steps 3 209 0192 209 0413 93 3448 Limits 30 85 Find bottom edge Show Signal Scan Signal 251 213 9784 214 0244 95 1676 Limits 30 85 Final measurement of distance and angles 514 Troubleshooting x Signal 91 Steps 6 93 3104 1506 764 m 209 0635 93 3919 209 0413 93 3512 Limits 30 85 Notes If at any stage the edge detection criteria are not satisfied then a Point not found message is generated The progress of the signal scan can be seen in the Signal Scan View
408. ordinate Null Coordinate Hide Point To hide the selected point in the Site Map tab 428 GeoMoS Analyzer Displacement Longitudinal Transverse and Height The displacement of the point movements of the selected points will be shown based on the time period settings The time will be displayed on the horizontal axis and the displacement is displayed on the vertical axis The point legend contains the relationship to the different colored curves in the graph It is also possible to show Comments in the graphic The comment legend is indexed for each comment which is shown in the graphic The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on the graphic the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics By default the connecting line of a graphic is interrupted between two measurements if the time difference is bigger than 1 day This setting is stored as MaxDiffDays 1 in the GeoMoS Graphics ini file and may be modified if required The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menu Options Longitudinal Displacement Options Transverse Displacement Options Height Displacement 429 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Velocity The velocity of the point movements of the selected
409. ored to the database Virtual sensor results outside the set limits causes the message Measurement out of range on the Messages tab System Unit Displays the current system unit This is the physical quantity of the Observation Type A user defined remark or comment about the defined virtual sensor and the formula The formula of the selected virtual sensor is displayed It is possible to combine data from physical sensors using Aliases with constants mathematical functions and or logic operators 202 GeoMoS Monitor Aliases Name Enter an unique name for the alias Sensor To identify a physical sensor data in a formula with an alias the combination of Point ID the Sensor name and Point ID is required Sensor Displays the selected sensor control point of the observation type Location Observation Displays the as alias available Observation Type of the selected physical Type sensor Note The observation types Hz V Slope Distance Easting Difference Northing Difference Height Difference are not available for the definition of an alias Select between Abs Null or Diff Absolute Use this shift to select the absolute value Null Use this shift to select the null value Depending on the sensor the null value is set either in the Null Measurement Editor or the Point Editor Difference Use this shift to select the difference between the current value and the null value The difference is computed wi
410. ose Module Port Possible States Port COM1 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the wireless router Port COM2 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer 138 GeoMoS Monitor Control port for Connection successfull The port is open the Baud rate of Connection failed There is a problem with the COM2 ComServer Port I O card Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the I O card Port ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Port VNC to Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the MonBox MonBox Note The message state is only valid if a MonBox is connected to this port Press this button to close the dialog and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog ComBox10 E Test Links Internet Description 7 DynDNS server DynDNS settings OK Por COMI Connection successfull 9 Port COM2 Connection successfull Port 1 0 card Connection successfull Port ComServer Connection successfull Port VNC to MonBox Connection failed This message is valid if a device is connected to this port Close 139 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Description Possible States Module Port DynDNS server DynDNS settings OK Connection to
411. ostProcessingOptions REG_SZ AHERNOBROEMEOI ERICH ProcessiDs ab TimeOutSeconds REG SZ 30 mE Projects lab TryAgainIfServiceNot etRunning REG_SZ FALSE E ProtocolPrinter fabjUser REG_SZ geomos As a HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Leica Geosystems Leica GeoMoS Database Server computer_name sql_instance Example AHERNOBROEMEO1 ERICH 582 Troubleshooting How to activate the Sensor_Log txt file The Sensor_Log txt file documents the communication between total stations and Leica GeoMoS Monitor For support reasons you may be asked to send the Sensor_Log txt file When to use Activate the Sensor_Log txt file only fo r support reasons if the Monitoring team requests the file Important Deactivate the Sensor_Log txt file after the support case is solved because there is no automatic file cleanup and the hard disk will fill up Procedure to activate The Sensor_Log txt file can only be activated and deactivated in the Windows Registry Note For each total station the Sensor_Log txt file must be separately activated and deactivated For each Nivel Bus System there is only one Sensor_Log txt file but the Sensor_Log txt file must be activated on two positions in the Windows Registry It must be activated for the Nivel with the lowest and the highest ID This is also valid for other settings in the bus system like Timeouts Number of measurements etc Follow these steps to activate the Sensor_Log t
412. ot known it might be safer to use local control points with orthometric heights and apply a transformation to approximate the local geoid The Classical 3D Transformation can be used in areas where the geoid has a regular shape while the Stepwise Transformation is particularly suitable if the local geoid contains large variations within the mapping area e Geoid Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by A and cannot be deleted Select from the index below to learn how to manage the Geoid Models Add a New Geoid Model Delete a Geoid Model Geoid Model Properties 654 Coordinate System Manager Related Topics How to write your own Geoid Model Compute Geoid Separations Create Geoid Model field file 655 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Add a New Geoid Model Follows these steps to add a new Geoid Model Right click on Geoids in the Tree View and select New Enter the Name for the new Geoid Model Select the Coordinate Type Geodetic or Grid the Geoid Model shall be defined for For coordinate type Geodetic with height scaling see Geoid models with height scaling Select the reference Ellipsoid which the model shall refer to Note For the Geodetic geoid models which refer to the WGS84 ellipsoid you may select Apply on the local side The geoid separations will then be applied after the transformation i e to the local ellipsoidal heights Enter the path and name of the user written
413. otors The Total Station coordinates will be re determined and saved at the beginning of a point group with Type Normal The method used to update the control point coordinates is dependent on the settings in the Free Station Group Properties if using a Free Station the Distance Intersection Group Properties if using Distance Intersection or in the TPS Properties GNSS Update of the Sensor Location Editor if using GNSS Type Special Point groups with the type Special have the next highest priority as point groups with type Normal A point group with the type Normal will be interrupted during measurements if a point group with type Special is scheduled to be measured The measurement of the point group with the type Normal will be continued after the point group that interrupted the 233 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 234 measurements has finished measuring Type FreeStation Point groups with the type FreeStation are used for the determination of the Total Station coordinates using both distances and angle measurements These point groups should contain the fixed or stable points for determining the Total Station position In the Free Station Group Properties dialog there are various options available for the automatic determination of the Total Station coordinates over a defined time period The coordinate solutions of the FreeStation point group can be averaged over a defined time e g 24 hours The au
414. ou want to so you can find and use them quickly The configuration toolbar Introduction to GeoMoS contains shortcuts to all of the menu options that are needed to configure the system Monitoring Toolbars allow you to organize the commands you use most often the way Toolbar you want to so you can find and use them quickly The monitoring toolbar contains shortcuts that allow you to easily to select another point group for manual measurement Measurement Toolbars allow you to organize the commands you use most often the way Toolbar you want to so you can find and use them quickly The measurement toolbar contains shortcuts to start and stop manual and automatic measurement The main window contains the main content of the selected tab Tabbed View Upon opening GeoMoS tabs at the bottom of the view allow you to quickly switch from one view to another Overview Last Actions Messages Observations Chart Sensor Status Status Bar The status bar shows important system information such as the current activity the user level and the time GeoMoS Help 5 1 en User Interface Analyzer General The GeoMoS graphical user interface GUI has been designed to be simple and efficient to use and configure The look of the GUI is very similar to that of Microsoft Windows Explorer with a collapsible tree view in the main window s left pane and a property view in the right pane With this presentation approach the user c
415. ound information GeoMoS Analyzer has an option to display the result data as daily average The daily average is calculated from 00 00 hr to 24 00 hrs for any particular day The main purpose is to reduce the amount of data viewed in the graphics over longer time periods e g weeks months or years It is sometimes easier to see the trends of the graphics over longer periods when the data is filtered and reduced using the daily average calculation If the daily average is active the measurements from the last 24 hours will be displayed as raw measurements Select the menu Configuration Daily Average Note To de activate the Daily Average display mode select the Configuration menu Daily Average again Automatic Calculation of Daily Average To view the Daily Average in Analyzer the average results must first be calculated Select the menu Configuration Daily Average in the GeoMoS Monitor program for the automatic calculating of the daily average Manual Calculation of Daily Average To view the Daily Average in Analyzer the average results must first be calculated Select the menu Configuration Daily Average in the GeoMoS Monitor program for manual calculating of the daily average Note The Daily Average only calculates the average of the results The average is calculated and stored as an average result the measurement is not averaged This means that in the Analyzer Report the Daily Average display will not displ
416. ove description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only Read below or click on the ComBox Manager image to learn about all properties in detail E ComBox Manager Host name rcomboy dyndns org Edit View Settings Test Link Test Digital Out The table below describes the fields and buttons in the ComBox Manager dialog box The name of the ComBox Each ComBox must have an unique name The host name of the ComBox Each ComBox has an own host name It is the TCP IP address of the ComBox and corresponds to the created DynDNS name in your DynDNS account which you must create when you would like to use ComBoxes With this address you can localize your ComBox and communicate with it Press the Close button to close the ComBox Manager dialog 111 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Use the Insert button to configure and insert a ComBox into GeoMoS Insert 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to GeoMoS Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where GeoMoS is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required Note When you configure your ComBox the first time you have to select Initial Startup and a LAN connection is require
417. p Monitoring points are statistically tested against significant displacements Stable monitoring points are added to the group of reference points 317 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Measurement Automatic Measurement Background information The automatic measurement mode is fully automatically until the Administrator ends the process The various measurement cycles and related computations and limit checks are continually controlled by the system time timer The automatic measurements can be started from the GeoMoS Monitor Before the automatic measurements can be started there must be at least one Point Group with type Normal defined in the Measurement Cycle editor 318 Select the menu Measurement Start automatic or click the toolbar Start button gt The automatic measurements will be initialized and the configuration Points Profiles Limits Options will be loaded The special system Control Groups for Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements will be re initialized The measurement time defined for the Point Groups in the Measurement Cycle Editor will be checked respectively with the Priority of the individual Point Groups When the measurement time for a point group is reached the measurement cycle will be started and the first point in the point group will be automatically pointed to and measured The raw measurements will be checked for plausible errors Point blunder checks Standard Deviation All p
418. p first please try to open the connection manually to make sure it is working Select lt Start gt lt Settings gt lt Network Connections gt and choose your previously configured dial up connection and connect it If the dial up process was successful disconnect the connection manually afterwards Now you have to do some GeoMoS related adjustments to the installed dial up connection Open the Properties of the dial up connection which you have installed in the earlier steps Select lt Start gt lt Settings gt lt Network Connections gt and right click on your previously configured dial up connection and select lt Properties gt Select the tab Options Dial up Connection Properties s 2 x General Options Security Networking Sharing rm Dialing options IV Display progress while connecting IV Prompt for name and password certificate etc T Include Windows logon domain J Prompt for phone number m Redialing options Redial attempts 3 Time between redial attempts iminute x Idle time before hanging up fi minute Tl Redial if line is dropped Cancel Go to the group box Redialing Options Enter a value for Redial attempts It is recommended to choose 3 redial attempts or more As the next step enter a value for the Idle time before hang up In general it is recommended for auto dial in connecting software to define a idle time of the telephone line for a hang up The recommended setting
419. p 3 Add a new Ellipsoid Follow these steps to create a new Ellipsoid 1 Right click on Ellipsoids in the Tree View and select New The New Ellipsoid dialog appears 3 Enter the Name of the Ellipsoid Enter the Semi major axis a of the Ellipsoid Enter the Reciprocal flattening 1 f of the Ellipsoid 64 Introduction to GeoMoS New Ellipsoid General Name Pessel 1841 Semi major axis a 6377397 155 m Reciprocal flattening 1f 299 15281 285 Cancel Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Continue to Step 4 Add a new Projection Step 4 Add a new Projection Follow these steps to create a new Projection Right click on Projections in the Tree View and select New The New Projetion dialog appears 3 Enter Name of Projection It is often useful to give any Projection set a meaningful name that identifies the area in which the Projection is applicable For example UTM Zone 5 hemisphere north UTM 5 North Selec t Type of Projection Mercator Tran sverse Mercator TM Obliqu e Mercator Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Ca ssini Soldner Lambert one Standard Parallel Lambert two Standard Parallels Polar Stereographic 65 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Dou ble Stereographic Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic or User defined Enter the necessary parameters of the selected Projection Note It is not possible to use State Plane Zones directly To use
420. perature and pressure at the target point and the temperature and pressure at the total station control point is averaged and used for the atmospheric correction The setup coordinate determines which meteorological sensor is used In some cases it may occur that not enough meteorological sensors are available to interpolate the temperature and pressure at the target point When the target temperature and pressure cannot be interpolated the system defaults to the Temperature Pressure option and will attempt to correct the measured distance using the temperature and pressure at the total station control point If no temperature pressure data is available the system will then use the Meteo Model No Correction Note Refer to the Meteo Corrections settings for a comparison of the advantages and disadvantages of reference distances and meteo sensor The reduction of the distance to horizontal can be selected to use the measured vertical angle recommended of the control point and target points The reduction of the distance to horizontal can be selected to use the heights i e elevations of the control point and target points During the point learn process the reduction of the distance will always use the measured vertical angle Warning Distance reduction using End Heights should only be used together with the Coordinate Calculation Only Measured Distance 193 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Compensator The total sta
421. perty Page enables you to display edit the Geoid Model Properties e Geoid models can either be defined by an executable file or by a geoid model field file For geoid models being defined by a field file the geoid separations required in your project are always kept up to date whereas for geoid models being defined by an executable file it is necessary to manually compute geoid separations e Geoid Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by A and cannot be renamed but only modified General Settings Description Ll c am not used in any Coordinate System definition Coordinate A Geoid Model may calculate Geoid separation values for either Geodetic or Type Grid Coordinates Ask the provider of the Model for the required Coordinate Type For coordinate type Geodetic with height scaling see Geoid models with height scaling A Geoid Model is referenced to a particular Ellipsoid Ask the provider of the Model for the correct Ellipsoid Apply on For the Geodetic geoid models which refer to the WGS84 ellipsoid you may the local select Apply on the local side The geoid separations will then be side applied after the transformation i e to the local ellipsoidal heights Path of EXE Path and file name including the extension EXE To select from the fils browser click Displays the optional Note to describe the Geoid Model The Note may be T enome o T Last Displays the Date and Time the Geoid Mod
422. ple _Coordinate_System X Properties Cancel Distance Reduction Automatic Map Projection ed r C No Reduction C Sealevel Reduction Projection Correction Individual Map Projection Messages Manual Acknowledge Only C Automatically Acknowledge After l Sound tone for Messages Print Messages To Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Related topics Options dialog Examples of Coordinate Systems 71 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en GeoMoS Configurations GeoMoS Monitor The GeoMoS Monitor application is the stand alone measurement station The following functionality is supported Connection to various sensors supported in Monitor TPS GNSS meteorological and geotechnical sensors Serial or TCP IP connection to supported sensors Proje ct management Us er levels Learn points Manual control point coordinate determination with Free Station Intersection or GNSS update for total stations and orientation Automatic measurements with various options Blunder tolerance checks on raw data Information about the current system and measurement status Calculation of GNSS displacements Calculation of GNSS daily average results Automatic database export Support for the MS SQL Server 2005 Express In the GeoMoS Monitor the following functionality is not supported 72 Support for the full SQL Server 2005 from Microsoft only the SQL Server 2005 Express The full MS S
423. potentially use a lot of CPU and hard disk Therefore the PP Positioning Products are done sequentially one at a time and only once creation of all file products has finished Currently only uncompressed file products and file products compressed by Zip and GZip are supported If the file product is from streaming data and the site is stopped and re started then multiple file products will be created where there would normally be one One of the last products to be created should be used the file product at the normal file product rollover 489 Technical Information Messages The following messages may be generated by the system See the Description Comment for information on what each message means and if applicable how the issue can be resolved Some messages are from previous versions of GeoMoS and are no longer supported These messages are still retained in the database and as such will be shown in the Message Configurator ID System failure Not supported a 2 Power failure EQwarning 1 You must have connected a UPS uninterrupted power supply to the PC where GeoMoS Monitor is running Most UPS application can run a external application if the power is interrupted In the BIN directory of the GeoMoS installation a small application UPS_Alarm exe that will produce this message Burglary GeoMoS Monitor will support a digital Input Short time limit E3warning check level 1 exceeded O
424. previous ComBox Manager dialog Advanced B Setup ComBox View settings General Mobile Provider DynDNS Advanced Port COM1 Port COM2 Port 1 0 card Port wireless router Port ComServer Field Button Description of the displayed settings Ports COM1 to Text fields with the entered COM port numbers COM4 of the ComBox Per default Port COM1 50001 Port COM2 50002 Port COM3 50003 ComBox20 only 135 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Port COM4 50004 ComBox20 only Port meteo Text field with the entered meteo sensor port sensor number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50020 Port webcam Text field with the entered webcam port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50030 Port LAN1 Text field with the entered LAN1 port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50031 Port LAN2 Text field with the entered LAN2 port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50032 Port I O card Text field with the entered I O port number of the ComBox Per default 50010 Port wireless Text field with the entered wireless router port router number of the ComBox Per default 50050 Port ComServer Text field with the entered ComServer port number of the ComBox Per default 50051 Port VNC to Text field with the entered VNC to MonBox port MonBox number of the ComBox Per default 50098 The button Default in this dialog is always adimi inactive due to it is not possible t
425. put or calculated between two existing points The calculation of the displacement along the profile perpendicular to the profile and in the vertical direction is dependent on the type of profile assigned to the point Definition 261 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en J J J Nisin Longitudinal Displacement m n Transverse Displacement Profile Direction Overall Displacement Vector The profile direction defines the direction of the longitudinal displacement The transverse displacement is orthogonal to the longitudinal displacement Example 5 Profile Direction The reference point up on the hill 1 was measured and used to define the profile direction In the Point Editor dialog a monitoring point was insert and measured 2 with the Learn button The coordinate types Null Reference Current and Scan are stored in the database To detect movements this monitoring point was located in a unstable area and over the years the monitoring point moved 3 to the current position 4 With the automatic measurement cycle the point is measured and the displacements computed The longitudinal displacements and the transverse displacements 5 are displayed on the Last Actions tab Standard profiles If in the Point Editor no profile is selected then the standard profile will be used 262 GeoMoS Monitor Total Station standpoints The standard profile direction will be calculated from the station p
426. que requires a connected GNSS Sensor Manual entry of measured Total Station or GNSS data is not possible The Free Station Distance Intersection and GNSS techniques can also be used for the automatic Total Station coordinate computations when activated in the Options dialog The movement of the control point can be monitored and automatically corrected A time period can be defined for calculating the coordinates using the Median Technique for Total Station coordinates Total Station Coordinates Follow these steps to configure the Total Station coordinates Select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or click the toolbar Sensor p Location button _2 The Sensor Location dialog will be displayed The Coordinate Calculation dialog will be displayed Select the required technique Free Station Distance Intersection or GNSS to determine the coordinates of the control point and follow the procedures to calculate the coordinates Ey Select a location point for the Sensor and press the Setup button 182 GeoMoS Monitor 6 Confirm the new Total Station coordinates with the OK button The Stand Point Settings dialog will be closed and the new Total Station coordinates will be saved in the database The Sensor Location dialog will be closed The Point ID the TPS Sensor and the Time will be saved with the Total Station coordinates and are not editable The technique used to determine the Total Station
427. r Setups Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates Data Editor Manual Coordinates 406 GeoMoS Analyzer Data Editor Setups Background information The Total Station coordinates are calculated in the automatic measurement cycle at the beginning of a point group of type Normal or after a point determining point group free station distance intersection or GNSS update The coordinates in the automatic cycle are calculated over a defined time defined in the TPS Properties dialog using Free Station computation Distance Intersection computation or GNSS coordinates The manual method of determining the control point coordinates offers 4 different computation methods being manual control point setup free station distance intersection and GNSS coordinates Post processing only uses the calculated coordinates of the control point The control point coordinates can be edited manually and post processed but the control point coordinates are not reprocessed automatically by post processing The history of all control point coordinates will be displayed It is not possible to modify the Point ID and the Time The Easting Northing and Height values can be modified Adding new lines i e additional control point coordinates is not supported Setup Properties Data Editor Additive Constant Fieflector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates Manual Coordinates Easting m Northing m Height m Instrument Height m
428. r comm 2 2 OST6 General 3 KALS Antenna b gt Bregenz Operator i 3 Ruthi Thematic b a RINEX headers aoe p gt Heerbrugg p Heerbrugg B gt Heerbrugg C SiteMap _Site Sensor Raw Data Status File Products AT Products AT Positioning PP Positioning You have now done all necessary preparations in order to create a Positioning product 477 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Create and Edit Positioning Products Open a server Switch with the Tabbed View to the RT Products tab SiteMap Site Sensor Raw Data Status File Products AT Products RT Positioning PP Positioning _ Click into the RT Positioning Products window and select New from the context menu Now the RT Product dialog appears Select the General tab New RT Positioning Product INACTIVE General Channel Logging Rates Product name New RT Positioning Product Site name and code Reference site Use network Send positions to Geos o o Message type fp 0 Processing Jaz o Satellite system GPS ony o Smoothing Dif X Initialisation Quasi Static ad OK Cancel E Enter a Product name Each RT Positioning Product must have a name Selec ta Site name and code The site that is to be monitored 478 GNSS Spider Selec ta Reference Site The site that is to be used as the reference station for the baseline processing Note The rover site and reference site must be different sites zero
429. r own computer select local Select OK and the GeoMoS Analyzer starts with the connection to the selected GeoMoS database in the network 565 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en How to activate an UPS uninterrupted power supply In case the network power is down an uninterrupted power supply UPS can power the GeoMoS computer Action the GeoMoS Monitor can take GeoMoS Monitor shows the message Power failure to indicate the that the network power is down The message Power failure can be assigned to any action e g e mail or SMS to inform the responsible staff Procedure to activate Follow these steps to setup an UPS to power the GeoMoS computer 566 1 Setup the UPS following the user manual Connect the UPS to the GeoMoS Monitor computer Most UPS can run an external application if the network power is interrupted GeoMoS Monitor provides in the GeoMoS BIN directory an external application UPS_Alarm exe Configure the UPS software to start the external application UPS_Alarm exe in case the network power is down Assign the message Power failure in the Message Configurator to any action e g e mail or SMS to inform the responsible staff In case the network power is down the UPS GeoMoS Monitor shows the message Power failure Troubleshooting Troubleshooting How to Configure Dial Up Connections Background information Within GeoMoS dial up connections can be used for GeoMoS to Internet s
430. r the currently selected action using the Condition button You will be presented with the following dialog Condition Trigger Condition Trigger On Every Message Cancel Trigger On Every fio Minutes Elapsed Since First Message Trigger If r Delay ction l Trigger Only Between Trigger On Every Message Activate this radio button to execute an action without any delays With the check box Trigger Only Between the action is hold back for a defined interval in a defined time range Trigger On Every Activate this radio button to execute an action after a defined number of messages In addition you can check the minutes elapsed since the first message was produced from the system With the check box Trigger Only Between the action is hold back for a defined interval in a defined time range For more detailed information about this function see the Conditions Dialog Examples Trigger lf Activate this radio button to execute an action after a defined number of messages in a time range In addition you can restrict this condition for a point group With the check box Trigger Only Between the action is hold back for a defined interval in a defined range For more detailed information about this function see the Conditions Dialog 272 GeoMoS Monitor Examples Trigger Only Between Each of the above defined trigger conditions can be enabled with this check box for a defined interval in a defined
431. rage Over 24 Hours Cancel Min Number Of Measurements po Do Not Update Height Update Reference Coordinate Blunder Blunder Tolerance fo m Sensor Name GNSS NMEA Confirm the entries with OK Select the Properties button in the Sensor Location dialog for the total station The TPS Properties dialog is displayed Select GNSS Update tab Activate the check box Update the TPS Station With GNSS Before Measuring A Normal Group and select the correct GNSS sensor TPS Properties Measurements Calculations Corrections GNSS Update iV Update The TPS Station Coordinate With The GNSS Coordinate Before Every Normal Group Parameters GNSS Sensor GNSS NMEA we Do Not Update Height Sensor Name TCA2003 Confirm the entries with OK To define measurements for the GNSS Update select the menu Configuration Measurement Cycle Editor or click the toolbar Sensor Manager button Sl The Measurement Cycle Editor is displayed 48 Introduction to GeoMoS Define e g for the GNSS sensor an interval of 5 minutes Measurement Cycle Editor TPSSensar Generic Sensor Font rou Start tine Continuous interval _ End tme Telescope poss Act 4_Leica 00 00 00 No 02 00 00 23 59 59 Face I GPS NMEA 00 00 00 No 00 05 00 23 59 59 Cancel Insert elet Point Groups To check the measurements select the Last Action view Note The above description guided you through the cre
432. rameters for the height will be calculated This transformation determines 4 parameters 2 shifts Easting and Northing 1 Rotation and 1 Scale factor e The Classical 2D transformation may only be used to export local Coordinates to an ASCII file A Classical 2D transformation can not be used in a Project Other transformation approaches Classical 3D One Step Two Step Interpolation Stepwise Which approach to use 609 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Classical 3D Background Information The Classical 3D transformation approach creates transformation parameters using a rigorous 3D Classical method Basically the method works by taking the Cartesian coordinates of the GPS measured points WGS84 ellipsoid and comparing them with the Cartesian coordinates of the local coordinates From this Shifts Rotations and a Scale factor are calculated in order to transform from one system to another The Classical 3D Transformation approach allows you to determine a maximum of 7 transformation parameters 3 shifts 3 rotations and 1 scale factor However the user can select the parameters to be determined The Classical 3D transformation allows the choice of two different transformation models Bursa Wolf or Molodensky Badekas For the Classical 3D transformation method we recommend that you have at least three points for which the coordinates are known in the local system and in WGS84 It is possible to compute transformation
433. range is also very likely in case of a weak communication line 194 GeoMoS Monitor Sensor name The name of the sensor Set as default Check this option for the setting entered for this sensor to be the default for all new sensors of this type that are connected to GeoMoS 195 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en TPS Properties Corrections Important Information e If there is no Vz Correction or PPM Correction activated in the Point Group Editor than you have to check that the displayed values in the tab Corrections are zero otherwise you should reset them by pressing the appropriate buttons Vz Cor 0 PPM Corr 0 or j e Itis very important when you reset the corrections that you confirm the changes by closing the TPS Properties and the Sensor Location with OK If this is not done the reset corrections will not be activated Corrections Settings The table below describes the fields in the TPS Properties Corrections tab dialog box Description Vz Correction This field shows you the value of the Vz Correction which was used to correct the last V angle measurement in the measurement sequence PPM This field shows you the value of the PPM Correction which was used to Correction correct the last distance measurement in the measurement sequence Sensor Name The name of the sensor 196 GeoMoS Monitor TPS Properties GNSS Update These options can be used if a GNSS sensor is co located with the total station
434. rates match to the baud rates of the instruments which will be connected to the COM ports of the ComBox Set the appropriate meteo sensor port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50020 Set the appropriate webcam port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50030 Note When you connect a webcam powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the webcam must be 192 168 1 30 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the webcam over mobile Internet Set the appropriate LAN1 port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50031 Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP address of the device must be 192 168 1 31 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device over mobile Internet Set the appropriate LAN2 port number ComBox20 only of the ComBox Per default 50032 Note When you connect a IP device powered over Ethernet PoE to the ComBox20 via a LAN port of the unmanaged Ethernet switch the IP GeoMoS Monitor address of the device must be 192 168 1 32 Otherwise you are not able to communicate with the IP device over mobile Internet Port I O card Set the appropriate I O port number of the ComBox Per default 50010 Port wireless Set the appropriate wireless router port router number of the
435. rd steps 5 The GNSS Sensor Communication dialog will be displayed Select the Sensor Type and the used communication device in the Sensor connected via field Click on Next gt to connect the sensor and proceed Note If Spider fails to connect the sensor the Sensor Connection Failure dialog appears prior to the next step of the Wizard 7 The General site parameters dialog will be displayed Enter the Site name the Site code which is a unique 4 character ID and the marker information The marker information is used in RINEX headers Typically it corresponds to Site name and code Ed Click on Next gt to proceed The Antenna dialog appears Enter the accurate coordinates alternatively if connected to the sensor press From sensor to query at least navigated coordinates the correct antenna type and the height reading Click on Next gt proceed until the Site Setup Wizard is completed The Site Setup Wizard can also be used if connection to the sensor is not yet GNSS Spider possible In that case finish the Wizard despite the failed connection but remember to upload the settings once the connection can be established 2 Create and configure a Site manually For standard setups it is recommended to run through these basic configuration steps Refer to the GNSS Spider Online Help for detailed information on the individual settings 1 Open a server 2 Switch with the Tabbed View
436. re the levels with the baud rate 9600 Restart Level with Switt Abos 5 This option is used to enable continuous uninterrupted operation of the monitoring system Lewel Continue in 7 is scheduled m TER schedule 556 Troubleshooting Switchbox Commands lt PWR_ON gt lt PWR_OFF gt 557 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en FTP Connections Background information With the QueryAndPush tool it is possible to push a database file or SQL results to a FTP Server The following parameters are available Parameter Description Additional description Query Q SQL script that c temp Points sql includes the SQL FTP Server F ftp leica geosystems test com D Time of exports the last 4 exported hours data Time of exports everything exported since the last export data Compressed format Poe 558 Troubleshooting To use the QueryAndPush tool Follow these steps to use the QueryAndPush tool Define a bat file The bat file includes all information and parameters to push a database file or SQL results to a FTP Server Examples a Database file c Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Bin QueryAndPush EXE F ftp leica geosystems test com U geomos P GzB54QxP D Temp E 1 b SQL query c Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Bin QueryAndPush EXE F ftp leica geosystems test com U geomos P GzB54QxP D Temp Q c temp Points sq Select in the Message Configurator Add Application t
437. reated in the Point Editor dialog The points will be connected with a profile and a limit class There are two possibilities to create point ID s 1 Enter manually 2 Import To make it easier for the beginning only the manually entered points are explained now Please read in the help for further information about Import Create new points Follow these steps to create new points 40 Introduction to GeoMoS Click the Insert Point button to create a new point row Type in the unique point ID Select a Profile from the list Select a Limit Class from the list Enter the correct reflector height and the additive constant ey Then learn the new point as described below Learn points Follow these steps to learn points 1 Select the point ID you want to learn Aim manually the total station telescope to the selected prism Click the Learn button Repeat the Create new points and Step 1 to 4 for the additional points Click the OK button to exit the Point Editor dialog and to confirm the entries 4 The instrument will execute the measurement and the coordinate information in the Point Editor dialog will be updated 41 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Step 13 Create Point Groups The created points should be assigned to a point group The creation of point groups allows points to be easily measured in scheduled cycles Point groups are also used to view individual points in the Analyzer application Follow t
438. rily have to be the same points for which height is known and that errors in local height measurement will not be propagated into the position transformation component The Interpolation approach has certain advantages over a traditional 3D Classical approach in that parameters can be calculated without knowledge of the map projection or local ellipsoid Additionally heights and position are transformed independently of each other This means that the local coordinates do not have to contain the height information The height information may be obtained from different points The Interpolation approach will tend to distort the GPS measurements to fit the existing local grid measurements This may be an advantage or disadvantage as the GPS coordinates are generally found to be better than the existing grid coordinates That is to say that they are more homogenous This means that the accuracy of the GPS coordinates may be slightly compromised when using this method This may be advantageous if you want future transformed GPS points to tie in with your existing local network 618 Coordinate System Manager The Advantages Errors in local heights do not affect the position transformation The parameters can be calculated without knowledge of the map projection or local ellipsoid The points used for determining the position and height transformation do not necessarily have to be the same points The Disadvantage The main disa
439. ription of the monitoring project tion Path to Select the path for the database files Files Important Only local hard drives are permitted to store the GeoMoS Monitor database file Delete Delete the database All data will be lost It is not possible to delete the active project Properties Use this option to edit the name description and the path of an existing project 86 GeoMoS Monitor Analyzer To open Analyzer e Select from the menu File Analyzer The GeoMoS Analyzer application is started parallel to GeoMoS Monitor In GeoMoS Analyzer the displacement velocity and vector information can be displayed either graphically or numerically The data can also be edited and post processed 87 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en User Level Background information There are three user levels which determine the functionality allowed by the operator in the system e Viewer eUs er e Adminis trator The Administrator has full access to all functionality while the User and Viewer have restricted access to the system as shown in the table below A password is required to change to a higher level of user access No password is required to change to a lower user level When the password is active the application starts in the lowest user level status of Viewer The password protection can be configured Viewer Re stricted Can view overview last actions messages and observations Cannot make any changes to oper
440. rmation e Coordinate Systems that are attached to a Project are indicated by A and cannot be deleted e The Coordinate Systems WGS1984 and None are hardwired and can neither be deleted nor modified Delete a Coordinate System Follow these steps to delete a Coordinate System Right click on a Coordinate System in the Tree View or Report View and select Delete 2 Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting Select from the index below to learn how to manage Coordinate Systems Coordinate System Overview Add a New Coordinate System Coordinate System Properties Coordinate System Properties General 603 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Coordinate System Properties Background Information This Property Sheet enables you to display edit the Coordinate System Properties A Coordinate System can be attached to a project by selecting it in the Project Properties Coordinates page If a coordinate system other than WGS1984 or None is attached coordinates can be displayed in either WGS84 or Local Important Information e The Coordinate System amp WGS1984 is hardwired and can neither be deleted nor modified It is the default coordinate system on GPS instruments e The Coordinate System amp None is also hardwired and can neither be deleted nor modified It is the default coordinate system on TPS 1200 instruments Edit Coordinate System Properties Follow these steps to edit Coordinate System Properti
441. rojection are calculated The Height transformation is a single dimension height approximation Because of the way in which the position transformation approach works it is possible to define a transformation without any knowledge of the local map projection or local ellipsoid As with the Interpolation and Stepwise approaches the height and position transformations are separate and therefore errors in height do not propagate into errors in position Additionally if knowledge of local heights is not good or non existent you can still create a transformation for position only Also the height points and position points do not have to be the same points Because of the way in which the transformation works it is possible to compute transformation parameters with just one point in the local and WGS84 system The combinations of the number of points in position and the position transformation parameters that can be calculated from them are as follows No of position points Transformation Parameters Computed 1 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y only 2 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y Rotation about Z and Scale more than 2 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y Rotation about Z Scale and Residuals The number of points with height included in the transformation directly affects the type of height transformation produced No of height points Height transformation based on 0 No height transformation 1 Constant height transformation
442. rom the rover station amp endash a null GGQ string will be output A navigated position will be calculated if no reference data is available Relative latency will affect the accuracy of the results The latency is shown in the Raw Data Status tab Ambiguity Resolution Techniques While Moving ambiguity resolution technique also knows as on the fly or OTF is suitable for receivers with high dynamics Use for sites that expected to move rapidly 482 GNSS Spider or far from their initial position The reliability is not as high as with the other approaches On Known Point ambiguity resolution is more reliable but requires that the reference station and rover station have highly accurate coordinates If the sites are moving then the coordinates must be updated in the site configuration because inaccurate coordinates will prevent GNSS Spider from resolving the ambiguities Quasi static is a combination of the While Moving and On Known Point approaches The site coordinates are used to aid the ambiguity resolution but they do not need to be very accurately known a few decimeters or a meter is sufficient Use for sites that are expected to move but not very far or fast Wrong fixes are more likely with While Moving initialization especially for long baselines A wrong ambiguity fix will be seen as a jump in the coordinates 483 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en PP Positioning Products Background information PP Positioning Pro
443. rs Changing the coordinate system will cause subsequent results from GNSS sensors to produce different coordinates This may result in a sudden jump in the coordinates 294 Distance Reduction No Reduction Sealevel Reduction Projection Correction GeoMoS Monitor Related topics Tour VIII Configure a coordinate system Examples of coordinate systems Information The atmospheric reductions are configured with the meteo model The measured distances are reduced with the refraction curvature of the path of the beam and the chord to arc correction The measured distances are not corrected to sea level and for the projection Database Global distance reduction setting 0 The measured distances are reduced with the refraction curvature of the path of the beam and the chord to arc correction and are corrected to sea level The measured distances are not corrected for the projection Database Global distance reduction setting 1 The measured distances are reduced with the refraction curvature of the path of the beam and the chord to arc correction are corrected to sea level and projection Two methods can be used to apply the projection correction Automatic Map Projection only for cylindrical projections Individual Map Projection for all projection types Automatic Map Only for cylindrical projections Projection The calculation is based on the offset from the line o
444. rther information Data Editor Overview Data Editor Meteo Data Editor Setups Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates Data Editor Manual Coordinates 404 GeoMoS Analyzer Data Editor Meteo Background information The table shows all collected meteorological data of the defined time period The meteorological data can be edited It is not possible to modify the Point ID and the Time Adding new lines additional measurements is not possible Meteo Properties Data Editor Additive Constant Retlector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates Manual Coordinates Pointo Sensor Pressure mbar Temp C S907 16 2008 09 39 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 v 20 5 07 16 2008 09 40 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 6 907 16 2008 09 41 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 7 07 16 2008 09 42 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 9 07 16 2008 09 43 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 20 9 07 16 2008 09 44 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 1 5907 16 2008 09 45 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 21 2 07 16 2008 09 46 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 1 S907 16 2008 09 47 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 9 07 16 2008 09 48 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 8 907 16 2008 09 49 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 20 9 07 16 2008 09 50 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 1 21 2 07 16 2008 09 51 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 3 07 16 2008 09 52 01 Temp Point Meteo Sensor 975 0 21 4 907 16
445. rting Learning Importing or Manual Input Open the Point Editor Follow these steps to open the Point Editor 214 Select the menu Configuration Point Editor or click the toolbar Point Editor The Point Editor dialog will be displayed Edit the existing points or create new points with the Insert Point button i Right click on each field to be edited and choose the option Modify Enter the value and confirm with Enter To copy the value to other points right click on the cell with the correct value and choose Paste Mode then click and drag to select the destination cells After using paste mode right click and choose Paste Mode again to return to normal mode Confirm the changes with OK The dialog will be closed and the changes and new points will be saved in the database Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only GeoMoS Monitor Point Editor Properties Point Editor a ee Limit Class Measurement Mode 2 09 A Profil Default J6 f 124091208 08 45 14 RHEN PRISM Profil Default 2764426 203 1252947 958 12 09 2008 08 10 00 MONR_PRISM Profil Default 2764473 309 1253173 246 04 08 2008 13 36 01 Temp Profil Default 2764470 000 1253170 000 12 09 2008 08 47 09 GEB3_CORNER Profil Default 2764422 915 1253238 193 12 09 2008 08 46 55 HEAT_STAT Profil Default 2764466 255 1253074 677 12 09 2008 08 46 44 GEB34 Profil Default 2764517257 1253043 330 12 0
446. s 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 60 min IHIN I r r T t t Y time 286 GeoMoS Monitor Example 2 Condition Trigger Condition C Trigger On Every Message C Trigger On Every ia Trigger If 10 Or More Messages within 75 Minutes And Point Belongs To Delay Action Trigger Only Between What The first Message 1 that is generated in GeoMoS Monitor checks the happens previous 75 minutes 2 for other messages GeoMoS Monitor does not dispatch the configured Action if there are no other messages in the previous 75 minutes In this case additional Messages 3 are generated after the first Message 1 GeoMoS Monitor checks for every Message the previous 75 minutes GeoMoS Monitor dispatches the configured Action 4 when the 10th Message within 75 minutes is generated For E Mails only GeoMoS Monitor dispatches an E Mail including all ten Message texts For SMS only GeoMoS Monitor dispatches an SMS with the Message that generated the Action 4 The next Message 5 that is generated in GeoMoS Monitor checks again for Messages in the previous 75 minutes Here GeoMoS Monitor dispatches the configured Action 6 because there are still 10 messages in the previous 75 minutes available For E Mails only GeoMoS Monitor dispatches an E Mail including only the last Message 5 text The previous Message texts are already sent before and deleted from the E Mail queue For SMS only GeoMoS M
447. s normal ATR and low visibility ATR For example when the normal ATR mode succeeds the measurement is calculated directly If due to weather conditions the normal ATR mode fails then the low visibility ATR attempts a second measurement OR Deselect Use ATR and press the Measure button to take the measurement to a known point GeoMoS Monitor reads only the angles from the total station pointing to the known target point The orientation will be calculated and displayed in the dialog Confirm the calculated orientation with the Finish button The Orientation assistant will be closed and the data orientation and instrument 185 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en height will be saved and used for further measurements and calculations Orientation Method B Set manually The information in this steps describes how to set the orientation value to null for a local coordinate system Select the menu Configuration Sensor Location or press the toolbar Sensor p Location button 2 Select the Total Station that needs to be orientated from the list and click the Orientation button The Orientation assistant is displayed The total station control point and sensor type selected in the Sensor Location dialog will be displayed These fields are not editable Click the Next gt button to display the next page Aim manually the total station telescope to the defined null orientation to set manually the orientation value Enter th
448. s All UsersWocume x Optional To save the image on a different location right click on the header of the window and select Save Picture a Press x to close the window 220 GeoMoS Monitor Learn Points can measured from the Total Station for convenience or if the coordinates of the points are not known Note The Total Station must be correctly positioned and orientated before learning points Only a single measurement will be used to learn the point Follow these steps to learn new points Select the menu Configuration Point Editor or click on the toolbar Points The Point Editor dialog will be displayed Press the Insert Point button ce A new line appears in the table Edit the Point Id Profile and Limit Class Please notice the column Measurement mode The measurement mode you choose depends on the connected Total Station For example Reflectorless Mode can only be chosen if the Total Station supports this feature The Point Learn dialog is displayed 7 Select the Total Station from which the target point should be measured The target point coordinates will be calculated using the Total Station coordinates and the measurement e Point to the target point H Press the Measure button to start the measurement The selected measurement mode for this point will be used For example measurement mode ATR The horizontal angle vertical angle and 221 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en
449. s always inactive due to it is not possible to edit any settings Press this button to close the wizard and get back to the previous ComBox Manager dialog Mobile p Setup ComBox View settings Ac Provider ooo General Mobile Provider DynDNS Advanced Phone number User name Password Access point name Authentication method PPP DNS query Ca Field Button Description of the displayed settings Phone number Text field with the entered phone number that is to dial This may be a GPRS UMTS breakout number such as 99 1 or a standard 132 Password Access point name Authentication method PPP DNS query lt Back GeoMoS Monitor telephone number from your mobile provider Per default the number 99 1 is set Text field with the entered User name Get this information from your mobile provider Note This text field can be void Text field with the entered Password Get this information from your mobile provider Note This text field can be void Text field for the Access point name Get this information from your mobile provider List box which displays the selected Authentication method Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or the Password Authentication Protocol PAP This check box specifies wether a DNS request Point to Point Protocol DNS query to the mobile provider is made or not Press this button to get one register b
450. s extreme the area over which the transformation is carried out should be reduced if accurate heighting is required Note that position will not be affected by extreme geoid undulations The Advantages e Errors in local heights do not affect the position transformation e The points used for determining the position and height transformation do not necessarily have to be the same points e The height transformation method will provide accurate height transformations without any knowledge of geoid separations as long as the geoid ellipsoid separation is reasonably constant and does not contain sudden changes The more height points included the better the model The Disadvantage e Knowledge of the local projection and local ellipsoid are required Other transformation approaches Classical 3D Classical 2D One Step Two Step Interpolation Which approach to use 617 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Interpolation The Interpolation approach creates transformation parameters based on an affine transformation model that uses a Collocation algorithm to estimate the systematic part of the noise Basically what this means is that the WGS84 coordinates measured by the GPS are squeezed or stretched to fit the local grid The local grid is constructed using the entered grid coordinates Position and height are treated separately and as such are independent of each other This means that the measured position points do not necessa
451. s gov uk 676 Coordinate System Manager To directly convert from WGS84 coordinates in the ETRS89 reference system to the OSGB36 using LGO define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation None Map Projection TM Central meridian 2 W Latitude of Origin 49 N False Easting 400 000 False Northing 100 000 Scale factor at origin 0 9996012717 Ellipsoid GRS80 CSCS Model OSTNO2 Note e You have to select the GRS80 ellipsoid in the definition of your coordinate system as this is what the preliminary ETRS89 Eastings and Northings coordinates are based upon Ordnance Survey and the OS symbol are registered trade marks and OSTNO2 is a trade mark of Ordnance Survey the national mapping agency of Great Britain 677 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en OSTN97 Great Britain Note e The OSTN97 transformation has been superceeded by the definitive transformation OSTNO2 by Ordnance Survey Great Britain e OSTN97 is still available within LGO to allow the user to transform existing OSTN97 projects to the new transformation OSTNO2 OSTN97 is a transformation from ETRS89 to OSGB36 National Grid which is the British mapping datum The connected CSCS Model file contains Easting and Northing shifts from preliminary ETRS89 Eastings and Northings to the OSGB36 mapping coordinates The ETRS89 Eastings and Northings are first obtained by applying the British national Transverse Mercator projection with th
452. s is my first SMS CMGS 49 OK Useful GeoCOM commands general CSV_GetInstrumentName R1Q 5004 R1P 0 0 0 TCA1800 Useful GeoCOM commands TPS1000 Series COM_NullProc R1Q 0 R1P 0 0 0 amp endash Check Communication TMC_GetAngle5 R1Q 2107 1 R1P 0 0 0 4 72000261178 1 465998089451852 amp endash Read Angles TMC_DoMeasure R1Q 2008 1 1 R1P 0 0 0 amp endash Angles and Distances Current Settings Measure R1Q 17017 2 Varies string containing measurements amp endash Angles and Distances ATR Useful GeoCOM commands TPS1100 and TPS1200 Series COM_NullProc amp endash R1Q 0 R1P 0 0 0 Check Communication BAP_MeasDistAngle R1Q 17017 2 Varies string containing amp endash Angles and measurements 579 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Distances Current Settings 580 Troubleshooting Hyper Threading Technology Hyper threading enables one processor to act like two Check if a computer uses the Hyper Threading Technology Follow these steps to check if a computer uses the Hyper Threading Technology pep TT Ul The Device Manager dialog appears Check the total number of Processors Pore agapcers of Ports COM amp LPT SW Processors A Intel R Pentium R M processor 1 80GH 2 D Sound video and game controllers System devices Iniversal Serial Riis rontrollars More than one processor indicates the Hyper Threading Technology 581 GeoMoS Help 5 1 e
453. se contact your Leica representative In order to compute automatic network adjustment and deformation analysis results XML files for the Leica GeoMoS Adjustment software need to be configured Background information Every geodetic observation is a random or stochastic value Extra measurements are called redundancy data Network adjustment Network adjustment describes observations with a mathematical and a stochastic model The adjusted parameters are more precise and receive a statement of reliability Deformation analysis Deformation analysis compares the results of the adjusted parameters epoch by epoch The variation in the network geometry is considered Data flow concept Path to files write read Network adjustment a X r 4 V Deformation analysis XML GeoMosS Technet database file database GeoloS Adjustment 311 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Configure automatic XML files for GeoMoS Adjustment Follow these steps to configure XML files 312 Select the menu Services Export to GeoMoS Adjustment The GeoMoS Adjustment Settings dialog will be displayed Switch with the Tabbed View to the Reference Points tab Select the reference points that are assumed to be stable Switch with the Tabbed View to the Parameters tab Select the overlap with the previous file Switch with the Tabbed View to the Location of Files tab Select the path to the files GeoMoS Adjustment should be configure
454. se than this Deviation figure than the correction will not be applied Repeat Group The table below describes the fields in the PPM Properties Repeat Group tab dialog box Repeat if If check this option will cause the system to re measure the point group if one of the one of the above checks fails checks fails Max This setting defines the number of times the system will re measure the Number of point group if the above checks continue to fail Repetitions Delay This setting defines the delay between the re tries The purpose of this between setting is to allow time for a temporary obstruction to be moved allowing the Cycles system to measure all of the points in the group 250 GeoMoS Monitor Measurement Cycle Editor Background information The measurement cycle automatically measures a defined configuration of different point groups The frequency of measurements can be defined by setting the start time interval and end time for each point group The measurement process must be stopped to define a new measurement cycle or change the existing cycle Remark When defining a measurement cycle take care not to overburden the system Definition of too many point groups can complicate the measurement cycle and make the overview and the time scheduling complicated Complicated or overlapping time schedules can create measurement jams in the system and cause certain point groups to be omitted from the measurement
455. sensor should turn on Step 3 Advanced test only with Total Stations Follow these steps to perform an advanced test with only Total Stations Set Total Stations output GSI to RS232 Take a measurement with a GEoCOM command The measurement should be seen in the HyperTerminal 573 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Test GNSS NMEA strings Follow these steps to test GNSS NMEA strings Step 1 Configure the sensor Configure the data output of a sensor to a free port Step 2 Basic check Follow these steps to perform a basic check Select from Windows the menu Programs Accessories Communications HyperTerminal The Connection Description dialog is displayed Enter a name and press OK Connection Description a5 New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name Troubleshooting Communicatior Icon The Connect To dialog is displayed Select TCP IP the Host address Port number and press OK 574 Troubleshooting Connect To D TCPIP Enter details for the host that pou want to call Host address 10 60 36 104 Port number 12001 Connect using TCP IP Winsock Cm The received data should be seen in the HyperTerminal TCPIP HyperTerminal Dar Fie Edit View Call Transfer Help 00 4 713 8808766 N 00934 8361054 E 4 06 1 500 570 402 00 4 713 8808763 N 00934 8361078 E 4 06 1 500 570 391 00 4 713 8808813 N 00934 8361017 E
456. servation Type and define the Sensor Location Confirm the settings with OK The dialog will be closed and the new sensors will be saved in the database Note The above description guided you through the creation process by describing the minimum settings only 160 GeoMoS Monitor Campbell Datalogger Configuration E E 10 60 36 26 8000 Active Name Observation Ty Sensor Location OK Ef Logger 2 DailyAverage Te Temperature TPS1_Station c C ExTemp 2 Interval Temperature Temperature TPS1_Station F Nivels 9 nterval 1 This check box is used to activate deactivate sensors connected to the Campbell Datalogger Only active sensors will be available for measurements You can enter a name of every individual sensor connected to the Campbell Datalogger As default the Sensor Name is transferred from the Campbell Datalogger Enter the description of this sensor or its location Observation Enter the observation type of the connected sensor An observation type Type is mandatory even if the sensor is not active Sensor Choose the sensor control point A sensor location is mandatory even if Location the sensor is not active Min Max Use this value to limit the sensor measurements to a minimal and or maximum value No measurements outside the set limits will be stored to the database A measurement value outside the set limits causes the message Measurement out of range on th
457. server was successfull and the DynDNS server settings are correct Connectiong to DynDNS server failed Either your DynDNS server address or your DynDNS server port is not valid Please verify your DynDNS settings Resolving ComBox Host name failed Your Host name DynDNS name is not valid Please verify your DynDNS settings Setting an IP address on DynDNS server failed Note If there is a problem with the DynDNS settings please check firstly these settings in the register DynDNS of the ComBox Setup wizard secondly check if there is a Internet connection and if there are still problems thirdly reboot the ComBox Port COM1 Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with 144 Port COM2 Port COM3 Port COM4 Port meteo sensor Port LAN1 GeoMoS Monitor the wireless router Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the ComServer Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the meteo module Connection successfull The port is open Connection failed There is a problem with the webcam Note When you connect a webcam powered over Ethernet PoE to the Com
458. sh to GeoMoS Web Settings Data Push To GeoMoS Web Active Settings GeoMoS Web User GeoMoS Web Password Test Iink p Cancel 309 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Active Check to activate the Data push to GeoMoS Web settings 310 GeoMoS Web Administrator ID GeoMoS Web Administrator Password Enter the administrator ID configured in GeoMoS Web Enter the administrator password configured in GeoMoS Web Note If the administrator ID and administrator password changed in GeoMoS Web it is required to adapt these settings in GeoMoS Monitor The data push to GeoMoS Web cannot push data with different administrator ID s and passwords Press to manually push data to GeoMoS Web This button is only activated when the GeoMoS Web User and Password information is entered correctly Note The manual data push is done during the automatic measurement mode This means that the measurement cycle needs to be started The selected data is then pushed in packages The time required to complete the manual data push is dependent on the amount of data and the push interval Press to test the data push Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog Press to cancel and close the Data push to GeoMoS Web dialog GeoMoS Monitor Export Service to GeoMoS Adjustment The export functionality is license protected This functionality can be purchased with GeoMoS Monitor Option 3 article number 774 137 Plea
459. signal scan measurement mode only makes sense if the distance to a point is outside of the ATR range Signal scanning is inherently slower and less accurate than ATR measurement The distance only measurement mode only makes sense if the distance to a point is outside of the ATR range and the customer is only interested in Longitudinal displacements slope distance measurements and ppm values Advantage V Disadvantage X Signal Scan SignalScan IR LO Determines the three dimensional position of a prism Angles are recorded as well but will be very inaccurate Depends on the atmospheric conditions Over very long distances several kilometers signal scan is not practical because the angle measurements become very inaccurate Distance Only DistanceOnly The slope distance is measured high precise Detects movements only in the direction of the distance measurement Measures only the slope distances using the EDM A single measurement is very fast Accuracy is based on EDM Longitu dinal displacement Slope distance and PPM can be used for analysis No angles are measured Requires a special monitoring setup geometry to be able to detect movements The profile direction should be similar to the measurement direction of the instrument 519 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Warning A single signal scan to one prism may take between 30 seconds and two min
460. sms com 2 Select in the left menu the entry USERKEY SYSTEMZUSTAND UserKey BENUTZER EINSTELLUNOEN hp kopieren Sie den enc on aig in ie den UserKey ganz genau kopieren Wenn ABUSNSER Femiacalren ASPSMS Anwendung nicht ausgef hrt Cosenney__ gt Genner 1234ABCD5678 Y GUTHABEN CREDIT WARNUNG Bitte beachten Sie dass Sie immer in Kombir ABMELDEN Passwort verwenden m ssen Das Passwort Einstellungen ndern Bitte beachten Sie das Scripts und Applikation ebenfalls das Passwo Password The valid password for the ASPSMS account How to check the password 1 The password is identical to your www aspsms com account PASSWORD forgot the password Digital 10 This button displays the dialog with the inserted Digital I O Cards and their settings 282 GeoMoS Monitor Digital 1 0 Card Settings Card Name Address ComBox_20 ComBox20 geomostest2 selfip org ICP DAS I O Card local myComBox1 ComBox10 mycombox dyndns org myWuTCard 10 60 36 31 Insert Three types of Digital I O Cards can be displayed W2 amp T Digital I O Card ICP DAS I O Card Digital I O Card from a ComBox10 20 Card name Name of the Digital I O card Name of a W amp T Digital I O Card can be defined Name of a ICP DAS I O Card is not changeable Name of a Digital I O Card from a ComBox10 20 is given by the name of the ComBox10 20 Behind the name in bracke
461. software GeoMoS Adjustment complements the Analyzer component GeoMoS Monitor is responsible for sensor maintenance measurements storing data computing results measurement and result checks and message generation GeoMoS Analyzer is responsible for analyzing the measurements and results It also has print and export capabilities GeoMoS Adjustment is responsible for the automatic network adjustment and deformation analysis It also has network simulation capabilities GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Important Notes Topic contents Symbols used Trademarks Safety directions Intended use of the product Permitted uses Prohibited uses Responsibilities Hazards of use S Symbols used In order to use the software correctly and reliably you must follow the instructions given in the online help system You must also adhere to the directions given in the user manual for the product with which you are using the software and the user manual of the manufacturer of the sensor and control equipment The rights and responsibilities accruing in respect to Leica Geosystems AG as a result of acquisition of the software are set out in the Leica Geosystems AG Software License Agreement All of the instructions and directions required for a technical specialist to use the system are included in the online help system which are only available in English and German The symbols used in this online help syste
462. splayed The Cycle History shows a list of all total stations measurement cycles including the name of the sensor the point group measured the start and end time of measurement the number of valid measurements and the number of failed measurements Cycle History Sensor Pointgroup_ Start End NrOfValidMe NrOFFall TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 amp TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 amp TCRP1203 Grondslag 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 amp TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 3 TCRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TcRP1203 Deformatie punten 19 08 200 19 08 2 TCRP1203 Grnndslan 19 NnA 2NN 19 0 2 WN NNN NNN NNN NN YON NN DD DY Poo
463. st Note An Ellipsoid cannot be selected if it is already defined in the Transformation or is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation Select a Projection or a Zone from the list Except for the Customized Projections and the State Plane Zones which are hardwired Map Projections have to be defined before they become available in the list See also Add a New Projection Note To switch between Projections and State Plane Zones right click on the background of the Property Sheet and select between Projections and Zones A Projection is not required if you are using a One Step or an Interpolation Transformation If required select a Geoid Model from the list Refer to Coordinate System Properties General for the requirements to add a valid geoid model to the new coordinate system If required select a CSCS Model Country Specific Coordinate System Model from the list CSCS models have to be defined before they become available in the list See also Add a new CSCS Model Enter the optional Note to describe the Coordinate System 601 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 10 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function Select from the index below to learn how to manage Coordinate Systems Coordinate System Overview Delete a Coordinate System Coordinate System Properties Coordinate System Properties General 602 Coordinate System Manager Delete a Coordinate System Important Info
464. st contains a list of all current Dial up Connections configured on the computer 278 GeoMoS Monitor Select an appropriate Dial up connection for sending E mails SMTP Server Settings Field Button Description Address Enter a valid SMTP Server name in the field The SMTP Server name is usually supplied by the E mail Provider e g smtp gmail com mail gmx net mail hotmail com Port The SMTP Server port is usually supplied by the E mail Provider e g 25 465 587 User User name of the registered E mail account The user name maybe the E mail address or an ID Password of the registered E mail account Enable SSL Enable or disable the SSL checkbox according to the E mail Provider requirements Mail Settings Mail Address of Enter a valid E mail address in the field from where Sender the messages will be sent This is normally the E mail address of the account from the E mail Provider e g name gmail com name gmx ch name hotmail com E mail addresses must have the following format name location domain Mail Body Enter the text body that will be sent with the E mail The E mail subject heading will appear as message text and the name of the Monitoring System Notes If the computer is connected to a network with access to the Internet the Dial up connection need not be started The Message Configurator will always try to send the E mail via the network connection to the Internet
465. st name server address login data etc Advanced Port numbers Note There is no connection to the appropriate ComBox required The View settings dialog will just display the stored settings in GeoMoS Inthe register Advanced there are only the port numbers displayed It is not possible to edit any settings in this dialog To open the View Settings dialog please follow the instructions on the page ComBox Manager Overview For more details about each register please refer to the page ComBox Configuration 130 GeoMoS Monitor Procedure Follow these steps to view the settings of a selected ComBox Step Register B Setup ComBox View settings General Mobile Provider DynDNS Advanced ComBox name ComBox type Integrated MonBox Comment optional Field Button Description of the displayed settings Text field with the Name of the ComBox ComBox type This text field shows the Type of the connected ComBox There are two types of a ComBox Leica ComBox10 Leica ComBox20 Integrated Shows the status if a Leica MonBox is MonBox integrated in the ComBox or not 131 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Comment This text field displays the inserted comment optional e g what sensors are connected to this ComBox Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard The button Apply in this dialog i
466. supported by the current software license or attached dongle You have more active sensors than what the current software license or attached E3Warning A message information information information coordinates See the GNSS Update in the TPS Properties The GNSS coordinate that is used to update the Total Station coordinate was measured more than 12 hours before If no PP Positioning Product is available within two times of the product length the system will react with this message If the customer wants to use the limit check computation he needs to purchase Monitor Option 2 If the customer wants to use the totals station computation he needs to purchase Monitor Option 1 If the customer wants to use more sensors he needs to purchase additional sensor licenses dongle supports Your GeoMoS O information software maintenance key will expire within the next days Measurement E3Warning out of range No E3warning measurements available Measurement O information Process Started Formula refers E3warning to a invalid point sensor or observation type Measurement E3warning missing to evaluate formula Computation is E3warning not supported by the current E Troubleshooting Occurs if the software maintenance key expires in 30 days The message is shown once a day The software maintenance key is related to a valid Customer Care Package CCP
467. t ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established 3 If the connection establishment was successfully the Test Link Progress dialog will be shown This dialog will show the test status of all modules which are included in a ComBox You find more details about this test under following link ComBox Test Link 4 After the test you can close the dialog Use the Test Digital Out button to display and change the state of the Digital I O outputs of the selected ComBox Test Digital Out 1 The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to GeoMoS Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where GeoMoS is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established If the connection establishment was successfully the ComBox Test Digital Out dialog will be shown This dialog will show the state of the Digital I O outputs and gives the opportunity to recycle the power of the appropriate ports 114 GeoMoS Monitor You find more details about this test under f
468. t Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 2 225 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 7 889 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 8 700 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 8 779 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 8 819 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 1 374 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 1 895 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 9 843 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Description select from points C Program Files Leica Geosyste 0 854 Action of type Send EMail triggered Command Neil Brown lt n brown bluewin ch gt Description System online Condition Message Poil 2 566 Action of type Run Database Query triggered Command E xport Points Descr
469. t Update Height Update Reference Coordinate Blunder Blunder Tolerance 10 0 m Sensor Name Rhenusana_OST6_RT_32_GEOMOS CLIENT2 The table below describes the fields in the GNSS Properties dialog box ees Ud Update Use average over If this option is checked recommended then an average position median from the GNSS will be used The longer the positions of the GNSS are averaged over the more precise the coordinate will be It is for example important to have the coordinate as precise as possible to avoid updating the control point coordinate will incorrect coordinates Note The average GNSS position is computed as median Min number of Below this amount of GNSS measurements there will be no average measurements computed This field is only active if you select the Use average over check box 198 GeoMoS Monitor Do not update If this option is checked only the horizontal position of the control height point will be updated by the GNSS and not the height The purpose of this option is either to avoid updating the height or trigger misleadingly limit checks messages with a low accuracy estimate from the GNSS The height component is less accurate than the horizontal coordinates when using GNSS due to the satellite geometry Notes The current measured GNSS height is always displayed in the graphs and stored to the GeoMoS Results table in the database The accuracy of the GNSS height can be analyzed
470. t a Table from the list and define with the read out time interval how frequently the results of the table is read out from Leica GeoMoS The available sensors will be Pona a E ae Repeat steps 3 through 5 for additional Campbell Pona a E ae on the identical IP address with different Pakbus addresses Confirm the Contin the Campbell Datalogger parameters with OK Datalogger parameters with OK 159 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 8 The dialog will be closed and the new sensors will be saved in the database Notes The measurement interval of the sensor is set per table in the measurement module on the Campbell Datalogger If for example the measurement interval is set to 1 second and the read out time interval is set to 1 minute GeoMoS retrieves each minute the last 60 measurements of the Campbell datalogger with the original time stamp The read out time interval of the a datalogger table is set in the Senor Manager Campbell Datalogger Parameters dialog and is transferred to the Interval field the Measurement Cycle Editor It is only allowed to have different Intervals for different tables Sensors in a single table cannot have different read out time intervals Campbell Datalogger Parameters dialog A list of all sensors configured in the Campbell Datalogger and with results stored in the selected table on the datalogger will be shown Activate the required sensors of the Campbell Datalogger Enter their appropriate Ob
471. t must be successfully measured before Number of the Vz Correction will be computed and applied The purpose of this option Valid Points is to prevent jumps caused by different measurement geometry Tolerance This option sets the maximum accepted standard deviation for the Vz Standard Correction calculation If the estimated standard deviation worse than this Deviation figure than the correction will not be applied Repeat Group The table below describes the fields in the Vz Correction Properties Repeat Group tab dialog box rn ee Repeat if If check this option will cause the system to re measure the point group if one of the one of the above checks fails checks fails Max This setting defines the number of times the system will re measure the Number of point group if the above checks continue to fail Repetitions This setting defines the delay between the re tries The purpose of this setting is to allow time for a temporary obstruction to be moved allowing the system to measure all of the points in the group 248 GeoMoS Monitor Properties Orientation Checks The table below describes the fields in the Orientation Properties Checks tab dialog box aa eet Minimum Number of Valid Points Tolerance Standard Deviation Repeat Group The minimum number of points that must be successfully measured before the Orientation Correction will be computed and applied The purpose of this optio
472. table The Campbell datalogger program needs to be written to meet these simple principle 1 Start the PC200W Datalogger Support Software 2 Follow the wizard or click the Add button 3 Step 4 Connect with Leica GeoMoS Read in the Sensor Manager how to connect the Campbell datalogger and geotechnical sensor with GeoMosS 61 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Tour VIII Configure a coordinate system Objective In this Quick Tour you will learn how to setup an example Coordinate System for the use of combined total station and GNSS monitoring Local Grid Grid Local Geoid Mode Final Local Grid Eh Sie Oe gt eae OER H lem pT CSCS Model Grid l Local Grid ae Om N 7 1 Example Projection Transverse Mercalor Local Geodetic giin ue HGH da 7 Example Local Ellispoid Bessel 1841 WGS84 Cartesian Classical 3D Transformation Local Cartesian wiz eie h Fight Mode Elipsoidal gt j ue A ie WGS84 Coordinate Side Local Coordinate Side GNSS Monitoring TPS Monitoring Procedure Follow these steps to configure a Coordinate System ee ES Create a new Projection If required import a new geoid model If required import a new CSCS Model Configure a coordinate system 62 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 1 Open the Coordinate System Manager Follow these steps to open the Coordinate System Manager
473. target tor exaingie your ISP is blocking pat 25 In this case you can use Ja RBL Servers intermediary SMTP gateways You can specily one or more servers here and if local delivery fails lor some resson they will be ined A SMTP Ga one alter another n sequence until one of them accepts the message This mammizes the chance of successful delivery eways Sip SMTP Options 7 Try to deliver messages directly to destination jhe Message Queue 4 Timeouts Check if port 25 is open by pour ISP A Server Replies Gateways List iD Por Onto P Local Domains H Save settings Press the save settings button The SMTP settings have now been changed Press Yes to restart the SMTP server process for the changes to take effect 7 Close the SMTP Server and continue to Step 4 Send a test email Select SMTP Options in the left hand tree view and configure the following options as shown in the screen shot SMTP Server 4 j F A ne en t Help Home Page 3E Logging P i Authentication 4i SMTP Options Security SMTP ports ci IP Range Lists Alter changing incoming or outgoing poits server must be restarted for Ihose changes lo take elfect A RBL Servers Incoming IP ports ports should be separated Dutgoing IP port for sending PI SMTP Gateways 5 5 oy SMTP Option l Message Queue Simultaneous connection D Timeouts Number of threads listening tor connections Number of threads that will be used to send
474. te Distanc component distance e reductions and coordinate system applied Computed coordinate Distanc component distance e reductions and coordinate Corrected Slope Calculated corrections Distanc Distance Ref from distance e PPM measurements to control points PPM Point Groups applied to the slope distance TPS only e 208 GeoMoS Monitor system applied Height Computed coordinate Distanc Displacement component displacement e related to the Null coordinate Horizontal Distanc Distance a e a e ee ae rd Longitudinal Computed coordinate Distanc yes Displacement component displacement related to the Null coordinate Longitudinal Tilt Compensator value L Angle measured in two faces with the sign of the face measurement Nivel_Temperature Temper yes ature Computed coordinate Distanc yes component distance reductions and coordinate system applied FE _ i Rain Measurement 209 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Reference PPM PPM yes Relative Height Distanc e Slope Distance e Temperature Transverse Computed coordinate Distanc Displacement component displacement e related to the Null coordinate yes V angle Raw vertical angle if required ee O a s e Distanc e ai yes EA yes ak Transverse Tilt Compensator value T Angle yes measured in two faces with the sign of the face measurement op mp az 3D Vector User defined observation types GP
475. terval is defined the Continuous option will be set to No Note e Spider RT Positioning Product The interval defines the time a RT Positioning Product is stored to the database The received RT Positioning Product results are averaged over the defined interval Spider PP Positioning Product The interval defines the time a PP Positioning Product is retrieved out of the Spider Positioning database If a new valid PP Positioning Product is available it will be processed by GeoMoS Campbell datalogger The interval defines the time a Campbell datalogger field is read out to GeoMoS monitor The received results are all stored to the database When the End Time is defined the point group will be measured 253 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en between the Start and End Time with the defined Interval The End Time can be turned off with the time value 23 59 59 When the End Time is turned off the point group will be measured until midnight and start again at the Start Time Hint How can a point group be measured once a day Enter the start time at which the point group should be measured Enter an interval of e g 2 hours and select an end time 1 hour after the start time The point group will be measured only once a day Telescope For Total Station it is possible to measure in a single face telescope Position position i e Pos 1 or in both faces telescope positions Pos 1 2 2 1 For measurements in both positions the first point will be
476. th the current value minus the null value Max Age h The maximum age defines the expiry date of the physical sensor data used in that specific alias Invalid aliases outside the maximum age causes the message No measurements available on the Messages tab and the virtual sensor formula is not computed System Unit Displays the current system unit This is the physical quantity of the Observation Type TAREE Adds a new line to the Virtual Sensor Editor Upper Insert button dialog or Aliases field Lower Insert button 203 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Insert Copy Remove Overview Types Points Check Remove 204 Copies a existing line to the Virtual Sensor Editor Press this button to delete a selected virtual sensor Upper Remove button or alias Lower Remove button List all defined Virtual sensors Use this button to create additional Observation Types that can be used for virtual sensor or all sensors that are connected to the Campbell Datalogger If the control point is not yet defined use the Points button to switch to the Point Editor to create the sensor control point Checks if the formula structure is correct Removes selected lines only GeoMoS Monitor Observation Types Background information Leica GeoMoS distinguishes between standard system observation types and user defined observation types A standard system observation type is pre defined by the GeoM
477. th the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to check if the instrument is connected correctly Port COM2 Displays the state of port COM2 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power with the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to check if 149 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en the instrument is connected correctly Port COM3 Displays the state of port COM3 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power with the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to check if the instrument is connected correctly Only available for ComBox20 Port COM4 Displays the state of port COM4 On or Off Possibility to recycle the power with the button Recycle Power This action will switch off and on this port within two seconds respectively the connected instrument This test gives you the opportunity to check if the instrument is connected correctly Only available for ComBox20 Press this button to recycle the power of the appropriate COM port Within two seconds the port will be switched off and on This action gives you the opportunity to check if a connected instrument to the ComBox is
478. the Leica GeoMoS configuration GeoMoS Monitor Supported Sensors A range of different sensors and sensor types are supported by GeoMoS and may be configured in the Sensor Manager Refer below for a list of all sensors supported by GeoMoS e Total Stations e GNSS Sensors e Inclination Sensors e Meteo Sensors e Levels e Campbell Scientific Datalogger e Geotechnical and Other Sensors Total Stations TPS1000 Series The TPS1000 series of total stations from Leica Geosystems includes the following instruments TCA20 03 TCA18 00 TM1100 DI3000 DI3000S or DI3002 EDM TM1800 DI3000 DI3000S or DI3002 EDM TCM1 00 TCM1 800 Notes The TCA1800 and TCA2003 are used by default in the Precise Mode TCA1800 1 2ppm TCA2003 1 1ppm The Standard Mode TCA1800 and 163 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en TCA2003 2 2ppm and the Fast Mode can only be set in the Windows Registry Please contact support for further help For the TM1100 and TM1800 the Precise Mode and the Fast Mode is not available TPS1100 Series and TPS1100 Series The TPS1100 series of total stations from Leica Geosystems includes the following instruments that are supported TCA1101 TCA1103 TCA1105 TCRA1101 TCRA1103 TCRA1105 TPS1200 Series and TPS1200 Series The TPS1200 series and TPS1200 series of total stations from Leica Geosystems includes the following instruments that are supported all TCA models all TCP mo
479. the Null measurement option shows the velocity compared to the smallest absolute velocity value e g 0 01 m day 382 GeoMoS Analyzer Vector Follow these steps to open and configure the Vector dialog Select menu Configuration Options or press the button Options i i The Options dialog appears The dialog contains three pages each of the page ntains the options for the graphics co Select the page Vector The vector option page is divided in the following three parts Vector Labels and Point displacement Choose the required options in this page Press the OK button to accept the settings Press refresh to show the Vector or Height Vector graphic with the new options The dialog will be closed and the new options will be stored Vector Options Vectors Increasing Direction Displacement range l Reverse Axis for Northing Coordinates l Smoothed Reverse Axis for Easting Coordinates Smoothing factor g Labels Paint Displacement Diagram title Vector relative to 1st measurement in time period with respect to Null measurement absolute Sub title The table below describes the fields in the Options Vector tab dialog box Description Vectors The point movements displacement vector will be defined by the displacement range The length of the vector is based on a fixed value e g 1 cm ona print out If the vectors are to long and lay on top of each other it is necessary t
480. the Site name for which you want to generate a product If you select All real data sites file products will be created for all sites which are checked for global products PP Products works with RINEX file products with either no compression Zip or GZip only Refer to the corresponding topic of the GNSS Spider Online Help for additional information on File Products 5 8 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the function 7 The File Products will immediately become active after they have been created Note All File Products will be created before PP Positioning Products are 485 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en started for performance reasons Create and Edit PP Positioning Products To create and Edit a PP Positioning Product follow these steps Switch with the Tabbed View to the PP Products tab SiteMap Site Sensor Raw Data Status File Products AT Products AT Positioning PP Positioning Click into the PP Positioning Products window and select New amp ldots from the context menu The New PP Product General tab will be displayed New PP Positioning Product ACTIVE General Logging Processing Product name Site name and code Site File Product Reference site Reference File Product Dynamics Static Enter a Product name The name must be unique for each PP Positioning Product 486 GNSS Spider Select the name of the rover or monitoring site Site name and code and
481. the graphic the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menu Options Vector 431 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Height Vector The point displacement in the height only of the selected points will be shown as a displacement vector length The displacement vector of the selected points will be shown as a plan view i e coordinate position the direction of the movement up or down and the length of the vector shows the magnitude of the displacement The displacement vector is based on the defined profile for the point The axis shows the plane coordinates for the selected coordinate system The Easting is displayed on the horizontal axis and the Northing is displayed on the vertical axis The layout of the graphic can be customized With a double click on the graphic the display properties of the selected object can be changed The same is possible by pressing the right mouse button and selecting the properties menu The properties dialog appears There are various options available to change the display properties of the graphics The contents of the graphic can be defined with the graphic options menu Options Vector 432 GeoMoS Analyzer Report Back
482. the scheduling of the measurements in the Measurement Cycle Editor Priority for the various Point Group Types ert High Freie Station Distance Intersection Orientation Only PPM Vz Correction aa B 3 Low Normal Repeat Measurements Tolerance Exceeded Every point group is assigned a type which defines the priority of the measurements 3 levels 1 highest and 3 lowest priority The point group types for FreeStation 321 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en PPM Orientation Only and Vz Correction have priority 1 the point group type Special has priority 2 and the point group type Normal has priority 3 The system control groups Tolerance Exceeded and Repeat Measurements have priority 3 Groups that have the same priority and the same start time will be measured sequentially in alphabetical order based on the point group name The Tolerance Exceeded point group will be measured before the Repeat Measurement point group The measurement sequence of point groups with overlapping time period is decided according to the priority When point groups have the same priority the current point group will continue to measure When a point group with a higher priority is ready to measure the lower priority group will be interrupted and continued after the higher priority group has finished measuring Point Groups with Type Normal A point group with the type Normal must exist at least once in the measurement cycle The
483. the tolerance limit defined in the limit class A status message will be sent when the difference is greater than the tolerance limit Diagram short time long time limit check Displacement Actual measured po Calculated displac Interpolated point Actual measured displacement Interpolated Measured points displacement Time interval Time Regression Check Similar to the short time and long time checks except that a special smoothing algorithm is used in the computation of the linear regression The regression check is defined by a displacement value and a time interval The displacement is calculated from the linear regression between the measured points defined by the interval The calculated displacement difference between the intersections of the regression line and the time interval is compared to the tolerance limit defined in the limit class A status message will be sent when the difference is greater than the tolerance limit Notes e The time interval to calculate the regression line can be selected 259 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en individually e The regression tolerance limit of the observation type limit 1 limit 2 and limit 3 defined in the limit class is always related to 24 hours Diagram regression check Displacement Actual measured po Calculated displace Actual measured Measured points P displacement m Time interval Time Interval The amount
484. time and Duration Fixed End time and fixed Start time The system shows the graphs and report from the defined End time back to the Start time It is possible to define the end time to use the current system time checkmark active or to define a fixed End time Press the OK button The system stores the entered settings and closes the Time Period dialog To show the graphs and the reports with the new time range press the button Refresh r The selected visible time range will be shown in the Status Bar 370 GeoMoS Analyzer Step mode Background information With the Step Mode it is possible to analyze the graphs report of the shown points profiles and the point groups of the tree view one by one This option can be used to quickly show and check all graphs of all points separately Use the cursor keys on the keyboard to navigate through the point tree Only one node of the tree point profile point group can be selected at one time The current selection will be shown in the graphs and reports Procedure Follow these steps to use the Step mode Select the menu View Step Mode or press the Single Mode button F The Step Mode is turned on or off If the Step Mode is active a check mark will be shown next to the menu and the Step Mode button in the toolbar is pressed down The main view shows the graph report of the first selected point or profile of the point tree view The graphs report are always shown with the a
485. ting Perpetual 03 31 2010 License updates Check for License updates Entitlement ID The Entitlement ID is the software key Licensed products and options Product Option The name of the product option Lists all currently activated options of the software package License Model The license model GeoMoS software products use only Floating licenses 333 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en License Type Expiration Date Maintenance License update Check for License updates Cancel Apply 334 The license type The following license types are available maintena nce perp etual The expiration date It is not possible to use the software product after the expiration date The maintenance date It is not possible to install software product with a release date behind the maintenance date The software product is still functioning after the maintenance date To check for newly purchased software options or software maintenance If no License Updates are available the message No new licenses are available appears If License Updates are available the message New floating licenses are available please contact your license server administrator Note For this function the internet connection is required to allow connection to the Leica Geosystems License Server Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog Press to cancel and close the Data push to GeoMoS
486. tion compensator readings can be read from the instrument before the start of each Normal point group The total station will be turned to the Hz 0 circle position in both faces and read the longitudinal and transverse compensator values from the total station sensor The compensator readings will be stored in the database The value specified in the Tolerance input field value will be checked after the readings have been taken The status message Compensator out of range will be produced once before the Normal point group if the measured value exceeds the specified tolerance Important If the compensator is set to ON in the Sensor Manager it is assumed that the current value of the compensator measurement value is valid It is then the customers own responsibility that the in cases of unstable total stations the Tolerance of the compensator is checked Working range Specification 700 0O 700 Tilt cc A mislevelling of the compensator outside the total station compensator specification may causes lower accurate compensation of the angle measurement and outside the working range causes the message Point not found If the compensator is outside the working range the electronic bubble displays no graphical and numerical bubble anymore If the compensator is outside the specification of the total station the onboard software will not measure anymore but GeoMosS still does Warning The status message Compensator out of
487. tion method is pre defined by the CSCS Model Grid file Coord Type Displays the Coordinate type with respect to which the grid file is given The k Coordinate type is defined by the CSCS Model Grid file Displays the optional note to describe the CSCS Model aa The Note may be up to 64 characters long Last Date and Time at which the CSCS Model was last modified 674 Coordinate System Manager Geoid Model Properties Extents Background Information This page enables you to display the extents of the Geoid Model e CSCS Models that are currently used in a Coordinate System are indicated by amp and cannot be renamed but only modified General Settings South west The coordinates of the lower left South west corner of the model are corner displayed as local grid coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the Coordinate Type of the Geoid model North east The coordinates of the upper right North east corner of the model are corner displayed as local grid coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the Coordinate Type of the Geoid model Spacing The spacing of the grid is displayed according to the Coordinate Type 675 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en OSTNO2 Great Britain OSTNO2 is the definitive transformation from ETRS89 to OSGB36 National Grid which is the British mapping datum The connected CSCS Model file contains Easting and Northing shifts from preliminary ETRS89 Eastings and Northings
488. tion of the point If the coordinates are changed it can cause large variations in the calculated displacement from the previous measurements and can cause tolerance exceeded messages to be generated When the height of reflector is changed or the reflector is replaced the height of the reflector can be edited The reflector height is used for the distance and height reduction of the measurements Errors in the reflector height input can lead to errors in the reduction of the measurements The Additive Constant is the current additive constant for the prism and is applied for all following measurements The additive constant used for previous measurements can be post processed in the Analyzer application A user defined remark or comment about the point For example a text description of the location or status of the point A new line is created in the table for the new point The point data can be entered in the available columns 1 Select the menu Configuration Point Editor or click the toolbar Points button 2 The Point Editor dialog will be displayed 3 Press the Insert Point button 217 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 4 Anewline will appear in the table 5 The time and date column will be set to the current time 6 Enter the Point ID Profile Limit Class and the Coordinates for the point Baste The selected points in the table will be deleted A point cannot be deleted when it is still used in a p
489. tions mi irira a Arenas tee eee eels Aenea a E Ea oe 439 M ltiple Graphs rrine e raaa e E Aea e E e a 440 Sele Sanie a e a a a E E a A E 443 E E EEE ET A E A Ea E AT 450 Graphics amp Context Menu ccceceeeeeeeecceceeeeeseceeaecaeeeeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeesecsecaeeeeeeeeees 456 SARS 0151 ni1 EATE A E E EA 460 PEDE e E E ETA A E E E E T eit 464 EINES 0116 21 EEEE EE E A E E A A AE TENE T 469 Add and Configure SNES reiia er E A E ETT tee eee eed 469 Table of Contents RT Positioning Products fis ices ecier daascict ease eet eet A A 477 PP Pesitioning Products s 4 a2 sctin cae een Aine eee 484 Technical MtOnmiatiOn secs ecesttet ee gecced a aces ne acest ee eee ent ieee 491 MESSAGES Tni rn ieted hein se Oita niet eM tes eae i hole Mei aees otter tole RERS 491 Coordinate Ty Pes serae ia T E A A saith E tid estates antes 504 POInUGrOUp LY POSis sc225 5 5 2soe etstaliaitsaas EE E E EET 506 Meteo COmections 3 sistas a A TA E E TA ATTEN 507 Signal Scan Measurement Mode cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaees 509 Distance Only Coordinate Calculation ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeesenneeeseenaeeees 518 Examples of Coordinate Systems 0000 0 ccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneee ee teneeeeeeteeeeetiieeeeeseeeeee 527 NMEA Format renner anna te ake fe die eeeneh a a a a 545 GSI formaticn cscs wi ee et a E E A E 547 Database ae ee es 548 SWITCHDOX iaeiiio i eee ad ee el ea 553 FIP Connections 0c
490. to activate deactivate sensors Select the sensor and press the Settings button Edit the sensor settings Use for each sensor a unique name description control point and other sensor dependant settings Press OK to confirm the settings 37 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 7 Select the sensor and press the Communication button Edit the communication options such as type connection baud rate IP address and port Press OK to confirm the settings Press the Test button to check the communication between GeoMoS Monitor and the connected sensor A message box should confirm the successful initialization Note If you switched off the Total Station in Step 7 then the Total Station must turns on but you receive the message No data of the sensor is available Please check if the sensor is properly connected In this case press the Test button again A message box confirms then the successful initialization In case the message box returns an error please try to fix the communication between GeoMoS Monitor and the connected sensor first Please refer to the Troubleshooting section Sensor Communication Press OK to exit the Sensor Setup dialog The Sensor Setup dialog will be closed Step 9 Sensor Location and Orientation All sensors connected in the Sensor Setup dialog to the monitoring system are listed in the Sensor Location dialog Follow these steps to configure the instrument height and orientation There are two possibil
491. to display limits Proje ct management Us erlevels Outlier detection algorithm Set results invalid valid Enter comments Cu stomizable graphics Customizable reports with filter and search mechanism Manual database import and export Export to other systems e g ASCII DXF and BMP Support for the MS SQL Server 2005 Express In the GeoMoS Analyzer the following functionality is not supported Connection of sensors Remote control of measurement cycles and measurements Editing of all settings in Monitor may be added using GeoMoS Monitor Re processing of total station results may be added using Analyzer Option 1 below GeoMoS Analyzer Options Analyzer Option 1 TPS Post Processing 75 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Support for re processing of total station results The following functionality is supported Re processing of the coordinate system distance reduction meteo model and all values modified in the Data Editor Data Editor to modify additive constants reflector heights temperature and pressure Re processing of the profile directions instrument heights and null coordinates together with GeoMoS Monitor 76 Introduction to GeoMoS GeoMoS Adjustment GeoMoS Adjustment is an analysis tool that can be used to simulate networks to compute network adjustments and deformation analysis results The following functionality is supported Manual import of GeoMoS XML files Automatic i
492. to the Site tab SiteMap Site Sensor Raw Data Status File Products RT Products AT Positioning PP Positioning Right click into the Site tab window and select New amp ldots from the context menu The New Site dialog will be displayed Select the Sensor Comm 1 tab 471 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en New Site Receiver Operator Thematic RINEX Headers Sensor comm 1 Sensorcomm2 General Antenna Sensor GMx302 v Sensor connected via Data source path Flow control Phone number of sensor Host name Sort number Mount Point User Name Password Streaming data rate Select the Sensor type and communication parameters in the field Sensor connected via Select the Streaming data rate Select the General tab 472 GNSS Spider Receiver Operator Thematic RINEX Headers Sensorcomm1 Sensor comm 2 General Antenna Site name G M902 Site code GMx3 Marker Name Mxs Marker Number GMX9 V Provide original raw data Use on Network Server MV Used for global products Primary sensor link Sensor comm 1 Do fallback to secondary sensor link r Enter a Site name and a unique 4 character ID Enter a Marker Name and Marker Number The marker information is used for the RINEX header only Enable Provide original raw data if you want to share a data stream with another Spider site server Enable Used for global products for convenie
493. to transform the preliminary to the r real local coordinates The position transformation requires knowledge of the local map projection and the local ellipsoid However as the distortions of the map projection are taken into account Two Step transformations can be used for larger areas than One Step transformations The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation As with the Interpolation Stepwise or One Step approaches the height and position transformations are separate and therefore errors in height do not propagate into errors in position Additionally if knowledge of local heights is not good or non existent you can still create a transformation for position only Also the height points and position points do not have to be the same points Because of the way in which the transformation works it is possible to compute transformation parameters with just one point in the local and WGS84 system The combinations of the number of points in position and the position transformation parameters that can be calculated from them are as follows No of position points Transformation Parameters Computed 1 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y only 2 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y Rotation about Z and Scale more than 2 Classical 2D with shift in X and Y Rotation about Z Scale and Residuals 614 Coordinate System Manager The number of points with height included in the transformation directly a
494. tomatic calculation of the Total Station coordinates can be turned on or off in the Free Station Group Properties dialog The average of the Total Station coordinates using FreeStation solutions is only applied when the respective option is active in the Properties dialog Before a point group with the type Normal is measured the coordinates of the control point will be calculated and used for the reduction of measurements If a point group with the type FreeStation is available in the measurement cycle the respective option must be activated in the Options dialog before the control point coordinates are updated from the FreeStation solution Note One point should not be entered more than once in a Free Station group Warning Do only use points measured with the measurement mode ATR or ATR small field of view in the Free Station point group If a point that is measured e g with Distance IR the measurement does not use the ATR to execute the measurement but the system stores the angles of the telescope positioning to the database These roughly stored angles decrease the accuracy of the Free Station computation Type Distance Intersection Point groups with the type Distance Intersection are used for the determination of the Total Station coordinates using only GeoMoS Monitor distance measurements These point groups should contain the fixed or stable points for determining the Total Station position In the Distance I
495. tor Meteo Data Editor Setups Data Editor Reference Point Coordinates Data Editor Manual Coordinates The Process button re computes the data over the effected time period All data between the period of the earliest edited data and the latest edited data will be post processed The data will be processed according to the options selected in the Post Processing dialog e g Type of Meteo Model The original results will be overwritten with the new computed results and stored in the database A process bar indicates the post processing The new computed results and all modified data will be stored in the database If you need further help about post processing and the integrated post processing possibilities please contact your support team GeoMoS Analyzer Data Editor Data Editor Overview Click on each tab to learn more about the Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Meteo Setups Reference Point Coordinates Manual Coordinates 401 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Data Editor Additive Constant Reflector Height Background information The additive constant shows the prism constant used for the measurements The additive constant can be defined in the Point Editor dialog in the Monitor application The additive constant used for a measurement is copied from the additive constant assigned to the point at the time of the measurement The additive constant value for the measurement can be changed in the Data Editor
496. tor the Coordinate Calculation should be set to Only measured distance and the Distance Reduction to Using End Heights Otherwise invalid results will be calculated Refer to the Distance Only Measurement Mode technical description for further details Automatic Target Recognition ATR is the sensor which recognises and measures the position of a prism by means of a CCD array A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received by the built in CCD array The position of the reflected spot with respect to the centre of the CCD is computed These ATR offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical angles The ATR offsets are also used to control the motors which turn the instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism With a Total Station the system can follow the movement of points by measuring 226 ATR Small field of view GeoMoS Monitor with the ATR Using ATR real 3D monitoring of the points is conducted This mode can only be used if the Total Station supports the ATR mode TCA and TCRA instruments The field of view of the ATR in some Leica instruments can be reduced to help prevent ATR detection of multiple reflectors when the prisms are closely spaced which often occurs in tunnel monitoring The ATR small field of view reduces the viewing field of the ATR CCD of a normal ATR CCD of small field of view ATR The small field of view feature in not available in all instruments The fields
497. tructural Monitoring solutions Leica Geosystems customers benefit from our service and support that spans time zones and geography Our Active Customer Care program provides customer packages to suit your needs whether you use our simplest distance measuring device or the most sophisticated integrated solution Active Customer Care is a true partnership it s our commitment to continue to provide the level of support and collaboration you have come to expect when you put your trust in Leica Geosystems 80 Getting Help How to find a Help topic e Click the Contents tab to browse through topics by category e or click the Index tab to see an alphabetically ordered list of index entries either type the word you re looking for or scroll through the list e or click the Search tab to search for words and or phrases that may be contained in a Help topic Combine several phrases by logical operators for a more advanced search 81 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en How to print Help text You can print topics and information right from the HTML Help viewer The available print options are determined by the version of Internet Explorer installed on your system To print a single topic 1 Click Print 2 Select Print the selected topic and click OK To print all topics in a selected book 1 Click Print 2 Select Print the selected heading and all subtopics and click OK Tips e Only from the Contents tab you may select to print ent
498. ts the type of the ComBox is written Address The address that the digital card is connected to W amp T Digital I O Card IP address ICP DAS I O Card this card is 283 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en connected locally to GeoMoS Digital I O Card from a ComBox10 20 DynDNS name host name of the ComBox10 20 Close the dialog C inset Insert a new Digital I O card W amp T Digital I O Card It is possible to insert multiple cards and define their communication parameters ICP DAS I O Card Only one local card can be inserted The Digital I O Card froma ComBox10 20 is inserted automatically when you configure a ComBox with the ComBox Manager of GeoMoS Monitor Edit an inserted W amp T Digital I O card Remove an inserted W amp T Digital I O Card or ICP DAS I O Card A Digital I O Card from a ComBox10 20 cannot be removed in this dialog Digital I O Cards Properties ICP DAS Digital I O Card No additional settings are required Before you begin 1 The ICP DAS Digital I O Card is delivered with a CD 2 Install the driver exe from the CD 284 GeoMoS Monitor 3 Start the test program Diag exe 4 Select in the test program Activate and test the relay of the ICP DAS Digital I O Card Typically the relay clicks if you trigger it W amp T Digital I O Card WET Digital 1 0 Card Settings Card Name inyWuTCard Address 10 60 36 31 Pott 80 Connection Internet WAN Passwor
499. tween Projections and Zones Bearbeiten Koordinatensystem Swiss Allgemein Name Swiss Transformation y Projektionen z Zonen Trans Typ 653 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Geoid Models Geoid Models Overview The user can utilise a Geoid Model that is appropriate for the mapping area under consideration An Ellipsoid is attached to the Geoid Model It is the user s responsibility to obtain the model which will be in the form of an executable computer program Geoid Models can be defined for Geodetic or Grid Coordinates and refer to a particular Ellipsoid With a Geoid Model attached to a Coordinate System you can Compute Geoid Separations of the Points in a Project The Geoid Model replaces the requirement for you to manually input Geoid Separations for your points If Geoid Separations are available it enables you to switch between viewing Ellipsoidal and Orthometric heights The relationship between Ellipsoid and Orthometric heights is given by Ellipsoidal Height h Orthometric Height H Geoid Separation N Geoid Models may also be used on the receiver in the field To do so you have to Create a Geoid Model field file and then upload the file to the receiver using the Data Exchange Manager Note e Geoid Models are always an approximation of the actual Geoid In terms of accuracy they may vary considerably and in particular global models should be used with care If the accuracy of the Geoid Model is n
500. ually input Geoid Separations for your points This command is only required if your geoid model is defined by an executable file If your geoid model is defined by a geoid model field file then the geoid separations of your project are always calculated automatically 1 Make sure a Geoid Model is defined in the Coordinate System attached to your Project 2 Open the Project for which you want to compute Geoid Separations 3 From the Tools menu select Compute Geoid Separations A Geoid Separation will be calculated and stored for each Point Note e fthe Geoid Model you are using is defined for local Grid coordinates make sure a Coordinate System with the appropriate Map Projection is attached to your Project e If you are using a regional Geoid Model that is defined for a certain area only make sure the points of the Project are located within this area e In View Edit it is also possible to display contour lines of the geoid for the extents of your project Please refer to Graphical Settings View Related Topic Geoid Model 664 Coordinate System Manager Create Geoid Model field file Geoid Models may also be used on the receiver in the field This command enables you to create a Geoid Model field file Geoid models usually consist of a geoid height grid where a Geoid Separation is defined for each grid point Depending on the extent and the grid spacing of the Geoid Model it may require considerable disk spac
501. ually or by Target coordinates used when positioning the measuring a Normal telescope and search for the target group Setup Manually or by Instrument coordinates used when calculating a Free positioning the telescope Station Distance Intersection or GNSS Update The only case where the scan and the current coordinates are not equal is the 1D monitoring distance only calculation Note If the message Point does not exist or computed distance to the point is too long is given when measuring to a point then the Null coordinate and the current coordinate are very different This problem can occur if the coordinates of the point are changed at any time except for immediately after the point was inserted into the Point Editor and before the dialog was closed with OK 504 Troubleshooting Warning Changing the Null coordinate will cause a jump in the calculated displacements To manually set all coordinate types including the Null coordinate to equal the current coordinates use the Set Null Measurement context menu option in the Point Editor as shown in the diagram below Point Editor Stations 10330 484 21021 936 4083 514 Good _Point 10718 159 20934 652 4083 016 Good _Point 4082 12 _profile Good _Point 10969 452 20207 8 4082 14 _profile Good _Point 10761 378 20131 6 nete 4082 2 Wall Good _Point 10827 739 20967 4 Delete Selected Points 4082 21 _profile Good _Point 10717 202 20102 9 f 408
502. uest Extract data from the database To import data from a SQL database into a another program two options are available Runa SQL query and import the data using an ASCII file Config ure an ODBC driver and import the data directly To configure an ODBC driver Follow these steps to configure an ODBC driver 549 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Select from Windows the menu Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC The ODBC Data Source Administrator will be displayed Select the User DSN tab and press the Add button ODBC Data Source Administrator User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Add dBASE Files Microsoft Access dBASE Driver dbf n Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver sls xlsx xlsm Remove MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb Visio Database Samples Microsoft Access Driver mdb Configure gt An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine Enter for example the name GeoMoS Database a description and select the server as the name of the local machine what is shown in the SQL server Click Next Select With SQL Server authentication using a login ID and password entered by the user and enter the correct Login and Password Click Next
503. us ComBox location Metro station A Pressing the button Apply starts the transfer of all settings to the ComBox ComBox name Define a Name for the ComBox Note Each ComBox needs a unique name ComBox type This text field shows the Type of the connected ComBox There are two types of a ComBox Leica ComBox10 Leica ComBox20 Integrated If a Leica MonBox is integrated in the ComBox MonBox then select the radio button Yes Per default the radio button No is selected This information is important when you would 122 Comment optional GeoMoS Monitor like to send SMS over a ComBox Sending SMS over a ComBox is only possible when a MonBox is integrated in the ComBox and the radio button Yes is selected Refer to the Message Configurator how to configure the SMS settings This text field gives you the opportunity to define a comment for the ComBox e g what sensors will be connected to this ComBox Note This text field is only available if the ComBox will be configured via the ComBox Manager in GeoMoS To insert a break line in the text field press Ctrl CR key Press this button to get one register back in the wizard Press this button to get to the next register in the wizard Press the button Apply to start the transfer of all settigns to the ComBox Note Not till all appropriate settings are set in the wizard you can start the transfer Press this button to close the
504. us messages units and coordinate system To open the Customize dialog Follow these steps to open the Customize dialog he Customize dialog is shown hange the settings as required Confirm the changes with the OK button The changed settings will be applied and used in the application The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Customize dialog box Time format Select the preferred time format from the list The time format is used for the display of all time values in the application In addition the splash screen that is displayed when the application is started can be turned on or off If the option is checked the splash screen will be displayed when the application is started 300 Splash Window Display Activate Deactivates the start window Start Window The following units can be selected Available system units Inclinations Temperature Pressure mBar GeoMoS Monitor All supported units Meter m US Survey feet fts International feet fti Degree dec DMS dms Decimal DMS dms Grad grad Gon gon Decimal Gon gon Radians rad mRad mm m Decimal Gon gon Celsius C Fahrenheit Kelvin mBar Pascal PSI Torr In addition the number of decimal places displayed for values can also be defined Display The length of the history to be shown in the Last Actions Observations and 301 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Period for Messages t
505. ustralia GDA Grid files containing the corrections in latitude and longitude between the old Australian Geodetic Datum AGD and the new GDA are available in the NTv2 file format GSB To create a CSCS Model from these correction download the files and convert them to the Leica CSC file format using the CSCSModelConvert EXE tool Detailed information and the links for downloading the GSB files are available from the Intergovernmental Committee on Surveying and Mapping ICSM Please refer to the GDA Technical Manual at http www anzlic org au icsm gdatm chapter7 htm Switzerland For Switzerland it is possible to directly obtain a LGO CSC file containing the corrections between the new LV95 and the older LVO3 datum Contact your local Leica representative for further information This CSCS Model is an approximation for the official FINELTRA transformation Whereas the Fineltra transformation models the distortions between LV95 and LVO3 with sets of affine transformations valid for triangles built from points where coordinates in LV95 and LVO3 are given the CSCS Model is built on a regular grid of 1 km spacing calculated using the Fineltra program The correction file was developed by the Bundesamt f r Landestopographie http www swisstopo ch To convert WGS84 coordinates in the CHTRS95 reference system to the CH1903 datum using LGO define a coordinate system comprising of 691 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Transformation
506. utes or even longer under certain atmospheric conditions The signal scan procedure requires a very good fast full duplex communication line Accuracy is approx 0 3m because of the special calculation method Transverse and Height displacement cannot be used for analysis Operation of system and analysis of data is more complicated in a 1D than in anormal 3D system Depends on the atmospheric conditions The atmospheric corrections should be applied for long distance measurements The measurement mode Distance Only should only be used if it is not possible to measure with ATR or Signal Scan See TPS Properties Calculations for information on how to configure the coordinate calculation to only measured distances and the distance reduction to using end heights The profile direction should be similar to the line of sight of the instrument See the Profile Editor for further information For the system to follow a point the search window in the point group editor must be greater than 0 Principles of Distance Only Calculation The distance only based coordinate calculation has the following characteristics 520 Troubleshooting Over very long distances several kilometers signal scan is not practical because the angle measurements become very inaccurate but distance measurement is still possible Movements can be monitored effectively using only distance measur
507. utput card It is possible to connect a electronic security system to one of this input channel Link http Awww icpdas com products Products list htm The observation exceeded the specified Short Time limit level 1 set in the limit class 1 5 Long time limit E3warning 1 The observation exceeded the specified Long check level 1 Time limit level 1 set in the limit class exceeded 491 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en 6 Point not found A message Point out of message tolerance Point does not A message exist or computed distance to the point is too long Point blunder message check failed Theodolite not message defined No A message communication with sensor Positioning message failure 492 If the Total Station cannot measure to a prism atmospheric fluctuation no visibility to the prism it will produce this message If the multiple measurement function see TPS Properties Measurements is activated the system will check the measurements if they are inside of the defined standard deviation The function will check horizontal angle vertical angle and the slope distance If the difference between the Null Coordinate and the Current Coordinate is to big the system will react with this message In such a case it helps to overwrite the Null Coordinate Point Editor gt right mouse button gt Set Null Measurement If the coordinate difference between the last measur
508. via Internet a host name DynDNS name of the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required Note When you configure your ComBox the first time you have to select Initial Startup and a LAN connection is required You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox Connect 2 After the connection type is selected a connection to the ComBox will be established and all settings will be read 3 If the connection establishment was successfully the Setup ComBox wizard will be shown 4 Now follow the wizard step by step and insert all settings in each register At the end of the wizard press the button Apply All settings will be written to the ComBox You find more details about the settings under following link ComBox Configuration 5 After the configuration the ComBox will reboot Use the Test Link button to test the connection to the selected ComBox and all its included modules The ComBox Connect dialog will be shown Firstly you have to choose the appropriate connection type how your ComBox is connected to ComBox Manager Connect via LAN the ComBox is connected via an Ethernet cable to the computer where ComBox Manager is running Connect via Internet a host name DynDNS name of 108 GeoMoS Monitor the ComBox and the port number of the wireless router are required You find more details about ComBox connections under following link ComBox
509. w action You can choose between application E Mail SMS digital out New action and database query 273 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Application Configure Application Commandiline C NToggleMeasCycle bat Description Define in the field command line an external application EXE or BAT which GeoMoS Monitor will run as an action Always use the full path to the directory The field Description is only a remark and has no additional functionality so it works also if this field is empty Press OK and the new action is in the right list of the Message Configurator Example An application reads some data by SQL out of the GeoMoS Database and stores this data in a ASCII file on the hard disk E Mail Add EMail Recipient Name i Address peter muster bluewin ch Subject Define the name and E Mail address of a recipient In the next field you define the E Mail subject If for example the message power failure is generated from GeoMoS so this person will receive a E Mail with this information Press OK and the new action is in the right list of the Message Configurator SMS 274 GeoMoS Monitor Add SMS Recipient EJE Phone Number e g 41711234567 44171123456 i janiza Sending Option TestComBox10 ComBox1 0 Description Define in the field Phone number the phone number of a recipient Always use the country code Then select in the list box your appropriate send
510. w point row Type in the unique point ID It is not necessary to select a profile from the list Type in the known coordinates for the control point Confirm the entry with OK There is now a point with the coordinates of the control point stored in the database Each sensor has to be connected to a point to get coordinates In the next steps the control point will be assigned to the Total Station 36 Introduction to GeoMoS Step 7 Sensor configuration and cable connection This is an optional step Follow these steps to confirm the sensor configuration and check if communication is functional If you are sure that the sensor configuration and communication is OK then you can skip this step Make sure the cable is connected from the PC to the Total Station and to the power supply Make sure the instrument communication settings are set correct Turn off the Total Station Proceed with the next step Step 8 Connect the total station to the GeoMoS Monitor application Follow these steps to connect the total station to the GeoMoS Monitor application and to check the communication Options button 8 The Sensor Setup dialog will be displayed Press the Insert button to insert a sensor Select from the menu Configuration Sensor Manager or click the toolbar 4 A list box with all possible sensors appears Select the type of sensor you wish to connect Activate the check box This check box is used
511. was provided by the IGN Institut Geographique National the French mapping authority More information can be found at http www ign fr To directly convert points given respect to the WGS84 System to the French NTF System define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation None Map Projection Select the appropriate map projection Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 IGN defined by a 6378249 200 m 1 f 293 466021 CSCS Model GR3DF97A France Note A geoid model can be used as well together with this coordinate system In case a Classical 3D transformation is used in addition to the CSCS Model then the transformation and the Cartesian shift of the CSCS Model would be both applied 680 Coordinate System Manager ETRS89 RD Netherlands The ETRS89 RD is a transformation from ETRF89 to the National Dutch Grid System RD The connected CSCS Model file contains Easting and Northing shifts which are interpolated and applied after the standard Dutch map projection To directly convert from WGS84 coordinates in the ETRF89 reference frame to the Dutch RD System using LGO define a coordinate system comprising of Transformation Classical 3D Molod Badekas model dX 593 032 m dY 26 000 m dZ 478 741 m Rx 0 40939 Ry 0 35971 Rz 1 86849 Scale factor 4 0772 ppm Rotation origin X0 3904046 180 Rotation origin YO 368161 313 Rotation origin Z0 5013449 047 Map Projection Dutch Proj
512. ways use the full path to the directory Retrieved data will always be added at the end of the file Press OK and the new action is in the right list of the Message Configurator Please select an action first in the list Press the button Edit and then it is possible the edit the selected action al Press this button to delete a selected action Ta Press this button to immediately test a selected action This function can be used for control all actions Mad Settings This function defines the parameters for sending E Mails E Mails can be sent over LAN or Dial Up Network Press the button and the E Mail settings dialog will be shown 277 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en ail Settings a Connection lt LAN gt zj Cancel SMTP Server Settings Address Port smtp gmail com 587 User Password geomos spider gmail com sooooooooe V Enable SSL Mail Settings Mail Address of Sender Ex Pete Brown lt pete brown hotmail com gt geomos spider qmail com Mail Body Test Email Connection lt LAN gt z Cancel SMTP Server Settings Address Port mail gmx net 587 User Password geomos gmx ch eeeecceece lt Enable SSL Mail Settings Mail Address of Sender Ex Pete Brown lt pete brown hotmail com gt geomos gmx ch Mail Body Test Email Dial Up Connection Select a valid Dial up Connection from the drop down list The drop down li
513. were successfully measured Measured Example If the Progress of 10 10 100 and Actually Measured of 9 10 90 is displayed all points of the point group are measured and for any reason one point of the point group was not measured This display shows the most recent measurements from all meteorological meteo sensors connected to the system e pe pS peen erm eee GeoMoS Analyzer Menu File Projects To open the Projects dialog Follow these steps to open the Projects dialog Owner Neil Description Location C Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Data Created 02 08 2005 21 03 21 Project Settings The table below describes the fields and buttons in the Projects dialog box 351 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Existing A list of the existing projects Projects Close window Opens the selected project Note A different project may be open in both Monitor and Analyzer Properties Project Description Hie Bees Description Path to Files C Program Files Leica Geosystems GeoMoS Enter the name of the new project This name will also be used as the name of the database Enter a description of the monitoring project Path to Select the path for the database files Files Important Only local hard drives are permitted to store the GeoMoS Monitor database file Delete Delete the database All data will be lost It is not possible to delete the active project
514. while Related Topic Geoid Model Overview 666 Coordinate System Manager Geoid models with height scaling Geoid models of coordinate type Geodetic with height scaling may be used to additionally correct the geoid separations with a scale factor The scale factor is applied to the height above the ellipsoid on which the model is based For such Coordinate Types LGO expects two values the geoid separation and the height scale factor to be written to the output file of the geoid model executable see also How to write your own Geoidal Model This option supports the DFHBF geoid model available in Germany For details on that model see also http Awww dfhbf de 667 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en CSCS Models CSCS Models Overview Several countries have produced tables of conversion factors to directly convert between GPS measured coordinates given in WGS84 and the corresponding local mapping coordinates taking the distortions of the mapping system into account Using these tables it is possible to directly convert into the local grid system without having to calculate your own transformation parameters Country Specific Coordinate System Models CSCS Models are an addition to an already defined coordinate system which interpolates corrections in a grid file and applies the interpolated corrections The extra step of applying these corrections can be made at different positions in the coordinate conversion process Therefore different
515. will be ignored then As with all Classical 3D Transformations the Pre transformation can also be one of two different transformation models Bursa Wolf or Molodensky Badekas dx dy Translations in X Y and Z direction dz Rx Ry Rotations around the X Y and Z axis Rz Scale factor in ppm e g mm km 626 Ellipsoid Ellipsoids Overview Coordinate System Manager This component enables you to manage the Reference Ellipsoids An Ellipsoid is defined by the semi major axis a and the flattening f The flattening is related to the semi minor axis b by f a b a In LGO an ellipsoid is defined by the name the semi major axis a and the reciprocal value of flattening 1 f Most of the ellipsoids in use around the world are already defined in LGO Name Airy x Airy Modified x ATS 77 x Australian National o Bessel 1841 x Clarke 1866 x Clarke 1880 x Everest x Fisher 1960 South Asia x Fisher 1960 Mercury x Fisher 1968 x GRS 1967 x GRS 1980 x a 637 7563 396 6377340 189 6378135 000 6378160 000 6377397 155 6378206 400 6378249 145 6377276 345 6378155 000 6378166 000 6378150 000 6378160 000 6378137 000 1 f 299 32496460000 299 32496460000 298 25700000000 298 25000000000 299 15281285000 294 97869820000 293 46500000000 300 801 70000000 298 30000000000 298 30000000000 298 30000000000 298 247 16743000
516. with the results of the least squares method Read below to learn about all Free Station Log File properties in detail 14 09 2006 11 00 43 730 EE ee ETE EES ELER EEE EEE ET EEE EEE ELLE PEELE EE EE EE ERE EE EEE EEE EE EEE ET CREEP EEL ER ELE EERE 14 09 2006 11 00 43 730 Processing pointgroup TPS1_FreeStatio 14 09 2006 11 00 43 730 Station point TPS1 Station 14 09 2006 11 00 43 762 Station coords 999 519 999 536 1000 003 14 09 2006 11 00 43 777 Reference coordinates of TPS1 i009 E 907 9719 N 1350 6892 H 1037 6995 100 GeoMoS Monitor 14 09 2006 11 00 43 777 Calculated polar reference of TPS1 1009 138 4527 93 4131 364 9005 14 09 2006 11 00 43 793 Measurement of TP51 1009 at 14 09 2006 11 00 16 Hz 138 4538 W 93 4126 5lope 364 8916 Temperature 28 2 Pressure 961 4 AtmosPPM 29 7 SlopedtmosPPMcorrected 364 902 NullDist 364 900 SlopeDistDiff 0 002 RefPPM 24 287 vzCorr 399 9995 Azimuth 383 7645 Orientation 245 3106 14 09 2006 11 00 43 808 Reference coordinates of TPS1 1010 E 937 2932 N 877 3344 H 996 2526 14 09 2006 11 00 808 Calculated polar reference of TP51 1010 4 6719 101 7410 137 2053 14 09 2006 11 00 43 808 Measurement of TPS1 1010 at 14 09 2006 1 0 30 Hz 384 6712 W 101 7403 Slope 137 2005 Temperature 28 2 Pressure 961 4 AtmosPPM 29 7 SlopeAtmosPPMCorrected 137 205 NulIDist 137 205 SlopeDistDiff 0 001 RefPPM 34 722 VeCorr 399 9993 Azinuth 229 9837 Orientation 245 3125 14 09 2
517. xt file Close GeoMoS Monitor Select in Windows Start Run and type in regedit The Windows Registry opens 4 Open the path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LEICA Geosystems Leica GeoMoS Projects lt project_name gt Sensors TPSSensors 583 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en Your active project name replaces the lt project_name gt For each connected total stations there is a separate ID in the registry For example 134217729 134217730 E Logfiles E Monitor C ProtocolPrinter 3 Sensors B TPSSensors 134217729 134217730 G 134217731 134217732 134217733 134217734 J SequenceManager C Temp PA l mike Click on the total station ID s to display the available registry options sang lab FilterCharacters ab LaserPointerON FALSE BB LogFile C Documents and Settings All Users Doc 134217731 BjLogtoriie FALSE 134217732 lab Modified 17 06 2008 17 18 14 380 E 134217733 Bb Parity o E 134217734 lab PingTimeOutInSeconds 2 000000000000 SequenceManager ab Port 0 abl DacitinninaTimacuikInSacande 12 ANANANANANAN Sensors TPSSensors 9 134217729 134217730 Look for the entry SensorName to identify the correct registry ID The SensorName corresponds with the Sensor Name in GeoMoS Monitor Once you found the correct registry ID change the LogToFile from FALSE to TRUE and the LogFile to an appropriate path Open GeoMoS Monitor Start the measurement cycle and check if the
518. ypes can be selected 685 473 6400 4 h Options 685 473 6600 E Reset graphic Different colors for different elements in the graphic can be 8 Export ES Series selected 685 473 6200 7 tn Show Outliers hi BT Blunder Tolerance t Move Y axis up 685473 8000 1 Move Y axis down Font The font font style size effect color and script can be selected Properties Selecting Properties opens a separate dialog box Each tab allows customizing of the graphics Click on the screen shot for more information Chart FX Properties General Series Ases Options The options of the selected graphic can be edited Reset Graphic The current graphic will be shown centered The current graphic will be exported in a comma separated csv file Opens the Series dialog Available series can be selected Show Outliers In the tabbed view Multiple Graphs it is possible to set a state for each measurement The state is set to valid or invalid An invalid measurement state is a so called outlier and in the tabbed view Multiple Graphs it is possible to hide or show these outliers Blunder If the resulting coordinate is further from the last position 3D Tolerance than the configured Blunder Tolerance then it will be regarded as a blunder and only the raw measurements will be stored in this database No result will be computed In the Multiple Graphs tab raw measurements graphics can be displayed with 458 E
519. ystems Overview ec eccceeceeeeeenneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 600 Add a New Coordinate System 0 cececneeeeeeecneeeeeetieeeeetineeeeeeineeeeeeenieeeeesnieeeeenaa 601 Delete a Coordinate SyStem 0 ccccccteee etter ee etneee eee enieeeeeeiieeeeetineeeeeeeeeeesieeeeee 603 Coordinate System PropertieS cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeseeaes 604 Coordinate System Properties General eeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeenaneeeeeaaees 605 Transformation OVErViCW orsi i erranen aar ERE EREE KAREAR EARRAN A ERREA AAEN REA 608 Classical 2D or A T E AEA EEOAE E 609 Classical oD e a a AAAA N AA EA AAA 610 One Stepe ma r ede a A A 612 GeoMoS Help 5 1 en vi TE WO sO Dinciss re senate see sens udeieeta a a a a ia detad a a a data 614 SLE PWISE tinadhana ha eos ee Sead ae es ete a ad ie at Sot io 616 Interpolation adina ian hited reed aeons ae tee eee 618 Which approach to USC cceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeececeeeaeceeeeeeeseedenaeeeeeeeeeeeesnnaneeeees 620 Add a New Transformation ccccccceceececeeeeeeeecceaeeeeeeeeeeecaaeaeeeeeeeseeeeccuceeeeeeeeeteees 621 Delete a Transformation 0 cccccccceeeeeceececeeeeeeeceeeaecaeeeeeeeeesencaeaeeeeeeeseeeenieeeeeeeentees 622 Transformation Properties ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeecececeeeeeceeeaacaeeeeeeesesseceaeeeeeeeseesenineeeees 623 Transformation Properties General ccccccec

GeoMoS Help 5

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents